Professional Documents
Culture Documents
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
00 Introduction
00-TOC Table of Contents
00-10 General Introduction
00-40 List of Abbreviations
00-50 Units conversion table
00-70 A380 CCOM on Ops Library Browser (OLB) FAP
02 Cockpit
02-TOC Table of Contents
02-10 Introduction
02-20 Onboard Information Terminal
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03 Cabin Layout
03-TOC Table of Contents
03-10 Deck Configuration
03-20 First Class
03-30 Business Class
03-40 Economy Class
03-50 Crew Stations
03-60 Stairs
03-70 Trolley Lift(s)
03-80 Stowages
03-90 Galleys
03-100 Lavatories
03-110 Shower Rooms
03-120 Crew Rest Compartment
03-130 Other Cabin Areas/Additional Cabin Equipment
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06 Cabin Systems
06-TOC Table of Contents
06-10 Audio/Cabin Music
06-20 Pre-Recorded Announcements
06-30 Lights
06-40 Doors/Slides
06-50 Air Conditioning/Temperature Control
06-60 Water/Waste
06-70 Smoke Detection
06-80 Seat Settings
06-90 System Info
06-100 Cabin Status
06-110 Cabin Ready Signaling
06-120 Galley Cooling/Supplemental Cooling System
06-130 IFE Power
06-140 Floor Temperature Setting
06-150 Humidification/Cabin Heating/Dry Air Generation
06-160 Window Shades
06-180 Shower Control
06-200 Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL)
06-210 Cabin Connectivity System - Cabin Communication
06-220 Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS)
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
07-20 Location
07-30 Operational Sequence
07-40 Containers
07-50 Oxygen Masks
07-60 Oxygen mask manual shut-off
07-70 Inadvertent oxygen mask deployement
12 Preflight Checks
12-TOC Table of Contents
12-10 Introduction
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
14-60 Depressurization
14-70 Crew Rest Compartment Procedures
14-80 Turbulence Management and Procedures
14-90 Additional Abnormal / Emergency Procedures
14-100 Safety Operational Awareness
16 Announcements
16-TOC Table of Contents
16-10 Boarding
16-20 Door Closure to Takeoff
16-30 In-Flight to "Top of Descent"
16-40 Approach
16-50 After Landing
16-60 Special Announcements
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
This is the CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL at issue date 10-Apr-17 for the A380 which replaces the
last issue dated 05-Jan-17
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
This table gives, for each delivered aircraft, the cross reference between:
- The Manufacturing Serial Number (MSN)
- The Fleet Serial Number (FSN) of the aircraft as known by AIRBUS S.A.S.
- The registration number of the aircraft as known by AIRBUS S.A.S.
- The aircraft model
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
The purpose of the Main CCOM Changes is to provide general information about the CCOM
revision and to highlight the main changes for:
- Standard Operating Procedures (Chapter 13)
- Abnormal /Emergency Procedures (Chapter 14)
- System Description affecting a basic cabin system.
Note: In addition, each Documentary Unit (DU) provides highlights with the reason(s) for change
and uses revision bars to indicate the revised sections.
TIMEFRAME
The subjects in the Main CCOM Changes are categorized by month and, are published regardless
of the revision cycle that is applicable to each Operator.
NOVEMBER 2008
PRECAUTIONARY EVACUATION PROCEDURE
The Precautionary evacuation procedure was deleted for the following reason: In case of obvious
rapid disembarkation on the stand initiated by the flight crew, specific airline procedures for both
aircraft and on ground activities should apply.
OCTOBER 2010
DOOR ARMING PROCEDURE
The Standard Operating Procedure "Door arming procedure" is modified to clarify that in case of
door closing from the outside cabin crew have to check that the door is correctly locked. As a
consequence, the cabin crew responsible of the door has to check first the mechanical flags then
the DSIP.
In addition, the door arming procedure is now classified Airworthiness Related Procedure.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
JANUARY 2014
In the ABNORMAL and EMERGENCY procedures section:
- The OVERHEAD BINS SMOKE/FIRE PROCEDURE is revised to take into account the potential
presence of lithium batteries. Refer to 14-20 OVERHEAD BIN Smoke/Fire Procedure
- New procedures LITHIUM BATTERIES FIRES and STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A LITHIUM
BATTERY FIRE are added.
Refer to 14-20 LITHIUM BATTERY FIRERefer to 14-20 STORAGE PROCEDURE AFTER A
LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE
FOREWORD
Applicable to: ALL
All manual holders and users are encouraged to forward any questions and suggestions regarding the
Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM) to :
AIRBUS
BP 33
1 Rond-point Maurice Bellonte
31707 BLAGNAC CEDEX - FRANCE
Fax : 33 (0) 561.93.29.68
Email : fltops.a380std@airbus.com
Attn. : FLIGHT OPERATIONS SUPPORT - STLX
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The CCOM must address the unique requirements dictated by its use in a cabin environment and,
possibly, by the conditions associated with abnormal or emergency situations. Some subjects are also
included in the FCOM, but each manual is specific to the applicable crew.
The CCOM content and format shall also satisfy the requirements for use as a reference document
during cabin crew training.
The CCOM will be available in the following electronic formats :
- Extensible Markup Language (XML).
- Portable Document Format (PDF, open Adobe specification).
The CCOM is delivered on CD-ROM, or online using Airbus World community.
No paper versions will be made available.
PRESENTATION
Applicable to: ALL
The CCOM is made up of one volume, which is divided into 17 chapters. Each chapter is divided into
pre-defined sections. Optional sections can be added to address, airline-specific requirements (Ex :
airline requests...).
Each section is made up of Documentary Units (DU), which are information segments containing
technical data. Each DU is assigned an effectivity.
- Chapter PLP : PRELIMINARY PAGES
This chapter provides: The table of contents, the List of documentary units, the list of modifications,
the aircraft allocation Table.
- Chapter 00 : INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides general information about the manual.
- Chapter 01 : AIRCRAFT GENERAL
The chapter presents an overview of the aircraft.
- Chapter 02 : COCKPIT
This chapter provides information of cockpit dedicated to cabin crew.
- Chapter 03 : CABIN LAYOUT
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the cabin layout.
- Chapter 04 : CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM (CIDS)
This chapter provides information on the CIDS.
- Chapter 05 : CABIN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
This chapter provides information on the : Passenger address (PA), Cabin interphone, Service
interphone and passenger call system.
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PAGINATION
Applicable to: ALL
FORMAT
The "PDF" CCOM is designed with the following paper layout:
- Page format and size: A4
- Orientation : Portrait
- Standard character type and size : Helvetica, 10 points.
The PDF CCOM page is composed of the following three zones :
- A header,
- A footer,
- A body.
HEADER
The header is composed of the following three parts :
- The left side : Includes the manual's title, the applicable aircraft program, and the applicable logo
(company logo, or Airbus logo by default)
- The middle : Indicates the title of the current chapter at the top of the zone, and the title of the
current section at the middle of the zone, the tittle of the subdivision at the bottom of the zone.
- The right side : Provides the sections's identification and revision date.
header
FOOTER
The footer contains such remaining Operation Manual identification data, not included in the header,
as : The extracted Document IDENT.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
footer
REVISION/UPDATING
Applicable to: ALL
REVISION
The CCOM is continuously revised. When a reason for change is needed (criteria, correction,..), the
CCOM is revised and provided at the next delivery.
The frequency of revision is in accordance with the customer requirements.
The revision date indicates the manual's date of the assembly.
A section is always revised in its entirety, and the changes are indicated in the Table Of Content (TOC)
. Each evolution is identified by a "revision" mark in the left-hand margin of the TOC entry.
The revision mark in the LEDU can be "N" for new , "R" for revised or "E" for effectivity change. It is
indicated in the First Column of the LEDU table.
The revision mark in the CCOM content is indicated by a line in the left margin with one or more
numerical indexes on the same line. The numerical index refers to the corresponding index of the
highlight page, located in the preliminary pages.
UPDATING
The CCOM is now globally updated.
WARNING : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in injury or loss of life, if not
carefully followed.
CAUTION : An operating procedure, technique, etc., which may result in damage to equipment, if not
carefully followed.
NOTE : An operating procedure, technique, etc., considered essential to emphasize.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CUSTOMIZATION
Applicable to: ALL
Several criteria are taken into account for the customization of a CCOM, and can be grouped
according to their function :
- Technical criteria : Represents the aircraft’s technical definition, including the :
• Aircraft's identification, or model,
• Technical definition (Factory Modifications, Service Bulletins, etc.),
• Customer Originated Changes (COC) .
- Operational criteria : Represents the aircraft’s operational environment, including the :
• Operator,
• Associated authorities.
- CCOM customization is specified in the :
• Aircraft Allocation Table (AAT) , and
• List of Modifications Table (LOM) .
AIRCRAFT ALLOCATION TABLE (AAT)
This tables gives, for each delivered aircraft, the cross reference between:
- The Manufacturing Serial Number (MSN)
- The Fleet Serial Number (FSN) of the aircraft as known by Airbus S.A.S.
- The registration number of the aircraft as known by Airbus S.A.S.
- The aircraft model
LIST OF MODIFICATIONS (LOM)
The List Of Modifications Table (LOM) lists the product’s applicable Factory Modifications and Service
Bulletins, along with their various cross-references. SBs appear when embodied on at least one
aircraft within the fleet. The LOM contains the following information :
- Codes describing the update :
• N = New criteria for revision
• R = Revision : SB change for an existing Change Identification Number (CIN), validity change,
or title change for the criteria.
- Date corresponding to the revision date for which the criteria was incorporated.
- Validity information is optional, and is expressed the same format as on the manual’s technical
pages (MSN, or Registration Number). Grouping is applied in the case of an MSN, or FSN.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE DOCUMENTARY UNITS (LEDU)
An effectivity is assigned for each DU. The LEDU provides:
- The evolution code "R", "N" or "E"
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
• R = Revised
• N = New
• E = Effectivity change
- The localization of the DU: chapter, section and subdivision
- The status of the DU temporary or permanent if blank.
- DU title, the configuration criteria and the effectivity (in the customer fleet context)
- The identification code
- The version date.
Note: Effectivity can either be expressed in terms of MSN, or registration number (tail number),
depending on the customer’s preference. However, MSN is the default.
SUMMARY OF HIGHLIGHT
The summary of highlight is presented in two formats:
- A global Summary of highlight indicates the creations, suppressions or movement at a chapter
level.
- A Summary of highlight, located at the beginning of each chapter, highlights the changes made to
the chapter.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ABBREVIATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
A
Abbreviation Term
AA Airworthiness Authorities
AAP Additional Attendant Panel
AAT Aircraft Allocation Table
ABN Abnormal
ABP Able Bodied Passenger
ABV Above
AC Alternating Current
A/C Aircraft
ACARS Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting System
ACC Aft Cargo Compartment
ACP Area Call Panel (Cabin) or Audio Control Panel (Cockpit)
ACU Air Cooling Unit
ADB Area Distribution Box
ADIRS Air Data and Inertial Reference System
ADS Automatic Dependent Surveillance
ADV Advisory
AED Automated External Defibrillator
AEVC Avionic Equipment Ventilation Computer
AIDS Aircraft Integrated Data System
AIP Additional Indication Panel
ALT Altitude
ALTN Alternate
AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
AMS Aircraft Management System
AMU Audio Management Unit
ANT Antenna
AOD Audio On Demand
AOG Aircraft On Ground
APU Auxiliary Power Unit
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARN Aircraft Registration Number
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ARPT Airport
A/S Airspeed
ASAP As Soon As Possible
ASP Audio Selector Panel
ATA Air Transport Association of America
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATR Audio Tape Reproducer
ATSU Air Traffic Service Unit
ATT Attitude
AVNCS Avionics
AVOD Audio/Video on Demand
AWY Airway
B
Abbreviation Term
BARO Barometric
BAT Battery
B/C Business Class
BCC Bulk Cargo Compartment
BCL Battery Charge Limit
BFE Buyer Furnished Equipment
BGM Boarding Music
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
BMC Bleed Monitoring Computer
BRK Break
BRT Bright
BTL Bottle
BTS Base Transceiver Station
C
Abbreviation Term
CA Cabin Attendant
CAAP Civil Aviation Advisory Publication
CAB Cabin
CAM Cabin Assignment Module
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CAPT Captain
CAS Cabin Attendant Seat
CAT Category
CAUT Caution
C/B Circuit Breaker
CBMU Circuit Breaker Monitoring Unit
CC Cabin Crew
CCB Cabin Crew Bulletin
CCDA Cabin Crew Digital Assistant
CCL CIDS Caution Light
CCOM Cabin Crew Operating Manual
CCR Credit Card Reader
CCRC Cabin Crew Rest Compartment
CCS Cabin Communication System
CD Compact Disc
CDU Control and Display Unit
CECAM Centralized Cabin Monitoring
CELLI Ceiling Emergency LED Light
CFDS Centralized Fault Display System
CG Center of Gravity
CH Channel
CHG Change
CHK Check
CIDS Cabin Intercommunication Data System
CIN Change Indication Number
CINS Cabin Information Network System
CKPT Cockpit
C/L Check List
CLB Climb
CLG Ceiling
CLR Clear
CLSD Closed
CM Cell Modem
CMC Central Maintenance Computer
CMD Command
CMI Cabin Management Interface
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
D
Abbreviation Term
dB Decibel
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
DC Direct Current
DCC Digital Cockpit Controller
DCL Digital Cabin Logbook
DCR Dock-on Crew Rest
DEG Degree
DES Descent
DEST Destination
DET Detection
DEU Decoder Encoder Unit
DFDR Digital Flight Data Recorder
DFS Duty Free Shop
DIM Dimming
DIR Direction
DISC Disconnect
DISCH Discharge
DISPL Display
DIST Distance
DSCS Door Slide Control System
DSIP Door and Slide Indication Panel
DSU Data Server Unit
DU Display Unit
DVD Digital Versatile Disc
DVD-ROM Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory
E
Abbreviation Term
EASA European Aviation Safety Agency
E/C Economy Class
ECAM Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring
ECAS Emergency Crew Alerting System
ECS Environmental Control System
EEPMS Emergency Escape Path Marking System
EFF Electronic Flight Folder
EHCS Electronic Handforce Control System
EIS Electronic Instruments System
ELEC Electricity
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Abbreviation Term
F/A First Aid
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FAIL Failure
FAP Flight Attendant Panel
FAR Federal Aviation Regulations
F/C First Class
FCC Forward Cargo Compartment
FCOM Flight Crew Operating Manual
FCRC Flight Crew Rest Compartment
FCTM Flight Crew Training Manual
FCU Flush Control Unit
FDAU Flight Data Acquisition Unit
FDB Floor Disconnect Box
FDDU Floppy Disc Drive Unit
FDIU Flight Data Interface Unit
FES Fire Extinguishing System
FF Fast Forward
FL Flight Level
FLT Flight
FM Flight Manual
FMC Flight Management Computer
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
G
Abbreviation Term
GCS Global Communications Suite
GEN Generator
GFI Ground Fault Interruption
GND Ground
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GRVTY Gravity
GS Ground Speed
GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
GSP Ground Service Panel
GWDU Galley Waste Disposal Unit
H
Abbreviation Term
HFP Heated Floor Panel
HI High
HP High Pressure
HPV High Pressure Valve
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
HS Handset
HZ Hertz
I
Abbreviation Term
IATA International Air Transport Association
IAVM In-Armrest Video Monitor
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
IDENT Identification
IFE In-Flight Entertainment
IFEC In Flight Entertainment Center
IGN Ignition
IMM Immediate
IND Indication
INOP Inoperational
INT Interphone
INTENS Intensity
IP Internet Protocol
IPCU Ice Protection Control Unit
IPRAM Integrated Prerecorded Announcement
IR Inertial Reference
IRS Inertial Reference System
ISPSS In-Seat Power Supply System
J
Abbreviation Term
JAR Joint Aviation Requirements
JB Junction Box
K
Abbreviation Term
KG Kilogram
KT Knot
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
L
Abbreviation Term
LAN Local Area Network
LAV Lavatory
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LD Lower Deck
LDCRC Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
LDF Lower Deck Facilities
LDG Landing
LD LAV Lower Deck Lavatory
LD-MCR Lower Deck - Mobile Crew Rest
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEDU List of Effective Documentary Units
L/G Landing Gear
LGCIU Landing Gear Control Interface Unit
LH Left Hand
LIM Limitation
LO Low
LOM List Of Modifications
LONG Longitude
LP Low Pressure
LRBL Least Risk Bomb Location
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LSU Lavatory Service Unit
LT Lighting
LVL Level
LWR Lower (or Lower Deck; depending on context)
M
Abbreviation Term
M Main Deck, e.g. for passenger door designation (M1R, M4L, etc)
MAINT Maintenance
MAN Manual
MB Milibar
MCDU Multipurpose Control and Display Unit
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Abbreviation Term
N/A Not Applicable
NATS North American Telephone System
NAV Navigation
ND Navigation Display
NLG Nose Landing Gear
NM Nautical Mile
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
O
Abbreviation Term
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBCE Onboard Control Equipment
OBRM Onboard Replaceable Module
OCCPD Occupied
OCM Operation Control Module
OCM Oven Control Module
OFF/R Off/Reset
OFST Offset
OHSC Overhead Stowage Compartment
OIT Onboard Information Terminal
OL Outboard Left
OMS Onboard Maintenance System
OMT Onboard Maintenance Terminal
O/P Output
OPP Opposite
OPS Operations
OPT Optional
OR Outboard Right
OSCU Oxygen System Control Unit
OVBD Overboard
OVHD Overhead
OVHT Overheat
OVRD Override
OVSPD Overspeed
OXY Oxygen
O2 Oxygen
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
P
Abbreviation Term
PA Passenger Address
PAT Primary Access Terminal
PAX Passenger
PAX SYS IFE Function on FAP
pb, PB Pushbutton
pb sw Pushbutton Switch
PBE Portable Breathing Equipment
PCB Passenger Call Button
PCU Passenger Control Unit
PDF Portable Document Format
PDLS Privacy Door Locking System
PED Portable Electronic Device
PERF Performance
PES Passenger Entertainment System
PIM Programming and Indication Module
PISA Passenger Interface and Supply Adapter
PLS Passenger Lighted Signs
PML Portable Media Loader
P/N Part Number
PNL Panel
POS Position
PR Pressure
PRAM Prerecorded Announcement and Music
PRIO Priority
PRM Passenger with Reduced Mobility
PROC Procedure
PRV Pressure Regulation Valve
PSI Pound per Square Inch
PSIU Passenger Service Information Unit
PSP Pre-Selected Passenger
PSS Passenger Services System
PSU Passenger Service Unit
PT Point
PTP Programming and Test Panel
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PTT Push-To-Talk
PURS Purser
PWCU Potable Water Control Unit
PWDP Potable Water Drain Panel
PWIP Potable Water Indication Panel
PWR Power
PWS Potable Water System
PWSP Potable Water Service Panel
Q
Abbreviation Term
QCCU Quantity Calculation and Control Unit
QRH Quick Reference Handbook
QT Quart (US)
QTY Quantity
R
Abbreviation Term
RA Radio Altitude
RAD/INT Function on ACP in the Cockpit
RADVR Random Access Digital Video Reproducer
RC Repetitive Chime
RCC Remote Control Center
RCDR Recorder
RCL Recall
RCP Radio Control Panel
RCVR Receiver
REG Regulation
REL Release
REV Reverse
REW Rewind
RH Right Hand
R/L Reading Light
RMP Radio Management Panel
ROM Read-Only Memory
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
RQRD Required
RS Reset Restore
RSVR Reservoir
RTE Route
RTS Return-To-Seat
RVC Remote Volume Control
RWY Runway
Abbreviation Term
SAT Static Air Temperature
SB Service Bulletin
SC Single Chime
SCR Smart Card Reader
SCS Supplement Cooling System
SCU System Control Unit
SD System Display, Smoke Detection
SDCP Smoke Detection Control Panel
SDCU Smoke Detection Control Unit
SDM Smart Display Unit
SDP Smoke Detection Panel
SDU Seat Display Unit
SEB Seat Electronic Box
SEL Selector, Select
SELCAL Selective Calling System
SEND Send Function on Handset
SEU Seat Electronic Unit
SERV INT Service Interphone
SFCU Seat Function Control Unit
SFE Seller Furnished Equipment
SGS Seat Group Switch
SMS Short Message Service
S/N Serial Number
SOP Standard Operation Procedure
SPD Speed
SPM Seat Power Module
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
T
Abbreviation Term
TBC To Be Continued
TBD To Be Determined
T/C Tourist Class
TCAS Traffic Collision Alert System Avoidance System
TCS Temperature Control System
TEL Telephone
TEMP Temperature
TK Tank
TMR Timer
T.O. Take Off
TOC Table Of Contents
TSM Trouble Shooting Manual
TTL Taxi, Takeoff and Landing
TU Tapping Unit
U
Abbreviation Term
U Upper Deck, e.g. for passenger door designation (U1R, U2L, etc.)
UD Upper Deck
UP Upper
USB Universal Serial Bus
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
V
Abbreviation Term
VC Ventilation Controller
VCC Video Control Center
VCP Video Cassette Player
VCR Video Cassette Recorder
VCU Video Control Unit
VENT Ventilation
VHCU Versatile Heating Control Unit
VHDU Versatile Heating Data Unit
VHF Very High Frequency
VIB Vibration
VLV Valve
VOD Video On Demand
VOL Volume
VTR Video Tape Reproducer
W
Abbreviation Term
WACO Water Cooler
WAP Wireless Access Point
WARN Warning
WBM Weight and Balance Manual
WDB Wall Disconnect Box
WDO Window
WiFi, WIFI, Wi-Fi, WI-FI Wireless Fidelity
WIPDU Water Ice Protection Data Unit
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
WMFL Wall Mounted Flood Light
WMS Warning and Maintenance System
WOW Weight On Wheels
WSHLD Windshield
WT Weight
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
X
Abbreviation Term
XML Extensible Markup Language
XMTR Transmitter
Y
Abbreviation Term
YC Yankee Class, Economy Class
Z
Abbreviation Term
Z Zone
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LEVEL OF INFORMATION
Applicable to: ALL
To provide an appropriate level of information, three layer have been applied to the CCOM content:
- Layer 1 : This layer of information provides the "need to know" information, to have a global
understanding sufficient to perform all the cabin crew tasks.
- Layer 2 : This layer of information provides the "nice to know" information.
- Layer 3 : This layer of information provides the "expert" level of information, to have a precise and
exhaustive understanding.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
APPROVAL REFERENCE
Approval date: 20-Jan-2015
Approval reference: L25ME1501875
Approved by: Mr Jean francois PETIT-Certification Manager and Cabin Safety
The CCOM procedures that are marked "Airworthiness Related" provide procedures and limitations
that are mandatory, in order to meet cabin safety airworthiness requirements.
These procedures are validated by the Airbus Office of Airworthiness. Modifications to these
procedures must be reviewed by the Operator's National Aviation Authorities for acceptance.
The list of Airworthiness Related procedures as agreed by the EASA Certification Panel is;
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
- Door arming procedure
- Direct View (table of required cabin crew seat occupancy)
- Recommendations for the use of the Forward and Aft Stairs
- Access to Cockpit
- Cockpit door opening from the cabin
- Cockpit door opening from the cabin
- Privacy Door Module Operation
ABNORMAL AND EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
SMOKE AND FIRE PROTECTION (SPECIFIC FOR A380)
- Aft and Forward Stair Smoke Barrier Installation
- LDCRC Smoke/Fire Procedure
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
01-30 Performance
Performance ........................................................................................................................................ 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
AIRCRAFT PRESENTATION
- General: The A380–800 is a long range, twin-aisle, subsonic, civil transportation aircraft.
- Engines: The aircraft has four high bypass, turbofan engines. Two engines are mounted
underneath each wing.
- Cockpit: The cockpit is located between the upper and main deck. The cockpit contains a minimum
of four seats: The captain and first officers seat are at the front of the cockpit, and, the two observer
seats at the back. An additional fifth seat may be installed as an option.
- Aircraft deck layout: The A380–800 has a total of three decks:
• A lower deck: which has the cargo compartments, and a Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
(LDCRC) (Optional)
• A main deck: which is a passenger cabin, and,
• An upper deck which is also a passenger cabin that extends to the length of the fuselage.
Two staircases provide access between the main deck and the upper deck. One staircase is
located forward of the cabin. The second, a spiral staircase, is located at the rear of the cabin.
- Cabin: The passenger seating configuration may be customized in accordance with the operators
requirements. The A380–800 has been certified for a maximum of 853 passenger seats.
Note: For customized seating configurations the maximum number of crew can be reduced in
accordance with Jar-Ops 1.990.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
Applicable to: ALL
Aircraft dimensions
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
The dimensions of the aircraft are measured from the static ground line.
The main dimensions of the A380–800 are:
- Length: 70.400 m (230.97 ft) measured from nose tip to tail tip
- Width: 79.750 m (261.65 ft) measured from wing tip to wing tip
- Height: 24.066 m (78.96 ft) measured from the static ground line to the top of the tail fin.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PERFORMANCE
Applicable to: ALL
Note: These curves are given for information only. The approved values are stated in the
Operating Manuals specific to the airline operating the aircraft.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
UNPRESSURIZED COMPARTMENTS
Applicable to: ALL
Unpressurized Compartments
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LANDING GEARS
Applicable to: ALL
Landing Gears
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The landing gear doors open to enable the extension and retraction of the landing gears. Following
the extension or retraction of the landing gears the landing gear doors close to align with the
aerodynamic profile of the of the wings and the fuselage.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
Applicable to: ALL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
The A380–800 has three cargo compartments in the lower deck of the aircraft, all the cargo
compartment doors are located on the right side of the aircraft.
The forward and aft cargo compartments are designed to carry containers and pallets.
The bulk cargo compartment is designed for bulk loading and the transportation of live animals.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CABIN DOORS
Applicable to: ALL
The A380–800 cabin doors are fail-safe/plug-type doors which open in a forward direction, parallel to
the fuselage. Normal passenger door operation is in the electrical mode. The cabin doors may be
opened from the outside of the aircraft or, from the inside of the aircraft. If, no electrical power is
available the cabin doors may opened manually.
The A380–800 has 16 type “A” cabin doors.
- There are 5 pairs of doors on the main deck,
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
02-10 Introduction
02-10-10 General
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT............................................................................................................... 1
02-20-20 Location
Location ............................................................................................................................................... 1
02-40-20 Location
Windows location................................................................................................................................. 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
02-60-20 Location
COCKPIT DOOR Location...................................................................................................................1
02-70-20 Location
Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Location ..........................................................................................1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
02-110-20 Location
VENT Panel ......................................................................................................................................... 1
Electrical Power ................................................................................................................................... 2
Air Conditioning ................................................................................................................................... 4
Communications .................................................................................................................................. 5
Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 6
Oxygen ................................................................................................................................................ 7
Cabin Systems..................................................................................................................................... 8
Doors ................................................................................................................................................... 9
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
02-110-30-23 Communications
ELT Panel.............................................................................................................................................1
EVAC Panel .........................................................................................................................................2
Calls Panel ...........................................................................................................................................4
RMP .....................................................................................................................................................7
Outside Cockpit-call Components ........................................................................................................9
Cockpit Handset.................................................................................................................................11
02-110-30-33 Lights
PAX SIGNS Overhead Panel...............................................................................................................1
EMER EXIT LT Overhead Panel..........................................................................................................5
02-110-30-35 Oxygen
Oxygen Controls and Indicators...........................................................................................................1
Oxygen Maintenance Panel .................................................................................................................3
02-110-30-52 Doors
CKPT Door Panel.................................................................................................................................1
DOOR/OXY System Display ................................................................................................................3
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
Applicable to: ALL
The A380 Cockpit is designed for maximum comfort and convenience, providing various types of
equipments and stowage possibilities.
In addition, the cockpit is thermally and acoustically insulated.
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The A380 cockpit is equipped with two Onboard Information Terminals (OIT). These terminals are
available for CCOM consultation.
LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The Captain (CAPT) and First Officer (F/O) seats are symmetrical, and have the same functions.
Both seats are electrically powered to: L2
The third occupant's seat is similar to the Captain's or the First Officer's seat. It can only be
mechanically controlled, and can rotate.
In its extreme forward position, the seat can rotate clockwise, to a 90° position. L2
The third occupant's life vest is stowed in the backrest of the Captain's seat.
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit is equipped with fixed and sliding windows, that are installed at the front and sides of the
cockpit.
There are four fixed windows:
- Two are located on each side of the cockpit, and are fitted with an anti-icing and defogging system.
- Two are located on the front windshield, and are also part of the integral security type, specifically
designed to protect against bird impact.
There are two sliding windows:
- They are located on each side of the windshield, and can be used as an emergency exit.
WINDOWS LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
Windows Location
SLIDING WINDOWS
Applicable to: ALL
L1
Note: Do not stow objects in the sliding window area, to ensure the sliding windows can be opened
when necessary.
Sliding Windows
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ESCAPE ROPE
Applicable to: ALL
The emergency evacuation procedure enables the crew to evacuate the cockpit by opening the sliding
windows and using a 8.6 m(28.2 ft ) long knotted rope (Refer to 14-50 Cockpit Evacuation Through
Window).
The rope is stored above each sliding window, on either side of the overhead panel.
The cover plate of each stowage compartment (indicated with red labels) is held closed by velcro
enabling it to be opened quickly.
The ropes and their attachments can support a load of 181.6 kg (400.4 lb). L2
Escape rope
L1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0009, 0017, 0023-0249
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the cabin. It has an electric-locking latch, that
the flight crew controls.
The cabin crew requests access to the cockpit via a keypad.
There are two entry modes:
- Normal
- Emergency.
The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression requirements.
A mechanical override enables the flight crew to open the door from inside the cockpit.
GENERAL
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0016, 0020
A forward-opening hinge door separates the cockpit from the cabin. It has an electric-locking latch, that
the flight crew controls.
The cabin crew requests access to the cockpit via a keypad.
There are two entry modes:
- Normal
- Emergency.
The door is bulletproof and fully compliant with rapid decompression requirements.
A mechanical override enables the flight crew to open the door from inside the cockpit.
The flight crew can lock the door by using the deadbolt.
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
The upper decompression panels automatically opens, if the differential pressure between the L2
If required, it is possible to evacuate the cockpit through the escape panel.Refer to 14-50 Cockpit
Evacuation Through Cockpit Door
The flight crew can open the escape panel if:
- The cockpit door is jammed in the closed position, or
- There is an emergency.
The flight crew can open the escape panel with the flap release mechanism by:
- Rotating the handle cover in order to access the panel release handle
- Pushing the panel release handle, and turning it in any direction in order to unlock the escape
panel.
If the escape panel is unlocked, the locked indicator is red.
ESCAPE PANEL
OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
A buzzer sounds in the cockpit for 2 seconds with an audio message “DOOR PLEASE”. L1
After the flight crew identifies the person requesting access, they can unlock the door with the
CKPT DOOR sw.
EMERGENCY ACCESS:
Refer to 14-50 Cockpit Evacuation Through Cockpit Door
If necessary, emergency access to the cockpit can be requested.
To request emergency access to the cockpit, the cabin crew types an emergency code, and
validates it using the “#” key, on the keypad.
The Operator defines this emergency code (between 2 and 7 digits). L2
A buzzer sounds in the cockpit until the flight crew unlocks, or locks the door using the CKPT L1
DOOR sw.
If the flight crew does not respond, the door automatically unlocks for 5 s after 30 s (default time
period).
The Operator can define this time-period (between 15 and 120 seconds). L2
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
General
KEYPAD
Applicable to: ALL
Keypad Control
DOOR INDICATORS
The CKPT DOOR sw is set to UNLOCK, by the flight crew.
The door is not locked, and can be opened.
NUMBER KEYS
Enables the cabin crew to enter the access code:
Normal access: Zero to seven digit code (to be programmed by the Operator)
Emergency access: Two to seven digit code (to be programmed by the
Operator).
VALIDATION KEY
Validates a code.
DEADBOLT
Applicable to: ALL
DEADBOLT
When turned to the left, unlocks the Cockpit Door Module.
When turned to the right, locks the Cockpit Door Module.
CKPT DOOR SW
The door is unlocked.
The keypad and the buzzer are inhibited for a defined time-period.
The Operator defines this time-period (between 5 and 20 minutes).
Note: When the switch is released, it returns to the NORM position.
The Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC) offers a little privacy to the flight crewmembers in their
off-duty times. To enable the occupants to relax or to sleep, the FCRC absorbs background noise from
the aircraft and the cabin.
The flight crew can enter the Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC) via the entrance door on the left
hand aisle.
A keypad lock secures the closed entrance door against opening by unauthorized persons.
On the crew rest side, the entrance door can be locked by a dead bolt, e.g. in case of a keypad lock
failure.
Note: If the entrance door is locked by the dead bolt from the crew rest side, the entrance door
cannot be opened via the keypad anymore.
On the cabin side of the entrance door, a dead bolt indicator shows whether the dead bolt currently
locks the entrance door or not (Refer to Entrance Door - Dead Bolt Indicator).
In the figure above, the door unlock lever is shown in the locked position.
1. Enter the access code by using the keypad.
Note: The access code is defined by the airline.
2. Turn the door unlock lever clockwise.
CAUTION Do not turn the door unlock lever counter-clockwise. Otherwise a mechanical
failure of the keypad lock is possible.
If the code was entered correctly, the visual indicators will turn green. If this is not the case L2
CAUTION From the cabin side, do not turn the door unlock lever counter-clockwise. Otherwise
a mechanical failure of the keypad lock is possible.
L1
Note: If the entrance door is closed correctly, it is locked automatically by the keypad lock.
HOW TO LOCK / UNLOCK THE ENTRANCE DOOR USING THE DEAD BOLT
Keypad Lock Panel - Crew Rest Side
In the figure above, the door unlock lever is shown in the locked position.
Push the dead bolt slider to the opposite side.
- The entrance door is locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the left side.
- The entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the right side.
HOW TO LEAVE THE FLIGHT CREW REST COMPARTMENT
1. Turn the door unlock lever in any direction to unlock the entrance door.
Continued on the next page
For information about how to override the locked entrance door Refer to Keypad Lock and Dead
Bolt Override from the Cabin Side
The bunks enable the flight crew to relax or to sleep during the flight. To ensure privacy, each bunk has
a curtain.
Each bunk has its own Personal Service Unit, which is installed in the lining above. When entering a
bunk, always place the head at the bunk end with the Personal Service Unit, to ensure access to the
oxygen mask in case of an abnormal situation.
It is possible to convert the two bunks to a seat bench.
HOW TO CONVERT THE BUNKS
Note: Two placards on the front side of the upper bunk explain how to convert the bunks.
HOW TO CONVERT THE BUNKS TO A SEAT BENCH
Note: Before converting the bunks to a seat bench, open the curtain of the lower bunk and secure
it in the fully open position.
On the lower bunk:
1. Lift both cubic mattress inserts (Step A).
Converting the Bunks to a Seat Bench - Figure 1
2. Unlock both latches in the holes formerly covered by the cubic mattress inserts (Step B).
3. Insert two fingers of each hand into the small holes in the surface of the mattress.
4. Pull (the movable part of) the mattress as far as possible into the aisle to extend the seat base
(Step C).
5. Lock both latches in the holes formerly covered by the cubic mattress inserts.
6. Restore both cubic mattress inserts.
7. Take the seat belts out of the gap in the mattress (See CONVERTING THE BUNKS TO A SEAT
BENCH - FIGURE 2 ).
On the upper bunk:
1. Support the upper bunk using one hand.
2. Unlock the latches on the front side of the upper bunk (Step D).
3. Carefully lower the front side of the mattress until it reaches the mattress of the lower bunk.
Converting the Bunks to a Seat Bench - Figure 2
Now the seat bench is ready for use. The mattress of the upper bunk is the seatback, the mattress
of the lower bunk is the seatpan.
Note: To ensure personal safety, always use the seat belts when sitting on the seat bench.
To save space in the flight crew rest compartment (FCRC), the installed table is a wall-mounted folding
table.
When in use, the folding table has a load limit of 68 kg / 150 lbs.
CAUTION Do not sit on the folding table or exceed its load limit. This will cause damage to the
folding table.
There are three stowage compartments for the occupants of the Flight Crew Rest Compartment
(FCRC):
- A bigger one, e.g. for coats and crew items, on the right hand wall.
- A smaller one, e.g. for shoes, on the right hand wall.
- One for flat items below the bunks.
This stowage compartment is a drawer.
All stowage compartments are secured against uncontrolled opening by double slam latches.
LCD SCREEN
An LCD screen is installed in the ceiling at the foot end of each bunk. If a bunk occupant wants to use
the LCD screen, it can be fold down manually.
LOUDSPEAKER
The loudspeaker is installed in the ceiling of the crew rest compartment.
It transmits:
- Announcements/messages sent by a crewmember in the cabin or by the flight crew in the cockpit.
- Acoustic warning signals in case of abnormal situations.
STOOL
At the wall on the opposite side of the bunks, there is a folding stool installed.
If a crew rest occupant wants to sit, the stool has to be operated like a cinema seat.
EMERGENCY LIGHT
The emergency light illuminates the area where it is installed.
To get more information Refer to Emergency Lighting - Overview
SMOKE DETECTOR
The smoke detector is installed in the ceiling. It detects smoke in the area, where it is installed and
gives an alert to the flight crew in the cockpit and the cabin crew in the cabin.
In case of an emergency situation, a quick evacuation of the Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC)
could be essential. The preferred evacuation path is through the entrance door of the FCRC.
If the way through the entrance door is blocked (e.g. by a fire), there is a second evacuation path
through the wall that separates the FCRC from the Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC).
EVACUATION PATH THROUGH THE WALL
There is an escape hatch between the FCRC and the CCRC leading through the wall.
1. Remove the escape hatch from the wall and put it aside.
a. Pull at both latch covers and put them aside.
Escape Hatch - Overview
b. Turn the D-ring handle of the latches in the direction shown on the placard until the escape
hatch is unlocked.
c. Push the escape hatch through the wall, into the CCRC.
The flight crew uses these keys to enter the Operator-defined access code.
When the visual indicators are red, the entrance door is locked.
When the visual indicators are green, the entrance door is unlocked.
The door unlock lever is in vertical position: The entrance door is locked.
From the cabin side:
When turned clockwise, the entrance door is unlocked.
From the crew rest side:
When turned in any direction, the entrance door is unlocked.
- When pushed to the left, the entrance door is locked by the dead bolt.
- When pushed to the right, the entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
supply by using the CREW SUPPLY pb-sw that is on the OXYGEN Overhead Panel.
- Four (five) oxygen mask. Each mask covers the entire face, and it's stowed in its own stowage box.
The stowage box is next to each flight crew station.
LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
The OFF legend comes on white. The supply valve is closed, and doesn't supply
oxygen to the masks.
The ECAM is located in the cockpit on the center pedestral. It is defined as the centralized aircraft
systems/configuration monitoring, and helps the crew to maintain the aircraft in a safe and permanent
operational status.
The ECAM DOOR page displays oxygen system information.
Cockpit Oxygen System Indications
CKPT INDICATION
Normal operation of the oxygen system. L12
On ground, it indicates that the oxygen capacity is sufficient for two flight
crewmembers.
- The oxygen system is off (the CREW SUPPLY pb-sw is OFF) L12
Regulator
RED GRIPS
When the red grips are pressed together, the harness inflates.
When the red grips are released, the harness deflates.
EMERGENCY SELECTOR
For prevent smoke, smell, ashes from entering the mask, or to remove condensation, the
EMERGENCY selector provides overpressure.
- When pressed, and until released, supplies oxygen overpressure
- When turned, permanently supplies oxygen overpressure.
L2
Note: If the cabin altitude is above 30 000 ft, oxygen overpressure is automatically supplied.
N/100% SELECTOR
The N/100% selector has two positions:
When the selector is set to the 100% position, the mask provides 100% pure
oxygen at all cabin altitudes.
When the selector is set to the "N" position, the mask provides a mixture of ambient L12
Note: If the cabin altitude is above 30 000 ft, the mask automatically provides 100% oxygen.
STEP 1
Coil the hose that is connected to the mask, and put it in the bottom of the stowage box.
STEP 2
Fold the harness, and put it in the mask.
STEP 3
Put the mask in the stowage box.
Make sure that the:
- Mask touches the bottom of the stowage box
- N/100% selector is face up, and at the 100% position.
STEP 4
Close the doors of the mask stowage box.
Firmly press the PRESS TO TEST AND RESET pb.
When released, check that the OXY ON flag disappears.
STEP 5
Press the EMERGENCY selector, and check that the oxygen flow indicator remains black.
STEP 1 AND 2
Remove the mask from its stowage box, by squeezing the red grips toward each other, and pulling the
mask out of its box.
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
For further information regarding Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) Refer to 11-20-10 General
GENERAL
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
The following descriptions are relative to the cockpit panels with cabin system interactions:
- Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning:Refer to 02-110-30-21 Air Conditioning Panel L2
- Communications L1
- Cabin Systems L1
- Doors L1
GENERAL
Applicable to: MSN 0110-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The following descriptions are relative to the cockpit panels with cabin system interactions:
- Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning:Refer to 02-110-30-21 Air Conditioning Panel L2
- Communications L1
- Lights L1
- Cabin Systems L1
- Doors L1
GENERAL
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0109
The following descriptions are relative to the cockpit panels with cabin system interactions:
- Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning:Refer to 02-110-30-21 Air Conditioning Panel L2
- Vent Panel L1
- Communications L1
- Lights L1
- Cabin Systems L1
- Doors L1
VENT PANEL
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0109
ELECTRICAL POWER
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
ELECTRICAL POWER
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
AIR CONDITIONING
Applicable to: ALL
COMMUNICATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
LIGHTS
Applicable to: ALL
OXYGEN
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN SYSTEMS
Applicable to: ALL
DOORS
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN SELECTOR
The cabin temperature is 24 °C (75.2 °F) .
Note: The temperature ranges from 18 °C (64 °F) (COLD) to 30 °C (86 °F)
(HOT).
.
COCKPIT SELECTOR
The cockpit temperature is 24 °C (75.2 °F) .
Note: The temperature ranges from 18 °C (64 °F) (COLD) to 30 °C (86 °F)
(HOT) .
.
VENT PANEL
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0109
ELT PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
ELT panel
ELT LIGHT
The ELT is not transmitting.
ELT SELECTOR
The Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) is armed, and automatically
transmits the emergency radio signal, when the aircraft sustains an abnormal
load factor
EVAC PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Evac Panel
COMMAND PB
No evacuation is ordered by the Captain or by the Chief Purser.
Evacuation is ordered by the Chief Purser. The EVAC light flashes and the horn
sounds in the cockpit.
When pressed:
- The ON and the EVAC lights come on
- The horn sounds in the cockpit
- The EVACUATION ALERT message appears on all Attendant Indication
Panels (AIP) in the cabin
- The evacuation aural alert sounds in the cabin.
HORN OFF PB
When pressed, the horn aural alert in the cockpit goes off.
CALLS PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
CALLS PANEL
PILOT REST PB
When pressed, a high/low chime sounds in the forward (aft) crew rest.
Note: In the case there is only one Pilot Rest Compartment, the PILOT REST
FWD pb and the PILOT REST MAIN pb, affect the same crew rest
location.
DECK/PURS PB
When pressed:
- A pink light, on the associated Area Call Panel(s) (ACP), comes on
- The CAPTAIN CALL message appears on the associated Attendant Information
Panel(s) (AIP)
- A high/low chime is generated via the associated cabin loudspeakers.
ALL PB
When pressed:
- A pink light, on all the ACPs in the cabin, comes on
- The CALL ALL CAPT message appears on all AIPs in the cabin
- A high/low chime is generated via the cabin loudspeakers.
MECH PB
When pressed:
- The COCKPIT CALL light on the nose gear ground service panel comes on
- An external horn sounds (as long as the MECH pbis pressed).
EMER PB-SW
No EMER call is made by the flight crew, or received from the cabin.
An EMER call is received from the cabin. The CALL light flashes, and a buzzer
sounds three times.
The ATT transmission key lights flash on all RMPs.
When pressed:
- The ON and the CALL lights come on
- A pink light, on all ACPs in the cabin, comes on
- The CALL PRIO CAPT appears on all AIPs in the cabin
- Three successive high/low chimes are generated via the cabin loudspeakers.
RMP
Applicable to: ALL
RMP General
PA TRANSMISSION KEY
The PA transmission key has to be pressed as long as the flight crewmember
wants to speak.
In this case, it is not necessary to use a PTT sw.
RECEPTION KNOBS
The associated way of communication is not in reception mode. Press, and
release in the out position to activate the reception mode.
The flight crewmembers communicate with each other and the ground crew via
the boomset, or the oxygen mask microphones (i.e. conference mode). The
switch remains in the INT position until the flight crew selects another position.
L2
Note: This panel is located on the nose landing gear.
COCKPIT CALL SW
HORN RESET SW
COCKPIT HANDSET
Applicable to: ALL
ELEC PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
ELEC panel
GALLEY PB-SW
The galleys are supplied. Some galleys may be automatically shed, if
necessary.
All electrical power to the complete IFE system (including the exTV
system) and seats is cut off.
All electrical power to the complete IFE system and seats is cut off.
CABIN PANEL
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
CABIN Panel
electrically supplied.
The passenger seats are equipped with power outlets where passengers can
connect their electronic devices.
The Flight Crew press the PAX PERS ELEC SPLY pb-sw to switch off all the
PED power outlets.
SIGNS PANEL
NO MOBILE SW
The NO MOBILE signs, and the EXIT signs come on in the cabin. L12
- The aircraft is flying over a country where the use of mobile phone is not
authorized, or
- The aircraft altitude is approximately below 13 000 ft .
Depending on CIDS programming, an associated low tone chime sounds in the
cabin.
The EXIT signs come on automatically in the cabin, when
- The slats are extended, or
- The landing gear is extended.
The NO MOBILE signs, and the EXIT signs go off in the cabin. L12
Depending on the CIDS programming, an associated low tone chime sounds in the
cabin.
Note: In the case of excessive cabin altitude (i.e. if the cabin altitude exceeds the
maximum of: 9 550 ft and the landing field elevation + 1 000 ft), then the
FASTEN SEAT BELT signs, and the EXIT signs come on in the cabin,
regardless of the position of the SEAT BELT sw and of the NO
MOBILE sw.
SEAT BELTS SW
Fasten Seat Belt and Return to Seat signs come on
Fasten Seat Belt and Return to Seat signs automatically comes on in specific L12
conditions.
Note: The sign is activated when the NLG is locked in down position, Slats
1(2) down and oil is in low press.
Fasten Seat Belt and Return to Seat signs are switched off
NO SMOKING SW
NO SMOKING signs come on
Note: The sign is activated when the NLG is locked in down position
EMER EXIT LT
Note: The EMER EXIT LT panel controls the cabin emergency lighting system.
EMER EXIT LT SW
The emergency exit lighting system is ON. L12
OXYGEN PANEL
The guard is open, and the pb is pressed: the mask will drop.
Maintenance personnel uses this pushbutton to reset the control circuit, after the oxygen system has
been used.
When pressed, resets the oxygen system : the PAX SYS ON light (on the oxygen L12
ENTERTAINMENT PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
ENTERTAINMENT PANEL
IFEC PB-SW
Normal operation. No smoke is detected.
All electrical power to the IFE Center is cut off, and smoke is
detected.
IFEC PB-SW
Normal operation. No smoke is detected. L12
All electrical power to the IFE Center is cut off, and smoke is detected.
CWS PB-SW
Normal operation. No smoke is detected.
The keypad and the buzzer are inhibited for a defined time-period.
The Operator defines this time-period (between 5 and 20 minutes).
Note: When the switch is released, it returns to the NORM position.
SLIDE INDICATION
The slide is armed
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
For further information regarding Emergency Equipment:Refer to 11-10-10 General Information about
Emergency Equipment
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03-10-20 Location
Zone Concept ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Upper Deck Layout .............................................................................................................................. 1
Main Deck Layout ................................................................................................................................ 3
Lower Deck Layout .............................................................................................................................. 7
Seating Capacity and Equipment Data................................................................................................ 9
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03-50-30 Description
Typical Cabin Crew Stations ................................................................................................................1
Typical Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)....................................................................................................5
03-60 Stairs
03-60-10 General
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................1
03-60-20 Location
All Stairs ...............................................................................................................................................1
03-60-30 Description
Forward Stairs......................................................................................................................................1
Aft Stairs...............................................................................................................................................4
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03-60-40 Operation
Forward Stairs - How to Operate the Staircase Barrier ....................................................................... 1
Forward Stairs - How to Operate the Theater Cord ............................................................................. 9
Forward Stairs - How to Install the Smoke Curtain ............................................................................ 11
Aft Stairs - How to Operate the Staircase Barrier .............................................................................. 14
Aft Stairs - How to Operate the Theater Cord.................................................................................... 22
Aft Stairs - How to Install the Smoke Curtain..................................................................................... 24
03-70-20 Location
Location of the Trolley Lift.................................................................................................................... 1
03-70-30 Description
Main Parts of a Trolley Lift ................................................................................................................... 1
Capacity and Load Limit ...................................................................................................................... 2
Lift Cage Position During Take-Off and Landing ................................................................................. 4
03-70-40 Operation
Door Operation .................................................................................................................................... 1
Load Handling...................................................................................................................................... 9
Lift Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 29
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03-80 Stowages
03-80-10 General
General Information about Stowage Compartments ............................................................................1
03-90 Galleys
03-90-10 Galley Description
The Purpose of a Galley.......................................................................................................................1
Galley Types ........................................................................................................................................2
Electrical Equipment - General.............................................................................................................2
Electrical Panel.....................................................................................................................................3
03-90-20 Location
Galley Location.....................................................................................................................................1
03-90-30-20 Trolley
Trolley Description................................................................................................................................1
Trolley Operation..................................................................................................................................2
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03-90-30-40 Latches
Latches - General ................................................................................................................................ 1
1/4 Turn Retainer Latch ....................................................................................................................... 2
Intermediate Latch ............................................................................................................................... 3
Slam Latch / Sliding Latch ................................................................................................................... 5
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03-100 Lavatories
03-100-10 General
General Information about the Lavatories ............................................................................................1
03-100-20 Location
Location of the Lavatories on the Upper Deck .....................................................................................1
Location of the Lavatories on the Main Deck .......................................................................................4
03-100-30 Description
Description of the Lavatory Interior ......................................................................................................1
Description of the Lavatory Doortypes .................................................................................................5
Description of the Lavatory Smoke Detection System .........................................................................9
Lavatory for Handicapped Passengers ..............................................................................................10
03-100-40 Operation
Operation of the Washroom Functions.................................................................................................1
Operation of the Toilet Functions .........................................................................................................3
Operation of other Lavatory Functions .................................................................................................5
Door Operation...................................................................................................................................17
Preparation of a Lavatory for Handicapped Passengers....................................................................18
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03-110-20 Location
Location of the Shower Rooms............................................................................................................ 1
03-110-30 Description
Description of a Shower Room ............................................................................................................ 1
Shower Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 4
Shower Unit Components.................................................................................................................... 6
Oxygen Masks in the Shower Room.................................................................................................... 9
Heated Floor Panels Control.............................................................................................................. 10
Hair Dryer Function............................................................................................................................ 12
Manual Shut-Off Valve....................................................................................................................... 14
03-110-40 Operation
Operation of the Shower ..................................................................................................................... 1
How to Operate the Shower................................................................................................................. 2
How to Clean the Shower After Use .................................................................................................... 5
How to Connect the Hair Dryer in the Hair Dryer Compartment .......................................................... 5
How to OPEN / Close the Access Door to the Manual Shut-Off Valve................................................ 7
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
03-120-20 Location
Crew Rest Compartment - Location .....................................................................................................1
03-120-30 Description/Operation
Crew Rest Compartment......................................................................................................................1
Crew Rest Compartment - Entrance Door ...........................................................................................3
Crew Rest Compartment - Entrance Hatch........................................................................................12
Crew Rest Compartment - The Interior ..............................................................................................16
Crew Rest Compartment - Bunks.......................................................................................................16
Crew Rest Compartment - Info Panel ................................................................................................17
Crew Rest Compartment - Stowage Compartments ..........................................................................21
Crew Rest Compartment - Additional Equipment...............................................................................22
Crew Rest Compartment - Safety Installations ..................................................................................25
Crew Rest Compartment - Emergency Exit Hatch .............................................................................31
Crew Rest Compartment - Evacuation...............................................................................................43
03-130-30-20 Location
Bar Location (Upper Deck)...................................................................................................................1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
AIRCRAFT OVERVIEW
Applicable to: ALL
ZONE CONCEPT
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft is divided into different zones per deck to allow an easy classification of the equipment,
seats and furnishing.
LOWER DECK
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0216, 0225-0229, 0241-0244
Following tables give an overview about the seating capacity per deck and passenger class, as well as
the quantity of the different parts installed in the cabin (e.g. stowages, galleys, lavatories, ...)
SEATING CAPACITY
Class \ Deck Upper Deck Main Deck (MD) Lower Deck (LD) Total per Class
(UD)
First Class (F/C) 14 — — 14
Business Class (B/C) 76 — — 76
Economy Class (E/C) — 426 — 426
Total per Deck 90 426 — total 516 seats
EQUIPMENT DATA
Class C/A Seats Lavatories Galleys Stowages Coat
Stowages
Deck UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD
F/C 4 — 3 — 3 — 6 — — —
B/C 4 — 4 — 6 — 7 — — —
E/C — 17 — 11 — 7 — 7 — —
Total per Deck 8 17 7 11 9 7 11 5 — —
Total per A/C 25 18 16 20 —
Following tables give an overview about the seating capacity per deck and passenger class, as well as
the quantity of the different parts installed in the cabin (e.g. stowages, galleys, lavatories, ...)
SEATING CAPACITY
Class \ Deck Upper Deck Main Deck (MD) Lower Deck (LD) Total per Class
(UD)
First Class (F/C) — — — —
Business Class (B/C) 58 — — 58
Economy Class (E/C) 120 437 — 557
Total per Deck 178 437 — total 615 seats
EQUIPMENT DATA
Class C/A Seats Lavatories Galleys Stowages Coat
Stowages
Deck UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD
F/C — — — — — — 4 — — —
B/C 6 — 4 — 6 — 7 — — —
E/C 3 17 2 11 3 6 6 5 — —
Total per Deck 9 17 6 11 9 6 13 5 — —
Total per A/C 26 17 15 18 —
Following tables give an overview about the seating capacity per deck and passenger class, as well as
the quantity of the different parts installed in the cabin (e.g. stowages, galleys, lavatories, ...)
SEATING CAPACITY
Class \ Deck Upper Deck Main Deck (MD) Lower Deck (LD) Total per Class
(UD)
First Class (F/C) 14 — — 14
Business Class (B/C) 76 — — 76
Economy Class (E/C) — 429 — 429
Total per Deck 90 429 — total 519 seats
EQUIPMENT DATA
Class C/A Seats Lavatories Galleys Stowages Coat
Stowages
Deck UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD
F/C 4 — 1 — 3 — 4 — — —
B/C 4 — 4 — 6 — 7 — — —
E/C — 17 — 11 — 7 — 5 — —
Total per Deck 8 17 5 11 9 7 11 5 — —
Total per A/C 25 16 16 16 —
Following tables give an overview about the seating capacity per deck and passenger class, as well as
the quantity of the different parts installed in the cabin (e.g. stowages, galleys, lavatories, ...)
SEATING CAPACITY
Class \ Deck Upper Deck Main Deck (MD) Lower Deck (LD) Total per Class
(UD)
First Class (F/C) 14 — — 14
Business Class (B/C) 76 — — 76
Economy Class (E/C) — 427 — 427
Total per Deck 90 427 — total 517 seats
EQUIPMENT DATA
Class C/A Seats Lavatories Galleys Stowages Coat
Stowages
Deck UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD
F/C 4 — 1 — 3 — 4 — — —
B/C 4 — 4 — 6 — 7 — — —
E/C — 17 — 11 — 7 — 5 — —
Total per Deck 8 17 5 11 9 7 11 5 — —
Total per A/C 25 16 16 16 —
Following tables give an overview about the seating capacity per deck and passenger class, as well as
the quantity of the different parts installed in the cabin (e.g. stowages, galleys, lavatories, ...)
SEATING CAPACITY
Class \ Deck Upper Deck Main Deck (MD) Lower Deck (LD) Total per Class
(UD)
First Class (F/C) 14 — — 14
Business Class (B/C) 76 — — 76
Economy Class (E/C) — 399 — 399
Total per Deck 90 399 — total 489 seats
EQUIPMENT DATA
Class C/A Seats Lavatories Galleys Stowages Coat
Stowages
Deck UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD UD MD
F/C 4 — 1 — 3 — 4 — — —
B/C 4 — 4 — 6 — 3 — 2 —
E/C — 16 — 10 — 7 — 3 — —
Total per Deck 8 16 5 10 9 7 7 3 2 —
Total per A/C 24 15 16 10 2
UD ZONE 1
Applicable to: ALL
The First Class (F/C) location with the relevant equipment is shown below.
F/C - Zone 1 on the Upper Deck
MINISUITE
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
MINISUITE
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
MINISUITE - SEAT
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
MINISUITE - CREDENZA
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Credenza Components
CONTROL PANEL
Control Panel Components
The Minisuite Control Unit enables the passenger to control the features and functions of the minisuite.
Normally the Minisuite Control Unit is stored in its cradle on the credenza. The Minisuite Control Unit
can be operated either when it is in the cradle or ,when it is released from the cradle, as a hand-held,
wireless remote control.
MINISUITE - TABLE
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
1. Put the fingers behind the cover at the center of the top side.
2. Carefully pull at the cover until it is removed from the provision.
Note: When the baby bassinet is not in use anymore, put the cover back by carefully pushing it
onto the provision.
For the installation of the baby bassinet Refer to General Information about the INNOVINT
725x-Series and Refer to How to Install / Remove the INNOVINT 725x-Series.
The carry-on stowage area is located underneath the table. There are two retractable retention belts to
secure the carry-on baggage of the passenger. The reels of the retention belts are located in the
credenza and the buckles in the forward interior bulkhead.
Note: Prior to taxi, take-off and landing the cabin crew must make sure that all carry-on baggage is
properly stowed and secured using the retention belts. If the retention belts do not work
properly or do not hold the carry-on baggage properly due to the baggage size, the carry-on
baggage has to be stowed somewhere else.
Carry-On Stowage Area
WARNING Danger of injury: Do not let go of the retention belt. The belt is under tension and may
cause injury when snapping back.
3. Using the buckle insert, guide the retention belt back to the credenza.
MINISUITE - WARDROBE
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The wardrobe is located on the forward side of the minisuite and is accessible from the aisle.
The wardrobe door has a double slam latch.
The wardrobe is deep and high to hold lengthy garments. A courtesy light illuminates the wardrobe
inside.
TWO HIDDEN SWITCHES IN THE WARDROBE
There are two switches in the wardrobe that must only be operated by the cabin crew. To hide them
from passengers' eyes, and to avoid misuse, they are located inside the wardrobe beneath its top side,
directly behind the Minisuite Information Panel (Refer to Minisuite Information Panel).
The hidden switches are called TTOL CUTOFF sw and SPM sw.
SPM Switch and TTOL CUTOFF Switch Inside the Wardrobe (Top Side)
The Minisuite Information Panel is located on the outside of the minisuite, above the wardrobe door.
Minisuite Information Panel
F/C SEAT
Applicable to: ALL
Instead of F/C seats the aircraft is equipped with minisuites: Refer to 03-20-20 Minisuite.
SEAT BELT
Applicable to: ALL
A seat belt is part of each cabin seat. The belts secure passengers and crewmembers on their seats
during the different flight phases (e.g. taxi, take off, landing, ...) and protect them against skidding
through the cabin during turbulences. Because these turbulences can come up very fast and
unexpected, the passengers should keep their belts closed during the whole flight to avoid any injury.
HOW TO CLOSE / OPEN THE SEAT BELT
Close and Open the Seat Belt
1. After closing the seat belt, pull the free strap end until the seat belt is tightened.
2. Check whether the seat belt is locked and tightened correctly.
MINISUITE RECOVERY
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
If the sliding doors of a minisuite are blocked or seat driving functions fail during the flight, here are
some checklists to assist the cabin crew in recovering the corresponding minisuite function.
For function recovery of the sliding doors: Refer to Minisuite Recovery - Sliding Doors
For function recovery of the seat: Refer to Minisuite Recovery - Seat
The sliding doors cannot be opened via the Minisuite Control Unit.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Inform the passenger that the sliding doors will be opened from outside
the minisuite.
Open the wardrobe door and push the TTOL CUTOFF sw.
TTOL Cutoff Switch in the Wardrobe
The TTOL CUTOFF sw is located inside the wardrobe, on the upper side,
behind the minisuite information panel.
Did the sliding doors open? Go to 4 Go to 2
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
2. Ask the passenger to assist the door opening.
Explain the location of the sliding doors override button to the passenger.
Sliding Doors Override Button (In the Literature Pocket Inside the
Minisuite)
Ask the passenger to press and hold the sliding doors override button.
Use the recessed grips (inside the minisuite) to open the sliding doors
manually.
Recessed Grip in the Middle of the Sliding Door (View from Inside the
Minisuite)
CAUTION The mechanical override controls must be used with the seat free of any load. DO NOT
USE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL CONTROLS AT THE SAME TIME.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Check on the FAP whether the power supply of the seat column including
the affected seat has tripped due to an Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI). A
GFI maybe caused by a faulty Personal Electronic Device (PED) which
was connected to the power supply.
The power supply of a seat column has tripped due to a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) when these indications appear on the IFE POWER page
on the FAP:
- A text message (GFI) TRIPPED
- The corresponding button of the affected seat column is gray (OFF)
- The affected seat column on the aircraft symbol is amber.
Is there a GFI TRIPPED message on the FAP? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. Reset the GFI TRIPPED message on the FAP (Refer to RESET A GFI
TRIPPED MESSAGE ON THE FAP).
Note: In the Function Recovery Procedure RESET A GFI TRIPPED
MESSAGE ON THE FAP there is a Seat Group Switch (SGS)
mentioned. There is no SGS for the minisuites, because each
minisuite has an individual Seat Power Module switch (SPM
switch). Every time the SGS is mentioned, perform the relevant
action at all SPM switches in the affected seat column.
Was the power supply reset of the affected seat column succesful? Go to 4 Go to 3
3. Switch OFF the power supply of the seat by setting the corresponding
SPM sw to the OFF position. Wait for approximately 3 min, then reset the
SPM sw to the ON position. Go to 4 Go to 4
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
SPM Switch in the Wardrobe
4. On the Minisuite Control Unit, test all seat driving functions by touching
the corresponding icons. Is at least one seat driving function inoperative? Go to 5 Go to 17
5. Does the leg rest extension move electrically? Go to 7 Go to 6
6. Push and hold the LEG REST EXTENSION OVERRIDE lever on the side
of the leg rest and push or pull the leg rest extension to the desired
position (entirely in for TTOL position). Go to 7 Go to 7
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Leg Rest Extension Recovery
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Seat Recovery
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Arm Rest in TTOL Position
UD ZONE 2
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
The Business Class (B/C) location with the relevant equipment is shown below.
B/C - Zone 2 on the Upper Deck
UD ZONE 2
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
UD ZONE 3
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0239-0249
UD ZONE 3
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0238
B/C SEAT
Applicable to: ALL
WARNING Risk of injury to small children's fingers when operating the movable armrest.
Advise passengers travelling with small children of the potential risk related to the
armrest movement.
SEAT BELT
Applicable to: ALL
For the description and operation of the Seat Belt: Refer to 03-20-20 Seat Belt.
UD ZONE 1
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
UD ZONE 2
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
UD ZONE 4
Applicable to: ALL
MD ZONE 5
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0249
MD ZONE 5
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
MD ZONE 6
Applicable to: MSN 0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
MD ZONE 6
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
MD ZONE 6
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
MD ZONE 6
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0178-0184, 0190, 0204-0207,
0210-0216, 0225
MD ZONE 7
Applicable to: ALL
MD ZONE 8
Applicable to: MSN 0147-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
MD ZONE 8
Applicable to: MSN 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0249
MD ZONE 8
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140
MD ZONE 8
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0142
E/C SEAT
Applicable to: ALL
WARNING Risk of injury to small children's fingers when operating the movable armrest.
Advise passengers travelling with small children of the potential risk related to the
armrest movement.
SEAT BELT
Applicable to: ALL
For the description and operation of the Seat Belt: Refer to 03-20-20 Seat Belt.
The cabin upper deck is equipped with a total of 6 cabin attendant stations with 8 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
One additional CAS is installed in the center of the fwd area.
Location of the CA Stations and CAS
The cabin upper deck is equipped with a total of 6 cabin attendant stations with 8 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
Location of the CA Stations and CAS
The cabin main deck is equipped with a total of 10 cabin attendant stations with 16 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
One additional CAS is installed in the center of the fwd entrance area.
Location of CA Stations and CAS
The cabin main deck is equipped with a total of 10 cabin attendant stations with 16 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
One additional CAS is installed in the center of the fwd entrance area.
Location of CA Stations and CAS
The cabin main deck is equipped with a total of 10 cabin attendant stations with 16 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
One additional CAS are installed in the center of the fwd entrance area.
Location of CA Stations and CAS
The cabin main deck is equipped with a total of 10 cabin attendant stations with 15 Cabin Attendant
Seats (CAS).
One additional CAS is installed in the center of the fwd entrance area.
Location of CA Stations and CAS
The typical Cabin Crew (CC) Station with FAP at the upper and main deck are equipped as follows:
- 1 FAP located above the Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS) or near the CC Station
- 1 AIP located in the door frame
- 1 Handset located at the headrest
- 1 CAS with the relevant emergency equipment
The maximum number of FAP amounts to 10 on the entire aircraft.
The typical Cabin Crew (CC) Stations with mini FAP on the upper deck and on the main deck are
equipped as follows:
- 1 mini FAP located above/beside the Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)
- 1 AIP located in the door frame
- 1 Handset located at the headrest
- 1 CAS with the relevant emergency equipment
The maximum number of mini FAP amounts to 28 on the entire aircraft.
Typical CC Station with Mini FAP
The typical Cabin Crew (CC) Stations on the upper deck and on the main deck are equipped as
follows:
- 1 AIP located in the door frame/beside the Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)
- 1 Handset located at the headrest
- 1 CAS with the relevant emergency equipment
Typical CC Station
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The restraint system consist of the seat belt and two shoulder straps integrated in the cabin attendant
seat.
CAUTION If the CAS is not occupied, the lap belt must be stowed in the Fasten seat-belt position.
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The restraint system consist of the seat belt and two shoulder straps integrated in the cabin attendant
seat.
Fasten seat-belt procedure:
1. Close the lap belt (1).
2. Pull the unlocked free strap end (2) and tighten the belt.
3. Pull down the shoulder straps (3).
4. Insert the shoulder straps (3) into the lap belt fastener.
Loosen seat-belt procedure:
Open the lap belt fastener through turning the cap of the fastener to the left or right side.
Fasten and Loosen of the Seat Belt
CAUTION If the CAS is not occupied, the lap belt must be stowed in the Fasten seat-belt position.
3. Release the body weight from the seat pan to return the seat into its stowed position.
HOW TO EXTEND THE SEAT
1. Pull down the seat pan until it stops in the horizontal position.
2. Apply body weight onto the seat pan.
3. Lift up the recline lever on the right front of the seat pan.
4. Slide the seat pan forward to the desired extend position.
5. Release the recline lever and make sure that the seat pan is in a locked position.
Seat in Fully Extended Position
Note: To stow the seat, push the seat pan back to the last locking position (horizontal position).
This will unlock the seat from the extended position.
OPERATION OF THE LEGREST (IF INSTALLED)
Some high comfort CAS are equipped with an additional feature:
HOW TO DEPLOY THE LEGREST
1. Release the legrest latch in the center of the bottom of the legrest.
2. Pull down the legrest. The seat pan moves towards the horizontal position.
Deploying the Legrest
3. Hold down the legrest and rotate the legrest support legs to the fully extended position.
4. Lift up the recline lever to lock the seat in the extended position.
3. Push the legrest flat against the seat pan so that the legrest latch closes.
OPERATION OF THE ADJUSTABLE HEADREST
For the comfort of the crewmembers, the headrest of the high comfort CAS is adjustable to different
body heights.
HOW TO ADJUST THE HEADREST HEIGHT
1. Pull down the headrest cushion until the desired position is reached.
2. Move the headrest cushion vertically up or down into one of the six possible positions.
CAUTION The headrest cushion must be stowed in the fully up position for taxi, takeoff and
landing.
CAUTION The lap belt must hang loosely to allow stowing the restraint system inside the
dished areas of the cushion when the seat pan is in the stowed position.
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
ALL STAIRS
Applicable to: ALL
Overhead View
FORWARD STAIRS
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
On the upper deck side of the FWD stairs there is a wall-mounted staircase barrier to prevent
passengers or trolleys from falling down the forward stairs.
WARNING The staircase barrier must be stowed for taxi, takeoff and landing in order to ensure a
quick evacuation in case of an emergency. If the staircase barrier is installed in case of
an evacuation, injury to or suffocation of passengers and/or cabin crew in this area is
possible.
Note: The MD Cabin Attendant Seat position provides only a limited view of the staircase barrier.
Therefore the cabin crew must pay increased attention to the FWD stairs area for Taxi, Takeoff
and Landing.
FORWARD STAIRS
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The forward stairs are the main connection between the main deck and the upper deck of the A380. To
read more about the use of the forward stairs, please Refer to Quick Reference Table for Use of the
Forward Stairs.
STAIRCASE ILLUMINATION
To read more about staircase illumination, please Refer to Types of Cabin Light, Refer to Definition of
Illuminated Areas.
THEATER CORD (IF INSTALLED)
If installed, there is at least one theater cord to hinder passengers using the forward stairs during
certain times of the flight.
Standard position of the theater cord is the main deck end of the forward stairs. Depending on the
aircraft configuration this theater cord can be installed alternatively on the upper deck end of the
forward stairs. It is even possible that there is one theater cord at the standard position and additionally
a second one on the upper deck end of the forward stairs.
Theatre Cord (Standard Position)
WARNING All theater cords must be properly stowed for taxi, take-off and landing in order to
ensure a quick evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an
evacuation, injury or suffocation to passengers and/or cabin crew in this area is
possible.
To properly stow the theater cord(s) either remove the theater cord(s) and put it/them into a stowage
nearby the forward stairs or - only if there is a hook installed on the staircase wall - fix the theater
cord(s) on the staircase wall.
Note: Due to the reduced visibility of the upper deck end of the forward stairs, the cabin crew must
increase attention to this area during taxi, take-off and landing.
STAIRCASE EMERGENCY LIGHTING
To read more about staircase emergency lighting, please Refer to Emergency Lighting - Cabin
Emergency Lights.
SMOKE CURTAIN
To minimize the negative effects of smoke on the persons in the deck, which is not directly affected by
smoke, a smoke curtain can be installed at the forward stairs. The smoke curtain is integrated in the
upper deck ceiling area of the staircase. A smoke curtain release lever opens the smoke curtain
compartment. When released, the smoke curtain deploys through gravity. Then the smoke curtain
must be tightened and fastened to the staircase sidewalls.
To read more about installing the smoke curtain, please Refer to Forward Stairs - How to Install the
Smoke Curtain.
AFT STAIRS
Applicable to: MSN 0042, 0056-0249
The aft stairs are the second connection between the Main Deck (MD) and the Upper Deck (UD) of the
A380. To read more about the use of the aft stairs, please Refer to Quick Reference Table for Use of
the Aft Stairs.
At the aft stairs the following are installed:
- Staircase barrier
- Theater cord
- Staircase illumination
- Staircase emergency lighting
- Smoke curtain
STAIRCASE BARRIER
The staircase barrier is wall-mounted.
The cabin crew must install the staircase barrier when loading/unloading the aft trolley lift on the UD to
prevent a trolley from accidentally falling down the aft stairs.
WARNING Ensure that the staircase barrier is open for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing. This is
necessary for a quick evacuation in case of an emergency. If the staircase barrier is not
open, injury or suffocation to passengers or cabin crewmembers in that area is possible.
For more information about the installation of the staircase barrier, Refer to How to Operate the
Staircase Barrier
THEATER CORD
The theater cord is a removable, flexible barrier that can be installed at the MD end of the aft stairs. It
will hinder passengers from using the aft stairs.
At each end of the theater cord are snap hooks that can be hooked into eyes on the sidewalls of the aft
stairs. If necessary, the cabin crew can unhook the theater cord to open the deck-to-deck passage. For
more information Refer to How to Operate the Theater Cord.
When to install and how to use the theater cord is in the responsibility of the airline.
WARNING The theater cord has to be removed for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing in order to ensure a
quick evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an evacuation, injury
or suffocation to passengers and/or cabin crew in this area is possible.
For Taxi, Takeoff and Landing, the theater cord must be stowed in a stowage near the aft stairs.
Continued on the next page
AFT STAIRS
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0030, 0046
The aft stairs are the second connection between the Main Deck (MD) and the Upper Deck (UD) of the
A380. To read more about the use of the aft stairs, please Refer to Quick Reference Table for Use of
the Aft Stairs.
STAIRCASE BARRIER
The staircase barrier is a wall-mounted barrier which has two functions:
- When loading / unloading the aft trolley lift on the upper deck, the staircase barrier prevents a trolley
from accidentally falling down the aft stairs.
- The staircase barrier also hinders passengers using the aft stairs during certain times of the flight.
WARNING The staircase barrier must be opened for taxi, take-off and landing in order to ensure a
quick evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an evacuation, injury
or suffocation to passengers and/or to the cabin crew in this area is possible.
To read more about the installation of the staircase barrier, please Refer to How to Operate the
Staircase Barrier.
STAIRCASE ILLUMINATION
To read more about staircase illumination, please Refer to Types of Cabin Light, Refer to Definition of
Illuminated Areas.
STAIRCASE EMERGENCY LIGHTING
For more information about staircase emergency lighting, please Refer to Emergency Lighting - Cabin
Emergency Lights.
SMOKE CURTAIN
To minimize the negative effects of smoke on the persons on the deck, that is not directly affected by
smoke, a smoke curtain can be installed at the aft stairs. The smoke curtain is integrated in the UD
sidewall of the staircase. To install the smoke curtain correctly, it must be tightened and fastened to the
opposite staircase sidewall.
For more information about the installation of the smoke curtain, please Refer to Aft Stairs - How to
Install the Smoke Curtain.
a. Ensure that the red locking indicator is visible before the staircase barrier reaches the locking
bracket.
CAUTION Do not entirely lower the staircase barrier when the locking indicator is green.
Otherwise the locking pin is in locked position too early and, when in contact to
the locking bracket, could cause damage to itself or to the locking bracket.
b. Guide the staircase barrier entirely down into the locking bracket.
4. Lock the staircase barrier:
a. Shift the collar towards the locking bracket until it clicks in the locked position.
b. Check that the green locking indicator is visible and the UNLOCK pb came out to ensure the
staircase barrier is installed correctly.
HOW TO STOW THE STAIRCASE BARRIER
1. Unlock the staircase barrier:
4. Turn both 1/4-turn retainers to lock the staircase barrier (in the figure below: a = open, b = closed).
Note: A theater cord is an optional feature of the forward stairs. If installed, the theater cord location
may differ from the location shown below. But the operation itself is the same.
HOW TO INSTALL THE THEATER CORD
WARNING Do not install the theater cord for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing in order to ensure a quick
evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an evacuation, injury or
suffocation to passengers and/or cabin crew in that area is possible.
1. Open the snap hook(s) and release the theater cord from the eye(s).
2. Depending on the location where the theater cord is stowed:
Continued on the next page
Put the theater cord into a stowage near the FWD stairs.
Alternatively fix the theater cord on the sidewall of the FWD stairs:
a. Put the theater cord under the hook and, with its free end, approach the eye where the fixed end
is on (see figure above).
b. Install the open snap hook of the theater cord in the eye on the sidewall of the FWD stairs.
Note: On the upper deck side of the staircase, below the bottom end of the RH handrail there is
the smoke curtain release lever.
The cover of the smoke curtain release lever is placarded with Smoke Curtain Lever.
a. To get access to the smoke curtain release lever, open it's cover by pressing on the left side of
the cover.
b. Swivel out the cover and hold it in fully open position using the left hand.
c. Using the left hand, pull up the smoke curtain release lever.
Now the smoke curtain compartment in the staircase ceiling opens and the smoke curtain
deploys through gravity.
2. Use the velcro strips to fasten the smoke curtain to the outer side of the staircase sidewalls.
Note: The velcro strips are located in the gap between the staircase sidewalls and the Shower
Spa.
The staircase barrier prevents a trolley from accidentally falling down the aft stairs.
WARNING Install the staircase barrier every time before loading or unloading the aft trolley lift at
the upper deck. A falling trolley can cause serious injury to persons in the aft stairs area
on the main deck.
Depending on the airline policy or national airworthiness regulations the staircase barrier must be used
additionally to prevent passengers, especially children, from falling down the stairs.
The staircase barrier is a bi-folded fence door.
Operating Parts
Sidewall Latch
WARNING To avoid injury to persons onboard the aircraft it is mandatory to safely stow the
removed staircase barrier for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing, e.g. in a nearby lavatory (then
close and lock it).
WARNING Do not install the theater cord for Taxi, Takeoff and Landing in order to ensure a quick
evacuation in case of an emergency. Otherwise, in case of an evacuation, injury or
suffocation to passengers and/or cabin crew in that area is possible.
1. Open the snap hook(s) and release the theater cord from the eye(s).
2. Depending on the location where the theater cord is stowed:
Continued on the next page
Put the theater cord into a stowage near the aft stairs.
Alternatively fix the theater cord on the sidewall of the aft stairs:
a. Put the theater cord under the hook and, with its free end, approach the eye where the fixed end
is on (see figure above).
b. Install the open snap hook of the theater cord in the eye on the sidewall of the aft stairs.
2. Swivel the smoke curtain cover to the fully open position (at an angle of 90 degrees).
3. Grasp both fabric loops on the front side of the smoke curtain and pull the smoke curtain out of it's
compartment.
Fabric Loops on the Smoke Curtain
4. Move the smoke curtain along the smoke curtain rail until it reaches the end position at the opposite
sidewall.
5. Press the three snap fasteners (upper, central, lower) to their counterparts on the sidewall.
CAUTION If there is the need to unfasten the smoke curtain – either partly or fully – from the
staircase sidewall, carefully lift up the snap fastener(s), which are quite stiff to operate.
Do not pull at the fabric around the snap fastener(s). Otherwise the snap fastener(s) can
be ripped easily out of the fabric.
WARNING Any other than this intended use of the trolley lift, especially the transportation of
persons or animals, is strictly forbidden.
Note: The trolley lift is designed and certified to prevent spreading of smoke and fire. Therefore, the
inner door of the trolley lift (cage door) should remain closed at any time except during the
loading of trolleys, standard units or loose items.
Note: In other AIRBUS Manuals the forward trolley lift is designated as "Trolley Lift L02" (L Zero
Two).
INFORMATION ABOUT PURPOSE AND USE OF THE TROLLEY LIFTS
The trolley lifts onboard the aircraft enable the transportation of trolleys, standard units or loose items
from the main deck to the upper deck, and vice versa. It is also possible to use the trolley lifts for the
stowage of trolleys.
WARNING Any other than this intended use of a trolley lift, especially the transportation of persons
or animals, is strictly forbidden.
Note: The trolley lifts are designed and certified to prevent spreading of smoke and fire. Therefore,
the inner door of the trolley lifts (cage door) should remain closed at any time except during the
loading of trolleys, standard units or loose items.
Overhead View
Overhead View
Overview (Typical)
Note: In other AIRBUS Manuals the outer door is designated as "trunk door" and the inner door is
designated as "cage door".
CAUTION Do not exceed the load limit of the trolley lift! Overload can significantly damage the
trolley lift.
The trolley lift onboard the aircraft has these load limits:
- 108 kg / 238 lbs during flight (warning limit)
- 180 kg / 397 lbs on ground (absolute limit)
Note: In case of an emergency during flight and for safety reasons only (e.g. to move the trolley
lift to the safer position on the main deck), exceeding the warning limit can be taken into
account
The folding shelf has a load limit of 40 kg / 88 lbs, which is also placarded in the lift cage.
All trolley lifts onboard the aircraft have the same capacity:
- One full-size trolley or
- One or two half-size trolley(s) or
- Up to six standard units or
- Loose items/waste bags
CAUTION Do not exceed the load limit of the trolley lift! Overload can significantly damage the
trolley lift.
A placard, in the lift cage of every trolley lift, indicates the load limit of the trolley lift.
All trolley lifts onboard the aircraft have the same load limit:
- 108 kg / 238 lbs during flight (warning limit)
- 180 kg / 397 lbs on ground (absolute limit)
Note: In case of an emergency during flight and for safety reasons only (e.g. to move the trolley
lift to the safer position on the main deck), exceeding the warning limit can be taken into
account
The folding shelf has a load limit of 40 kg / 88 lbs, which is also placarded in the lift cage.
WARNING The trolley lift(s) should not be operated during the following flight phases:
- Take-Off and Initial Climb
- Final Approach and Landing
Opening the inner door during these flight phases can result in injury to the operating
person and damage to the trolley lift caused by moving trolleys.
The lift cage is most secure, when it is on the main deck. Therefore the lift cage automatically moves to
the main deck in these conditions:
- If the lift cage reaches the upper deck and the outer door will not be opened within a certain time,
depending on the flight phase:
• Within 120 seconds (presetting) during the flight phase Cruise.
L2
Note: The maintenance crew may have adjusted this time to a value between 30 and 600
seconds.
• Within 20 seconds (presetting) during the flight phases Take-Off and Initial Climb, Final Climb, L1
DOOR OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
Note: The following instructions refer to both the forward trolley lift and the aft trolley lift.
HOW TO OPEN THE OUTER DOOR (TRUNK DOOR)
Note: The outer door is locked by an automatic door lock if the lift cage is not behind it. In this case it
is not possible to open the outer door.
CAUTION Do not try to open the outer door if the lift cage is not behind it. Otherwise the outer door
and its operating parts could be damaged.
STEP 1
Slide the latch handle of the manual door lock to the open position.
STEP 2
Slide the latch handle of the door latch to the open position and hold it.
STEP 3
Pull the latch handle of the door latch until the outer door is entirely open.
The outer door is entirely open when the door stopper on the upper side of the outer door snaps into
place and holds the outer door in open position.
HOW TO CLOSE THE OUTER DOOR (TRUNK DOOR)
Note: It is not possible to close the outer door if the inner door (cage door) is not correctly closed and
latched.
Steps to Close the Outer Door (Trunk Door)
STEP 1
Slide the latch handle of the door latch to the open position and hold it.
Continued on the next page
STEP 2
WARNING Hold the latch handle, when closing the outer door, in order to prevent jamming
fingers between the outer door and the door frame.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the outer door and the door latch of the inner door, do not try
to close the outer door with force, if:
- There is still a gap between the outer door and the door frame and
- It is not possible to move the outer door gently towards the door frame.
Then open the outer door again and check whether the inner door is correctly
latched or whether there is an object jamming between the outer door and the door
frame.
STEP 3
Slide the latch handle of the door latch to the closed position.
Note: Instead of sliding the latch handle, it is possible to simply release it. Because the door latch
is spring-loaded, the door bolt snaps into place.
STEP 4
To additionally lock the trolley lift: Slide the latch handle of the manual door lock to the closed
position.
Note: The following instructions refer to both the forward trolley lift and the aft trolley lift.
HOW TO OPEN THE INNER DOOR (CAGE DOOR)
Steps to Open the Inner Door (Cage Door)
STEP 1
Lift the T-handle of the door latch all the way up, and then slide it horizontally to the open position.
STEP 2
Pull the T-handle of the door latch to open the inner door. If the inner door is in an intermediate
position, stop pulling the inner door and use the second hand to hold the inner door in the
intermediate position.
STEP 3
Slide the T-handle of the door latch horizontally to the opposite side, and then lower it entirely to the
closed position. The closed position is reached when the T-handle is level with the door surface.
Note: Instead of lowering the T-handle, it is possible to simply release it. Because the T-handle is
spring-loaded, normally it reaches the closed position automatically. In very few cases it
can happen that the T-handle does not reach the closed position. Then correct its position
manually.
STEP 4
Use the second hand to entirely open the inner door.
STEP 1
Lift the T-handle of the door latch all the way up, and then slide it horizontally to the open position.
STEP 2
WARNING Hold the T-handle of the door latch, when closing the inner door, in order to prevent
jamming fingers between the inner door and the door frame.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the inner door and the door latch of the inner door, do not try
to close the inner door with force, if:
- There is still a gap between the inner door and the door frame and
- It is not possible to move the inner door gently towards the door frame.
In this case open the inner door again and check whether there is an object jamming
between the inner door and the door frame.
STEP 3
Slide the T-handle of the door latch horizontally to the opposite side, and then lower it entirely to the
closed position. The closed position is reached when the T-handle is level with the door surface.
Note: Instead of lowering the T-handle, it is possible to simply release it. Because the T-handle is
spring-loaded, normally it reaches the closed position automatically. In very few cases it
can happen that the T-handle does not reach the closed position. Then correct its position
manually.
LOAD HANDLING
Applicable to: ALL
Note: If not mentioned explicitly, the following instructions are applicable to both the forward trolley
lift and the aft trolley lift.
AFT TROLLEY LIFT ONLY: BEFORE INSERTING OR REMOVING A TROLLEY
WARNING Before inserting or removing a trolley on the upper deck, fix the trolley barrier to prevent
the trolley from falling down the rear stairs. Otherwise severe injury to persons at the
main deck end of the rear stairs as well as damage to the trolley itself and/or the aircraft
furniture is possible.
CAUTION Make sure that the shelf is in vertical position. Otherwise damage to the shelf when
inserting the trolley is possible.
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the vertical
position.
WARNING When pushing the trolley into the lift cage, make sure that your hands are on the front
side of the trolley only, in order to avoid jamming fingers between the trolley and the lift
cage.
1. On the trolley: Press down on the green pedal to release the trolley brake.
2. With the pedals showing towards the trolley lift (Forward Trolley Lift) or with the pedals showing
towards you (Aft Trolley Lift) respectively and with your hands on the front side of the trolley,
carefully push the trolley into the lift cage until it reaches the rearmost position.
3. On the trolley: Press down on the red pedal to apply the trolley brake.
HOW TO REMOVE THE FULL-SIZE TROLLEY
WARNING When pulling the trolley out of the lift cage, make sure that your hands are on the front
side of the trolley only, in order to avoid jamming fingers between the trolley and the lift
cage.
Continued on the next page
1. On the trolley:
Press down on the green pedal to release the trolley brake.
2. With your hands on the front side of the trolley, carefully pull the trolley out of the lift cage.
3. On the trolley:
Press down on the red pedal to apply the trolley brake.
FORWARD TROLLEY LIFT
HOW TO INSERT ONE HALF-SIZE TROLLEY
CAUTION Make sure that the shelf is in vertical position. Otherwise damage to the shelf when
inserting the trolley is possible.
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the
vertical position.
WARNING It is important to push the trolley into the lift cage with your hands on the nearest face
of the trolley. Do NOT place your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the
trolley. Otherwise jamming the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
CAUTION Always latch the trolley in the lift cage before operating the trolley lift in order to
prevent damage to both the lift cage and the trolley.
2. On the trolley:
Press down on the green pedal to release the trolley brake.
3. With the pedals showing towards the trolley lift and with your hands on the nearest face of
the trolley:
Carefully push the trolley into the lift cage until it touches the intermediate latch.
On the Upper Deck
Note: If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the
intermediate latch is level with the sidewall.
1. On the trolley:
Press down on the green pedal to release the trolley brake.
2. With the pedals showing towards the trolley lift and with your hands on the nearest face of
the trolley:
Carefully push the trolley into the lift cage until it reaches the rearmost position.
3. Move up the handle of the intermediate latch on the sidewall of the lift cage to the latched
position.
WARNING It is important to pull the trolley out of the lift cage with your hands on that part of the
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place
your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming
the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
2. With your hands on that part of the trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional
latch panel:
Carefully pull the trolley out of the lift cage.
3. On the trolley:
Press down on the red pedal to apply the trolley brake.
WARNING Before inserting or removing a trolley on the upper deck, fix the trolley barrier to prevent
the trolley from falling down the rear stairs. Otherwise severe injury to persons at the
main deck end of the rear stairs as well as damage to the trolley itself and/or the aircraft
furniture is possible.
CAUTION Make sure that the shelf is in vertical position. Otherwise damage to the shelf when
inserting the trolley is possible.
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the
vertical position.
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate latch is
level with the sidewall.
WARNING It is important to push the trolley into the lift cage with your hands on the nearest face
of the trolley. Do NOT place your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the
trolley. Otherwise jamming the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
CAUTION Always latch the trolley in the lift cage before operating the trolley lift in order to
prevent damage to both the lift cage and the trolley.
WARNING It is important to pull the trolley out of the lift cage with your hands on that part of the
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place
your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming
the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
2. With your hands on that part of the trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional
latch panel:
Carefully pull the trolley out of the lift cage.
3. On the trolley:
Press down on the red pedal to apply the trolley brake.
WARNING Before inserting or removing a trolley on the upper deck, fix the trolley barrier to prevent
the trolley from falling down the rear stairs. Otherwise severe injury to persons at the
main deck end of the rear stairs as well as damage to the trolley itself and/or the aircraft
furniture is possible.
Note: Remember to immediately remove the trolley barrier after having inserted or removed the
trolley.
HOW TO INSERT THE TWO HALF-SIZE TROLLEYS
CAUTION Make sure that the shelf is in vertical position. Otherwise damage to the shelf when
inserting the trolley is possible.
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the vertical
position.
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate latch is level
with the sidewall.
WARNING It is important to push the trolley into the lift cage with your hands on the nearest face of
the trolley. Do NOT place your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the
trolley. Otherwise jamming the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
WARNING It is important to pull the trolley out of the lift cage with your hands on that part of the
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place your
hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming the
fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
WARNING Before inserting or removing a trolley on the upper deck, fix the trolley barrier to prevent
the trolley from falling down the rear stairs. Otherwise severe injury to persons at the
main deck end of the rear stairs as well as damage to the trolley itself and/or the aircraft
furniture is possible.
Note: Remember to immediately remove the trolley barrier after having inserted or removed the
trolley.
HOW TO INSERT THE TWO HALF-SIZE TROLLEYS
CAUTION Before inserting the trolleys into the lift cage, make sure that the wheel guides, on both
sidewalls slightly above the lift cage floor, are in the vertical position in order to prevent
damage to both the wheel guides and the trolleys.
If the wheel guides are not in the vertical position, move them up by hand until they are locked
magnetically in the vertical position.
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate latch is level
with the sidewall.
WARNING When pushing a trolley into the lift cage, make sure that your hands are on the front side
of the trolley only, in order to avoid jamming fingers between the trolley and the lift cage.
WARNING It is important to pull the trolley out of the lift cage with your hands on that part of the
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place your
hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming the
fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
CAUTION Make sure that the shelf is in vertical position. Otherwise damage to the shelf when
inserting the trolley is possible.
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the
vertical position.
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate latch is
level with the sidewall.
WARNING It is important to push the trolley into the lift cage with your hands on the nearest face
of the trolley. Do NOT place your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the
trolley. Otherwise jamming the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
WARNING It is important to pull the trolley out of the lift cage with your hands on that part of the
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place
your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming
the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
WARNING Before inserting or removing a trolley on the upper deck, fix the trolley barrier to prevent
the trolley from falling down the rear stairs. Otherwise severe injury to persons at the
main deck end of the rear stairs as well as damage to the trolley itself and/or the aircraft
furniture is possible.
CAUTION Make sure that the shelf is in vertical position. Otherwise damage to the shelf when
inserting the trolley is possible.
If the shelf is not in the vertical position, move it up by hand until it is locked magnetically in the
vertical position.
If the intermediate latch is in latched position, move down the handle until the intermediate latch is
level with the sidewall.
WARNING It is important to push the trolley into the lift cage with your hands on the nearest face
of the trolley. Do NOT place your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the
trolley. Otherwise jamming the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
WARNING It is important to pull the trolley out of the lift cage with your hands on that part of the
trolley handle which avoids contact with the additional latch panel. Do NOT place
your hands on the trolley side panels or on the top of the trolley. Otherwise jamming
the fingers between trolley and lift cage is possible.
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Note: The load limit of the shelf is placarded in the lift cage.
a. Move down the shelf by hand until it is in the horizontal position.
2. Grasp the standard units on the floor, one at a time, and take them out of the lift cage.
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0216,
0225-0229, 0241-0244
Note: The load limit of the shelf is placarded in the lift cage.
a. Move down the shelf by hand until it is in the horizontal position.
2. Grasp the standard units on the floor, one at a time, and take them out of the lift cage.
LIFT OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
Note: If the trolley lift is in an abnormal or emergency condition, it is possible to stop the lift cage
while it is moving from the one deck to the other.
DO NOT USE THE STOP pb FOR TROLLEY LIFT OPERATION IN NORMAL CONDITIONS!
Stopping/Restarting the Lift Cage
CAUTION Before restarting the lift cage make sure that the trolley lift is no longer in an abnormal or
emergency condition, in order to avoid trolley lift damage.
STEP 1
On the same operating panel, where the STOP pb has been pressed to stop the lift cage:
Note: The deck where the STOP pb has been pressed is indicated on the display of both
operating panels (STOP UD/ STOP MD). Additionally the STOP pb which has been
pressed is illuminated.
Press the illuminated STOP pb.
The STOP pb goes off and the OPERATIVE indicator comes on.
STEP 2
While the trolley lift re-initalizes itself:
Wait until the display on the operating panel is clear.
STEP 3
Press either the UP ARROW pb or the DOWN ARROW pb to move the lift cage to a deck position.
The lift cage moves with half speed (low noise mode).
OPERATING PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Note: The OK pb is for maintenance purpose only and should not be pressed from a member of the
cabin crew. Furthermore the access to the maintenance menu is code protected.
OPERATIVE INDICATOR
Applicable to: ALL
The OPERATIVE indicator is located on every operating panel of the trolley lift.
The display provides information about the current trolley lift status.
The intermediate latch is in the sidewall of the lift cage. It is used to prevent a single half-size trolley
inside the lift cage from rolling.
CAUTION Always latch the trolley in the lift cage before operating the trolley lift in order to prevent
damage to both the lift cage and the trolley.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. On another operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: Is the green
OPERATIVE indicator ON? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. The OPERATIVE indicator is defective.
Note: A defective OPERATIVE indicator normally should not have an
influence on the trolley lift operation.
Report to the purser, who will:
- inform all cabin crewmembers that the OPERATIVE indicator is
defective for the remainder of the flight
- make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. Go to 8 Go to 8
3. Using the cabin interphone: Call the flight crew.
Ask whether the flight crew
- has access to the Power Distribution Control System (PDCS) page on
the Onboard Information Terminal
- is allowed to perform a reset of the trolley lift power supply.
Does the flight crew answer to both questions with "Yes"? Go to 4 Go to 7
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
4. Ask the flight crew to check on the Onboard Information Terminal on the
Power Distribution Control System (PDCS) page whether the trolley lift
circuit breaker is still activated.
To display the circuit breaker of the FWD trolley lift (= shown as "Trolley
Lift 1 L02"), the flight crew should select:
ATA = 25, Panel = SPDB2 and FIN = 1ML.
To display the circuit breaker of the aft trolley lift (= shown as "Trolley Lift
2 AFT"), the flight crew should select:
ATA = 25, Panel = SPDB6 and FIN = 2ML.
Has the corresponding circuit breaker still the status CLOSED? Go to 5 Go to 6
5. Ask the flight crew to do a reset:
a. They should set the circuit breaker to the status OPEN.
b. After approximately one minute of waiting, they should set the circuit
breaker back to the status CLOSED.
Wait for confirmation. Go to 8 Go to 8
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
6. The circuit breaker has the status OPEN.
If the display on the operating panel shows OVERLOAD, please follow this procedure:
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the lift cage in a deck position (Upper Deck or Main Deck)? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. The load in the lift cage exceeded the absolute limit of the trolley lift.
Note: To see the warning limit, please Refer to Capacity and Load
Limit Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Partially remove the load.
a. Open the outer and the inner door.
b. Remove the extra load.
c. Close the inner and the outer door. Go to 5 Go to 5
4. The load in the lift cage exceeded the warning limit of the trolley lift.
Note: To see the warning limit, please Refer to Capacity and Load
Limit. Go to 5 Go to 5
5. Please Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Final Check and Result END END
If the display on the operating panel shows "STOP UD" or "STOP MD", please follow this
procedure:
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. On the related operating panel (Upper Deck or Main Deck) of the
inoperative trolley lift: Is the STOP pb-sw illuminated? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. Trolley lift movement has been interrupted by pressing the STOP pb-sw.
a. Ask other cabin crewmembers why the STOP pb-sw has been
pressed.
b. Eliminate the cause of the interruption.
c. On the operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift where the
STOP pb-sw is illuminated: Press the STOP pb-sw again. Go to 10 Go to 10
3. On the related operating panel (Upper Deck or Main Deck) of the
inoperative trolley lift:
a. Press the STOP pb-sw.
b. Check whether "STOP UD" or "STOP MD" is still on the display and
keep this in mind.
c. Press the STOP pb-sw again. Go to 4 Go to 4
4. On the related operating panel (Upper Deck or Main Deck) of the
inoperative trolley lift: Does the display show "STOP UD" or "STOP MD"
now? Go to 5 Go to 10
5. On the related operating panel (Upper Deck or Main Deck) of the
inoperative trolley lift: Is the STOP pb-sw illuminated now? Go to 6 Go to 7
6. After you pressed the STOP pb-sw first, did the display show "STOP UD"
or "STOP MD"? Go to 9 Go to 2
7. After you pressed the STOP pb-sw first, did the display show "STOP UD"
or "STOP MD"? Go to 9 Go to 8
8. The light in the STOP pb-sw is defective. The function of the STOP pb-sw
is not affected, the trolley lift can be operated as usual. Go to 10 Go to 10
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
9. The trolley lift is inoperative.
Report to the purser, who will:
- inform all cabin crewmembers that the trolley lift is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight
- make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
10. Please Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Final Check and Result END END
If the display on the operating panel shows "FAULT", please follow this procedure:
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift:
a. Press the STOP pb-sw .
b. Press the STOP pb-sw again. Go to 2 Go to 2
2. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: Is the FAULT
message still on the display? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. The trolley lift is inoperative.
Report to the purser, who will:
- inform all cabin crewmembers that the trolley lift is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight
- make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
4. Please Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Final Check and Result END END
If the display on the operating panel shows "TRAILING" or "JAMMING", please follow this
procedure:
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: Is the JAMMING
message on the display? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: To reverse the
original move of the lift cage press the UP ARROW pb or DOWN
ARROW pb, depending on the original moving direction.
Note: When it is important not to disturb the passengers, such as at
night, select the low noise mode. Refer to How to Move the Lift
Cage Up/Down Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Did the lift cage reach the deck where it started (Upper Deck / Main
Deck)? Go to 7 Go to 6
4. The TRAILING message is on the display.
On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: To continue the
original move of the lift cage press the UP ARROW pb or DOWN
ARROW pb, depending on the original moving direction.
Note: When it is important not to disturb the passengers, such as at
night, select the low noise mode. Refer to How to Move the Lift
Cage Up/Down Go to 5 Go to 5
5. Did the lift cage reach the target deck (Upper Deck / Main Deck)? Go to 7 Go to 1
6. The trolley lift is inoperative.
Report to the purser, who will:
- inform all cabin crewmembers that the trolley lift is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight
- make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
7. Please Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Final Check and Result END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Possible cause: Temperature or voltage out of permitted range.
Wait until the LOW TEMPERATURE or OVERTEMPERATURE or
VOLTAGE DROP message disappears and the OPERATIVE indicator
comes on again.
Note: Check from time to time whether the error message is still on the
display or not. Go to 2 Go to 2
2. Please Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Final Check and Result END END
To find out whether the function recovery was successful, please follow this procedure:
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. On any operating panel of the inoperative trolley lift: Depending on the lift
cage position press the UP ARROW pb or DOWN ARROW pb.
Note: When it is important not to disturb the passengers, such as at
night, select the low noise mode. Refer to How to Move the Lift
Cage Up/Down Go to 2 Go to 2
2. Does the lift cage start moving? Go to 4 Go to 3
3. The trolley lift is inoperative.
Report to the purser, who will
- inform all cabin crewmembers that the trolley lift is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight
- make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
4. The trolley lift is operative.
Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground about the fact that the trolley lift was temporarily inoperative and
how it was recovered. END END
In case of a trolley lift failure the following error messages can appear on the display of all operating
panels.
Note: If the trolley lift does not work properly, refer also to one of these Function Recovery
Procedures:
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - OPERATIVE Indicator Is OFF
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "OVERLOAD"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "STOP"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "FAULT"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "TRAILING" or "JAMMING"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "LOW TEMPERATURE" or
"OVERTEMPERATURE" or "VOLTAGE DROP"
WARNING Do not use the stowage compartments for any abnormal purposes!
Injury to persons is possible.
All stowage compartment doors or drawers have a locking mechanism. The locking mechanism
prevents the door or the bin from inadvertent opening, e.g. caused by flight manoeuvres or by
turbulences.
WARNING Make sure that the doors or the bins of all stowage compartments are closed and
correctly latched during:
- Taxi
- Take off
- Turbulences
- Landing.
Injury caused by moving doors, bins and/or falling items is possible.
Depending on the compartment function, the load limit is specific. It is shown on a placard on the inner
side of each stowage compartment.
Depending on their function and location in the cabin, different types of stowage compartments are
installed:
- Overhead Stowage Compartments (OHSC) with a fixed bin
- Overhead Stowage Compartments (OHSC) with a movable bin
- Coat stowages
Continued on the next page
Typically overhead stowage compartments (OHSC) are installed above the seat rows in the cabin.
They are attached to make overhead stowage compartment rows. At their bottom side, each OHSC
contains oxygen containers and Passenger Service Units (PSUs). Each oxygen container provides the
passengers in the related seat row with oxygen masks. The PSU provides the passengers with:
- Reading lights (Refer to 06-30-10-30-80 Reading Lights — General).
- Lighted signs (Refer to 04-20-20 Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS)).
- Passenger call system (Refer to 05-50-10 General Information on Passenger Call System).
- Loudspeakers.
OHSC Components
OHSC TYPES
Adapted to the cabin configuration, there are different sizes of overhead stowage compartments.
Depending on their position in the cabin, two types of OHSCs are installed:
- Lateral OHSC (above the window seat rows)
- Center OHSC (above the center seat rows).
OHSC ARRANGEMENT
The OHSC can differ from each other in terms of size and bin type for reasons of their position in the
cabin in relation to the cabin configuration. Depending on these customer options different types of
OHSCs can be installed:
- OHSC with a fixed bin (available for small and large compartment sizes),
- OHSC with a movable bin (only available for the small compartment size),
- OHSC with a movable bin and reduced height (only available for the large compartment size).
Additionally, there are different spacers (occasionally usable) and endcaps installed to complete each
OHSC row.
The following overview shows where the different OHSCs are installed in the cabin.
Location of the OHSCs
WARNING After closing the bin check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons.
Typically overhead stowage compartments (OHSC) are installed above the seat rows in the cabin.
They are attached to make overhead stowage compartment rows. At their bottom side, each OHSC
contains oxygen containers and Passenger Service Units (PSUs). Each oxygen container provides the
passengers in the related seat row with oxygen masks. The PSU provides the passengers with:
- Reading lights (Refer to 06-30-10-30-80 Reading Lights — General).
- Lighted signs (Refer to 04-20-20 Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS)).
- Passenger call system (Refer to 05-50-10 General Information on Passenger Call System).
- Loudspeakers.
OHSC Components
OHSC TYPES
Adapted to the cabin configuration, there are different sizes of overhead stowage compartments.
Depending on their position in the cabin, two types of OHSCs are installed:
- Lateral OHSC (above the window seat rows)
- Center OHSC (above the center seat rows).
OHSC ARRANGEMENT
The OHSC can differ from each other in terms of size and bin type for reasons of their position in the
cabin in relation to the cabin configuration. Depending on these customer options different types of
OHSCs can be installed:
- OHSC with a fixed bin (available for small and large compartment sizes),
- OHSC with a movable bin (only available for the small compartment size),
- OHSC with a movable bin and reduced height (only available for the large compartment size),
- OHSC with a movable bin and an integrated Electronic Handforce Control System (EHCS, only
available for the large compartment size).
Additionally, there are different spacers (occasionally usable) and endcaps installed to complete each
OHSC row.
The following overview shows where the different OHSCs are installed in the cabin.
Location of the OHSCs
Depending on the OHSC bin type, the bin door latch position is different:
- For movable bins in the middle of the door
- For fixed bins centered at the bottom edge of the door.
WARNING After closing the bin check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons. In the case of a
OHSC latching or damper device failure: unload, close and identify as inoperative.
WARNING After closing the bin check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons.
WARNING After closing the bin, check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons. In the case of
an OHSC latching or damper device failure: unload, close and identify as
inoperative.
Typically overhead stowage compartments (OHSC) are installed above the seat rows in the cabin.
They are attached to make overhead stowage compartment rows. At their bottom side, each OHSC
contains oxygen containers and Passenger Service Units (PSUs). Each oxygen container provides the
passengers in the related seat row with oxygen masks. The PSU provides the passengers with:
- Reading lights (Refer to 06-30-10-30-80 Reading Lights — General).
- Lighted signs (Refer to 04-20-20 Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS)).
- Passenger call system (Refer to 05-50-10 General Information on Passenger Call System).
- Loudspeakers.
OHSC Components
OHSC TYPES
Adapted to the cabin configuration, there are different sizes of overhead stowage compartments.
Depending on their position in the cabin, two types of OHSCs are installed:
- Lateral OHSC (above the window seat rows)
- Center OHSC (above the center seat rows).
OHSC ARRANGEMENT
The OHSC can differ from each other in terms of size and bin type for reasons of their position in the
cabin in relation to the cabin configuration. Depending on these customer options different types of
OHSCs can be installed:
- OHSC with a fixed bin (available for small and large compartment sizes),
- OHSC with a movable bin (only available for the small compartment size),
- OHSC with a movable bin and reduced height (only available for the large compartment size),
- OHSC with a movable bin and an integrated Electronic Handforce Control System (EHCS, only
available for the large compartment size).
Additionally, there are different spacers (occasionally usable) and endcaps installed to complete each
OHSC row.
The following overview shows where the different OHSCs are installed in the cabin.
Location of the OHSCs
Depending on the OHSC bin type, the bin door latch position is different:
- For movable bins in the middle of the door
- For fixed bins centered at the bottom edge of the door.
WARNING After closing the bin check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons. In the case of a
OHSC latching or damper device failure: unload, close and identify as inoperative.
WARNING After closing the bin check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons.
WARNING After closing the bin, check that the bin door of the OHSC is locked correctly. Stowed
items could fall out of the compartment and cause injury to persons. In the case of
an OHSC latching or damper device failure: unload, close and identify as
inoperative.
OTHER STOWAGES
Applicable to: ALL
In addition to the OHSC which is mainly used for passengers baggage, there are other types of
stowage compartments on board of the aircraft:
- Stowages (S)
- Coat stowages (C)
- Doghouses (D).
These stowage compartments are used for different purposes, e.g. for stowing emergency equipment,
passenger clothes, blankets or pillows etc.
They are normally located near the door/cabin attendant areas and indicated with a placard on the
outside (Refer to 03-10-20 Seating Capacity and Equipment Data).
If aircraft related items are stowed inside these compartments, this is indicated by the placards, e.g.
first aid kit.
Different kind of latches secure the compartment doors against uncontrolled opening and their normal
opening/closing are similar to the other latches installed in the cabin (Refer to 03-90-30-40 Slam Latch
/ Sliding Latch). Special latches, as used for doghouses, are explained by a placard.
When pulling at the bin handle, the movable overhead bin does not open.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Push up the movable overhead bin with one hand to support the weight
and simultaneously pull at the bin handle using the other hand. Does the
movable overhead bin open now? END Go to 2
2. Unlock both emergency release latches (called latch in the following)
using a manual release tool.
Note: Instead of the manual release tool a folded magazine or safety
instructions card can be used alternatively.
a. At the position shown in the graphic:
Insert the manual release tool through the sealing into the gap
between the jammed movable overhead bin and the adjacent
overhead bin. It can be helpful to detach the gap sealing by pulling it
out of the retainer in order to improve the access.
b. Slide the manual release tool slowly down to the latch.
c. Carefully use the manual release tool to shift the pin on the latch to
the unlocked position.
d. When the latch is unlocked, unlock the latch on the opposite side of
the jammed movable overhead bin by repeating the operating steps a
to c.
e. Support the bin with the second hand to avoid rapid opening and
down falling objects.
f. Pull at the bin handle.
Does the movable overhead bin open now? Go to 5 Go to 3
3. Check whether the movable overhead bin is equipped with an Electronic
Handcraft Control System (EHCS). Does the movable overhead bin have
an EHCS? Go to 4 Go to 6
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
4. Release the EHCS cable from the movable overhead bin using the
manual release tool.
Note: Instead of the manual release tool a folded magazine or safety
instructions card can be used alternatively.
a. Insert the manual release tool through the sealing into the gap
between the jammed movable overhead bin and the adjacent
overhead bin. It can be helpful to detach the gap sealing by pulling it
out of the retainer in order to improve the access.
b. Slide the manual release tool slowly up to the emergency release
lever in order to release the EHCS cable.
c. Release the EHCS cable on the opposite side of the jammed movable
overhead bin by repeating the operating steps a and b.
d. Support the bin with the second hand to avoid rapid opening and
down falling objects.
e. Pull at the bin handle.
Does the movable overhead bin open now? Go to 5 Go to 6
5. The movable overhead bin is open. Enter the relevant details of the
performed recovery action into the cabin logbook. END END
6. The movable overhead bin is still locked. Enter the failure into the cabin
logbook. END END
DEFINITION
A galley is an area especially designed for in-flight catering purposes:
- To stow and prepare meals
- To stow and prepare hot or cold drinks
- To hold removable galley items like full-size and/or half-size trolleys and containers/standard units
- To integrate several (electrical) galley items like ovens, beverage makers, freezers, etc.
- To stow catering equipment like cutlery, cups, towels, etc. (e.g. in stowages or containers/standard
units)
- To compact and to stow waste.
Galleys are for cabin crew use only.
LIMITATION
If a galley compartment is capable to take more than one trolley / trash compactor side by side:
In order to secure the trolleys / trash compactors properly inside the compartment and to prevent them
from an unintended release either ALL or NO trolleys / trash compactors must be stowed in the
compartment during takeoff, landing and turbulence.
This limitation is also addressed through a placard installed in the galley.
INTRODUCTION
As the cabin itself is adapted to the needs of the airline, so are the galleys. Their number and location
is linked with one specific cabin layout. The galley monuments can be "stand-alones" or arranged in
groups. If arranged in groups, a pelmet - installed as a ceiling on the top of the galleys - may connect
the galley monuments.
To learn more about the galleys in your specific aircraft and the installations:
- Refer to Galley Location
- Refer to Galley Types
- Refer to Electrical Equipment - General
- Refer to Removable Galley Items
- Refer to Equipment of the Water/Waste Cabin System
GALLEY TYPES
Applicable to: ALL
ELECTRICAL PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The electrical panels are installed in several galleys.
DESCRIPTION
The electrical panels are designed to control the devices in the galley.
Note: The following illustrations are examples. They show two typical layouts of electrical panels.
The layouts and the equipment are different according to the galleys installed. Each galley
insert has its own C/B installed on one of these panels. If necessary, each galley insert
electrical supply can be switched off by pulling the related C/B(s) and/or by using the main
galley power OFF switch(es).
For the location of the galleys: Refer to 03-90-20 Galley Location.
WORK The cabin crew can set the WORK LIGHT sw to the following
LIGHT sw positions:
- BRIGHT
- DIM
- OFF.
MAIN The MAIN POWER sw supplies the galley with electrical power
POWER s (ON) or removes the electrical power from the galley (OFF).
w
Toggle The cabin crew can set the toggle switch to the ON or OFF position
switch for to switch ON or OFF the related device.
devices
Selector The cabin crew can use the selector to control the device. Several
positions are possible (e.g. temperature, selection of items to be
cooled).
GALLEY LOCATION H1
Main Deck
GALLEY FEATURES
1. Supplemental Cooling System
Following galleys are equipped with a supplemental cooling system in order to cool food in the
galleys:
G1U6, G1U7, G3U2, G3U3, G3U4, G3U5, G3U6,
Upper Deck
G3U7
Main Deck G2M1, G2M2, G2M3, G2M4, G4M1, G4M2
GALLEY LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
Main Deck
GALLEY FEATURES
1. Supplemental Cooling System
Following galleys are equipped with a supplemental cooling system in order to cool food in the
galleys:
G1U4, G1U6, G3U2, G3U3, G3U4, G3U5, G3U6,
Upper Deck
G3U7
Main Deck G2M1, G2M4, G2M5, G4M1, G4M2
Refer to Supplemental Cooling System
2. Wet Galleys
For the wet galleys, connection is required to the:
- potable water system
- waste water system
- air extraction system
- cabin ventilation system
- terminal block for galley power supply.
GALLEY LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
GALLEY FEATURES
1. Supplemental Cooling System
Following galleys are equipped with a supplemental cooling system in order to cool food in the
galleys:
G1U6, G1U7,
Upper Deck
G3U2, G3U3, G3U4, G3U5, G3U6, G3U7
G2M1, G2M3, G2M4
Main Deck
G4M1, G4M2
Refer to Supplemental Cooling System
2. Wet Galleys
For the wet galleys, connection is required to the:
- potable water system
- waste water system
- air extraction system
Continued on the next page
GALLEY LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0178-0184, 0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0216, 0225
GALLEY FEATURES
1. Supplemental Cooling System
Following galleys are equipped with a supplemental cooling system in order to cool food in the
galleys:
G1U6, G1U7,
Upper Deck
G3U2, G3U3, G3U4, G3U5, G3U6, G3U7
G2M1, G2M3, G2M4
Main Deck
G4M1, G4M2
Refer to Supplemental Cooling System
2. Wet Galleys
For the wet galleys, connection is required to the:
Continued on the next page
There are some removable galley items for the purpose of stowing and securing catering equipment
and/or galley equipment during taxi, takeoff, landing and turbulence.
For more details:
- Refer to Trolley - Definition
- Refer to Container/Standard Unit - Description
The galleys have the following equipment of the water/waste (cabin) system:
- Water tap Refer to Water Tap
- Water shut-off valve Refer to Water Shut-Off Valve
- Waste water draining Refer to Waste Water Draining
- Galley Waste Disposal Unit (GWDU) (optional).
TROLLEY DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
TROLLEY - DEFINITION
A trolley is a latchable mobile storage and transport unit with a (parking) brake.
Depending on the purpose of the trolley, there are basically these different types:
- Catering trolley
It contains food and beverages only.
Purpose 1: Transport from the catering company (in)to the aircraft.
Purpose 2: Storage in a galley (normally in chilled environment only).
Purpose 3: Meal delivery to the passengers onboard the aircraft.
- Waste trolley
It takes the waste, especially from the mealtime, collected by the cabin crew.
- Shopping trolley (Duty-free/Onboard shop)
Normally it contains amenity products offered to the passengers.
Refer to Trolley - Description.
TROLLEY - DESCRIPTION
There are trolleys with two different sizes:
- full-size trolleys
- half-size trolleys.
Both trolley types differ in length, interior volume and load limit. The load limit of a trolley is linked with
its park position. Therefore the trolley compartments (park positions) have placards that indicates the
load limits
CAUTION Do not overload the trolleys, because this can damage the locking mechanism (danger
of uncontrolled opening), the trolley housing, and/or the galley.
To avoid overloading the trolley, distribute some items to other trolleys.
Overview
TROLLEY OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
2. If necessary turn the trolley around until its brake pedals are on the front side.
3. Carefully insert the trolley into its compartment.
4. Engage the trolley brake.
Refer to How to Operate the Trolley Brake
5. Close the latches/securing devices at the trolley compartment.
CAUTION To correctly secure removable galley items when not in use, close and lock ALL
latches and lock ALL other securing devices installed in the galley. A single
latch/securing device not used causes overload and/or damage to the properly used
latch(es)/securing device(s).
Engaging
Disengaging
OPENING
1. Turn the latch handle to the OPEN position.
2. Swivel out the trolley door using the handle.
L2
Note: The door will remain open, when swiveled out to an angle of 270°.
CLOSING L1
GENERAL
For catering purposes, there are standardized steel boxes. The designation of these steel boxes is
either container or standard unit. A container/standard unit stores, protects and transports meals on
trays and/or beverages in drawers.
L2
Note: Do not use a container for any other than the designated purposes.
Note: There are placards inside the container/standard unit or in front of the galley compartment that
indicate the load limit.
In the aircraft, the container/standard unit is inserted in the corresponding galley compartment. 1/4-turn
retainers on the galley compartment frame prevent the container/standard unit from inadvertently leave
position. A handle eases inserting or removing the container/standard unit.
To remove or to open a container/standard unit Refer to How to Remove/Insert a Container/Standard
Unit.
DESCRIPTION
A container/standard unit has a closed housing with a door on the front side. A door keep the content of
a container/standard unit in place. A latch prevents the door from uncontrolled opening and enables
the cabin crew to easily open or close the door.
To open or to close a container/standard unit Refer to How to Open/Close a Container/Standard Unit.
Note: Container/standard units are removable galley items. After removal, immediately load/unload
the galley item. Then immediately re-insert the galley item into its compartment. Only in its
compartment, the removable galley items are stowed safely.
HOW TO REMOVE A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT
1. Unlock the latch(es) which hold the container/the standard unit in place.
2. Firmly grasp the handle of the container/the standard unit and pull the galley item out of its
compartment.
3. Put down the container/the standard unit.
Note: Use an even surface which is wide enough to accommodate the galley item. Check that the
galley item is placed safely before you open the container/the standard unit.
HOW TO INSERT A CONTAINER/STANDARD UNIT INTO ITS COMPARTMENT
1. Place the container/standard unit in front of its compartment and carefully push it into the
compartment.
2. Lock the latch(es) which hold the container/the standard unit in place.
CAUTION To correctly secure removable galley items when not in use, close and lock ALL
latches and lock ALL other securing devices installed in the galley. A single
latch/securing device not used causes overload and/or damage to the properly used
latch(es)/securing device(s).
LATCHES - GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
CAUTION To correctly secure removable galley items when not in use, close and lock ALL
latches and lock ALL other securing devices installed in the galley. A single
latch/securing device not used causes overload and/or damage to the properly used
latch(es)/securing device(s).
Note: To assist the latches/securing devices on the galley, the trolleys must be blocked
additionally with their brake.
- Latch/secure all galley inserts, doors, drawers and trolley (cart) doors.
WARNING Clamping fingers between a latch and an item is possible. Be careful!
WARNING Unsecured items may cause personal injury or damage to the interior of the aircraft.
Ensure that all items are correctly latched.
Danger of trapping!
Trapping of fingers between the latch and the items is possible. Be careful!
CAUTION Always latch, stow, and secure all doors, drawers, inserts, containers, shelves, cart
doors, stow carts and any other loose items.
Note: Additionally respect the general safety advices and recommendations about the use of
latches.
Refer to Latches - General
OPERATION
How to lock the latches
Turn the applicable 1/4-turn retainer 90° until it locks the item.
INTERMEDIATE LATCH
Applicable to: ALL
WARNING Unsecured items may cause personal injury or damage to the interior of the aircraft.
Ensure that all items are correctly latched.
Danger of trapping!
Trapping of fingers between the latch and the items is possible. Be careful!
CAUTION Always latch, stow, and secure all doors, drawers, inserts, containers, shelves, cart
doors, stow carts and any other loose items.
Note: Additionally respect the general safety advices and recommendations about the use of
latches.
Refer to Latches - General
OPERATION
How to unlock an intermediate latch
The illustration shows an intermediate latch in the locked
position. In this position the latch indicator is green (green
dot).
To unlock, turn the intermediate latch 90° (a 1/4-turn) in any
direction.
The red dot indicates that the intermediate latch is in the
unlocked position.
There are water shutoff valves in the water supply lines. There is one shutoff valve in each one of the
wet galleys.
The water shutoff valve can be set to the ON or OFF position, to open or close the valve.
Closing the water shutoff valve stops the potable water supply to such galley equipment as the boiler,
water tap, steam oven, etc. in case of a leakage between the water shutoff valve and the connected
galley equipment (downstream). This procedure will shut down the water supply of the related wet
galley and not the water supply of the entire aircraft.
Note: If the water leakage is in front of the water shutoff valve (upstream) a shut down of the Potable
Water System (PWS) must be performed. Refer to 06-60-50 How to Shut Down the Water
Supply via the FAP.
CAUTION Switch off all electrical galley equipment connected to the water line after the water
shutoff valve has been closed. This will prevent any electrical equipment from heating
up while empty and will avoid the risk of potential hazards.
Note: The following illustration is an example. The shutoff valve may be located inside a trolley
compartment. To handle the shutoff valve it may be necessary to remove the trolley out of its
compartment.
The normal purpose of the waste water draining system is to discard residual water or liquids.
The waste water from the galleys will be drained from sink to the drain valve.
There is an drain valve in each drain line. This valve prevents cabin air loss through the drain line, due
to the cabin ambient pressure difference.
The drain valve has a flexible membrane that opens by the weight of a water column in the drain line. L2
- Drain valves
Drain Valve
- Drain masts
Refer to Waste Water Draining Operation
GENERAL
Normally the drain valve works automatically.
In case of overflow of the sink, the drain valve can be operated manually.
CAUTION The following items must not be poured into the sink, because they can damage the
waste water draining system:
- Milk
- Cream
- Milk with acidic liquids (e.g. orange juice, apple juice, vinegar, etc.)
- Coffee grounds
- Tea leaves
- Food
WARNING Be careful when handling with hot water. Hot water can cause serious burns.
OPERATION
Pull and release the operating knob of the drain valve.
Note: The operation handle may differ in various galleys.
In some wet galleys is the handle directly located at the drain valve. The drain valve is located
at the rear wall of the trolley compartment. Therefore it may be necessary to remove the trolley
out of its compartment.
The liquid in the drain line will be drained off through the drain mast.
Continued on the next page
After discarding liquids flush the sink occasionally with hot water.
COFFEE MAKER
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The coffee maker is designed to supply freshly brewed coffee or hot water during all phases of normal
flight.
The hot water flows through the coffee in the brew tray and into the coffee pot.
WARNING - Insert only one coffee pillow pack into the brew cup during coffee preparation.
- Do not operate the coffee maker without the coffee pot.
- Ensure that the brew cup is inserted and the brew lever is in down position.
Note: The coffee maker will not operate when the coffee pot is not in position.
Coffee Maker
LAMP TEST
To perform a lamp test, press and hold the LOW WATER/LAMPTEST pb.
All lamps should light up when the LOW WATER/LAMPTEST pb is pressed.
2.
Note: If the LOW WATER light lights up, wait for the tank to be filled before L2
proceeding.
The coffee maker will not operate when the LOW WATER light is
illuminated.
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE COFFEE MAKER L1
8. When the coffee pot is filled charged with hot coffee, the BREW pb extinguishes automatically.
9. Lift the brew lever up.
10.Carefully remove the coffee pot for serving.
11.Carefully remove the coffee pot for serving.
Note: The brew cycle will be interrupted automatically if the water temperature gets too low for
brewing coffee, e.g. when the hot water has been withdrawn from the faucet during the brew
cycle. The brew cycle will automatically continue when the water temperature is high enough
again for brewing coffee.
WARMER PLATE OPERATION
1. Ensure that a filled non insulated coffee pot is inserted in the coffee maker.
2. Secure the coffee pot by lowering the brew lever and the secondary latch.
3.
CAUTION Use the warmer plate operation only with a non insulated
coffee pot.
ESPRESSO MAKER
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The espresso maker is installed in a wet galley and supplied with water from the aircraft water system.
The espresso maker is for preparing espresso, coffee and cappuccino.
A steam mode can be used to produce milk foam for cappuccino coffee, hot chocolate and to heat
water (for tea and other hot drinks).
Note: The following illustration is an example. Depending on the actual ordered coffee maker, the
colors may differ.
Espresso Maker
1. ON/OFF pb
2. READY indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED)
3. Coffee pad
4. Pad holders
5. Handle
6. Cup
7. SMALL CUP pb
8. LARGE CUP pb
9. Steam outlet
10.STEAM pb
11.NO WATER indicator LED
12.FAIL indicator LED
13.RUN TIME/HOURS indicator LED
14.DRAIN pb
HOW TO START THE ESPRESSO MAKER
Note: The following illustrations are examples. Depending on the actual ordered coffee maker, the
colors may differ.
1.
Push the ON/OFF pb. The indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) comes ON.
2.
Ensure that the yellow READY indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) (2) is ON.
2. Place a espresso/coffee pad (3) in one or both pad holders (4), face down, as written on the pads.
3. Push the handle (5) down to the locked position.
CAUTION The espresso maker does not operate with the handle in the upright position. The
handle has to be locked in the down position first.
4. Place the espresso/coffee cup (6) under the pad holder (4).
5.
5. Push the left SMALL CUP pb (7) for a small cup of espresso in the left cup,
or
push the right SMALL CUP pb for a small cup of espresso in the right cup.
Or push the left LARGE CUP pb (8) for a long coffee in the left cup, or
push the right LARGE CUP pb for a long coffee in the right cup.
The Espresso/Coffee Maker will then make the selected size of coffee on the
selected side.
6. When the Espresso/Coffee Maker has finished the brewing cycle, lift the handle, remove the used
coffee pad and insert a new pad.
Repeat the operation for new espresso/coffee.
Make sure that the READY indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) (2) is ON.
2. Place a half full large cup with milk under the steam outlet (9).
Dip the steam outlet spout into the milk until the mark.
WARNING When operating the steam function be careful. Steam can cause serious burns.
3.
With the cup of milk under the steam outlet , push the STEAM pb (10) to start
the steam function.
Keep on frothing the milk until satisfactory foam is created. The steam will
remain ON for approximately two minutes.
Push the STEAM pb (10) again to turn it OFF earlier.
If the steam is not enough, push the STEAM pb (10) again to start another
cycle.
4. To froth the milk properly, apply circular and top to bottom movements. The pump operates
intermittently, which is normal.
5. When the milk is hot and foamed push the STEAM pb (10) to turn OFF the steam function, unless it
has automatically stopped.
6.
Insert a coffee cup (6) under the coffee pad holder (4), place a coffee pad
onto the filter and push the handle (5) down and push the SMALL CUP pb (7).
When the brewing cycle is finished the cappuccino is ready to serve.
Pour the coffee into the frothed milk.
7. Clean the plastic steam outlet (9) immediately after operation, using a damp sponge, and again
operating the STEAM pb (10) to clean it inside.
CAUTION The steam outlet must be replaced with a new outlet after each flight.
Note: - The milk foam can also be prepared in a jug and the foam poured onto a cup of espresso.
- The steam and coffee functions can be used simultaneously and the steam function unlike
the coffee function works with the handle in either up or locked position.
Make sure that the READY indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) (2) is ON.
3. Place the coffee cups (6) in the area under the coffee pod holder (4).
4.
Push the left LARGE CUP pb (8). After a few seconds, the water flows into the
filter cup.
When the water has reached its preset amount it stops automatically.
Repeat the operation for the right LARGE CUP pb.
Push the STEAM pb to start the steam function. Let the steam flow through
the outlet until it automatically stops.
5. When the cycles are finished discard the cups into the sink of the galley.
6.
Push the ON/OFF pb (1). The ON/OFF indicator LED goes OFF.
NO WATER INDICATION
Note: The following illustrations are examples. Depending on the actual ordered coffee maker, the
colors may differ.
If the NO WATER indication Light Emitting Diode (LED) comes ON perform the
following steps:
STEAM OVEN
Applicable to: ALL
OVEN GENERAL
The steam oven heats pre-cooked meals onboard the aircraft using a water injection system and a
pressurized oven cavity.
The steam oven is installed in a galley. It is equipped with a door that opens towards the user.
It is connected to the aircraft electrical and potable water system.
The oven is controlled by an Oven Control Module (OCM), which is part of the galley compartment.
The OCM is used to operate the oven and to provide the user with all kind of information such as error
messages, temperature, progress time etc. The information is displayed on a LCD screen. Refer to
Oven Control Module (OCM)
Steam Oven and Oven Control Module
OCM
Applicable to: ALL
2.
4.
5.
6.
Stand-by Screen
Note: It is not possible to resume the stopped program to restart cooking. A new program or
menu has to be selected from the menu.
HOW TO CHANGE THE COOKING TIME BEFORE RUNNING A STANDARD PROGRAM
Note: The cooking time can only be changed in standard programs. It is not possible to change the
time of pre-defined menus.
1.
2.
3.
2.
MICROWAVE OVEN
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The Microwave Oven is installed in the galley of the aircraft.
A square tray is installed in the oven instead of turn table for smooth operation.
WARNING Do not operate this oven with open door. This can result in harmful exposure to
microwave energy.
WARNING Do not operate the oven if it is damaged. It is particularly important that the oven door
close properly and that there is no damage to the door, hinges and latches, door seals
and sealing surfaces.
CAUTION Some products such as whole eggs and sealed containers - for example closed glass -
explode and should not be heated in this oven. Use this equipment only for its intended
use. Do not use corrosive chemicals in this equipment. This type of oven is specifically
designed to heat, cook, or dry food.
CAUTION Do not use any metal wares. Electrical spark may occur and the microwave oven may
be damaged. The metal wares include aluminum foil and so on.
CAUTION Do not operate the oven empty. The unit will cause hard damage on electrical parts
within and surrounding area.
20 memory banks which can store cooking programs are provided. Information in these memory banks
are not lost due to power interruptions.
11 preset power levels are provided for accurate level-setting (0 % to 100 % at intervals of 10 %).
There is an automatic power shut-down system for safety. This system prevents the oven, if an error
during the running occurs.
Microwave Oven
1. Digital display
2. Touch control pb
3. Main switch
4. Door handle
5. Door latches
6. Oven door with see-through window
7. Door latch handle
CONTROL PANEL
Control Panel
Push the MAIN ON/OFF pb and unlock the door lock lever.
cooking process.
Input by using the touch control pads is allowed only during this 1 min period.
Note that this 1 min period is restarted if any control pad is touched. After this 1 min, all electric
circuits are shut OFF automatically and the control pads become inoperable. To allow again the
input by using the control pads, open and close the door.
2.
Push for example the 0 pb to delete the program lock for program 0.
10.
Note: If the memory program could not be entered, please perform the steps first:
See : How to Cancel the Program Lock .
4.
Note: It is not necessary to push the SELECT POWER pb for 100 % power. If the cooking time is
over the maximum time, the display will show EE9.
Note: It is possible to select different power levels in different stages. For example:
- Stage 1: 5 min at 70 % power level
- Stage 2: 20 min at 30 % power level.
MICROWAVE OVEN
The microwave ovens are installed in galleys. The aircraft electrical system supplies the microwave
ovens.
The microwave oven is controlled by a control panel, that is located on the door of the microwave oven.
The microwave oven has a left hinged door.
MICROWAVE OVEN H3
The microwave oven is designed to heat precooked meals or liquids on board the aircraft. A rotating
glass plate is installed in the microwave oven.
It is possible to heat the meals and the liquids for a maximum time limit of 30 min.
Any time entered higher than 30 min will be reduced to 30 min. L2
Microwave Oven
L1
CONTROL PANEL
The control panel is the interface between the user and the microwave oven.
Control Panel
The cabin crew uses the door latch to open and to close the microwave oven door.
How to Open the Door
1. Turn the secondary latch clockwise to unlock the door.
2. Pull the door latch and open the door.
Note: The light inside the microwave oven turns ON when the door is open.
How to Close the Door
1. Close the door and push the door until the door latch engages with a snap.
2. Turn the secondary latch counterclockwise to lock the door.
When power is applied to the galley, the display backlight of the microwave oven turns fully ON and
"WAVEJET AX" appears for 3 s. After 3 s, "0:00" is displayed.
HOW TO OPERATE THE MICROWAVE OVEN
WARNING Do not use the microwave oven if it is damaged. It is particularly important that the
microwave oven door closes correctly. Defects on the door, hinges, latches, door seals
and sealing surfaces can cause injury and/or damages.
CAUTION The microwave oven must not be operated in the following cases:
- With an open door. This will have harmful impacts due to the microwave oven
energy.
- With the microwave oven empty. The microwave oven will cause damage on
electrical parts within and the surrounding area.
Do not use any metal wares in the microwave oven. Electrical sparks may occur and the
microwave oven can be damaged.
Do not heat products such as whole eggs and sealed containers (e.g. closed glass).
They may explode and must not be heated in this microwave oven.
Do not use corrosive chemicals in this microwave oven. It can cause damage.
1. Push the 1...0 pb to enter a cooking time in minutes and seconds (mm:ss). The numbers will scroll
from the right to the left as they are entered.
2. Push the POWER LEVEL pb several times to select the heating program High, Medium or Low.
3. Push START/STOP pb to start the cooking cycle.
When the cooking cycle is over, the message "FINISHED" is shown in the display and the buzzer
sounds, if enabled.
HOW TO TURN OFF THE MICROWAVE OVEN
The microwave oven turns OFF automatically when it is at idle and no pushbutton is pushed for 60 s.
The display backlight is reduced and "WAVEJET AX" is displayed with reduced brightness.
Note: To activate the microwave oven for heating again, push the START/STOP pb. No other
pushbutton is accepted.
The cabin crew can interrupt the cooking program by the following steps:
1. Open the microwave oven door.
The countdown of the cooking time stops.
2. Close the microwave oven door again and push the START/STOP pb to continue the cooking
program.
The countdown of the cooking time continues.
The cabin crew can enable or disable the buzzer sound. This function only operates at idle.
1. Push the MENU pb. The display shows "Chime/Buzzer".
2. Push
- 0 pb to switch OFF the buzzer sound
- 1 pb to select a short beep
- 2 pb to select a long beep.
The cabin crew can enter and save any cooking time of a maximum of 30 min. This function operates
only at idle.
1. Enter the desired cooking time in minutes and seconds (mm:ss) on the display.
2. Enter the desired power level by pushing the POWER LEVEL pb.
3. Push and hold the PRESET pb until "Stored" is shown in the display and the buzzer sound, if
enabled, sounds.
The PRESET cooking time is now saved for future use.
GENERAL
The refrigerating unit is a vapor cycle system refrigeration unit. It provides air cooling within an integral
insulated cavity.
The refrigerating unit may contain one or more shelves to hold on-board food.
Approximately 31 liters of volume is available for storing food and beverages.
Internal cavity temperature is selectable.
There are three modes selectable:
1. Wine Chiller
2. Refrigerator
3. Freezer
Refrigerating Unit
GENERAL
The operation panel is used to monitor and control the refrigerating unit.
The operating panel comprises of LED lights, a two-line display and push-buttons.
The push-buttons allow the user to switch ON or OFF the refrigerating unit or to select the desired
cooling functions.
Control Panel
1. ON light
2. TEMP WARNING light
3. FAIL light
4. Display
5. MODE pb
Continued on the next page
6. ON / OFF pb
CONTROL AND INDICATION
Illuminates when the refrigerating unit is switched on by pushing
the ON/OFF pb. The unit starts cooling.
1. After turning on, the unit displays the previously selected mode.
2.
3.
The unit displays the mode (e.g. Freezer) and the green ON LED will be
illuminated.
Note: Depending on the customer version, there are different modes selectable.
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER
To switch off the refrigerating unit press the ON / OFF pb to stop the cooling
process. The OFF message is shown on the display, and the green ON LED
extinguishes.
Note: If the unit has a loss of power during the cooling operation, the current temperature selection
will be saved internally. After power has been restored, the unit will automatically begin cooling
at the previously selected mode setting.
Message Meaning
OFF The cooling process has been stopped by pressing the ON /OFF pb.
Pressing the ON /OFF pb again, will resume the cooling process.
AUTO DEFROST During normal operation the refrigerating unit will periodically enter an automatic
defrost to avoid internal ice building. During defrost the displays indicates that
defrost is in progress. After defrost has ended, the display indicates the current
selected mode (WINE CHILLER, REFRIGERATOR, FREEZER).
DOOR NOT - The door latch is not in the LOCK position while cooling is in progress.
LOCKED - The green ON LED remains illuminated while the door is open.
- The door latch must be in the locked position to remove the DOOR NOT
LOCKED indication.
UNIT FAILED An unrecoverable error has occurred. The red FAIL light is illuminated and the
green ON light is extinguished.
TARGET: 4 C Temp Warning Message. If the internal temperature is higher than the
ACTUAL: 7 C temperature of the selected mode, the Temp Warning light illuminates and the
current temperature is displayed along with the selected (target) temperature.
TRASH COMPACTOR
Applicable to: MSN 0098-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
DESCRIPTION
The trash compactor reduces the in-flight waste volume to a minimum. It consists of a fixed part
(compaction unit) and a moveable part (collection trolley). When disconnected the collection trolley is
used for collecting the waste in the cabin. Three small trash bins located inside the collection trolley
store the collected in-flight waste until it will be compacted under very high force. After having finished
a compaction process, it is possible to add more waste into the same trash bin and to start a new
compaction process.
4. Collection trolley
Moveable unit for collecting waste.
5. Pedals of collection trolley brake
Red and green pedal to engage and disengage the collection trolley brake.
Control Panel Components
5. (Optional) CLEAN pushbutton switch under cover marked "Ground Services only"
CAUTION The CLEAN pushbutton switch is not to be operated by the cabin Crew.
Else trash compactor damage is possible.
OPERATION
TAKING THE TRASH COMPACTOR INTO SERVICE
1. Check for galley power.
2. Push the POWER ON pushbutton switch.
For approximately two seconds, the LCD shows the following message:
CYCLES: "XXXXX"
HOURS : "YYYYY"
"XXXXX" represents the total number of compaction processes.
"YYYYY" represents the total flight hours.
The trash compactor is now ready for working.
This is also expressed by the appearing LCD message:
READY TO COMPACT
PRESS BUTTON
OPERATING THE COLLECTION TROLLEY BRAKE
CAUTION Overfilling the collection trolley can cause damage of the compaction unit.
Fire Door
4. If possible move the collection trolley away from the passenger zone.
a. Disengage the collection trolley brake.Refer to Operation, paragraph "Disengaging the
collection trolley brake".
b. Move the collection trolley to the next galley zone.
c. Engage the collection trolley brake.
.
5. Advice another crew member to take a portable fire extinguisher.
6. Protect both hands with fire gloves.
7. Carefully re-open the fire doors.
8. If the fire is still burning extinguish it with the portable fire extinguisher.
INSERTING THE COLLECTION TROLLEY INTO THE TRASH COMPACTOR COMPARTMENT
CAUTION Before inserting the collection trolley into the trash compactor compartment make
sure that
- both fire doors are in vertical position
- the waste in each trash bin Does not exceed the maximum filling level
1. Make sure that the securing latch at the top of the trash compactor compartment is in open
position.
2. Place the collection trolley in front of the trash compactor compartment with the brake pedals at
the front side.
3. Shift the collection trolley into the trash compactor compartment, until the trolley release latch
snaps.
4. Engage the collection trolley brake.Refer to Operation, paragraph "Engaging the collection
trolley brake".
5. Swivel the securing latch at the top of the trash compactor compartment into close position.
TRASH COMPACTOR
Applicable to: ALL
DESCRIPTION
The trash compactor reduces the in-flight waste volume to a minimum. Small trash boxes located
inside the trash compactor store the collected in-flight waste until it is compacted under very high force.
After having finished a compaction process, it is possible to add more waste into the same trash box
and to start a new compaction process. As soon as the trash box is full, the trash compactor shows a
corresponding message on its LC display. Replacing the full trash box by an empty one makes the
trash compactor ready for further compaction processes.
There are two types of trash compactors available: The FS version includes one full size trash box (full
depth of the device). The HS version includes 2 half size trash boxes. When the first box has been
filled it can be pushed to the back compartment inside. Then the second half size trash box can be
inserted.
Trash Compactor Components
WARNING If the trash compactor automatically shuts down, it will go into a "FAIL" state. If this
occurs, shut off the trash compactor immediately.
COMPACTING TRASH
Control Panel
1. Disengage the security latch and open the trash drawer by pulling the drawer handle.
2. Wait for the display message "FEED WASTE" and fill in the waste from the top of the trash
drawer.
3. Close the drawer by pushing the drawer handle and engage the security latch.
4. Wait for the display message "READY TO COMPACT". and press the "COMPACT" key.
Note: During compaction the display shows "COMPACTING...", during running the
progressive status of compaction is displayed by means of dark dots and a percentage
level of available volume.
5. The compacting cycle stops after a time depending on the waste quantity inside the box and the
display shows "COMPACT DONE".
6. After a few seconds the message "READY TO COMPACT" is displayed again and the device is
ready for a new cycle of feeding waste.
STOPPING THE COMPACT CYCLE
To interrupt (or stop) the cycle, push the "COMPACT" key. To restart compaction push the
"COMPACT" key again.
BUN WARMER
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The bun warmer is installed in a galley and is powered by the aircraft electrical system.
The only purpose of the bun warmer is to warm buns.
The bun warmer is a device with a thermostatically controlled heating-element. L2
Bun Warmer
L1
comes on.
Note: The bun warmer has one basic operating mode to warm up the unit to its
firmly adjusted temperature. You can switch the bun warmer ON and OFF
only with the ON pb-sw.
2. The bun warmer operates for 15 minutes and heats up the buns.
3. After 15 minutes the bun warmer switches into the HOLD mode automatically.
Note: In the hold mode the bun warmer operates with reduced power and lower
temperature to keep the buns warm.
2. The bun warmer operates for additional 15 minutes and heats up the buns.
3. After 15 minutes the bun warmer switches back into the HOLD mode again.
2. After use, and after the bun warmer is cooled, wipe it with a clean lint-free cloth.
3. Close the door.
Use the door latch to close the door, until you hear a snap. Make sure that the door
fits correctly in the housing
TOASTER
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
1. The toaster is installed in a galley and is supplied from the aircraft electrical system.
2. The normal purpose of the toaster is to toast pieces of bread.
The toaster allows you to make 2 or 4 pieces of toast at a time.
WARNING Danger of injury!
Use the Toaster only for the designated purpose!
3. The toaster is a self-contained unit, mounted on a sliding shelf. The shelf can be slide forward on
the galley work surface.
Toaster
3. Press the ON/OFF pb-sw (1) to the ON position. The green light comes on.
4. Select either the 2-SLICE (2) or 4-SLICE (3) SELECTOR switch as required.
Note: Either the 2 SLICE indication or the 4 SLICE indication comes on, depending on which
mode is selected.
5. Move the lever (5) to the RAISE position and place the bread in the slots:
- For 2 slices put one in slot 1 and one in slot 2 (the 2 front slots).
- For 4 slices put one in each slot.
CAUTION Fill always a slice of bread into slot 1 and slot 2 if the 2-SLICE mode is selected.
Fill always a slice of bread into all slots if the 4-SLICE mode is selected.
Operating the toaster without any bread in the selected slots can cause
overheating. An overheating thermostat will disconnect the heating elements
from electrical power.
8. Listen for the sound of the attention getter telling you that the toast is ready.
9. Move the lever (5) to the RAISE position and carefully remove the toast.
Note: After use, always press the ON/OFF pb-sw to the OFF position.
Continued on the next page
- Withdraw the crumb tray and empty its content into a waste container.
- Wipe the crumb tray clean with a solution of water and mild detergent.
- Wipe the crumb tray dry with a lint-free cloth.
- Reinstall the crumb tray to the toaster. Make sure that it is correctly inserted.
3. Slide the toaster back into its compartment in the galley by moving the sliding shelf.
4. Secure the sliding shelf and make sure that it is correctly latched.
CAUTION Due to technical issue on the water boiler, the water boiler should be operated as the
following procedure describes.
To operate the water boiler, only comply with the following procedure. This document
replaces all other CCOM documents of the remote water boiler until this documents has
no effectivity.
READY
6. When the water in the tank reaches the set temperature, the
READY indicator comes on in green.
When water is tapped the heater remains ON until operating
temperature has been reached again.
Note: If the water temperature drops below 72 °C (161 °F) the
green READY indicator will extinguish.
SERVICE
POWER ON
Note: A recovery plan for this water boiler is scheduled in Jan 2010.
wiring, the remote water boiler will provide hot water and cold water. In conjunction with an (optional)
mixing valve it will provide a pre-set water temperature to water taps.
Remote Water Boiler
L1
POWER ON
4. Press the POWER ON pb. The POWER ON LED will
be illuminated.
Note: If the water tank is empty, the LOW WATER
indicator lights up for about 30 s. Wait until the
tank fills. The lamp will extinguish when the tank
is filled.
5. When the water in the tank reaches the preset READY
temperature the READY indicator will illuminate in
green.
When water is tapped the heater remains ON until
operating temperature has been reached again
Note: If the water temperature drops below 72 °C
(161 °F) the green READY indicator will
extinguish.
6. If there is a minor failure, the SERVICE light illuminate SERVICE
in yellow (e.g. one heating element fails).
In this stage the Remote Water Boiler can be operated
but the time to prepare hot water will increase.
Note: The SERVICE light remains ON in yellow until
the service is done.
Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
OBTAINING WATER
POWER ON
READY
FOLDING TROLLEY
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0217-0224, 0226-0249
CAUTION Do not overload or sit on the folding trolley. Excessive weight may damage the shelves
or the castors.
Operation Overview
In order to prepare the folding trolley for service, follow the steps below:
1. Fold out the left and right sides of the frame, one after another, until they lock in position.
2. Lift the upper shelf to the horizontal position.
3. Fold down the table shelves to the horizontal position until they rest on the sides of the frame.
4. Slide the extension plates tables outward from under the top shelf panels.
5. Move the folding trolley to a place where it is needed, or where it is not an obstacle for any person.
HOW TO OPERATE THE BRAKE SYSTEM
Two of the trolley castors have integrated brakes. One brake is on the front castor, the other brake is
on the back castor. A swing lever on top of these castors enables the cabin crew to operate the brake
using a foot.
Brake System Overview
CAUTION Do not overload or sit on the folding trolley. Excessive weight may damage the shelves
or the castors.
Operation Overview
Note: The following illustrations are examples. Depending on the actual ordered coffee maker, the
colors may differ.
Espresso Maker
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the water shutoff valve in the OPEN position? Go to 5 Go to 2
2. Set the water shutoff valve to OPEN position.
Refer to Water Shutoff Valve Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Is the NO WATER LED OFF? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The espresso maker is operative. END END
5. The espresso maker is inoperative. Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
Inform the purser. END END
The READY LED remains OFF three minutes after switching ON.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Normally, three minutes after switching ON the espresso maker, the
READY LED comes ON.
1. Is the espresso maker switched ON and is the ON/OFF LED ON? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. Push the ON/OFF pb to switch ON the espresso maker.
Wait for three minutes until the READY LED comes ON.
Is the READY LED ON now? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. The espresso maker is operative. END END
4. The espresso maker is inoperative. Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
Inform the purser. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the espresso maker switched ON and is the ON/OFF LED ON? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. Push the ON/OFF pb to switch ON the espresso maker.
Wait for three minutes until the READY LED comes ON.
Is the coffee function or the steam function selectable now? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. The espresso maker is operative. END END
4. The espresso maker is inoperative. Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
Inform the purser. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the espresso maker switched ON and is the ON/OFF LED ON? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. – Push the ON/OFF pb to switch OFF the espresso maker.
– Push the ON/OFF pb again to switch ON the espresso maker.
Is the FAIL LED OFF now? Go to 4 Go to 5
3. – Push the ON/OFF pb to switch ON the espresso maker.
Is the FAIL LED OFF now? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The espresso maker is operative. END END
5. The espresso maker is inoperative. Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
Inform the purser. END END
Microwave Oven
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the digital display on? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. Is the ON/OFF pb in the ON position? Go to 5 Go to 3
3. Push the ON/OFF pb to ON position. Is the digital display on? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. Is the microwave door properly closed? Go to 9 Go to 7
5. In relevant galley, is the MICROWAVE OVEN C/B tripped?
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
6. Resetting the microwave oven.
CAUTION The cabin crew has to ask the flight crew for
permission before performing a RESET by pulling and
pushing the relevant circuit breaker.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the galley water shutoff valve in the OPEN position? Refer to Water
Shutoff Valve Description. Go to 3 Go to 2
2. Open the galley water shutoff valve.
Wait 30 s until the water boiler is filled with water.
Is the LOW WATER indicator still ON? Go to 6 Go to 5
3. Is the remote water boiler switched ON for less than 30 s? Go to 4 Go to 6
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
4. Wait 30 s until the water boiler is filled with water.
Is the LOW WATER indicator still ON? Go to 6 Go to 5
5. The remote water boiler is operative. END END
6. The remote water boiler is inoperative. Make an entry into the cabin
logbook. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
If one heating element has failed, or one power phase is interrupted, the
SERVICE indicator illuminates in yellow.
The remote water boiler can be operated. The time to prepare hot water
will increase. The SERVICE indicator remains illuminated until the
maintenance service is done.
Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
If there is a major failure in the electronic system, the SERVICE indicator
illuminates in red.
The remote water boiler is shut down and can only be reactivated by
maintenance personnel.
Switch OFF the remote water boiler.
Make an entry into the cabin logbook.
Note: The location of the Drain Release Handle is normally next to the sink in the related wet galley.
Drain Valve
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Clean the sink from obstruction. Does the sink drain after it has been
cleaned? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. To drain the sink pull the drain release handle
Does the sink drain now? Go to 4 Go to 5
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
3. If access is possible: Open the panel under the sink and pull the airstop
valve ring.
Does the sink drain now? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The sink is unblocked. END END
5. The sink is blocked. Make an entry into the cabin logbook. Inform the
purser. When possible, describe the sink as inoperative with a placard. END END
The purpose of this procedure is to close the water shutoff valve inside the galley to stop a permanent
water flow which comes from a (heavy) leakage.
A water leak is detected inside the galley
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Remove the trolley out of its compartment, if necessary.
Close the galley water shutoff valve.
Typical Water Shutoff Valve
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
2. Perform a shut down of the entire Potable Water System (PWS) via the
FAP:
Note: A shut down of the PWS leads to the loss of the complete water
distribution on all decks of the aircraft, including all lavatories
and galleys. In some cases this is the only way to stop a heavy
leakage (e.g. in case of a broken water line).
Typical WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP - All Decks
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
3. Switch off all electrical galley equipment connected to the potable water
line. These galley equipment is inoperative. Enter the failure into the
cabin logbook. END END
LAVATORY LOCATION
There are lavatories on the main and upper deck, assigned to specific areas in different zones.
Optional lavatories can be installed on the lower deck, named Lower Deck Facilities “LDF”.
Refer to Upper Deck.
Refer to Main Deck.
Refer to Typical Lavatory Interior.
Each lavatory has a toilet and washroom function with the related equipment and connections.
They can also have different sizes. L2
TYPICAL INTERIOR
In the standard configuration each lavatory has:
- A toilet bowl with flush function and lamp
- Toilet paper roll holders
- A wash basin with faucet (infrared operated)
- Dispenser for liquid soap, paper towels, tissues, water cups and toilet seat covers
- A drinking fountain (not installed in each lavatory)
- A mirror
- A handrail, installed on the opposite wall of the mirror
- A waste bin with a self-closing flap and an integrated fire extinguisher
- A return-to-seat sign
- A razor socket
- An attendant call-button
- An air supply
- An air extraction
- A passenger oxygen mask
- A Refer to 03-100-30 Lavatory Single blade DOOR
- A Refer to 03-100-30 Lavatory Bi-Folding Door
- A Refer to 03-100-30 Lavatory for Handicapped Passengers
- A coat hook
- A loudspeaker
- A smoke detector
- A baby nursing table (not installed in every lavatory)
- An urinal bowl (not installed in every lavatory)
- Lights (in the ceiling, behind and beneath the mirror).
Lavatory Interior
Lavatory Interior
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
The drinking fountain provides water to the passengers and may be located:
- On the outside wall of a lavatory
- Inside a lavatory.
Note: The following illustration is an example. The design may differ, depending on the cabin layout
and the customer implementation.
Drinking Fountain on the outside wall of a lavatory (Example)
Note: The self-closing flap which is located below the drinking fountain leads to the waste bin of the
lavatory.
BI-FOLDING DOOR
The bi-folding door of each lavatory has on the outside:
- A spring-loaded coverplate hiding the emergency unlocking latch and the flags VACANT or
OCCUPIED,
- an ashtray,
- door lockers in three corners, and
- a metal cover where the door should be pushed for opening.
Equipment on the Outside
The equipment on the inside of the bi-folding door is similar to the components of the single blade door:
- A coat hook,
- a latch with the indications VACANT or OCCUPIED,
Continued on the next page
- an ashtray, and
- a door handle combined with a metal cover plate to close the door.
GENERAL
Each lavatory is equipped with a smoke detector, installed in the lavatory extraction duct (located in the
lavatory ceiling).
Note: Do not use any spray next to the smoke detector to avoid a smoke alert.
DESCRIPTION
The smoke detection system monitors the amount of smoke inside the extracted lavatory air. It has
connections to the CIDS (Smoke Detection Function) and the FWC.
The smoke related cabin warnings are:
- A triple chime, coming from the cabin loudspeakers (repeated every 30 seconds)
- A red flashing indicator light and a steady text (SMOKE LAV X) on all AIP's
- An amber flashing light on the related ACP
- An amber flashing call light, located on the related lavatory wall
- A red indication SMOKE LAV on the FAP, mini FAP and/or the related AAP.
For further information on the smoke detection system and the subsequent CIDS indications please
Refer to 06-70-30 Description of the Smoke Detection System, to get access to the related FAP or mini
FAP pages please Refer to 06-70-20 Position of the Smoke Detection System on the FAP.
OPERATION
If smoke enters into the measuring chamber of the detector, a warning signal is transmitted to the CIDS
and FWC.
The CIDS activates the related indications on the FAP, mini FAP, AAP, AIP and the ACP.
The FWC activates the related indications in the cockpit.
By pushing the LAV SMOKE/RESET pb on the FAP, mini FAP and/or on the related AAP the aural and
visual warning as well as the warning indications on the ACP and AIP are turned off. The indication on
the FAP disappears as soon as the density of smoke drops below the threshold of the respective
smoke detector.
If there is a fire in the waste bin, the fire extinguisher operates automatically.
When the temperature in the waste bin increases to approximately 77 °C (170.6 °F.), the fusible plug
installed in the end of the discharge tube melts and lets the extinguishing agent flow into the waste bin.
Waste-Bin Fire Extinguisher
For more information about the operation: Refer to 03-100-40 How to Prepare a PRM Lavatory
Combining Two Units.
The Flush pb also indicates different flush modes of the toilet- or the urinal system:
1. Steady blue light : The flush cycle is in progress
2. Steady amber light : The toilet- or the urinal system is turned off
3. Flashing blue light : The automatic flush cycle after bowl full condition is in progress
4. Flashing amber light : The maintenance disinfection mode running
CAUTION Do not press the FLUSH pb, if it is flashing amber. Otherwise a toilet and faucet
maintenance operation (e.g. continuous water flowing) is possible.
The baby nursing table is attached to the lavatory wall panel above the toilet unit.
Note: Before using the nursing table make sure that the work area is clean and ready for service.
Putting the nursing table into service:
1. Unlock the latch
2. Lift the latch until the nursing table is unlatched from the stop
3. Use the latch to pull the nursing table down from its position
Continued on the next page
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
To obtain water from the drinking fountain follow the steps below:
1. Place a suitable container below the drinking fountain (e.g. a cup from the dispenser, located next
to the drinking fountain).
2. Push and hold the operating push-button to start the water flow.
3. Release the push-button to stop the water flow.
4. Remove the cup from below the faucet.
Note: The following illustration is an example. The design may differ, depending on the cabin layout
and the customer implementation.
Water Fountain
For more information about the water shut-off valve: Refer to 03-100-40 Manual Water shut-off Valve
The paper cup dispenser of the drinking fountain, located at the outside wall of a lavatory, must be
refilled from inside the lavatory.
Note: Depending on the cabin layout, the following illustrations may be mirror inverted.
MIRROR DOOR OPENING
Mirror Door Opening
WARNING Ensure that the mirror door is closed. A not closed door can cause injuries.
Now the paper cups can be pulled out of the paper cup dispenser.
The water temperature is regulated to 50 °C (122 °F). The outlet temperature at the water heater is L2
between 40 °C (104 °F) and 50 °C (122 °F), depending on flow and water inlet temperature. If the
thermal control has a malfunction, an overheat switch cuts the electrical supply between 72 °C
(161.6 °F) and 82 °C (179.6 °F).
CAUTION Switch off the water heater after the manual water shut-off valve(s) has been closed.
This will prevent the water heater from heating while empty and will avoid the risk of
potential hazards (Refer to 03-100-40 Water Heater).
An additional water shut-off valve can be installed if a lavatory is equipped with a drinking fountain.
With this valve the water supply of the drinking fountain can be stopped.
Drinking Fountain Shut-Off Valve
DOOR OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
3. Check if the center lavatory with the single blade lavatory is vacant.
4. Fully open the single blade door of the vacant lavatory.
5. Lift the cover above the dividing door and push the bolt from the left to the right and hold it in this
position to release the dividing door lock.
6. Turn the latch handle of the dividing door counter clockwise to unlock the door (if it doesn't work
smoothly, rattle at the latch). When the door is disengaged you can release the bolt of the dividing
door lock.
7. Push at the door to fold it. The door will slide to the right in the rail in the ceiling of the lavatory.
8. Push the folding door elements to the right until it has folded completely and is flat to the right
lavatory wall.
9. Secure the door elements in the open position with the stopper located in the upper door guide
channel.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Open the access door below the washstand. Check the control device if it
is ON and the A/C or the D/C indicator is illuminated. If not, put the
ON/OFF sw to the ON position. Is the A/C or D/C indicator illuminated
and the water faucet is operative now? Go to 5 Go to 2
2. Check, if the "Clean" pb of the control device is illuminated. If yes, wait for
60 s until the light goes off. Operate the water faucet. Is water pouring
from the faucet now? Go to 5 Go to 3
3. Check the lavatory water shut-off valve. It is located near to the floor
below the washstand or the bench in the First Class Lavatory. Is the
water shut-off valve closed? END Go to 4
If the water shut-off valve is found closed: Report to purser.
4. Reset the control device. Open the access door below the washstand:
- At the control device , set the switch from the ON to the OFF position.
- Wait 5 s, then set the control device back to the ON position and wait
10 sagain.
- Close the access door.
Operate the water faucet. Is water pouring from the faucet now? Go to 5 Go to 6
5. The water faucet is operative. Report to the purser. END END
6. The water faucet does not operate, or water system failed. Enter the
failure into the cabin logbook. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Open the access door under the washbasin and tap on the thermostat.
Does the water pouring stop? Go to 4 Go to 2
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
2. Reset the control device:
- Set the switch to the OFF position.
- Wait 5 s, switch it ON and wait 10 s again. Does the water pouring
stop? Go to 4 Go to 3
3. Close the lavatory water shut-off valve. It is located near to the floor
below the washstand or the bench in the First Class Lavatory. Tap on the
electronic-mechanical valves, then open the water shutoff valve again.
Does the water pouring stop? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The water faucet is operative now. Periodically, check the faucet. Close
the access door and report to the purser. END END
CAUTION Closing the lavatory water shut-off valve will
deactivate the toilet rinse system. The related lavatory
should be disabled (lavatory deactivation procedure).
5. On the lavatory floor, close the lavatory water shutoff valve and switch off
the control module below the washstand. The purser must enter the
failure in the cabin logbook. END END
WASHBASIN UNBLOCKING
Applicable to: ALL
Airstop
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Check the washbasin plug and remove existing waste. Is the washbasin
emptying now? END Go to 2
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
2. Open the door under the washbasin and pull the Air Stop Valve ring. Is
the washbasin emptying now? END Go to 3
3. The Washbasin is blocked. Report to the purser who must enter the
failure into the cabin logbook. END END
In the case of a lavatory failure there will be an associated FAP message on the WATER/WASTE page
which reports the affected lavatory (LAV XY) in a list box. Additionally, the locations of the affected
lavatories will be displayed in amber characters next to the aircraft symbol, together with the dedicated
lavatory name. The CAUTION button, located in the upper left corner of the screen, also comes on in
amber.
For more information about the possible FAP messages: Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to
the Lavatories
Typical Lavatory INOP Message on the FAP
Note: The lavatory names depend on the CAM programming and their location in the aircraft.
It may be necessary to deactivate a lavatory due to the following reasons:
- The connected waste tank is full: Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory (Waste Tank full)
- There is a leakage in the corresponding lavatory: Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a Lavatory
(Leakage)
- The washbasin or toilet in a lavatory is overflowing or clogged: Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a
Lavatory (Overflowing and/or Clogging)
Continued on the next page
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Select the WATER/WASTE page on the FAP: Is the indicated waste level
of the waste tank(s) “FULL” ? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. If the waste tank(s) is (are) full, deactivate and close all lavatories
corresponding to the relevant tank(s). Enter the failure into the cabin
logbook and report to the flight crew. END END
3. In the cabin, check at the failure associated lavatory the real toilet
condition and the indication of the corresponding AIP. Is the relevant toilet
really failed ? END Go to 4
4. If the toilet is found correctly operating, it can be used normally.
Periodically check the toilet function and enter the incident into the cabin
logbook. END END
Note: For other error messages related to the WATER/WASTE system
please
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Vacuum
System
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Galleys
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Lavatories
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Waste
System
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the Potable
Water System
- Refer to 06-60-60 FAP-Messages Related to the ICE
Protection System
For more information about the manual shut-off valve: Refer to 03-100-40 Manual Water shut-off Valve
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Open the relevant access door/panel:
- Close the lavatory water shut-off valve(s)
- Switch off the control module below the washstand. Refer to
03-100-40 Water Heater
- Does the water flow stop? Go to 3 Go to 2
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
2. Perform a shut down of the entire Potable Water System (PWS) via the
FAP:
Note: A shut down of the PWS leads to the loss of the complete water
distribution on all decks of the aircraft, including all lavatories
and galleys. In some cases this is the only way to stop a heavy
leakage (e.g. in case of a broken water line).
Typical WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP - All Decks
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
3. Close the door of the lavatory, lock and tag the door ("Out of Order"). The
lavatory is inoperative. Enter the failure into the cabin logbook. END END
Note: Depending on the airline policy it is possible to use the toilets
without the rinse system if they are rinsed periodically by the
cabin crew, e.g. with a bottle of water.
For more information about the manual shut-off valve: Refer to 03-100-40 Manual Water shut-off Valve
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Push the toilet Flush pb to empty the toilet bowl. Is the toilet bowl
drained? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. Push the toilet Flush pb again. Does the toilet bowl start to overflow again
and again? Go to 3 END
Note: The rinse valve fills the toilet bowl quickly (less than 1 min and a
high level water sensor will send a signal to operate the flush
valve in this case. This action will drain the potable water tank (in
long term) because it will be repeated as many times until the
intervention of a crewmember.
3. Open the relevant access door/panel:
- Close the lavatory water shut-off valve(s)
- Switch off the control device below the washstand. Refer to 03-100-40
Water Heater
- Close the door of the lavatory, lock and tag the door ("Out of Order").
The lavatory is inoperative and the failure must be entered into the
cabin logbook. END END
Note: Depending on airline policy it is possible to use the toilet without
the rinse system, if the drain is not blocked. In this case the
deactivated toilet should be rinsed periodically by the cabin crew,
e.g. with a bottle of water.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Push the toilet Flush pb to empty the toilet bowl. Does the toilet bowl start
to overflow again and again? Go to 2 END
Note: The rinse valve fills the toilet bowl quickly (less than 1 min and a
high level water sensor will send a signal to operate the flush
valve in this case. This action will drain the potable water tank (in
long term) because it will be repeated as many times until the
intervention of a crewmember.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
2. Open the relevant access door/panel:
- Close the lavatory water shut-off valve(s)
- Switch off the control device below the washstand. Refer to 03-100-40
Water Heater
- Close the door of the lavatory, lock and tag the door ("Out of Order").
The lavatory is inoperative and the failure must be entered into the
cabin logbook. END END
Note: Depending on airline policy it is possible to use the toilet without
the rinse system. In this case the deactivated toilet should be
rinsed periodically by the cabin crew, e.g. with a bottle of water.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the toilet bowl drain blocked (waste not drained) ? Go to 2 END
2. Push the toilet Flush pb . Is the bowl drained now? END Go to 3
3. Open the relevant access door/panel:
- Close the lavatory water shut-off valve(s)
- Switch off the control device below the washstand. Refer to 03-100-40
Water Heater
- Close the door of the lavatory, lock and tag the door ("Out of Order").
The lavatory is inoperative and the failure must be entered into the
cabin logbook. END END
For more information about the manual shut-off valve: Refer to 03-100-40 Manual Water shut-off Valve
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. If there is an excessive noise level due to permanent suction, the toilet
flush valve is open and will not close:
- Push the toilet Flush pb and
- throw a blanket or cushion into the toilet bowl.
Open the relevant access door/panel:
- Close the lavatory water shut-off valve(s).
- Switch off the control module below the washstand. Refer to
03-100-40 Water Heater
- Close the door of the lavatory, lock and tag the door ("Out of Order").
The lavatory is inoperative and the failure must be entered into the
cabin logbook. END END
If a single lavatory door is closed and can not be opened anymore (from the inside or outside) the cabin
crew must perform the procedure described below.
Coverplate / Latch and Flag in Emergency Opening
A single lavatory door is closed as well as locked and needs to be opened from the outside.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. If the flag on the lavatory door shows OCCUPIED:
1. Lift the cover plate wit the inscription LAVATORY.
2. Slide the latch to show VACANT on the flag.
3. Turn the door handle.
Can you open the door now? END Go to 2
2. If turning the door handle does not open the door, use a coin to unlock the
door latch:
1. Turn the lock pin with the coin by 90 degrees (left or right) to unlock
the door latch.
2. Pull at the door handle.
Can you open the door now? Go to 3 Go to 4
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
3. The door is open. However, it is likely that the lock will jam again. This
means that the lavatory is inoperative. Deactivate the lavatory:
1. Close and latch the lavatory. The flag on the lavatory door must show
OCCUPIED.
2. Tag the door with an "Out of Order" sign.
3. Make an entry into the cabin logbook. END END
4. The door can not be opened without force.
1. Use force and pull firmly at the door handle. The lock will break and
the lavatory will be inoperative.
2. Deactivate the lavatory. The flag on the lavatory door must show
OCCUPIED.
3. Close and latch the lavatory.
4. Tag the door with an "Out of Order" sign.
5. Make an entry into the cabin logbook. END END
WARNING Be careful when holding the locked bi-folding lavatory door. It could be unlocked from the
inside and fold together, causing injuries.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Use the emergency unlocking procedure:
1. Lift the cover plate LAVATORY above the OCCUPIED flag.
2. Push the unlocking pin from the right to the left until the flag shows
VACANT.
Is it possible to open the lavatory door? END Go to 2
2. Use two of the three door lockers: The lockers in the upper right and the
lower right corner of the bi-folding lavatory door.
1. Turn the safety pins about 90 degrees to unlock the door lockers.
2. Unlock the two door lockers one by one by moving the safety pins up
to release the locks.
3. Turn the bi-folding door about 90 degrees toward you. Then lift up the
bi-folding door to release the damper.
Can the door be opened? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. Deactivate the lavatory in order that nobody is locked in again.
1. Replace the door with all locks:
- First replace the lower corner of the bi-folding door without the
lock.
- Then push the door into its frame and lock all locks.
2. Tag the door with a "Out of Order" sign.
3. Make an entry into the cabin logbook. END END
4. If the door can not be opened, the door has to be removed. For more
information: Refer to 03-100-50-40 Removing a Bi-Folding Lavatory Door END END
WARNING - Do not proceed with the procedure described below if there are turbulences. There is a
danger of injury: The door may fall down and hurt some one or fingers may be clamped.
- To avoid injuries request a second crew member to help with the procedure.
If opening a bi-folding lavatory door when locked does not help, follow the procedure described below. For
information about opening a locked bi-folding lavatory door:Refer to 03-100-50-40 Opening a Bi-Folding
Lavatory Door when Locked
A bi-folding lavatory door is locked and can not be opened from the inside or outside.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. To remove the bi-folding lavatory door:
1. Unlock the upper (1) and lower (2) outside latches of the door, then
unlock the upper inner latch (3).
2. Use one foot to push against the outer lower part of the door. The
upper inner part of the door will come out.
3. Grasp the door at the upper part and hold it. Swivel the door out of its
frame.
WARNING Hold on to the door. It may cause injuries if it falls.
There are two shower rooms provided in the First Class cabin on the Upper deck. These facilities
provide First Class passengers the opportunity to shower and change in comfort during the flight.
When the First Class cabin is at full passenger capacity, the system provides each passenger the
possibility of having a shower for a duration of 5 min.
The shower function is set up by the cabin crew via the Flight Attendant Panel FAP.
SHOWER ROOM MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY IN-FLIGHT
The number of oxygen masks installed in the shower room is three (3). The shower compartment must
not be occupied by more than two persons at any one time during a flight.
For more information about the oxygen masks in the shower room: Refer to 03-110-30 Oxygen Masks
in the Shower Room.
USE OF THE SHOWER ROOMS
The shower room must not be occupied on ground, during taxi, takeoff, landing, turbulence, or any time
when the FASTEN SEAT BELT signs are switched ON.
TIME-OUT WARNING
The cabin crew can set a time-out warning for the shower time on the SHOWER CONTROL page on
the FAP. The time-out warning indicates to the passenger in the shower compartment, that the shower
time will be over soon. When the time-out time is reached the time-out warning stops the water flow in
the shower.
For example, if the TOTAL WATER TIME is set to 5 min, and the cabin crew set a time-out warning of
30 s, the water flow in the shower compartment will stop after 4 min and 30 s.
The water flow can be started again for the remaining shower time.
For more information about how to set a time-out warning: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Set a Time-Out
Warning from the FAP
SHOWER CLEANING MODE
The cabin crew can start a cleaning mode from the FAP. The cleaning mode provides water to enable
the cabin crew to clean the shower compartment after its use.
For more information about how to start the cleaning mode: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start the
Cleaning Mode on the FAP
Two shower rooms are installed in the Upper Deck (UD) forward cabin. One is on the right hand side
and one on left hand side of the forward stairs.
Location of the Shower Rooms
- A towel-rail
- Two toilet paper holders
- A stowage compartment.
SHOWER UNIT
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The shower unit is located right behind the shower room door.
Shower Unit
- A Thermostat Unit
- WATER CONTROL pb-sw
- TIME REMAINING indicator
- Passenger Information Panel
- A Shower Door with a Proximity Switch.
For more information about the shower unit components: Refer to 03-110-30 Shower Unit Components
PASSENGER INFORMATION PANEL
The passenger information panel located inside the shower unit contains the following:
- A PULL OXYGEN MASK OUTSIDE sign
Note: In the case of a depressurization the PULL OXYGEN MASK OUTSIDE sign comes ON.
The oxygen masks are outside the shower unit. The cabin crew should brief the
passengers on the location and use of the oxygen masks, before the passengers use the
shower unit.
- A RETURN TO SEAT sign
- A CABIN CREW CALL pb.
Passenger Information Panel
By default the hand held shower head in the wall supply elbow is fixed at the highest position on the
slide bar and the shower hose is fixed to the shower unit wall by a special fixture. The passenger can
remove the shower head from the wall supply elbow as well as the shower hose from the fixture. The
passenger can also adjust the height of the shower head. Refer to 03-110-40 How to Operate the
Shower
Note: Make sure that the shower head fits tightly into wall supply elbow. It must "click" into the wall
supply elbow in order not to fall out of the support.
SHOWER HOSE AND SHOWER HOSE FIXTURE
By default the shower hose is fixed to the shower unit wall by a special fixture. This is to avoid any
damage to the hose and to make sure no bacteria can grow due to residual water in the shower hose.
TIME REMAINING INDICATOR
When the cabin crew has initiated a shower on the FAP upon passenger request, the lighted TIME
REMAINING indicator in the shower compartment comes on. This indicates to the passenger that the
shower is ready for use.
TIME REMAINING Indicator
Indication Description
1 The full shower time is available for the passenger.
1/2 Half of the original shower time is available.
1/4 A quarter of the original shower time is available.
0 The shower time is over.
THERMOSTAT UNIT
A thermostat unit is installed in each shower unit. The thermostat unit allows the passenger to mix hot
and cold water to the selected temperature.
Continued on the next page
The thermostat unit has a minimum flow rate of 5 l per minute (1.32 US Gal per minute). L2
There are three (3) oxygen masks in the shower room. The oxygen masks are in the overhead panel
above the washbasin.
In case of a depressurization, the oxygen masks will drop into the shower room.
Oxygen Mask Location
Note: The purpose of this illustration is to demonstrate the location of the oxygen masks in the case
of a depressurization.
The shower rooms on the aircraft have heated floor panels. The passenger can adapt the temperature
of the heated floor panels via the Floor Temperature Setting Panel (FTSP)
LOCATION OF THE FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING PANEL
The FTSP is located on the information column.
Information Column with Floor Temperature Setting Panel
The numbers in the middle on the LCD correspond to the following temperatures:
Each shower room on the aircraft each has a hair dryer compartment in the information column.
Hair Dryer Compartment with Start Pushbutton
The cabin crew can connect a hair dryer to a socket in the hair dryer compartment. The socket for the
hair dryer plug is hidden behind a panel.
CAUTION The panel hides the socket and the plug from the passengers. The panel is installed for
safety reasons.
After connecting the hair dryer, the panel must be closed again.
The power supply to the hair dryer is started via a pushbutton in the hair dryer compartment. Pushing
this pushbutton will supply power for 5 min. It is possible to start the power again after the elapsed
5 min.
An additional pushbutton outside the shower room door enables the cabin crew to switch OFF the
power to the hair dryer in an emergency.
If the power was switched OFF via the pushbutton outside the shower room, it can be switched ON L2
again via the pushbutton in the hair dryer compartment. There is no need for a reset when power is
needed again.
There are two manual shut-off valves installed below the lavatory washing table. In shower room on
the right hand side of the aircraft (in flight direction) the shower water shut-off valve is on the right hand
side. In the shower room on the left hand side of the aircraft (in flight direction) the shower shut-off
valve is on the left hand side.
The shut off valve on the respective other side stops the water flow for the faucet and the toilet.
A placard indicates the relevant access door which must be opened before getting access.
Turn the related valve handle to the CLOSED position if it is necessary to stop the water flow. The
different handle positions of the manual shut-off valve(s) are shown on the related placards.
Shower Water Shut-Off Valve
Before a passenger can take a shower, the cabin crew must activate the shower from the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP). Before switching ON the showers at the FAP, the cabin crew has to make sure
that the water system is pressurized.
When a passenger has taken a shower and has left the shower room and the shower has been
cleaned, the cabin crew must deactivate the shower from the FAP.
The cabin crew can control and monitor the shower function by selecting the SHOWER CONTROL
page on the FAP. There is a FAP located at U1L near the shower rooms.
For information about the SHOWER CONTROL page: Refer to 06-180-30 The SHOWER CONTROL
Page.
For information about how to activate a shower from the FAP: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start a
Shower from the FAP.
For information about how to operate the shower: Refer to 03-110-40 How to Operate the Shower.
Shower Unit
The TIME REMAINING indicator indicates to the passenger the remaining shower time. For more
information: Refer to 03-110-30 Shower Unit Components.
For information about the shower control via FAP: Refer to 06-180-20 Position of the SHOWER
CONTROL Page on the FAP.
HOW TO ADJUST THE HEIGHT OF THE SHOWER HEAD
The shower head is adjustable in height.
Continued on the next page
By default the hand held shower head in the wall supply elbow is fixed at the highest position on the
slide bar and the shower hose is fixed to the shower unit wall by a special fixture. The passenger can
remove the shower head from the wall supply elbow as well as the shower hose from the fixture. The
passenger can also adjust the height of the shower head. Refer to 03-110-40 How to Operate the
Shower
To adjust the height of the shower head follow the steps below:
1. Remove the shower head from the wall supply elbow.
2. Turn the knob located on the side of the wall supply elbow to loosen it from the slide bar.
3. Move the wall supply elbow on the slide bar to the required height.
4. Turn the knob to tighten and secure the wall supply elbow in place.
5. Insert the shower head into the wall supply elbow.
Note: Make sure that the shower head fits tightly into wall supply elbow. It must "click" into the
wall supply elbow in order not to fall out of the support.
HOW TO ADJUST THE WATER TEMPERATURE
A thermostat unit is installed in each shower unit. The thermostat allows the passenger to mix hot and
cold water to the selected temperature.
Thermostat and WATER CONTROL Pushbutton Switch
The thermostat unit has a minimum flow rate of 5 liters per minute (1.32 gallons per minute) L2
The passenger can control the water temperature manually by turning the knob with the red and blue
indications. Turning the knob to the left (red indicator) will supply hot water, or to the right (blue
indicator) will supply cold water.
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE WATER FLOW.
When the cabin crew has activated the shower function the time remaining indicator is ON to indicate
that the shower is ready for use.
1. Press the WATER CONTROL pb in the shower unit. The green light comes ON and the water flow
stars in the shower.
Note: It is possible to stop the water flow during a shower without reducing the remaining shower
time.
2. To stop the water flow during a shower session press the WATER CONTROL pb.
The green light goes OFF and the water stops flowing to the shower.
Note: Opening the shower door during a shower session will stop the water flow. The water will
not flow again automatically when the door is closed. To restart the water flow press the
WATER CONTROL pb again.
The water flow stops automatically to indicate the near end of the shower time if a time out warning
was preset.
When a time-out warning is preset, the water flow is available for the remainder of the preselected
time.
3. If the water flow has stopped, check the time remaining indicator. If there is still shower time
remaining the automatic stop was the preset time out warning.
4. To restart the water flow, press the WATER CONTROL pb.
CAUTION THE MIRRORS AND SHOWER DOOR ARE MADE OF ACRYLIC. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED CLEANING MATERIALS.
- DO NOT USE CLEANING AGENTS SUCH AS ACETONE OR EQUIVALENT.
THESE WILL DAMAGE THE SURFACE.
- DO NOT USE ABRASIVE MATERIALS SUCH AS SCOTCH-BRITE PADS OR
EQUIVALENT. THESE WILL DAMAGE THE SURFACE.
Clean the surfaces with a mild soap solution. Use a soft brush or a clean lint free cloth. Use a mild
disinfectant to clean the shower floor. Rinse the soap and disinfectant with water.
It is recommended that the cabin crew connects the hair dryers in the shower compartments prior to
the first customer shower and disconnects the hair dryers after the last customer shower.
To connect the plug of the hair dryer to the hidden socket follow the steps below:
1. Open the hair dryer compartment door in the information column.
2. Open the panel at the top of the hair dryer compartment.
3. Insert the plug of the hair dryer into the socket.
4. Position the cord of the hair dryer that it fits into the cut out in the panel.
5. Close the panel and make sure that it will not open on its own.
CAUTION The panel hides the socket and the plug from the passengers. The panel is installed
for safety reasons.
6. Coil up the cord of the hair dryer and store it together with the hair dryer in the compartment. Ensure
that neither will fall out of the compartment when the compartment door is opened.
7. Close the hair dryer compartment door in the information column.
HOW TO OPEN / CLOSE THE ACCESS DOOR TO THE MANUAL SHUT-OFF VALVE
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
A placard indicates the relevant access door which must be opened before getting access.
HOW TO OPEN THE ACCESS DOOR TO THE MANUAL SHUT-OFF VALVE
To access the shut-off valves follow the steps described below.
1. Push against the upper left corner of the access door. The door will open a little.
2. Grab the door at the opening and open it fully.
HOW TO CLOSE THE ACCESS DOOR TO THE MANUAL SHUT-OFF VALVE
To close the access door push it closed until there is a clicking sound.
The purpose of this procedure is to close the manual water shut-off valve inside the shower compartment
to stop a permanent water flow which comes from a (heavy) leakage of the shower unit.
Heavy Leakage inside the Shower Unit
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is it possible to enter the affected shower compartment (maybe blocked
by a passenger) ? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. Inside the shower compartment, push at the door of the washing table to
open it, and unlatch the inner door to get access to the shut-off valves.
Shower Water Shut-Off Valve
Close the manual shower water shut-off valve. Does the water flow stop ? Go to 5 Go to 3
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Note: If it is not possible to get access to the shower compartment or if
the water flow does not stop after closing the manual shower
water shut-off valve, a shut down of the entire Potable Water
System (PWS) can be performed.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
3. Perform a shut down of the entire PWS via the FAP:
Typical WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP - All Decks
On the WATER SUPPLY control pad, push the SHUT DOWN button.
The color of this button will change from GRAY (shut down not active)
to GREEN (shut down active).
a. Confirm the PWS shut down on the pop-up blue card with the YES
Continued on the next page
button.
b. Depending on the system condition (e.g. water level inside the tank),
UAE A380 03-110-50 P 3/8
CCOM the shut down of the PWS can take up to a few minutes (3-6 min). 10-Apr-17
Note: A shut down of the PWS leads to the loss of the complete water
CABIN LAYOUT
SHOWER ROOMS
Function Recovery Procedures (FRP)
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
4. Once the shower compartment is accessible:
a. Check that there is no water leakage (successful shut down of the
potable water system (PWS).
b. Push at the door of the washing table to open it, and unlatch the inner
door to get access to the shut-off valves.
c. Close the manual shower water shut-off valve.
d. On the FAP, deactivate the PWS shut down to recover the water
supply:
- Select the WATER/WASTE page with the related function button
in the 1st level function selector row.
- On the WATER SUPPLY control pad push the SHUT DOWN
button. The color of this button will change from GREEN (shut
down active) to GRAY (shut down deactivated).
- Depending on the system condition (e.g. water level inside the
tank), the deactivation of the PWS shut down can take up to a few
minutes (1-7 min).
Has the water leakage inside the shower unit stopped?
Note: If the water starts to flow again, a final shut down of the PWS
must be initiated immediately. Go to 5 Go to 3
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
5. On the FAP, select the SHOWER CONTROL page. Use the related
function button in the 2nd level function selector row, and switch OFF the
affected shower unit. The relevant ON/OFF button is on one of the
SHOWER UNIT control pads. When the cabin crew pushes the ON/OFF
button, it will change from GREEN (ON) to GRAY (OFF).
Typical SHOWER CONTROL Page
Close and lock the affected shower compartment and make an entry into
the cabin logbook.
Note: If the water supply is recovered (PWS shut down deactivated)
and only the shower water shut-off valve has been closed, the
compartment can still be used as a lavatory (all other lavatory
functions should be available). END END
The message SHOWER OFF LOW WATER QUANTITY appears on the SHOWER CONTROL page on
the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. At the FAP:
Select the WATER/ WASTE page to check if water pressure is available.
Is water pressure available? Go to 2 Go to 13
2. At the FAP:
Select the SHOWER CONTROL page to check the water quantity.
Is the water quantity sufficient on the WATER QUANTITY control pad?
Note: The WATER QUANTITY control pad indicates the available
amount of available potable water on the aircraft in %. Go to 3 Go to 13
3. At the FAP:
Start the cleaning mode by pushing the CLEAN MODE button for the
corresponding shower unit. Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Go to the affected shower unit and check the time indicator. Is the time
indicator ON and flashing? Go to 5 Go to 13
5. In the shower:
1. Turn the thermostat unit to hot.
2. Push the WATER CONTROL pb to start the water flow.
Is the green light of the WATER CONTROL pb ON? Go to 6 Go to 13
6. Does the water flow? Go to 7 Go to 8
7. Push the WATER CONTROL pb to start the water flow again.
Push the WATER CONTROL pb again if the water does not flow
smoothly.
Note: In the cleaning mode, the water flow can be started up to three
times for a maximum duration of 10 seconds each time. Go to 12 Go to 12
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
8. Check the position of the shower water shut-off valve.
Shower Water Shut-Off Valve
The aircraft has a Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC). The CCRC enables the off-duty cabin crew
to relax or to sleep during the flight.
When occupying the CCRC, the cabin crew action must comply with all the information given on
placards and must respect the relevant operating procedures (Refer to Crew Rest Compartments
Normal Operation).
WARNING Every crewmember, who wants to enter the Crew Rest Compartment has to be trained
for evacuation situations.
This crewmember must be familiar with:
- The evacuation paths
- The operation of the Crew Rest Compartment's doors and emergency exits
- The use of the emergency equipment.
Note: Before the first crewmember enters the Crew Rest Compartment, a crewmember, who is on
duty (e.g. the purser), must be informed that the Crew Rest Compartment is going to be
occupied now.
WARNING To ensure the safety of the Crew Rest Compartment occupants, their number must not
exceed the number of bunks. The number of oxygen masks in the Crew Rest
Compartment is adapted to the number of bunks. Additional occupants would not get an
oxygen mask, which implies a risk of suffocation!
WARNING Do not smoke in the Crew Rest Compartment! Otherwise smoke or fire is possible and
can result in loss of life or injury to all persons in the aircraft.
WARNING Every crewmember, who wants to enter the LDCRC, has to be trained for evacuation
situations.
This crewmember must be familiar with:
- The evacuation paths
- The operation of doors and hatches on the way to the main deck
- The use of the emergency equipment
Note: Before the first crewmember enters the LDCRC, a crewmember, who is on duty (e.g. the
purser), must be informed that the LDCRC is going to be occupied now.
WARNING To ensure the safety of the LDCRC occupants, their number must not exceed the
number of bunks. The number of oxygen masks in the LDCRC is adapted to the number
of bunks. Additional LDCRC occupants would not get an oxygen mask, which implies a
risk of suffocation!
WARNING Do not smoke in the LDCRC! Otherwise smoke or fire is possible and can result in loss
of life or injury to all persons in the aircraft.
The cabin crew can enter or leave the Crew Rest Compartment through the entrance door.
For the location of the entrance door in the cabin: Refer to Crew Rest Compartments - Location
A keypad lock secures the closed entrance door against opening by unauthorized persons.
On the crew rest side, the entrance door can be locked by a dead bolt, e.g. in case of a keypad lock
failure.
Note: If the entrance door is locked by the dead bolt from the crew rest side, the entrance door
cannot be opened via the keypad anymore.
In the figure above, the door unlock lever is shown in the locked position.
1. To make sure that no key has been pressed before entering the access code, clear any previous
inputs.
Note: To clear any previous inputs, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER clockwise.
2. Use the keypad to enter the access code.
Continued on the next page
Note: If the entrance door is closed correctly, it is locked automatically by the keypad lock.
HOW TO LOCK / UNLOCK THE ENTRANCE DOOR USING THE DEAD BOLT
Keypad Lock Panel - Crew Rest Side
In the figure above, the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER is shown in the locked position.
Push the dead bolt slider to the opposite side.
- The entrance door is locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the right side.
- The entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the left side.
For information about how to override the locked entrance door Refer to Keypad Lock and Dead
Bolt Override from the Cabin Side
The cabin crew can enter or leave the Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC) through the entrance L2
door. For entrance door location: Refer to Crew Rest Compartment - Location.
A keypad lock secures the closed entrance door against opening by unauthorized persons. L1
On the crew rest side, the entrance door can be locked by a dead bolt, e.g. in case of a keypad lock
failure.
Note: If the entrance door is locked by the dead bolt from the crew rest side, the entrance door
cannot be opened via the keypad anymore (Refer to Entrance Door - Dead Bolt Indicator).
In the figure above, the door unlock lever is shown in the locked position.
1. To make sure that no key has been pressed before entering the access code, clear any previous
inputs.
Note: To clear any previous inputs, turn the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER clockwise.
2. Use the keypad to enter the access code.
Continued on the next page
Note: If the entrance door is closed correctly, it is locked automatically by the keypad lock.
HOW TO LOCK / UNLOCK THE ENTRANCE DOOR USING THE DEAD BOLT
Keypad Lock Panel - Crew Rest Side
In the figure above, the DOOR UNLOCK LEVER is shown in the locked position.
Push the dead bolt slider to the opposite side.
- The entrance door is locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the right side.
- The entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt when the dead bolt slider is on the left side.
For information about how to override the locked entrance door Refer to Keypad Lock and Dead
Bolt Override from the Cabin Side
1. While holding the entrance hatch in position, turn both 1/4-turn retainers on the sidewall to
unlock the entrance hatch.
2. Carefully guide the entrance hatch entirely downwards.
3. Grasp the entrance hatch handle, lift it and turn it to lock the entrance hatch in closed position.
2. On the FCRC control pad: In the HEATER CONTROL area touch the ON/OFF key once.
The status of the FCRC heater changes to the opposite and is updated accordingly in the
HEATER STATUS display.
How to Set the Temperature in the Crew Rest Compartment
Note: In the following the temperature control of the FCRC is shown as an example.
Operation is possible only via the mini-FAP in the FCRC.
Temperature control in the CCRC is identical, but operation is possible only via the
mini-FAP in the CCRC.
1. On the function selector: Touch the TEMP. key.
The TEMP. key changes its color to green and the CABIN TEMPERATURE page appears on
the mini-FAP screen.
2. On the FCRC control pad: Touch the + or – key to increase or decrease the desired heating
level.
The heating level is updated accordingly in the SELECTED HEATING LEVEL display.
Note: The temperature scale is divided in heating level units (from 1 to 5). The default
heating level is three (3) – the medium level.
HUMIDIFICATION (IF INSTALLED)
For more information about the humidification system Refer to Crew Rest Compartment - Additional
Equipment
HANDSET
The handset enables the internal communication between the occupants of the crew rest compartment
and the cabin crew or the flight crew.
For more information: Refer to Handset Description
INFO SIGN "LEAVE COMPARTMENT"
If the info sign LEAVE COMPARTMENT comes on, all occupants must leave the crew rest
compartment immediately and quickly.
Note: The info sign LEAVE COMPARTMENT comes on in the event of low air flow or a smoke
alarm.
Depending on the aircraft configuration there may come on a symbol instead of the text
"LEAVE COMPARTMENT".
INFO SIGN "FASTEN SEAT BELT"
If the info sign FASTEN SEAT BELT comes on, fasten the lap belt immediately.
LOUDSPEAKER
The loudspeaker transmits:
- Vocal messages sent by a crewmember in the cabin or by the flight crew
- Acoustic warning signals in case of abnormal situations.
(3) Handset
MINI FAP
The mini FAP enables the occupants of the Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC) to control and/or
to monitor the main systems of the CCRC:
- Lights
For more information: Refer to Crew Rest Area Illumination Control via FAP / Mini FAP or Refer to
How to Control the Crew Rest Area Illumination via FAP / Mini FAP
- Air conditioning / temperature control
For more information: Refer to General Information about Air Conditioning / Temperature Control
- Smoke detection
For more information: Refer to Description of the Smoke Detection System.
POWER OUTLET
This power outlet is installed supplies power to e.g. a shaver or a vacuum cleaner.
HANDSET
The handset enables the internal communication between the occupants of the Cabin Crew Rest
Compartment (CCRC) and the cabin crew or the flight crew.
For more information: Refer to Handset Description.
The Crew Rest Compartment (CRC) has stowage compartments to stow clothing and personal
belongings of the crewmembers. The stowage compartments have latches to keep the doors or
drawers closed. Each stowage compartment has a specific load limit, which is shown on a placard on
the inside.
Note: Do not overload a stowage compartment. Overload can cause a failure of the latch and can
lead to an uncontrolled door or drawer opening. To minimize the risk of injury to the CRC
occupants, stow the surplus items in other stowage compartments.
LOUDSPEAKER
At least one loudspeaker is installed in the crew rest compartment.
The loudspeaker transmits:
- Announcements/messages sent by a crewmember in the cabin or by the flight crew in the cockpit.
- Acoustic warning signals in case of abnormal situations.
LCD SCREEN
An LCD screen is installed in the ceiling at the foot end of each bunk. If a bunk occupant wants to use
the LCD screen, it can be swivelled out manually.
STOOL
The stool is wall-mounted. If a crew rest occupant wants to sit, the stool has to be operated like a
cinema seat.
HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
The humidification system is installed in the FCRC. The FCRC occupants can switch ON or OFF the
humidification via the mini-FAP.
HOW TO SWITCH THE HUMIDIFICATION ON OR OFF
1. On the function selector: Touch the HUMID. key.
The HUMID. key changes its color to green and the HUMIDIFICATION page appears on the
mini-FAP screen.
Humidification
2. On the FCRC control pad: In the HUMID. CONTROL area touch the ON/OFF key once. The
status of the FCRC humidifier changes to the opposite and is updated accordingly in the
HUMIDIFIER STATUS display.
LOUDSPEAKER
At least one loudspeaker is installed in the crew rest compartment.
The loudspeaker transmits:
- Announcements/messages sent by a crewmember in the cabin or by the flight crew in the cockpit.
- Acoustic warning signals in case of abnormal situations.
LCD SCREEN
An LCD screen is installed in the ceiling at the foot end of each bunk. If a bunk occupant wants to use
the LCD screen, it can be swivelled out manually.
STOOL
The stool is wall-mounted. If a crew rest occupant wants to sit, the stool has to be operated like a
cinema seat.
EMERGENCY LIGHT
The emergency light illuminates the area where it is installed.
To get more information Refer to Emergency Lighting - Overview
SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
Basic component of the smoke detection system is the smoke detector. The smoke detector is installed
in the ceiling. It detects smoke in the area where it is installed and gives an alert to the smoke detection
system.
When Smoke is Detected
The smoke detection system:
- Closes the air conditioning isolation valve to stop the air flow to the Lower Deck Crew Rest
Compartment (LDCRC),
- Sets the LDCRC lighting to 100% intensity, to ease the evacuation of the LDCRC occupants,
- Sends a signal to the fire extinguishing system (FES):
The CLOSE HATCHES indication on the FES panel comes on.
- Warns the crewmembers.
For more information about how to proceed in case of a smoke alarm: Refer to Lower Deck Crew Rest
Compartment Smoke/Fire Procedure
HOW THE SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM WARNS THE CREWMEMBERS
In the LDCRC via:
- Loudspeaker:
A single low chime sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. Following the single low chime, a
repetitive triple chime (smoke alarm) sounds every 30 seconds.
- Attendant Indication Panel (AIP):
• The smoke location message comes on.
• The red indicator light flashes.
- Personal Service Unit (PSU) of each bunk:
The LEAVE COMPARTMENT sign comes on.
- Info panel(s) with a LEAVE COMPARTMENT sign:
The LEAVE COMPARTMENT sign comes on.
In the cabin via:
- Loudspeaker:
A repetitive triple chime (smoke alarm) sounds every 30 seconds.
Continued on the next page
agent.
The discharge time is approximately 1 min. L3
Fire extinguishing bottle 2 then slowly discharges, to provide sufficient extinguisher agent L2
concentration.
The discharge time is 240 min. L3
- One FES panel for status indication and activation of the fire extinguishing system, located in the
staircase housing (outside the LDCRC).
FES PANEL
On the FES panel, there are three main components installed:
- The FES sw
FES Switch
Note: The position of these three main components on the FES panel is in the responsibility of
the galley manufacturer, because the staircase housing is part of the galley.
EMERGENCY LIGHT
The emergency light illuminates the area where it is installed.
To get more information Refer to Emergency Lighting - Overview
SMOKE DETECTOR
The smoke detector is installed in the ceiling. It detects smoke in the area where it is installed and
gives an alert to the flight crew in the cockpit and the cabin crew in the cabin.
In case of an emergency situation, quick evacuation of the Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
(LDCRC) occupants could be essential. If the normal evacuation path via the staircase is blocked, e.g.
by a fire, the emergency exit hatch offers a second evacuation path.
Note: Do not open the emergency exit hatch unless there is an emergency situation and the normal
evacuation path via the staircase is blocked.
WARNING Do not block the emergency exit hatch from the cabin side. Otherwise the LDCRC
occupants cannot use the emergency exit hatch if needed for LDCRC evacuation. If the
emergency exit hatch is blocked, serious injury or suffocation to the LDCRC occupants
is possible.
Note: If the LDCRC is occupied, ask passengers standing on the emergency exit hatch for minutes
to move to another place in the cabin.
After all occupants have left the LDCRC, the emergency exit hatch must be closed and locked
immediately.
WARNING Do not leave the emergency exit hatch open, when evacuation of the LDCRC is
finished. An open emergency exit hatch blocks an evacuation path in the cabin and - if
occurring - enables smoke in the LDCRC to contaminate the cabin. A blocked
evacuation path and/or smoke in the cabin can cause serious injury or suffocation to
anyone in the cabin.
c. Stop the initial move and use one hand to hold the hatch cover on its bottom side.
d. Use the second hand to carefully pull out the curtain rail lining while the other hand
simultaneously guides the hatch cover.
e. With the hand on the curtain rail lining: Carefully lower the curtain rail lining and put it aside,
e.g. on the upper bunk, ideally aside from the hatch area.
L2
Note: The insulation package has three layers which are connected one to another via the
seam.
3. If necessary place both feet on the lower bunk to stand in a better position to open the L1
b. In a rather slow but continuous move: Pull the handle downwards along the curved groove to
the end position.
Note: It is important that the handle of the release mechanism has reached the end
position once despite the emergency exit hatch unlocks before. Only with the handle
in the end position the emergency exit hatch slightly pops up and can be removed.
a. Pull the cord which fixes the piece of carpet on the emergency exit hatch until the cord is
entirely removed.
b. Remove the piece of carpet.
2. Lift the emergency exit hatch and put it aside.
L2
Note: The insulation package has three layers which are connected one to another via the
seam.
4. Use a foot to kick the hatch cover away (see figure below). L1
In case of an emergency situation, a quick evacuation of the Cabin Crew Rest Compartment (CCRC)
could be essential. The preferred evacuation path is through the entrance door of the CCRC.
If the way through the entrance door is blocked (e.g. by a fire), there is a second evacuation path
through the wall that separates the CCRC from the Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC).
EVACUATION PATH THROUGH THE WALL
There is an escape hatch between the CCRC and the FCRC leading through the wall.
1. Remove the escape hatch from the wall and put it aside.
a. Pull at both latch covers and put them aside.
Escape Hatch - Overview
b. Turn the D-ring handle of the latches in the direction shown on the placard until the escape
hatch is unlocked.
c. Use the D-ring handles to pull the escape hatch into the CCRC and put the escape hatch aside.
The cabin crew uses these keys to enter the Operator-defined access code.
When the visual indicators are red, the entrance door is locked.
When the visual indicators are green, the entrance door is unlocked.
The door unlock lever is in vertical position: The entrance door is locked.
From the cabin side:
When turned counter-clockwise, the entrance door is unlocked.
From the crew rest side:
When turned in any direction, the entrance door is unlocked.
- When pushed to the right, the entrance door is locked by the dead bolt.
- When pushed to the left, the entrance door is not locked by the dead bolt.
BAR AREA
Applicable to: ALL
Overview
In two trolley compartments, it holds up to four catering trolleys. The trolley compartments doors are
bi-fold. Solenoid latches unlocks the trolley compartment doors electrically. The renouncement of
mechanically-operated latches hinders passengers from opening the trolley compartment doors.
On the sidewall of the bar, there is the bar control panel. It enables the crew to start/stop the water
feature and to open the trolley compartment doors. The bar control panel is covered when not in use.
Note: There are two covers:
- The left cover is installed to cover the circuit breakers only.
- The right cover is installed to cover all other components of the bar control panel.
The Bar Control Panel
WATER FEATURE
HOW TO START THE WATER FEATURE
1. Check whether the water feature is ready for operation:
a. If the display doors are open, remove all items from the display shelves and close the display
doors.
b. Make sure the drip tray is free from debris and has no blockages.
2. Open both covers of the bar control panel.
3. Check that the water level indicator on the bar control panel is at least midway between LOW
and FULL (minimum start level).
If the water level is below the minimum start level: Refer to Bar in First Class (Social Area)
4. Close the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is connected to the power supply of the aircraft.
5. Check whether the PWR indicator is ON.
Note: If the PWR indicator is OFF: Refer to Bar in First Class (Social Area)
6. Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to ON.
7. Check that the water feature operates correctly:
a. Make sure the water flows.
b. Make sure there are no water leaks or water spillage.
Note: If the water feature does not operate correctly: Refer to Bar in First Class (Social Area)
8. Close the covers of the bar control panel.
HOW TO STOP THE WATER FEATURE
1. Open both covers of the bar control panel.
2. Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to OFF.
3. Open the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is disconnected from the power supply of the aircraft.
4. Check that the PWR indicator is OFF.
5. Close the covers of the bar control panel.
TROLLEY COMPARTMENT
HOW TO OPEN A TROLLEY COMPARTMENT DOOR
1. Open both covers of the bar control panel.
2. Close the circuit breaker DOOR CONT.
Both solenoid latches are connected to the actuation circuit.
3. Press the DOOR RELEASE button corresponding to the trolley compartment door to be opened
(left or right).
The solenoid latch of the selected trolley compartment door is released.
Continued on the next page
4. Open the trolley compartment door and move it to the fully open position.
5. Close the covers of the bar control panel.
HOW TO SECURE A TROLLEY IN THE TROLLEY COMPARTMENT
1. On the trolley:
Press down on the green pedal to release the trolley brake.
2. With your hands on the front side of the trolley:
Carefully push the trolley entirely into the trolley compartment.
3. On the trolley:
Press down on the red pedal to apply the trolley brake.
4. Latch the trolley.
Engage all these 1/4-turn latches:
- The primary latch (the long one) on the top side of the trolley compartment
- The secondary latch (the short one) on the top side of the trolley compartment
- The two latches on the sidewall of the trolley compartment.
HOW TO RELEASE A TROLLEY FROM THE TROLLEY COMPARTMENT
The eight LED's beside the ▴ pb and the ▾ pb indicate the current brightness.
HOW TO SWITCH ON THE AIR COOLING UNIT OF THE DISPLAY AND STOWAGE UNIT
1. On the bar control panel, press the ACU ON pb.
2. Check the bar control panel whether the FAULT indicator is OFF.
If the FAULT indicator is ON, Refer to Bar in Onboard Lounge
Note: Depending on the current temperature in the chilled compartment and the trolley
compartments, it is possible that the TEMP WARN indicator is on, too. It should go OFF
when the temperature in the chilled compartment and in the trolley compartments falls
below the warning level.
3. Check the chilled compartment whether there is a cooling effect.
Note: To ensure that beverage and food in the catering trolleys and in the chilled compartment
are properly stowed in cold condition, do regular checks of the TEMP WARN and the
FAULT indicator on the bar control panel. If at least one of them is ON, Refer to Bar in
Onboard Lounge
HOW TO SWITCH OFF THE AIR COOLING UNIT OF THE DISPLAY AND STOWAGE UNIT
On the bar control panel, press the ACU ON pb.
In case the water feature does not operate properly, follow the appropriate of the three following function
recovery procedures.
On the bar control panel: The water level indicator is below the minimum start level.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Carefully pour a very small amount of mineral water into the drip tray and
wait a few minutes until the mineral water reaches the water sump inside
the bar monument.
CAUTION Do not pour too much mineral water into the drip tray.
Otherwise spilling of either the drip tray or the water
sump inside the bar monument is possible. Spilling
water can cause damage to the electrical system of
the bar monument and/or of the aircraft.
On the bar control panel: Though the water feature PWR indicator should be ON, it is OFF.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN tripped? Go to 7 Go to 2
2. Open the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is disconnected from the power supply of the aircraft. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. After approximately one minute, close the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is connected to the power supply of the aircraft. Go to 4 Go to 4
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
4. Is the PWR indicator ON now? END Go to 5
5. Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to ON.
Is the water flowing? Go to 6 Go to 7
6. The PWR indicator is defective. Water feature operation is possible.
Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
7. The water feature has an electrical fault and is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight.
a. Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to OFF.
b. Open the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is disconnected from the power supply of the
aircraft.
c. Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
The water feature does not operate correctly (e.g. water leakage, water spillage or no water flow)
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. On the water feature or in the drip tray or on the bar monument: Is there
water leakage or water spillage? Go to 6 Go to 2
2. On the water feature: No water is flowing? Go to 3 Go to 5
3. On the bar control panel: Is the PWR indicator ON? Go to 4 Go to 7
4. Is the water level indicator at the EMPTY mark? Go to 8 Go to 5
5. The water feature has an unspecified fault and is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight.
a. On the bar control panel: Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to
OFF.
b. Open the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is disconnected from the power supply of the
aircraft.
c. Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
6. The water feature has a fault in the water cycle and is inoperative for the
remainder of the flight.
a. On the bar control panel: Set the water feature ON/OFF pb-sw to
OFF.
b. Open the circuit breaker FOUNTAIN.
The water feature is disconnected from the power supply of the
aircraft.
c. Collect the water until there is no water leakage or water spillage
anymore.
d. Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
7. Though the water feature PWR indicator should be ON, it is OFF.
See the specific Function Recovery Procedure above. END END
8. The water feature has not enough water for operation.
See the specific Function Recovery Procedure above. END END
In the display and stowage unit, there are two main power switches installed:
- The ACU POWER sw:
• In position ON, it connects the ACU to the aircraft's 115 V AC power system.
• In position OFF, it disconnects the ACU from the aircraft's 115 V AC power system.
- The DIMMER BOX POWER sw:
• In position ON, it connects the bar/lounge lighting to the aircraft's 115 V AC power system.
• In position OFF, it disconnects the bar/lounge lighting from the aircraft's 115 V AC power system.
ACU POWER Switch (Left) and DIMMER BOX POWER Switch (Right)
There is a system emergency (e.g. smoke) in either the bar/lounge lighting system or in the bar
cooling system.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the system emergency in the bar cooling system? Go to 2 Go to 3
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
2. Set the ACU POWER sw to the OFF position.
Note: For safety reasons, do not set the ACU POWER sw back to the
ON position again for the remainder of the flight. Go to 4 Go to 4
3. Set the DIMMER BOX POWER sw to the OFF position.
Note: For safety reasons, do not set the DIMMER BOX POWER sw to
the ON position again for the remainder of the flight. Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Inform the purser about the system emergency:
- Which system is affected.
- That the system is OFF.
- Further actions taken as a consequence of the system emergency.
Note: Enter these information into the cabin logbook to inform the
maintenance crew on ground. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. On the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP): Check whether the GALLEY
COOLING page displays the error message COMPLETE SYSTEM
FAILURE / NO COOLING OF: ALL LOCATIONS.
Is this error message displayed on the FAP? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. On the electrical panels of all other switched-ON ACU's: Check whether
each TEMP WARN indicator (TEMP WARNING indicator respectively) is
ON.
Are all TEMP WARN or TEMP WARNING indicators ON? Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Refer to SCS Reset after Complete System Failure END END
4. On the bar control panel: Is the FAULT indicator ON, too?
If yes, read the Function Recovery Procedure "On the bar control panel:
The FAULT indicator is ON" (follows below). END Go to 5
5. Check the chilled compartment and the trolley compartments whether the
doors are entirely closed.
Are all doors entirely closed? Go to 7 Go to 6
6. Close the door which is not entirely closed. Go to 8 Go to 8
7. Relocate food or beverages that can go bad without cooling to other
chilled compartments in the aircraft. Go to 8 Go to 8
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
8. On the bar control panel: Check regularly whether the TEMP WARN
indicator goes OFF.
Is the TEMP WARN indicator still ON? Go to 9 Go to 10
9. Due to unknown reasons the cooling capability of the ACU is not
sufficient. Use the chilled compartment and the trolley compartments only
to stow food and beverages, which need no cooling.
Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
10. The chilled compartment and the trolley compartments are ready for
cooling beverages and food again.
Enter the fact that the TEMP WARN indicator was ON for a certain time
into the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on ground. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. On the bar control panel: Press the ACU ON pb to switch OFF the ACU. Go to 2 Go to 2
2. After approximately 1 min: Restart the bar cooling system.
Refer to Bar in Onboard Lounge Go to 3 Go to 3
3. On the bar control panel: Is the FAULT indicator still ON? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The ACU is inoperative for the remainder of the flight.
- Relocate food or beverages that can go bad without cooling to other
chilled compartments in the aircraft
- Inform the purser about the loss of cooling in the bar in the onboard
lounge
- Make an entry in the cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on
ground. END END
5. The chilled compartment and the trolley compartments are ready for
cooling beverages and food again.
Enter the fact that the FAULT indicator was ON for a certain time into the
cabin logbook to inform the maintenance crew on ground. END END
Following description is valid for the baby bassinets of the INNOVINT 725X-Series.
GENERAL
Baby bassinets provide passengers travelling with babies with a place for their baby to sleep during the
flight. It can be installed on a partition wall, lavatory or galley wall, always in front of the passengers
travelling with the baby. Two quick release pins attach the bassinet to the related wall, inserted into
special holes.
When not in use, the baby bassinet should be folded to the minimum size and stowed.
LIMITATIONS
To ensure a safe flight to the baby obey the following limitations:
- Do not use the baby bassinet during taxi, take-off, turbulences and landing.
- The zipper must be closed while a baby is lying in the bassinet.
- Do not use the baby bassinet for any other purpose than to lay a baby inside.
- Do not exceed a maximum body weight of 11 kg (24 lbs) or an age above 12 month.
Note: An overload will not occur if the baby fits smooth into the baby bassinet (bassinet length:
75 cm).
A baby aged 9 to 12 month has an average length of 74 cm (29 inch) and a weight between
9.2 kg (20 lbs) and 11.4 kg (25 lbs).
PREFLIGHT CHECK
Prior to the installation of the baby bassinet:
- Check that the baby bassinet is not damaged and its textile is not torn.
- Check that the pins and the corresponding holes in the related monument are not defective,
damaged or blocked.
DESCRIPTION
The baby bassinet from INNOVINT (725X-Series) consists of:
Baby Bassinet from INNOVINT
OPERATION
HOW TO INSTALL THE BABY BASSINET
How to insert the Pins
1. Kindly ask the persons in front of the monument where the baby bassinet has to be installed to
leave the seats for the time of installation. This allows staying in front of the monument for the
installation of the baby bassinet.
2. On both sides, simultaneously open and hold the spring loaded flaps (A), and press and hold the
pin release buttons (B).
3. Simultaneously insert the pins in their corresponding holes in the monument and release both
pin release buttons and flaps (C).
Note: Do not insert the pins fully into the corresponding holes.
4. Continue inserting the pins (D) until it clicks (E).
5. Check the safe attachment of the baby bassinet to the monument by pulling back each pin !
1. Kindly ask the persons in front of the baby bassinet to leave the seats for the time of
deinstallation. This allows staying in front of the monument for the deinstallation of the baby
bassinet.
2. On both sides, simultaneously open and hold the spring loaded flaps (A) and press and hold the
pin release buttons (B).
3. Pull the pins out of the corresponding holes from the monument (C) until they are out, then
release both pin release buttons and flaps (D).
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The CIDS automatically performs different system and unit tests, before and during the flight. It detects L2
and indicates possible faults in its components or the connected equipment. Some of these faults can
be reset in flight by the Cabin Crew (CC), if applicable Function Recovery Procedures (FRPs) are
available.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Depending on the function of the CIDS components there are Control Panels and Indication Panels in
the cabin.
Components of the CIDS in the Cabin
L2
L1
Note: Many of the above functions are accompanied by a chime or by chime sequences. The
possible chime types are described here:Refer to 05-10 Sounds, Light Indications, and
Chimes.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Depending on the function of the CIDS components there are Control Panels and Indication Panels in
the cabin.
Components of the CIDS in the Cabin
L2
L1
Note: Many of the above functions are accompanied by a chime or by chime sequences. The
possible chime types are described here:Refer to 05-10 Sounds, Light Indications, and
Chimes.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) provides the following control possibilities:
Integrated Systems of the CIDS
- The header (to indicate the title of each selected system page)
- The display area (to indicate each selected system page)
- The system and function buttons (to control system functions).
2. The sub panel. L1
It is used to activate main functions, that must operate independently from the FAP touch screen. It L2
includes:
- A row of hard keys
- A headphone jack
- A USB-port.
SCREEN 30 sec LOCK Sets the touch screen in a sleep mode for a time period of 30 seconds for
cleaning
EVAC CMD Activates the Evacuation Alert System
EVAC RESET Resets the aural warning of the Evacuation Alert System
SMOKE RESET Resets the aural warning of the Lavatory Smoke System, activates local
visual warnings (ACP, AIP)
DECMP CHIME RESET Resets the aural warning of the Decompression Chime
(if installed )
FAP RESET Initiates a software reset of the integrated PC-Card
PAX SYS (if installed ON (default setting):
)
- Activates the Passenger Entertainment System
- Supplies the IFE system and the seats with electrical power.
OFF:
- Deactivates the Passenger Entertainment System
- All electrical power to the IFE system and the seats is deactivated (IFE
System Emergency Shutdown).
Note: Even only one PAX SYS pb-sw in the OFF position will shut down
the IFE and the seat power.
CAUTION The cabin crew can use the PAX SYS pb-sw to reset all
cabin PAX systems. The PAX SYS pb-sw is an
emergency pushbutton-switch! A regular use of this
pushbutton-switch can result in damage of passenger
system components.
In the case of a frozen FAP, it is possible to reset the related FAP via a pin hole. However, this FAP
reset is used preferably for maintenance purpose.
FAP Rest via the Pin Hole
CIDS DEVIATIONS
There are known software deviations on the FAP pages described below.
These deviations will be removed as soon as a new software update is available.
1. SPORADIC DOUBLE INDICATION OF A MESSAGE ON THE FAP SYSTEM INFO / MISC PAGE
Observation: The message 'LOWER DECK ACCESS DOOR 5 CLOSED' is sporadically displayed
twice on the FAP SYSTEM INFO/MISC page.
Solution: The message is indicated correctly, the second message can be disregarded. There is no
further functional impact to the system.
2. SPORADIC INDICATION OF A MESSAGE ON THE FAP SYSTEM INFO / CIDS INTERN PAGE
Observation: The message 'LIMITED MINI-FAP FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE "Mini-FAP XXX"'
(whereas XXX is the position of the respective installation) may be displayed on the FAP SYSTEM
INFO / CIDS INTERN page.
Solution: The message can be disregarded. There is no further functional impact to the system.
3. FAP / MINI FAP SCREEN SAVER DEACTIVATION (ONLY FOR DISPLAYS WITHOUT AN
ACCESS CODE AFTER SCREEN SAVER)
Observation: Touching the screen of the FAP / mini FAP in order to deactivate the screen saver can
cause an unintended command.
Reason: The previously operated page on the FAP / mini FAP is still active in the background and
an active button from this previously displayed page is being touched. Depending on the CAM
programming, the upcoming page (which appears after the screen saver deactivation) may not
display the unintentionally touched button.
Solutions to prevent an unintended touching of an active button BEFORE leaving the FAP / Mini
FAP to the screen saver:
- Select a page which contains only few command buttons (e.g. 'Seat Settings'), if the previously
operated page will be displayed after the screen saver deactivation by default, or
- Select the CAM assigned "Start page after screen saver deactivation", if this CAM assigned
page will be displayed after the screen saver deactivation by default.
Solution for the screen saver deactivation:
- Touch the top middle part of the screen of the FAP / mini FAP (right below the screen frame)
where there are no buttons.
The navigation on the FAP screen is done by buttons. The FAP screen is divided into several areas:
Header Location: Upper side of the Contains: The CAUT button and the Help button
FAP screen
Deck Selector Location: Left side of the Contains: The ALL, Upper Deck, Main Deck and
FAP screen Lower Deck buttons
Function Button Location: Lower side of the Contains: The Screen Off button, the Function
Row FAP screen Selector, and the Cabin Status button
FAP Page Location: Middle of the FAP Contains: The aircraft symbols, control pads, and list
screen boxes
SYSTEM PAGES
On the Cabin Status page there are 5 system pages. They can be selected by touching the aircraft
symbols. The following system pages are available on the Cabin Status page:
CAUTION HANDLING
The CAUT button always appears in the upper left corner of the touch screen. In case of a caution
message, the CAUT button will become amber and will flash until the related messages have been
checked by the cabin crew.
An information message appears in the heading of the touch screen as long as the related page has L2
not been checked by the cabin crew. The CAUT button goes off if all messages/errors have been
resolved by the cabin crew, either on ground or in flight.
STATUS INDICATION AND PASSWORD PROTECTION L1
The SYSTEM INFO page on the FAP indicates the status of several cabin systems. After selecting the
SYSTEM INFO page, an amber indicator, next to the related button will come on, if there is a fault
message on another page. To display the faults of the different systems, touch the related button on
the SYSTEM INFO page.
Indication: The faults of the following systems are displayed on the SYSTEM INFO page: L2
- CIDS Internals
- Ice Protection
- Power Management.
The password protection prevents from unauthorized use of the screen, the screen is automatically L1
locked after it is switched off. If the screen is switched on by touching the screen or an auto event, the
cabin crew must enter a password. The SMOKE page is the only page that can be displayed without
entering a password.
The following system pages are protected by a password: L2
Screen off function: The SCREEN OFF button is located in the lower left corner of the touch screen.
When the cabin crew touches the SCREEN OFF button or if there is no input for more than 10 minutes,
the touch screen switches off and the screen saver comes on.
The cabin crew can reactivate the touch screen by touching it or by entering the password on the
ENTER ACCESS CODE page in case the SCREEN OFF function is protected. In the case of an auto
event the screen will come on automatically.
The Integrated Cabin Systems are on the FAP CABIN STATUS page. The CABIN STATUS page
displays a Function Selector which is divided into 3 levels, and displays the following function buttons:
Example of Integrated Cabin Systems Menu
The Mini Flight Attendant Panels (Mini FAPs) are installed in the door areas near the cabin crew
stations on both decks of the aircraft to control several functions of the CIDS and of the related cabin
systems. As an option, the mini FAPs can also be installed in some Cabin and Flight Crew
compartments (Refer to Operation of Mini FAPs).
Mini FAP
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
There are also Mini Flight Attendant Panels (Mini FAPs) installed in some Cabin and Flight Crew
compartments
Mini FAP in the Crew Rest Compartment
The Mini-FAP enables the cabin crew to control different cabin systems. The status of several cabin
systems is also indicated on the Mini-FAP. The Mini-FAP is similar to an FAP, but it has fewer
functions.
(Refer to Description of the Mini-FAP)
Layout of the Mini-FAP Screen
The Mini-FAPs can be customized to specific Operator requirements via the Mini-FAP CAM (Cabin L2
- The Display Unit has a functional area: the Header. The header row displays the title of the selected
function system page.
- The Display Area for CIDS functions displays the interactive buttons and functions of the selected
function system page.
- The Extra Display area for an aircraft symbol indicates the areas in which the changes to the
selected system function are performed.
- Function Selector
With the keys in the function selector the user can select the different function system pages
Continued on the next page
- The subpanel contains buttons and some interfaces (e.g. USB outlet). Typical functions are
installed on the subpanel as hard keys or switches.
The Integrated Cabin Systems can be found on the Mini FAP Cabin Status page. The Cabin Status
page displays a Function Selector menu that is divided into 2 levels which reveal the following menus:
Integrated Cabin Systems from Mini FAP Page
The AAPs are installed in different locations in the aircraft. The AAPs enable the cabin crew to control
some of the cabin systems additionally to the FAP or Mini-FAP (Refer to Operation of the AAP).
There are AAPs installed in the galley area.
AAP in the Galley Area
Pushbutton on the AAP Function of the AAP Pushbutton in the Crew Rest Compartment
Push this pushbutton to switch the lights to on/off.
Push this pushbutton to control the lights from the changing area.
The Attendant Indication Panels (AIPs) are located near all cabin crew stations on the different decks
of the aircraft to display CIDS-related messages.
The AIPs provide cabin crew far reaching call functions. Their displays indicate dial and call information L2
from the PA / Interphone system and other system-related information (e.g. Lavatory Smoke
Location/PAX Calls).
Typical AIP
L1
The AIP display has two rows where all messages appear.
There are two indicator lights (pink and green) on the display. The pink light is used for system and
emergency information, the green light is used for communication information.
Typical Location of the AIPs in the Cabin
The Area Call Panels (ACPs) are located in the entrance areas. Some of them are integrated in the
EXIT sign housing.
The ACPs provide a visual indication related to system information (e.g. Lavatory Smoke Location,
PAX Calls, interphone calls).
The ACP has four or five fields that are controlled separately. Each field contains colored LEDs. When
the lights are on they can be seen from the front and the back of the ACP. The fields are individually
activated to indicate the different system information. The lights come on continuously or flash.
Typical ACP with 5 colored LEDs
Note: The different indications (BLUE, AMBER, PINK) are only visible when they are on.
The following table shows the types of information visible on the ACP:
The cabin crew can reset passenger calls from the FAP and from the Mini-FAP via the related reset
commands. The reset commands can be applied for each cabin zone individually.
CHIME INHIBITION
The cabin crew can prevent the activation of passenger call chimes with the help of inhibit commands
from the FAP and from the Mini-FAP. Through related buttons on the FAP or Mini-FAP the chime can
be suppressed generally of per zone.
CALL INHIBITION
It is possible to completely prevent a passenger seat from activating calls. This can be done on the
Seat Setting page of the FAP. All inhibitions are reset when the aircraft changes from the flight phase
to the landing phase.
INITIATING CALLS
Passengers can initiate calls by pressing a passenger call pushbutton. Passenger call pushbuttons are
installed close to each seat, in each lavatory and at each cabin crew station. The calls can be made
either from the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) or from the Passenger Control Unit (PCU) (Refer to PAX
Control Lights), that is part of the IFE system.
There are different signs installed on board the aircraft that indicate security guidelines for the
passengers. Most of these signs are controlled by the Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS) system, some
operate independently of this system.
When the signs are activated or deactivated, an attention chime triggers in the respective cabin area.
The Passenger Lighted Signs system controls the following signs:
- NO SMOKING signs
As a sub-function of the Passenger Lighted Signs it is possible to perform the non-smoker L2
area/aircraft programming.
L1
Refer to Information on Zone Programming
Seat rows, seat columns, cabin zones/areas, stair or even the entire aircraft can be defined as L2
non-smoker sections. The respective signs are switched on by a pre-defined database or via the
on-board programming, regardless of the position of the cockpit switches.
- FASTEN SEAT BELT L1
- EXIT
- RETURN TO SEAT
- RETURN TO CABIN
- LAVATORY OCCUPIED.
Usually, all of these signs come on during taxi, takeoff and landing. L2
The signs are switched off when the aircraft is not in the cruise flight phase (for example to permit
smoking in the related areas), if there are no extreme circumstances, e.g. turbulences.
The control switches for the signs are located in the cockpit, but the signs can also come on
automatically in specific conditions (e.g. Landing Gear up/down).
Independently from the passenger lighted-signs system, each lavatory is equipped with a LAVATORY
OCCUPIED SIGN (LOS). This sign displays the location of the lavatories and indicates if the lavatories
are either occupied (RED light on) or free (GREEN light on).
There are different signs installed on board the aircraft that indicate security guidelines for the
passengers. Most of these signs are controlled by the Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS) system, some
operate independently of this system.
When the signs are activated or deactivated, an attention chime triggers in the respective cabin area.
The Passenger Lighted Signs system controls the following signs:
- NO SMOKING signs
As a sub-function of the Passenger Lighted Signs it is possible to perform the non-smoker L2
area/aircraft programming.
L1
Refer to Information on Zone Programming
Seat rows, seat columns, cabin zones/areas, stair or even the entire aircraft can be defined as L2
non-smoker sections. The respective signs are switched on by a pre-defined database or via the
on-board programming, regardless of the position of the cockpit switches.
- FASTEN SEAT BELT L1
- EXIT (the "running man" symbol shows the correct exit direction)
- RETURN TO SEAT
- RETURN TO CABIN
- LAVATORY OCCUPIED.
Usually, all of these signs come on during taxi, takeoff and landing. L2
The signs are switched off when the aircraft is not in the cruise flight phase (for example to permit
smoking in the related areas), if there are no extreme circumstances, e.g. turbulences.
The control switches for the signs are located in the cockpit, but the signs can also come on
automatically in specific conditions (e.g. Landing Gear up/down).
Independently from the passenger lighted-signs system, each lavatory is equipped with a LAVATORY
OCCUPIED SIGN (LOS). This sign displays the location of the lavatories and indicates if the lavatories
are either occupied (RED light on) or free (GREEN light on).
The control switches for the Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS) in the cockpit have the following command
modes:
- ON
- AUTO
- OFF.
Note: Depending on customer cabin requirements, other signs can be installed in the cabin instead
of the NS Signs (e. g. No Portable Equipment signs).
NS Switch Panel in the Cockpit
If the No Smoking control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the AUTO position, the No L2
Smoking and EXIT signs will come on if one of the following conditions applies:
1. Condition I: Nose landing gear down, locked
2. Condition II: Nose landing gear down, locked or Slat_1 or Slat_2.
Continued on the next page
If the No Smoking control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the OFF position, all No L2
Smoking and EXIT signs will be off. Only the No Smoking signs in pre-programmed NON SMOKER
areas will remain on.
Applicable to: MSN 0105-0249
If the Flight Crew sets the SEAT BELT sw to ON (or AUTO under certain conditions), the FASTEN
SEAT BELT (FSB) signs and the RETURN TO SEAT signs come on in the cabin.
FSB Switch Panel in the Cockpit
If the FSB control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the ON position, the FSB and Return L2
To Seat signs will come on. In addition, a related message will show on the ECAM display.
2. FSB switch in the AUTO position L1
If the FSB control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the AUTO position, the FSB and L2
Return To Seat signs will be active if the following input conditions apply:
1. Condition I: Nose landing gear down, locked or Slat_1 or Slat_2 and oil pressure high
2. Condition II: Nose landing gear down, locked or Slat_1 or Slat_2
3. Condition III: Nose landing gear down locked.
3. FSB switch set to the OFF position. L1
If the FSB control switch on the cockpit overhead panel is in the OFF position, FSB and Return To L2
In case of cabin decompression, all FSB and EXIT signs come on, regardless of the position of the
cockpit switches.
The Return To Seat signs are off.
SIGN FLASH
The SIGN FLASH function is defined in the CAM. L2
After activation of the No Smoking, FSB or Return To Seat signs, the signs flash for a pre-defined time L1
It is possible to install movable class dividers in the cabin. The dividers can have additional NS and
FSB signs. The operation of these signs is the same as for the normal NS and FSB signs.
SIGNS DIMMING L1
The Passenger Lighted Signs (PLS) adapt to the lighting level of the general lighting, to make sure that
the signs are always visible.
Different modes are available to decrease or increase the lighting level of the passenger lighted signs: L2
The lighting level of the PLS decreases or increases in relation to the level of the general lighting.
The online loudspeaker level adjustment function enables to manually adjust the volume of the
loudspeakers and chimes.
Refer to Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment
Loudspeaker
The adjustment is possible within fixed limits. The cabin crew can adjust different groups of L2
loudspeaker individually. The Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment page is access protected.
The loudspeaker groups are:
- Upper deck rooms
- Main deck rooms
- Lower deck rooms
- Upper deck cabin crew areas
- Main deck cabin crew areas
- Lower deck cabin crew areas
- Upper / main deck stair areas
- Main / lower deck stair areas
- Lavatories.
All loudspeakers can be adjusted in groups of:
- Variable upper deck cabin zones
- Variable main deck cabin zones
- Fixed upper deck cabin segments
- Fixed main deck cabin segments.
The Online Level Loudspeaker Adjustment page can only be displayed on one FAP at a time. If this
page is displayed on one FAP in the aircraft, and another crew member tries to start the same page on
another FAP, a warning message will appear on the FAP where the crewmember is trying to see the
page. All changes to the loudspeaker levels are immediately applicable, so that an acoustical check is
possible before the changes are saved. Changes to the loudspeaker levels must be ended pushing
SAVE and then OK. After an unsuccessful change a failure message appears on the FAP.
The Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment page can only be displayed on one FAP at a time.
If no change is done to the loudspeaker levels, the pre-defined loudspeaker levels in the CAM are
applicable.
The Reset button sets the loudspeaker levels back to the pre-defined levels in the CAM.
All changes to the loudspeaker levels are immediately applicable. It is possible to perform an
acoustical check before the changes are saved. Changes to the loudspeaker levels must be ended
with SAVE and the OK buttons.
L2
Note: The Online Loudspeaker Level Adjustment can only be displayed on one FAP in the aircraft at
a time. If a page is being displayed on one FAP, a warning message will appear on the other
FAP, if a crewmember tries to access the same page.
If the user exits the level adjustment page and does not push the SAVE and the OK buttons before, all
changes are cancelled. After an unsuccessful change a failure message shows on the FAP. The
progress of the save procedure shows on the FAP.
The cabin settings of the CIDS is divided conforming the following illustration.
Cabin Settings on the FAP
If a cabin setting is changed, it is not necessary to perform a hardware change of CIDS components. L2
Only the software database must be changed to adapt e. g. the new cabin zoning.
The cabin programming functionality enables the operators to modify the pre-defined aircraft zones.
Several functions of the CIDS operate in relation to different cabin zones. The cabin crew can change
the configuration of these zones via the cabin programming pages on the FAP. (Refer to Access to the
Zone Menu)
The following cabin programming modes are available on ground and in flight (Refer to Cabin
Programming Operation):
- Cabin Zones Programming
- No Smoking Zones Programming
- Non Smoker Aircraft Programming.
(Refer to Defining Zones).
The cabin programming page can only be displayed on one FAP in the aircraft at a time. If the page is
displayed on one FAP in the aircraft and another crew member tries to access the same page on
another FAP, a warning message will show on that FAP.
DEFINING ZONES
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can choose one cabin layout out of a maximum of three pre-defined and three
modifiable cabin layouts, via the FAP page.
Three different programming modes are available via the FAP page. They are accessible on ground
and in flight.
The three programming modes are (Refer to Cabin Programming Operation):
1. Cabin Zones Programming
This mode will change the length of cabin zones.
2. No Smoking Zones Programming
This mode will change the length of no smoking zones.
3. Non Smoker Aircraft Programming
This mode will change the entire aircraft to non smoker aircraft.
Note: The Cabin Programming page can only be displayed on one FAP in the aircraft at a time. If a
page is being displayed on one FAP, a warning message will appear on the other FAP, if a
crewmember tries to access the same page.
The crew must confirm the changes on the programming pages of the FAP with the Save key. If
changes are not confirmed they will be cancelled. The progress of the save procedure will be displayed
on the FAP.
PROGRAMMING MODES
CABIN ZONES PROGRAMMING
The CABIN ZONES PROGRAMMING mode enables the cabin crew to change the length of cabin
zones.
Cabin Programming – Zone Limits
A change of the cabin zone boundaries on the CABIN ZONES PROGRAMMING page will L2
immediately appear on all related buttons and displays of the zone related FAP pages. It is possible
to define eight cabin zones per aircraft deck. The smallest cabin zone has one seat row.
Each lavatory and its related functions are assigned to a number of seat rows. Therefore, the
lavatory is assigned to the cabin zone that the seat row belongs to.
All changes to the cabin zones are stored in the CAM.
NO SMOKING ZONES PROGRAMMING L1
The CABIN ZONES PROGRAMMING mode enables the cabin crew to change the length of the no
smoking zones.
Continued on the next page
The non smoking aircraft key disables previous programming of no smoking zones programming. L2
This programming mode enables the cabin crew to change the aircraft non smoker areas to
nonsmoker aircraft.
The LAYOUT SELECTION functionality enables the operator to select between pre-defined aircraft
layouts. It is possible to choose one of a maximum of three pre-defined and three modifiable cabin
layouts (M-CAM) to be effective for the CIDS software.
The CAM layouts can only be selected when the aircraft is on ground, the CAM data is available and L2
The LAYOUT SELECTION page displays all available layouts with the following information: L2
1. Version number
2. Storage date
3. Information text.
When the operator selects one layout and touches the LOAD button, a progress page will appear on L1
the FAP. If the change is successful, a confirmation message will appear and the new layout will
become active.
Refer to Access to Layout Menu
FAP – Layout Selection – Load Procedure
Push the scroll right icon ▸ from the Function Selector in order to get to the second level page. This is
possible from every page.
Then push the LAYOUT SELECT. button from the Function Selector to get to the LAYOUT
SELECTION page.
Layout Selection Page
- Version number
- Storage date
- Information text.
Layout Selection – Selection Page
L1
The cabin crew can select a layout and then touch the LOAD key.
A progress page will appear on the FAP. If a change is successful, a confirmation message will appear
and the new layout will become active (Refer to Layout Selection Operation).
If a change is not successful, a failure message will appear on the FAP, and the previous layout will
remain active.
The Passenger Address (PA) transmits announcements from the cockpit and each cabin crew station
through all assigned PAX loudspeakers.
The PA level adjustment enables Operators to modify the volume of the announcements/music and of
the chimes in all defined cabin areas independently. Level adjustment is possible in flight and on
ground (Refer to Description of PA Level Adjustment).
Push the scroll right icon ▸ from the Function Selector in order to get to the second level page. This is
possible from every page.
Push the LEVEL ADJUST. button from the Function Selector to get to the LEVEL ADJUSTMENT page.
Level Adjustment – All Pages
ADJUSTING PA LEVEL
Applicable to: ALL
On the PA LEVEL ADJUSTMENT page the cabin crew can change the volume of announcements /
music and chimes in all defined cabin areas separately.
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Page
connected to the Audio Management Unit (AMU) (boomset, microphone, and oxygen mask).
- PA announcements from the cabin handset L1
- Priorities L1
- Source priorities
The PA sources have different priorities. A source with a higher PA priority interrupts a PA L2
announcement from a source with a lower priority. Only the announcement from the source with
the higher priority is heard.
- Functional priorities L1
In addition, the PA functions have different functional priorities. The PA function with the higher L2
functional priority overrides the function with the lower functional priority.
- Resetting selected PA functions L1
If the PA function is initiated by the handset function keys, the function is cancelled after hooking L2
the handset on to the cradle or by pressing the RESET button on the handset.
If the function is initiated by pressing the PTT, releasing the PTT pushbutton will cancel the
function.
- Attention chimes L1
As an option, it is possible that a selected PA function generates a chime for the related L2
loudspeakers.
- PA indications L1
Dial and status information related to PA system functions is displayed on the respective Attendant L2
In case of low cabin pressure or engine on (high oil pressure) the volume of a PA announcement L2
will be increased. If a cabin handset is in use, the volume of the PA announcement in the respective
handset area will decrease to avoid feedback.
For aural annunciations in the cabin, specific tone sequences (e.g. chimes) are heard in the
respective cabin areas via the loudspeakers.
The call annunciation in the cockpit is done by the activation of output commands to the audio
management system of the cockpit.
SAVE CONFIRMATION
In the example above, first class is selected and highlighted in the list box.
Other cabin areas can be selected using the UP/DOWN buttons. L2
A scrollbar, located on the right hand side of the list box, indicates that there are further locations L1
Note: In order to complete the procedure, the save key must be touched. Otherwise, the changes
made to the level adjustment are not taken into account and the system goes back to the
previous settings after exiting the page. To reset the modifications, touch the Default button.
All values will be set to the assigned CAM basic values.
Level Adjustment — Save Confirmation
L1
Touch the OK key to save the changes or CANCEL to return to the VOLUME ADJUSTMENT page.
This function enables maintenance personnel to upload software to specific components of the CIDS
system.
The following systems are supported by software:
1. Directors
2. Flight Attendant Panels (FAPs)
3. Mini-FAPs
4. Decoder-Encoder Units (DEUs)
5. Handsets.
Refer to Refer to Downloading Software.
The software is provided by the FAP/OBRM and can only be loaded when the aircraft is on ground.
The maintenance crew enters the access code for the SOFTWARE LOADING menu.
Software Loading – Access Code
DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE
Applicable to: ALL
The SOFTWARE LOADING menu enables maintenance personnel updating the software of some
CIDS components. The software loading function is a maintenance activity.
Therefore, other CIDS functionalities are not available during the DOWNLOAD/OMS information L2
operation and global uploading operation initiated by the FAP and the DOWNLOAD/OMS.
CIDS Components — Load Section
L1
The respective downloaded software is intermediately stored in the OBRM module and then handled L2
Start Loading
Loading in Process
Loading Completed
The FAP can be changed using the FAP set-up functionality. The maintenance crew can change the
configuration of the FAP. Usually, this page is accessed when the aircraft is on ground. (Refer to
Access to FAP SET-UP Menu)
On the CABIN STATUS page the cabin crew can touch the right arrow key from the function selector in
order to get to the second level page. Then the cabin crew can touch the FAP Set-Up key from the
function selector to open the FAP SET-UP page. (Refer to Change FAP Settings)
FAP Set-up page
The FAP display can be set with the up/down arrow keys.
Switch the touch screen click on/off with the ON/OFF key.
If the system does not receive any data from the active CIDS director, the FAP will display a fault page
(blue card).
Blue Card
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CIDS RESET AFTER CABIN SYSTEM FAILURE(S) IN FLIGHT OR ON GROUND WITH PASSENGERS
ON BOARD
Applicable to: ALL
If a cabin system has failed, this has an impact on the operation of the cabin. In order to recover the cabin
system, the Cabin Crew has to request the Flight Crew to perform a CIDS reset as described below. Cabin
systems are e.g.: Passenger Address (PA), Cabin Communication Systems, Cabin Lighting, or Flight
Attendant Panel functions.
A cabin system has failed. L12
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative. Request the Flight
Crew to perform a reset on the CIDS 1 RESET button.
Note: In order to perform the reset, the Flight Crew pulls the CIDS 1
RESET button.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 1 minute.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP) e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN TEMPERATURE, etc.
Note: In most cases the first reset will be successful.
Are the system pages available? Go to 8 Go to 2
2. The Flight Crew will keep the CIDS 1 RESET button pulled.
Is the system operative? Go to 8 Go to 3
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
3. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative.
Note: In order to perform the reset, the Flight Crew pushes back the
CIDS 1 RESET button.
Note: The CIDS 1 takes into account the default settings. These
default settings lead to:
- Full bright cabin illumination
- The basic CIDS functions (e.g. PA, interphone) are lost for 30
seconds.
- The FAPs and mini FAPs are not available for 5 minutes.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 5 minutes.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP) e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN TEMPERATURE, etc.
Are the system pages available? Go to 8 Go to 4
4. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative. Request the Flight
Crew to perform a reset on the CIDS 2 RESET button.
Note: In order to perform the reset, the Flight Crew pulls the CIDS 2
RESET button.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 1 minute.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP) e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN TEMPERATURE, etc.
Are the system pages available? Go to 8 Go to 5
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
5. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative.
Note: In order to perform the reset, the Flight Crew pushes back the
CIDS 2 RESET button.
Note: The CIDS 2 takes into account the default settings. These
default settings lead to:
- Full bright cabin illumination
- The basic CIDS functions (e.g. PA, interphone) are lost for 30
seconds.
- The FAPs and mini FAPs are not available for 5 minutes.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 5 minutes.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP) e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN TEMPERATURE, etc.
Are the system pages available? Go to 8 Go to 6
6. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative. Request the Flight
Crew to perform a reset on the CIDS 3 RESET button.
Note: In order to perform the reset, the Flight Crew pulls the CIDS 3
RESET button.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 1 minute.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP) e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN TEMPERATURE, etc.
Are the system pages available? Go to 8 Go to 7
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
7. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative.
Note: In order to perform the reset, the Flight Crew pushes back the
CIDS 3 RESET button.
Note: The CIDS 3 takes into account the default settings. These
default settings lead to:
- Full bright cabin illumination
- The basic CIDS functions (e.g. PA, interphone) are lost for 30
seconds.
- The FAPs and mini FAPs are not available for 5 minutes.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 5 minutes.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP) e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN TEMPERATURE, etc.
Are the system pages available? Go to 8 Go to 9
8. The CIDS is operative again.
Enter the failure symptoms and the recovery process into the cabin
logbook. END END
9. The CIDS is inoperative, or partially inoperative.
Report the failure to the flight crew and make an entry into the cabin
logbook. END END
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
If a cabin system has failed, this has an impact on the operation of the cabin. In order to recover the cabin
system, the Cabin Crew has to request the Flight Crew to perform a CIDS reset as described below. Cabin
systems are e.g.: Passenger Address (PA), Cabin Communication Systems, Cabin Lighting, or Flight
Attendant Panel functions.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Inform the Flight Crew that the CIDS is inoperative. Request the Flight
Crew to perform a reset of the CIDS. Wait for instructions from the Flight
Crew.
Note: In order to perform the reset,
1. The Flight Crew pulls the CIDS 3 RESET button, then waits 5
seconds
2. The Flight Crew pulls the CIDS 2 RESET button, then waits 5
seconds
3. The Flight Crew pulls the CIDS 1 RESET button, then waits 5
seconds
In the cockpit: The ECAM will trigger the CAB COM CIDS
1+2+3 FAULT alert. This alert must be disregarded.
In the cabin: On the FAP and on the mini FAP, there is a Blue
Card with the information "No FAP / Mini-FAP Information
Available".
4. The Flight Crew pushes at the SAME time all three buttons,
the CIDS 1 RESET, the CIDS 2 RESET, and the CIDS 3
RESET.
Note: This action leads to CIDS default settings:
- Full bright cabin illumination
- Activation of the Fasten Seat Belts (FSB), and No Smoking
signs
- Temporary unavailability (5 minutes) of PA Interphone,
chimes, FAPs, and mini FAPs.
1. When the Flight Crew has confirmed the reset, wait 5 minutes.
2. Randomly check the system pages on the FAP, e.g. LIGHTS, CABIN
TEMPERATURE, etc.
Are the system pages available? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. The CIDS is operative again.
Enter the failure symptoms and the recovery process into the cabin
logbook. END END
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
3. The CIDS is inoperative, or partially inoperative.
Report the failure to the Flight Crew and make an entry into the cabin
logbook. END END
If any FAP screen is frozen or black follow the procedure described below.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Touch the screen on sensitive places in order to activate the screen
again. Is the FAP screen active and operating now? END Go to 2
2. Go to all FAPs and touch the screens on sensitive places in order to
activate the screens. Are the screens active and unlocked? END Go to 3
3. At any active and operating FAP screen:
Use the active and operating screen for the rest of the flight to control and
monitor the cabin systems.
Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the failure of FAP screen(s). END END
4. All FAPs are inoperative.
Report to the flight crew and perform the CIDS reset procedure. Refer to
04-40 CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s) in Flight or on Ground
with Passengers on Board
Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the failure of FAP screens. END END
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
If any mini FAP screen is frozen or black follow the procedure described below.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Touch the screen on sensitive places in order to activate the screen
again. Is the mini FAP screen active and operating now? Go to 2 END
2. Report to the flight crew and perform the CIDS reset procedure. Refer to
04-40 CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s) in Flight or on Ground
with Passengers on BoardIs the mini FAP active and operating now?
Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the failure of the mini FAP
screens. END END
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
05-20 PA System
05-20-10 General
General Information on the Passenger Address System..................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
05-40-20 Location
Location of the Jacks............................................................................................................................1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Communication Principles
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Communication Principles
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
HANDSET DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
vertical position near the cabin crew stations in the pressurized area of the cabin.
A handset has the following components: L1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Handset
Note: In order to use the handset, push the unlocking mechanism, and then lift the receiver assy
from the support bracket.
The handsets have the following functions: L2
- Select the related functions and establish a communication link with the integrated keyboard. A
RESET key is available. The keys provide a tactile feedback when you push them.
- Select up to 8 functions with the function keyboard. A RESET function is available. The keys give a
tactile feedback when you push them.
- The integrated display shows PA/Interphone dialing and calling information and system related
information. It has a backlight illumination.
- The Push-To-Talk key initiates a DIRECT PA. The PTT key also validates special selected PAs and
establishes also a communication link. It has a backlight illumination and gives a tactile feedback.
- The earphone is used to distribute clear acoustic signals without distortion and without background
noise. When you hook on the handset, the handset is in a standby mode with minimized power
consumption. If the handset is not in its bracket it is connected to the electrical power.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Cockpit Handset
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
HANDSET PHILOSOPHY
Applicable to: ALL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Combined Calls
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PRIO Concept
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PA ON BOTH DECKS
Press the PTT key.
PA on Both Decks
Note: The PA will be distributed on all decks (including the Crew Rest Compartments).
PA ON THE CURRENT DECK
1. Press the PA key
2. Press and hold the PTT key.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Chime
Function Chime Lights on the ACP Chime
Sequence
Passenger Call: Blue
Passenger Light, Steady
Passenger Chime Sequence:
Address Attention A-C-B Passenger Call from
Address A-C-B
Chime Lavatory: Amber Light,
Steady
Emergency Calls
C-B / C-B / Chime Sequence: C-B
Cabin Interphone Conference Calls Pink Light, Flashing
C-B / C-B / C-B
Normal Calls
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The Passenger Address (PA) system is used as a one-way voice communication between the cockpit
crew, the cabin crew and the passengers. The passenger address system distributes the PA related
announcements from the cockpit, the attendant stations, the Pre-recorded Announcements and
Boarding Music (PRAM) and the Video Control Unit (VCU) to all assigned passenger loudspeakers.
The communication is possible over all decks of the aircraft.
Within the PA system the cabin loudspeakers are assigned to the different announcement modes. L2
Audio signals from the IPRAM and other external sources can be distributed via the PA system. The L1
different audio signals are transmitted from the related audio source to the passenger loudspeakers in
the cabin. The PA system provides a number of independent audio channels for distribution of various
PA announcements in different areas (zones/rooms) at the same time.
Different inputs from other aircraft systems control the volume of the PA audio output in order to make
the PA signal easy to understand.
Refer to PA from the Cockpit via Cockpit Handset
Refer to PA from the Cabin via Cabin Handset
Refer to Operation of PA System.
When a crewmember makes a PA via the cabin handset the audio signal is transmitted to the director
which distributes the signal to the loudspeakers. In addition, the signal is transmitted from the director
to the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system.
Refer to PA from the Cockpit via Cockpit Handset
Refer to PA Functional and Source Priorities
Refer to PA Settings.
The priority of a PA depends primarily on the function and secondarily on the source.
3 Resetting If the PA function is initiated by the function keys on the handset, the function is
selected PA cancelled after hooking the handset on to the cradle or by pushing the reset button
functions on the handset. If the function is initiated by pushing the PTT, release of the PTT
cancels the function.
4 Attention chimes There is the possibility that a selected PA function generates a chime for the related
loudspeakers.
5 PA indications Dial and status information related to PA system functions is displayed on the
respective Attendant Indication Panel (AIP).
6 Gain adjustment In case of low cabin pressure or engine on (high oil pressure) the volume of a PA is
increased. The volume is also increased in case of a data bus failure (top line). If a
cabin handset is in use, the volume of the PA in the respective handset area is
decreased to avoid a feedback.
The priority of a PA depends primarily on the function and secondarily on the source.
individually by:
- Zone
- Room
- Cabin crew area
- Lavatory or cabin zone
as defined in the CAM. It is protected by an access code.
The following loudspeaker groups show on the FAP and can be adjusted independently: L1
A passenger address (PA) can be initiated from the cockpit using the cockpit handset.
The audio signal is transmitted from the cockpit handset directly to the director which transmits the
signal to the louspeakers. In addition, the signal is transmitted from the director to the In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE) system.
Refer to PA from the Cockpit via Audio Equipment
Refer to PA Monitoring
Refer to PA from the Cabin via Cabin Handset.
Refer to 02-110-20 CommunicationsTypical Communication Panels Location.
A PA can be initiated from the cockpit using the equipment that is connected to the Audio Management
Unit (AMU) (boomset, microphone and oxygen mask).
The audio signal is transmitted from the audio equipment that is connected to the AMU, via the AMS, to
the director. In addition, the signal is transmitted from the director to the In-Flight Entertainment system
(IFE).
Refer to PA Announcement from the cockpit via the Cockpit Handset
Refer to 02-110-20 CommunicationsTypical Communication Panels Location.
The flight crew can monitor the current PA using the Cockpit Handset. Press the PA key to monitor the
current PA.
The flight crew can monitor the present PA with the highest priority in the cabin via the AMU by turning
the PA reception knob on the RMP.
Refer to PA Announcement from the Cockpit via Audio Equipment.
Turning the PA knob clockwise or counterclockwise controls the volume of the announcement.
Selecting any another function will stop the PA monitoring procedure.
INT, CAB, and PA on the RMP
The Cabin Interphone system provides communication among the Cabin Interphone stations and also
between the Cabin Interphone stations and the cockpit.
Because the communication links are established independently, a certain number of communication
links can exist at the same time. Also, conference modes are possible, where more than two
interphone sources take part in the communication.
The priority depends primarily on the source and secondarily on the function.
1. Source priorities
The interphone sources have different priorities. A source with a higher priority interrupts a link to
an interphone station with a lower priority. A source with a higher priority that selects a function with
a lower priority also interrupts an existing link.
2. Functional priorities
The interphone functions have different priorities. Every function will override a function with a lower
priority. In general, emergency calls have the highest priority. Emergency calls and Priority Captain
calls initiated from lower sources will interrupt existing links initiated from sources with higher
priority.
Note: In certain areas, two adjacent handsets may be connected in parallel.
The cabin crewmembers cannot use these handsets independently.
The handsets operate on a first come - first served basis: If a call is in progress, the first
handset has control over the call. The second handset is able to participate in the call, but it
cannot end this call or start a new call/PA.
The exception is the emergency call. The cabin crewmembers can initiate it from either
handset.
Refer to Calls from the Cockpit via CALLS Panel and Audio Equipment.
Refer to Calls from the Cabin — Emergency.
Refer to Operation of Cabin Interphone System.
EMERGENCY CALL
Applicable to: ALL
In order to make an EMER Call the Cabin Crew must simply push the EMER key on any handset.
Every other Cabin Crew member can pick up a handset and participate in the conversation (similar to a
CONF Call).
Refer to Calls from the Cockpit via CALLS Panel and Audio Equipment
Refer to Transfer/Reset a Call
Refer to Call Indications/Chimes/Priorities.
PRIO CALLS
Applicable to: ALL
The following table shows how to make Priority Calls. The handset must be in standby mode.
ANSWERING/TRANSFERRING/REJECTING CALLS
Applicable to: ALL
During an interphone communication audio signals are transmitted from the cabin handset to the
cockpit equipment. The communication is initiated via the keypad on the cabin handsets.
ANSWERING CALLS
The following table shows how to answer calls.
An established link is also reset when all participating sources have reset the function. Activated calls
are automatically cancelled after a certain time, if no requested handset has accepted the call.
CALL INDICATIONS/CHIMES/PRIORITIES
Applicable to: MSN 0028-0249
INDICATIONS
Visual interphone call annunciations in the cabin are made by indication of respective messages on the
related AIPs. The respective light segments in the ACPs also come on. The cabin crew is also
informed about the status of the communication mode (e. g. call activated, accepted, engaged or
cancelled) via messages which are displayed at each interphone station.
Additional full telephone signaling is provided at the audio output of the affected interphone audio
equipment.
CALL CHIMES
For aural annunciation in the cabin, certain tone sequences (e. g. chimes) are emitted in the respective
cabin areas via the loudspeakers.
The call annunciation from the cockpit is an annunciation which is activated by the audio management
system of the cockpit.
The chimes are described here: Refer to 05-10 Sounds, Light Indications, and Chimes.
CALL INDICATIONS/CHIMES/PRIORITIES
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0025
INDICATIONS
Visual interphone call annunciations in the cabin are made by indication of respective messages on the
related AIPs. The respective light segments in the ACPs also come on. The cabin crew is also
informed about the status of the communication mode (e. g. call activated, accepted, engaged or
cancelled) via messages which are displayed at each interphone station.
Additional full telephone signaling is provided at the audio output of the affected interphone audio
equipment.
CALL CHIMES
For aural annunciation in the cabin, certain tone sequences (e. g. chimes) are emitted in the respective
cabin areas via the loudspeakers.
The call annunciation from the cockpit is deactivated.
The chimes are described here: Refer to 05-10 Sounds, Light Indications, and Chimes.
The cabin and flight crew interphone system allows telephone communication between all cabin crew
stations and the cockpit. There can be one or more links initialized at the same time. In conference
mode communication is possible between more than two interphone stations.
- Interphone functions from cabin
During an interphone communication audio signals are transmitted from the cabin handset to the
cockpit equipment. The communication is initiated by the keypad on the handset.
- Conference mode
Communication between more than two interphone sources is called a conference call. Several
different conference calls are possible at the same time. A conference call can be made between
different interphone sources on each deck but also between different interphone sources on all
three decks.
- Interphone monitoring
If the INTPH monitoring is enabled, the INTPH function with the high function with the highest
priority can be monitored from the cockpit (via the Audio Management Unit (AMU)).
Note: This function is not available if the Service Interphone is active.
Refer to Calls from the Cockpit via Cockpit Handset.
Refer to Calls from the Cabin — Emergency.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. When unhooking the handset, it is not possible to dial. Is it possible to use
the PA function? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. Using the PA, request all cabin crewmembers to check if their interphone
handset is correctly placed in its cradle. Does the interphone system work
now? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. The cabin interphone system is working again.
Enter the failure symptoms and the recovery process into the cabin
logbook. END END
4. The cabin interphone system is inoperative.
Enter the failure into the cabin logbook. END END
The Service Interphone SVCE INTPH system allows telephone communication between the ground
crew, flight crew and the cabin crew when the aircraft is on ground.
The service personnel use them to speak with each other if their boomsets are connected to the jacks. L2
The flight crew and/or the cabin crew is also able to speak with the connected service personnel
through the acoustical equipment in the cockpit or the attendant handsets in the cabin. Different
indications in the cockpit and in the cabin display the status of the active function.
L1
Refer to Location of the Jacks
Refer to System Operation
Refer to Operation of the Service Interphone.
(5) APU
(6) THS Actuator
(7) Bulk Cargo Door
(8) Aft Cargo Compartment
(9) Air Conditioning Bay
(10) FWD Cargo Compartment
(11) Aft Avionics Compartment
(12) Nose Landing Gear
(13) Engine 1, 2, 3, 4.
Note: Jacks on one side of the aircraft are also on the opposite side of the aircraft (e. g. the jacks on
the engines).
MANUAL ACTIVATION L2
For a manual activation of the Service Interphone press the Service Interphone Override sw in the
cockpit. When the service interphone is activated manually, a related indication comes on in the
cockpit.
Refer to Operation of the Service Interphone.
COMMUNICATION LINK L1
The flight crew uses the equipment that is connected to the AMU (boomset, microphone and oxygen L1
mode.
L1
Refer to Cockpit to Ground Crew Calls
Refer to Ground Crew to Cockpit Calls.
INDICATIONS
When the Service Interphone function is active and a boomset is connected to the ground service
jacks, the related AIPs display related messages.
RESET OF SERVICE INTERPHONE FUNCTIONS
The link between the ground crew source and the AMU is reset when the Service Interphone function
is automatically or manually switched to the interactive mode. This occurs when the landing gear is not
on ground or when the Service Interphone Override sw is set to OFF and no external power is
available.
A link from any cabin handset to the ground crew boomset is reset when the handset is hung up or
when the reset pushbutton is pressed.
The flight crew is able to communicate with ground stations and with cabin crew members using the
interphone system. In the cockpit, the main interface for communication is the Radio Management
Panel (RMP), which acts as a remote control of the Audio Management Unit (AMU).
In addition to the described Service Interphone system, there is a call system installed which allows the
cockpit crew to get the attention of the ground service personnel.
In order to get the attention of the ground crew, the flight crew must press the MECH pushbutton. An
external horn will be heard. It is located in the nose gear well. Additionally, the blue cockpit call
indicator light comes on (this is located near to the ground power receptacle).
If the MECH pushbutton-switch is released the external horn stops, but the indicator light remains on.
In order to reset this light, the HORN RESET pushbutton-switch must be pushed and released.
The following warnings are provided through the external horn:
-- APU FIRE on ground
-- BLOWERS LOW FLOW on ground with engines shut down
-- ADIRS ON BAT on ground
-- BAT FEED WARN on ground.
The ground crew can perform cockpit calls using the Service Interphone panels located on the outside
of the aircraft.
The PAX call system controls the passenger call activation, the lighting of the PAX call-light and the
activation of the call-chime. Passengers can initiate calls from the passenger seats and from the
lavatories.
Passenger calls trigger different acoustic and visual signals in the aircraft cabin.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seat Row via PSU.
Refer to PAX Call from a Lavatory via LSU.
Refer to Reset of a PAX Call via FAP.
The PAX call system controls the passenger call activation, the lighting of the PAX call-light and the
activation of the call-chime. Passengers can initiate calls from the passenger seats and from the
lavatories.
Passenger calls trigger different visual signals in the aircraft cabin.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seat Row via PSU.
Refer to PAX Call from a Lavatory via LSU.
Refer to Reset of a PAX Call via FAP.
INITIALIZATION
Passengers initiate calls, when they press a passenger call pushbutton. Passenger call pushbuttons
are installed near to each seat, in each lavatory and at each cabin crew station. The call can either be
initiated from the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) or from the Passenger Control Unit (PCU), that is part
of the IFE system. Pressing the same pushbutton again will reset the call.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seat Row — via PCU.
CALL RESET FROM SEATS, ATTENDANT STATIONS AND LAVATORIES
If passengers press the call pushbutton a second time, the call indications will be reset. The related call
light and the related AIP messages will go off. The related ACP light will go off, if there are no other
active calls in the ACP related area.
Refer to PAX Call from a Lavatory — via LSU.
Refer to Reset of a PAX Call — via FAP.
INITIALIZATION
Passengers initiate calls, when they press a passenger call pushbutton. Passenger call pushbuttons
are installed near to each seat, in each lavatory and at each cabin crew station. The call can either be
initiated from the Passenger Service Unit (PSU) or from the Passenger Control Unit (PCU), that is part
of the IFE system. Pressing the same pushbutton again will reset the call.
Refer to PAX Call from a Seat Row — via PSU.
Refer to PAX Call from a Lavatory — via LSU.
INDICATION
After a call activation information appears on the related visual attention getters (ACP segments and
messages on the AIP).
CHIME
A call chime will be heard from all loudspeakers in the related cabin area after every call activation. A
maximum number of pending (not reset) PAX call chimes can be programmed in the database.
CHIME INHIBITION
The cabin crew can prevent the activation of passenger call chimes with the help of inhibit commands
from the FAP and from the mini FAP. Via the related pushbuttons on the FAP or mini FAP the chime
can be inhibited per zone or for all zones. If assigned in the CAM, it is possible to prevent a new chime
when a certain number of calls are pending.
INDICATION
After a call activation information appears on the related visual attention getters (ACP segments and
messages on the AIP).
CHIME
The call chimes via all attendant and passenger compartment loudspeakers of the respective zones
are deactivated.
VIA AAP
Applicable to: ALL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-30 Lights
06-30-10 Cabin Lighting System
06-30-10-10 General
Types of Cabin Light ............................................................................................................................1
Definition of Illuminated Areas..............................................................................................................2
Cabin Lighting System and Its Elements..............................................................................................3
Cabin Lighting System Control.............................................................................................................4
General Aspects of Cabin Lighting Control ..........................................................................................5
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-30-20-20 Location
Emergency Lighting System - Subsystems ......................................................................................... 1
06-40 Doors/Slides
06-40-10 General
General Information about the DOORS / SLIDES Page...................................................................... 1
SYSTEM Deviation with operational impact ........................................................................................ 1
06-40-30 Description
DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP.................................................................................................... 1
06-40-40 Indications
Messages on the FAP ......................................................................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-50-20 Location
Upper Deck Zones and Cabin Temperature Zones .............................................................................1
Main Deck Zones and Cabin Temperature Zones ...............................................................................2
Lower Deck Zones and Cabin Temperature Zones .............................................................................3
06-50-40 Description
General Information about Temperature Selection ..............................................................................1
Additional Air Outlets in the Cabin........................................................................................................2
Cabin Temperature Control from the Cockpit.......................................................................................3
Cabin Temperature Control from the Cabin .........................................................................................4
06-50-50 Operation
How to Set the Temperature for a Temperature Zone .........................................................................1
How to Correct the Temperature Value for All Zones ..........................................................................3
How to Reset the Cabin Temperature to the Predefined Value ...........................................................7
06-60 Water/Waste
06-60-10 General
General Information about the Water/Waste System Functions ..........................................................1
06-60-20 Location
Location of the Water and Waste Tanks ..............................................................................................1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-60-40 Description
06-60-40-10 Potable Water System
Potable Water System ......................................................................................................................... 1
06-60-50 Operation
How to Preselect the Water Quantity for a Flight................................................................................. 1
How to Auto-Flush All Toilets .............................................................................................................. 4
How to Shut Down the Water Supply via the FAP............................................................................... 7
How to Reactivate the Water Supply ................................................................................................ 12
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-70-30 Description
Description of the Smoke Detection System ........................................................................................1
SMOKE DETECTION Page on the FAP ..............................................................................................2
SMOKE DETECTION Page on the Mini FAP.......................................................................................5
Additional Smoke Indications in the Cabin ...........................................................................................8
06-90-30 Description
SYSTEM INFO Page............................................................................................................................1
SYSTEM INFO Page/Blue Card...........................................................................................................6
06-90-40 Indications
Indications on the SYSTEM INFO Page ..............................................................................................1
Messages on the Miscellaneous Indicator / System Info .....................................................................2
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-100-30 Description
CABIN STATUS ALL Page.................................................................................................................. 1
CABIN STATUS per Deck Page.......................................................................................................... 2
06-110-30 Description
CABIN READY Page on the FAP ........................................................................................................ 1
06-110-40 Operation
How to Signal CABIN READY on the FAP .......................................................................................... 1
06-120-30 Description
06-120-30-10 Galley Cooling Overview
Galley Cooling Overview ..................................................................................................................... 1
06-120-30-30 Pre-Conditioning
Pre-Conditioning .................................................................................................................................. 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-120-40 Operation
How to Switch ON the Air Cooling Unit ................................................................................................1
How to activate the PRE-CONDITIONING Mode.................................................................................2
How to Switch OFF the Air Cooling Unit ..............................................................................................3
How to Stow Cooled Trolleys ...............................................................................................................4
06-120-50 Indications
Error Messages....................................................................................................................................1
06-130-30 Description
IFE POWER - ALL Page ......................................................................................................................1
IFE POWER PAGE Access Code ........................................................................................................2
IFE POWER MAIN DECK Page ..........................................................................................................4
IFE POWER UPPER DECK Page ....................................................................................................10
IFE POWER LOWER DECK Page ....................................................................................................16
06-130-40 Indications
Indications on the FAP .........................................................................................................................1
06-130-50 Operation
How to Turn Off/On the Power of a Seat Power Group .......................................................................1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-140-20 Location
Heated Floor Panels on the Main Deck ............................................................................................... 1
Heated Floor Panels on the Upper Deck ............................................................................................. 2
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-160-20 Location
Location of the Electromechanical Window Shades ............................................................................1
Location of the Manual Override Tool ..................................................................................................1
06-180-30 Description
The SHOWER CONTROL Page ..........................................................................................................1
06-180-40 Operation
How to Start a Shower from the FAP ...................................................................................................1
How to Set the Shower Time from the FAP .........................................................................................2
How to Set a Time-Out Warning from the FAP ....................................................................................2
How to Start the Cleaning Mode on the FAP .......................................................................................3
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-200-30 Description
HOME Page......................................................................................................................................... 1
USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE Pages ......................................................................................... 6
FLIGHT INFORMATION Page............................................................................................................. 9
CREATE DEFECT REPORT Pages.................................................................................................. 11
SCRATCH PAD Page........................................................................................................................ 24
CABIN STATUS Pages ..................................................................................................................... 26
06-200-40 Operation
How to Login or Logout a Registered User.......................................................................................... 1
How to Register a New User................................................................................................................ 5
How to Create a Defect Report Using Keyword Search ...................................................................... 9
How to Create a Defect Report.......................................................................................................... 19
How to Create a Defect Report for a Seat Area................................................................................. 39
How to View Defect Reports in the Logbook ..................................................................................... 61
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
06-220-40 Description
CVMS Application Start Page .............................................................................................................1
CVMS Application Login.......................................................................................................................2
CVMS Home Page ...............................................................................................................................3
CVMS QUAD VIEW Page ....................................................................................................................5
The cabin music function is controlled and monitored via the CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP or the
mini FAP, if installed.
For more information about the CABIN MUSIC pages:
- Refer to 06-10-30-10 CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
- Refer to 06-10-30-20 CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The audio files are customized. Depending on the function, the files are loaded from the Integrated
Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM) (See IPRAM) or an In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) source
(See IFE Source)
The CABIN MUSIC page provides the controls and indications for the following cabin music functions:
- Boarding music (from the IPRAM source)
- Lavatory music (from the IFE source), if installed
- Light scenario music (from the IFE source), if installed.
AUDIO SOURCES
IPRAM
The media containing the audio files for boarding music is a memory card called Integrated
Pre-Recorded Announcement and Music (IPRAM). The data from the IPRAM is loaded via a slot in
the FAP subpanel (master FAP). For more information about the FAP subpanel: Refer to 04-20-10
Operation of the FAP.
IFE SOURCE
The media containing the audio files for the lavatory music and the lighting scenario music source is
part of the In-Flight Entertainment system. The audio files are loaded automatically by the cabin
music function.
BOARDING MUSIC
For Boarding Music Groups the cabin crew can:
- Select an audio channel
Continued on the next page
The cabin crew can access the CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP by pushing the MUSIC button on the
function selector. For more information about the FAP function selector: Refer to 04-20-10 Operation of
the FAP.
Up to three control pads (music groups) are displayed on the CABIN MUSIC page. If more than three
music groups are available, pushing a PREV. or NEXT button enable the cabin crew to display the
other available music groups.
Typical CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
For information about the access to the CABIN MUSIC function via the mini FAP: Refer to Position of
the CABIN MUSIC page on the Mini FAP.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN MUSIC page on the mini FAP by pushing the MUSIC button on
the function selector. For more information about the mini FAP function selector: Refer to 04-20-10
Operation of the Mini-FAP.
The mini FAP will display the CABIN MUSIC page with the BOARDING GROUP control pad
corresponding to the zone where the mini FAP is installed.
Typical CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP
For information about the access to the CABIN MUSIC function via the FAP: Refer to Position of the
CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP.
The CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the music
distributed in the cabin via loudspeakers and/or headsets.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN MUSIC ALL decks page by pushing the MUSIC button of the
function selector at the bottom of the FAP screen.
Typical CABIN MUSIC Page on the FAP
When the system is powered up, the CABIN MUSIC page is displayed with disabled music group
control pads:
- all buttons are disabled
- the volume indicator is disabled
- the channel name in the CHANNEL text box is replaced by the text INITIALIZING.
In addition, a blue card is displayed on the right side of the music group control pads: WAIT UNTIL
INITIALIZATION HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE BOARDING MUSIC FROM THE FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the CABIN MUSIC page to monitor and control the boarding music groups.
On the FAP, select the MUSIC button from the function selector. (For information about the function
selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). The CABIN MUSIC page will display on the
FAP.
There may be several boarding music groups defined for the cabin, depending on the customer
definition. Each boarding music group has its own control pad.
For each boarding music group, the cabin crew can:
- Select an audio channel (See How to Select An Audio Channel)
- Adjust the volume (See How to Adjust the Volume of the Boarding Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the boarding music (See How to Switch ON/OFF the Boarding Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY mode (See How to Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY
Mode) .
HOW TO SELECT AN AUDIO CHANNEL
Follow the steps described below to select an audio channel for a boarding music group:
1. Push the CHAN. SELECT button on the control pad of the desired boarding music group. The
CHAN. SELECT button will turn green and the corresponding adjust control pad is displayed on the
right side of the screen.
2. Use the ▴ and ▾ icons on the adjust control pad to scroll through the list of available audio channels.
A blue highlight indicates the current position in the list.
3. When the desired music channel is highlighted, push the SELECT button. The selected audio
channel will be displayed in the SELECTED CHANNEL text box.
HOW TO ADJUST THE VOLUME OF THE BOARDING MUSIC
Change the volume level of a boarding music group by using the ▴ and ▾ icons on the control pad of
the boarding music group. The VOL indicator will change accordingly.
When the cabin crew has selected the highest volume level, the VOL ▴ icon will be indicated as
disabled.
When the cabin crew has selected the lowest volume level, the VOL ▾ icon will be indicated as
disabled.
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE BOARDING MUSIC
The cabin crew can switch ON or OFF each boarding music group individually.
The status of the boarding music group is indicated by the color of the ON/OFF button.
To switch the boarding music ON, push the gray ON/OFF button. The button will turn green.
To switch the boarding music OFF, push the green ON/OFF button. The button will turn gray.
Continued on the next page
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE LAVATORY MUSIC FROM THE FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the CABIN MUSIC page to monitor and control the lavatory music groups.
On the FAP, select the MUSIC button from the function selector. (For information about the function
selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). The CABIN MUSIC page will display on the
FAP.
There may be several lavatory music groups defined for the cabin, depending on the customer
definition. Each lavatory music group has its own control pad.
For each lavatory music group, the cabin crew can:
- Adjust the volume (See How to Adjust the Volume of the Lavatory Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the boarding music (See How to Switch ON/OFF the Lavatory Music).
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE LIGHTING SCENARIO MUSIC FROM THE FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the CABIN MUSIC page to monitor and control the lighting scenario music groups.
On the FAP, select the MUSIC button from the function selector. (For information about the function
selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). The CABIN MUSIC page will display on the
FAP.
There may be several lighting scenario music groups defined for the cabin, depending on the customer
definition. Each lighting scenario music group has its own control pad.
For each lighting scenario music group, the cabin crew can:
- Switch ON/OFF the lighting scenario music (See How to Switch ON/OFF the Lighting Scenario
Music)
- Indicate an automatic trigger: AUTO MODE. (See AUTO MODE Indication).
Example of SCENARIO GROUPS on the FAP
To switch the lighting scenario music OFF, push the green ON/OFF button. The button will turn gray.
AUTO MODE INDICATION
The auto mode is indicated, when the music group is linked to a lighting scenario and is started
automatically. The indication AUTO MODE is displayed in yellow, below the CHANNEL text box and
the ON/OFF button will turn green.
Example of an Scenario Auto Trigger Event
If the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM) audio data are not available:
- All buttons are disabled
- The volume indicator is disabled
- The channel name in the CHANNEL text box is replaced by the text INITIALIZING.
In addition, a blue card is displayed on the right side of the music group control pads: NO I-PRAM
MUSIC AVAILABLE - CHECK I-PRAM.
Example of an IPRAM Function Error
The CABIN MUSIC page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the boarding music
distributed in the cabin via loudspeakers and/or headsets in the corresponding area.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN MUSIC page by pushing the MUSIC button of the function
selector at the bottom of the mini FAP screen.
Typical CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP
When the system is powered up, the CABIN MUSIC page is displayed with a blue card: WAIT UNTIL
INITIALIZATION HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
Example of a Cabin Music Initialization on the Mini FAP
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE BOARDING MUSIC FROM THE MINI FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the CABIN MUSIC page to monitor and control the boarding music groups.
On the mini FAP, select the MUSIC button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to 04-20-10 Mini-FAP, 1st Level). The CABIN MUSIC page will display on the
mini FAP.
For the boarding music group, the cabin crew can:
- Select an audio channel (See How to Select An Audio Channel)
- Adjust the volume (See How to Adjust the Volume of the Boarding Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the boarding music (See How to Switch ON/OFF the Boarding Music)
- Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY mode (See How to Switch ON/OFF the LAVATORY ONLY
Mode) .
Typical CABIN MUSIC Page on the Mini FAP
2. When the desired music channel is highlighted, push the SELECT button. The selected audio
channel will be displayed in the SELECTED CHANNEL text box.
HOW TO ADJUST THE VOLUME OF THE BOARDING MUSIC
Change the volume level of a boarding music group by using the ▴ and ▾ icons on the control pad of
the boarding music group. The VOL indicator will change accordingly.
When the cabin crew has selected the highest volume level, the VOL ▴ icon will be indicated as
disabled.
When the cabin crew has selected the lowest volume level, the VOL ▾ icon will be indicated as
disabled.
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE BOARDING MUSIC
The cabin crew can switch ON or OFF each boarding music group individually.
The status of the boarding music group is indicated by the color of the ON/OFF button.
To switch the boarding music ON, push the gray ON/OFF button. The button will turn green.
To switch the boarding music OFF, push the green ON/OFF button. The button will turn gray.
HOW TO SWITCH ON/OFF THE LAVATORY ONLY MODE
It is possible to activate the boarding music only for the lavatory/ies of a boarding music group. The
selected music will only play in the lavatories of the selected boarding music group:
The status of the is indicated by the color of the LAV. ONLY button.
To restrict the boarding music to the lavatory/ies, push the gray LAV. ONLY button. The button will turn
green.
To play the boarding music for the whole boarding music group, push the green LAV. ONLY button.
The button will turn gray.
If the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM) audio data is not available a blue card is
displayed: NO I-PRAM MUSIC AVAILABLE - CHECK I-PRAM.
Example of an IPRAM Function Error
The cabin crew can control and monitor pre-recorded announcements via the PRE-RECORDED
ANNOUNCEMENTS page on the FAP.
For more information about the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page:
- Refer to 06-20-20 Position of the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP
- Refer to 06-20-30-10 PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The cabin crew can select and start announcements individually or in groups. Some pre-recorded
announcements start automatically. They have the highest distribution priority.
The audio files containing the prerecorded announcements are customized. The files are loaded from
the Integrated Prerecorded Announcement Module (IPRAM).
IPRAM L2
The media containing the audio files for the prerecorded announcements is a memory card called
Integrated Pre-Recorded Announcement and Music (IPRAM). The data from the IPRAM is loaded via a
slot in the FAP subpanel (master FAP). For more information about the FAP subpanel: Refer to
04-20-10 Operation of the FAP.
The cabin crew can access the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page on the FAP by pushing
the PRE-ANN. button on the function selector. For more information about the FAP function selector:
Refer to 04-20-10 Operation of the FAP:
Typical PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP
The PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and
control the pre-recorded announcements distributed in the cabin via loudspeakers and headsets.
The cabin crew can access the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS all decks page by pushing the
PRE- ANN. button of the function selector at the bottom of the FAP.
Typical PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS Page on the FAP
When the system is powered up, the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT page is displayed with a
blue card is displayed on the right side of the music group control pads: WAIT UNTIL INITIALIZATION
HAS BEEN COMPLETED.
HOW TO MONITOR AND CONTROL THE PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS FROM THE FAP
Applicable to: ALL
Use the PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS page to monitor and control the announcements
groups. On the FAP, select the PRE- ANN. button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to 04-20-10 Overview Cabin Systems from the FAP). The PRE-RECORDED
ANNOUNCEMENTS all decks page will display on the FAP.
There may be up to two announcements groups defined for the cabin, depending on the customer
definition. Each announcements group has its own control pad.
For each boarding music group, the cabin crew can:
- Select one or more announcement(s) to the MEMO list: See How to Select One or More
Announcement(s) to the MEMO List
- Stop, play or clear announcements from the MEMO list: See How to Stop, Play or Clear
Announcements from the Memo List
- Play an announcement directly from the SELECT list: See How to Play an Announcement Directly
from the SELECT List .
If the IPRAM (Integrated Pre-Recorded Announcement Module) audio data are not available, a blue
card with the message NO PRE-RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT AVAILABLE. CHECK IPRAM.
STAIRS LIGHTS L1
Stairs have lights that are located under each step. As an option, lights can be installed which follow
the stairs ceiling contour.
EFFECT LIGHTS
Effect lights are installed in lavatories as mirror lights and wash table lights. As an option, effect lights
may be installed for emphasizing cabin furniture.
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) controls the Cabin Lighting System. For the
control of the cabin lighting the cabin is divided into the following controlled illuminated areas:
- See Entry areas
- See Cabin zones
- See Rooms
- See Stairs.
The areas are displayed on the control panels (FAP, mini FAP). Via the control panels the level of
illumination of the different areas can be controlled.
ENTRY AREAS
Entry areas include the area at a cabin door, the cross aisle area and the corresponding door across
the aisle.
CABIN ZONES
Typically, the cabin zones include all passenger seating areas. The cabin zones are defined by the
airline and depend on the individual cabin layout. The customized information is stored on the CAM
(Cabin Assignment Module).
ROOMS
Rooms on an aircraft are not necessarily closed compartments. Rooms may be:
- Crew Work Stations (CWS)
- Galleys
- Crew rest areas
- Bars / lounges
- etc.
STAIRS
Stairs are part of the two decks that are connected by it. Thus the illumination of the stairs can be
controlled from both decks, i.e. the corresponding stairs control pad is displayed on both deck pages.
For safety reasons, the stairs illumination can not be turned off. It will always stay on at a predefined
minimum brightness.
The cabin lighting system is part of the aircraft lighting system. The cabin lighting system has elements
that depend on the cabin layout:
- Cabin zone illumination (e.g. First, Business and Economy Class)
- Room illumination (e.g. crew rest areas, galleys, work stations etc.)
- Entry area illumination
- Staircase illumination
- Reading lights.
The cabin lighting system is controlled via the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS).
The CIDS control panels (FAP / mini FAP) display control pads of the cabin lighting elements. Refer to
Cabin Lighting System Control.
Typical Control Pads for Cabin Lighting Elements (FAP)
CONTROL PANELS
The cabin lighting system is controlled via the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS).
The cabin lighting system can be controlled from these (CIDS) control panels:
- Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
- Mini FAP
- Additional Attendant Panel (AAP).
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
CONTROLLED AREAS
The illumination of the following areas can be controlled via the control displays:
- Cabin zones
- Rooms
- Entry areas
- Staircases.
Refer to Definition of Illuminated Areas.
CONTROL MODES
Cabin lighting can be controlled via two different modes:
- Classic control (standard)
- Scenario control (optional)
Scenario control enables the cabin crew to select predefined lighting scenarios (e.g. BOARD, SLEEP
etc.).
Note: Typically, cabin lighting is controlled via classic control. However, if the cabin zones are
controlled via the optional scenario control, not only the control pads of the cabin zones are
different but also the GENERAL SETTINGS. Thus the CABIN LIGHTING page layout depends
on the control mode of the cabin zones.
CIDS POWER-UP
When CIDS is powered up, all cabin lights are illuminated automatically in a predefined brightness. A
power-up has the same effect as pushing the MAIN ON/OFF button when CIDS is already running and
all lights are off (MAIN OFF state).
MAIN ON / OFF
The MAIN ON/OFF function is only available on ground. This function is controlled via the MAIN
ON/OFF button on the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS.
Typically the cabin lights are illuminated automatically in a predefined brightness (typically bright white
light) after power up and is in the MAIN ON state. The MAIN ON/OFF button is green (activated) in the
MAIN ON state.
The MAIN ON/OFF button is a toggle button:
- If the cabin lighting is ON (MAIN ON state) and the button is pushed, the cabin lighting will go OFF.
The button will turn from green (activated) to gray (enabled).
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination will stay ON at a predefined brightness level.
- If the cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) and the button is pushed, the cabin lighting will go ON
(MAIN ON state). The button will turn from gray (enabled) to green (activated).
Note: Pushing any light control button on any CIDS control panel when the cabin lighting is OFF
(MAIN OFF state) will switch the cabin lighting to the MAIN ON state. However, only the lights
corresponding to the pushed light control button and the lavatory illumination will go ON.
CABIN DECOMPRESSION
In case of cabin decompression, all lights are switched automatically to predefined brightness (typically
bright white), independent from any selected light setting.
BRIGHTNESS
Generally the cabin illumination is dimmable. Typically there are three illumination levels:
- BRIGHT: 100% visual brightness
- DIM 1: 50% visual brightness
- DIM 2: 10% visual brightness.
Note: The light brightness is automatically dimmed in the cockpit access area if the cockpit door is
open with engines running.
For cabin lighting functions there are several pages available on the FAP display:
- CABIN LIGHTING ALL page (overview of all decks)
- CABIN LIGHTING MAIN DECK page
- CABIN LIGHTING UPPER DECK page
- CABIN LIGHTING LOWER DECK page (optional)
- READING LIGHT SETTINGS page.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN LIGHTING ALL page by pushing the LIGHTS button on the first
level of the function selector on the FAP.
Typical CABIN LIGHTING ALL Page
On the CABIN LIGHTING ALL page on the FAP aircraft symbols show the lighting status of all aircraft
decks.
The aircraft symbols display the cabin layout and its illuminated areas.
On the aircraft symbol, yellow bars indicate the location and the illumination brightness of the cabin
zones and entry areas. The color intensity of a bar changes when the illumination brightness is
decreased or increased.
Continued on the next page
Each bar, except entry area bars, is labelled, (e.g. F/C for First Class; B/C for Business Class etc.).
The background color (green) of a deck selector button indicates the deck for which the page is
activated.
NAVIGATING ON THE CABIN LIGHTING PAGES
The lighting of a single deck can be controlled or monitored by two ways:
- Selecting the corresponding deck selector button on the left side of the screen.
- Touching the corresponding aircraft symbol of the desired deck on the CABIN LIGHTING ALL
decks page.
LIGHT INTENSITY INDICATION
The intensity of the color (yellow) of the aircraft symbols indicates the illumination level of the cabin
zones and entry areas.
After selecting the LIGHTS button from the mini FAP function selector the CABIN LIGHTING page is
displayed.
Typical Mini FAP Classic Control CABIN LIGHTING Page
This example shows a typical mini FAP CABIN LIGHTING page layout displaying the maximum of four
control pads. Each control pad has a header indicating the zone or area it controls.
Control buttons for general lighting functions are on the right side of the screen.
Activated buttons are displayed green.
Depending on DAY or NIGHT mode a scenario typically has different characteristics and settings.
SCENARIO CONTROL
The following pages are available for scenario control:
- CABIN LIGHTING pages for the main deck, upper deck and (optionally) lower deck : Refer to Cabin
Lighting Scenario Control Per Deck
- Initialization mode: Refer to Scenario Control Initialization Mode
For operating the scenario control:
- Refer to How to Start a Scenario
- Refer to How to Fine Tune Scenario Controlled Lights.
SCENARIOS WITH THEME MUSIC
Some lighting scenarios may be accompanied by a music / audio theme which is provided by the IFE
system.
The music / audio theme will start and stop at the same time as the lighting scenario. However, it is
possible that a delay is programmed for the music / audio theme: for example could the music theme
become audible 15 minutes after the lighting scenario has begun.
Note: If the cabin crew interrupts the lighting scenario manually, the music theme will not be
interrupted or stopped (Refer to 06-30-10-30-10 Scenario Control Per Deck via FAP).
Only the following will turn OFF the lighting scenario and will end the music / audio theme also:
- Pushing the OFF button on the adjust control pad
- Starting a new lighting scenario
- Pushing the DAY/NIGHT button on the GENERAL SETTINGS control pad and thus ending
the running lighting scenario if it is not assigned to the mode that has been selected (DAY
or NIGHT).
Button Description
MAIN ON/OFF The MAIN ON/OFF button is part of the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS and is
only available on ground. It is a toggle button:
- If the cabin lighting is ON (MAIN ON state) and the button is pushed, the
cabin lighting will go OFF. The button will turn from green (activated) to
gray (enabled).
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination will stay ON at a
predefined brightness level.
- If the cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) and the button is pushed,
the cabin lighting will go ON (MAIN ON state). The button will turn from
gray (enabled) to green (activated).
Note: Pushing any light control button on any CIDS control panel when the
cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) will switch the cabin lighting
to the MAIN ON state. However, only the lights corresponding to the
pushed light control button and the lavatory illumination will go ON.
R/L SET Pushing the R/L SET button turns ON all assigned reading lights.
Note: The function of this button is available on ground, only. The button is
disabled during flight.
R/L RESET Pushing the R/L RESET button turns OFF all assigned reading lights.
Note: The function of this button is available on ground, only. The button is
disabled during flight.
Button Description
DAY/NIGHT Pushing the DAY/NIGHT button changes the characteristics and setting of
the lighting scenarios adapting to the current lighting outside the cabin
(day/night).
If the NIGHT mode is activated the signs are dimmed automatically
depending on the current cabin lighting intensity.
The active mode is highlighted green on the button.
DAY BOARD/NIGHT Pushing the DAY BOARD/NIGHT BOARD buttons starts the day boarding
BOARD lighting or respectively the night boarding lighting in the whole cabin.
DIM 50%/ DIM 10% Pushing the DIM buttons dims the lighting in the whole cabin.
ENTRY AREAS
Note: Entry areas are typically controlled by classic control. Refer to 06-30-10-30-50 Entry Area
Illumination Control Via FAP / Mini FAP.
CONTROL PAD FOR SCENARIO CONTROL
Cabin Zone Control Pad
All scenario control pads have the same functions and look the same except for the name of the control
pad, e.g. ECONOMY CLASS.
Cabin Zone Control Pad
Button Description
SELECT Pushing the SELECT button displays an additional control pad (ADJUST).
Indicator Field Description
Button Description
Mode and Status In the first line of the mode and status field the scenario title e.g. CRUISE is
displayed. The title of the current scenario remains displayed, even if it has
been stopped or it has ended, until a new scenario is selected.
The title of a scenario remains displayed until a new scenario is selected.
In the last line of the mode and status field the illumination status of the
corresponding area (e.g. ECONOMY CLASS) is displayed e.g. RUN.
The following illumination status are available:
- RUN: Lighting scenario is running.
- END: Lighting scenario has ended. The last settings of the previous
lighting scenario remain active until a new scenario or other settings are
selected. The name of the scenario remains in the first line of the mode
and status field.
- MOD: The lighting was modified by the ▴ or ▾ buttons. (These buttons are
disabled when a scenario is running.)
- OFF: The lighting is switched off.
- BRT: The lighting is switched to full brightness (typically bright white
light). This will interrupt a running scenario.
The cabin crew can use the ADJUST control pad to adjust the lighting for the selected cabin zone or
room.
Button Description
Zone wise Scenario Pushing a zone wise lighting scenario button starts the corresponding
Selection scenario in the assigned area.
e.g. CRUISE The activated button remains green (activated) as long as the scenario is
running.
The available zone wise lighting scenario buttons are displayed on the left
side of the ADJUST control pad.
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the lighting in the assigned area to typically
bright white light.
Note: If the BRT button is activated the scenario is interrupted .
▴ and ▾ Pushing ▴ or ▾ increases or decreases the brightness of the lighting in the
assigned area.
These buttons are disabled when a scenario is running.
OFF Pushing the OFF button turns OFF the lights in the assigned area.
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination can not be turned OFF
completely. It will always stay ON at a predefined brightness.
Button Description
SKIP END Pushing the SKIP END button skips the rest of the running scenario to its
end.
REPEAT Pushing the REPEAT button repeats the running scenario (infinite loop).
Pushing the button a second time terminates the loop.
RECOV. Pushing the RECOV. button synchronizes back an overridden scenario after
using BRT, ▴, ▾, OFF.
Note: The ▴ and ▾ buttons are only available when a scenario has ended).
HOLD Pushing the HOLD button pauses the scenario. Pushing the button a second
time continues the scenario.
Indicator Description
Brightness Indicates the current visual brightness (in % or graphically).
1. To display the CABIN LIGHTING page push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function
selector of the FAP
For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector on the CABIN LIGHTING page.
3. Push the SELECT button on the control pad of the desired cabin zone (e.g. ECONOMY CLASS).
The corresponding ADJUST control pad opens.
4. Select a lighting scenario from the ADJUST control pad. The activated button turns green (e.g.
CRUISE).
The selected zone wise lighting scenario starts in the assigned area.
After a zone wise lighting scenario has started, it runs until its end. Its last visual brightness and color is
maintained after it has ended. The BRT button and the ▴ or ▾ buttons on the ADJUST control pad of the
assigned area can be used to adjust the illumination.
The zone wise lighting scenario can be overridden by any other scenario (entire or zone wise lighting
scenario).
HOW TO START AN ENTIRE LIGHTING SCENARIO VIA FAP
General Cabin Settings Control Pad
1. To display the CABIN LIGHTING page push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function
selector of the FAP. For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector on the CABIN LIGHTING page.
3. Select an entire lighting scenario from the GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS control pad. The activated
button turns green (e.g. DAY BOARD)
The selected entire lighting scenario starts in the whole cabin (the assigned areas).
After an entire lighting scenario has started, it runs until its end. Its last visual brightness and color is
maintained after it has ended. The BRT and OFF button on the ADJUST control pads of the individual
cabin zones can be used to adjust the illumination.
The entire lighting scenario can be overridden by any other lighting scenario (entire or zone wise
lighting scenario).
1. To display the CABIN LIGHTING page push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function
selector of the FAP.
For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector on the CABIN LIGHTING page.
3. Push the SELECT button on the control pad of the desired zone, room or area . The corresponding
ADJUST control pad opens.
4. Use the ▴ or ▾ icon to increase or decrease the light brightness gradually.
Button Description
SELECT Pushing the SELECT button displays an additional control pad (ADJUST).
Indicator Description
Field
Mode and In the first line of the mode and status field the scenario title e.g. CRUISE is displayed.
Status The title of the current scenario remains displayed, even if it has been stopped or it
has ended, until a new scenario is selected.
The title of a scenario remains displayed until a new scenario is selected.
In the last line of the mode and status field the illumination status of the corresponding
area (e.g. ECONOMY CLASS) is displayed e.g. RUN.
The following illumination status are available:
- RUN: Lighting scenario is running.
- END: Lighting scenario has ended. The last settings of the previous lighting
scenario remain active until a new scenario or other settings are selected. The
name of the scenario remains in the first line of the mode and status field.
- MOD: The lighting was modified by the ▴ or ▾ icons. (These icons are disabled
when a scenario is running.)
- OFF: The lighting is switched off.
- BRT: The lighting is switched to full brightness (typically bright white light). This will
interrupt a running scenario.
When the SELECT button is pushed on the cabin zone control pad, the ADJUST control pad is
displayed on the right side of the cabin zone control pad.
Button Description
Zone wise Scenario Pushing a zone wise lighting scenario button starts the corresponding
Selection scenario in the assigned area.
e.g. CRUISE The activated button remains green (activated) as long as the scenario is
running.
The available zone wise lighting scenario buttons are displayed on the left
side of the ADJUST control pad.
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the lighting in the assigned area to typically
bright white light.
Note: If the BRT button is activated the scenario is interrupted .
▴ and ▾ Pushing ▴ or ▾ increases or decreases the brightness of the lighting in the
assigned area.
These icons are disabled when a scenario is running.
OFF Pushing the OFF button turns OFF the lights in the assigned area.
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination can not be turned OFF
completely. It will always stay ON at a predefined brightness.
Button Description
SKIP END Pushing the SKIP END button skips the rest of the running scenario to its
end.
REPEAT Pushing the REPEAT button repeats the running scenario (infinite loop).
Pushing the button a second time terminates the loop.
RECOV. Pushing the RECOV. button synchronizes back an overridden scenario after
using BRT, ▴, ▾, OFF.
Note: The ▴ and ▾ buttons are only available when a scenario has ended).
HOLD Pushing the HOLD button pauses the scenario. Pushing the button a second
time continues the scenario.
Indicator Description
Brightness Indicates the current visual brightness (in % or graphically).
1. To display the CABIN LIGHTING page push the LIGHTS button on the function selector of the mini
FAP. For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of Mini FAP.
2. Push the SELECT button of a room / cabin zone control pad.
The ADJUST control pad is displayed.
3. Select a lighting scenario from the ADJUST control pad.
The selected lighting scenario starts in the selected cabin zone.
After a zone wise lighting scenario has started, it runs until its end. Its last visual brightness and color is
maintained after it has ended. The BRT button and the ▴ or ▾ buttons on the ADJUST control pad of the
assigned area can be used to adjust the illumination.
The zone wise lighting scenario can be overridden by any other scenario (entire or zone wise lighting
scenario).
The Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) has pushbuttons to control the cabin lighting. For more
information about the AAP: Refer to Additional Attendant Panel (AAP).
Typical Lighting Control Pushbuttons on the AAP
Pushbutton Description
CABIN (x) Pushing a CABIN pushbutton turns the light in the selected cabin zone to 100%
brightness.
ENTRY (x) Pushing an ENTRY pushbutton turns the light at the corresponding entry area to
100% brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 pushbutton turns the light in the selected cabin zone / entry
area to 50% brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 pushbutton turns the light in the selected cabin zone / entry
area to 10% brightness.
NIGHT Pushing the NIGHT button turns the light in the assigned cabin zone OFF.
Note: The light in the area of lavatories and galleys will remain at a predefined
low brightness.
The cabin lighting system has subsystems that depend on the cabin layout:
- Cabin zone illumination (e.g. First, Business and Economy Class)
- Room illumination (e.g. crew rest areas, galleys, work stations etc.)
- Entry area illumination
- Staircase illumination
- Reading lights.
CONTROL MODES
Cabin lighting can be controlled via two different modes:
- Classic control (standard)
- Scenario control (optional)
Scenario control enables the cabin crew to select predefined lighting scenarios (e.g. BOARD, SLEEP
etc.).
Note: Typically, cabin lighting is controlled via classic control. However, if the cabin zones are
controlled via the optional scenario control, not only the control pads of the cabin zones are
different but also the GENERAL SETTINGS. Thus the CABIN LIGHTING page layout depends
on the control mode of the cabin zones.
TYPES OF LIGHT
There are different types of light installed in the cabin:
- Ceiling lights, e.g. light strips, spot lights
- Effect lights
- Staircase lights
- Lavatory lights: Refer to Description of the Lavatory Illumination
- Reading lights: Refer to Reading Lights — General.
For more information about types of light: Refer to Types of Light.
BRIGHTNESS
After the power-up of the CIDS, all cabin lights illuminate with predefined brightness (typically bright
white).
Continued on the next page
Note: In case of low cabin-pressure, all lights are switched to predefined brightness (typically bright
white) automatically, independently from any selected light setting.
The general cabin illumination is dimmable and is typically assigned to up to four illumination levels:
- BRIGHT: 100% visual brightness
- DIM1: 50% visual brightness
- DIM2: 10% visual brightness
- NIGHT 1% visual brightness.
A centralized ON/OFF command button (GENERAL CABIN SETTINGS) enables full bright illumination
for cleaning or maintenance purposes (only active on ground).
Note: The light brightness is automatically dimmed in the cockpit access area if the cockpit door is
open with engines running.
An additional control pad on the CABIN LIGHTING pages provides buttons for GENERAL CABIN
SETTINGS. The general cabin settings have an impact on the entire cabin lighting system.
General Cabin Settings Control Pad
Button Description
MAIN ON/OFF The MAIN ON/OFF button is part of the GENERAL CABIN
SETTINGS and is only available on ground. It is a toggle button:
- If the cabin lighting is ON (MAIN ON state) and the button is
pushed, the cabin lighting will go OFF. The button will turn from
green (activated) to gray (enabled).
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination will stay
ON at a predefined brightness level.
- If the cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) and the button is
pushed, the cabin lighting will go ON (MAIN ON state). The
button will turn from gray (enabled) to green (activated).
Note: Pushing any light control button on any CIDS control panel
when the cabin lighting is OFF (MAIN OFF state) will switch
the cabin lighting to the MAIN ON state. However, only the
lights corresponding to the pushed light control button and
the lavatory illumination will go ON.
R/L SET By pushing the R/L SET button, all assigned reading lights are
turned ON.
Note: The function of this button is available on ground, only. The
button is disabled during flight.
Button Description
R/L RESET By pushing the R/L RESET button, all assigned reading lights are
turned OFF.
Note: The function of this button is available on ground, only. The
button is disabled during flight.
DAY/NIGHT Pushing the DAY/NIGHT button changes the characteristics and
setting of the lighting scenarios adapting to the current lighting
outside the cabin (day / night).
If the NIGHT mode is activated the signs are dimmed automatically
depending on the current cabin lighting intensity.
The active mode is highlighted green on the button.
Entire Scenario Scenario buttons Pushing an entire scenario button starts the corresponding entire
Button (several different lighting scenario in the assigned areas.
buttons, e.g. DAY Pushing the button again starts the currently selected entire lighting
BOARD) scenario again.
Pushing another entire scenario button starts the other entire lighting
scenario.
DIM 50% / DIM There are two DIM buttons (DIM10% and DIM50%) Pushing the DIM
10% buttons dims the lighting in the whole cabin to the according light
intensity.
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button typically turns the light in the assigned entry area to
100% visual brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button typically turns the light in the assigned entry area
to 50% visual brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 button typically turns the light in the assigned entry area
to 10% visual brightness.
HOW TO CONTROL THE ENTRY AREA ILLUMINATION VIA FAP / MINI FAP
Applicable to: ALL
HOW TO CONTROL THE ENTRY AREA ILLUMINATION VIA FAP OR MINI FAP
1. Push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function selector.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector (FAP only).
3. To switch ON the entry area lights at full brightness push BRT on the entry area control pad.
The entry area lights will illuminate with the corresponding brightness.
4. To set the brightness to a desired value push the corresponding button:
- Push DIM 1 to dim the entry area lights to 50% visual brightness.
- Push DIM 2 to dim the entry area lights to 10% visual brightness.
5. To switch OFF the entry area lights push the active (illuminated) button, i.e. DIM 1, DIM 2 or BRT.
The entry area lights will turn off.
CABIN ZONE ILLUMINATION CONTROL VIA FAP / MINI FAP SCENARIO CONTROL
Applicable to: ALL
To control the cabin zone illumination, each cabin zone has its own control pad.
Cabin Zone Control Pad
Button Description
SELECT Pushing the SELECT button displays an additional control pad (ADJUST).
Indicator Field Description
Mode and In the first line of the mode and status field the scenario title e.g. CRUISE is displayed.
Status The title of the current scenario remains displayed, even if it has been stopped or it has
ended, until a new scenario is selected.
The title of a scenario remains displayed until a new scenario is selected.
In the last line of the mode and status field the illumination status of the corresponding
area (e.g. ECONOMY CLASS) is displayed e.g. RUN.
The following illumination status are available:
- RUN: Lighting scenario is running.
- END: Lighting scenario has ended. The last settings of the previous lighting scenario
remain active until a new scenario or other settings are selected. The name of the
scenario remains in the first line of the mode and status field.
- MOD: The lighting was modified by the ▴ or ▾ icons. (These icons are disabled when a
scenario is running.)
- OFF: The lighting is switched off.
- BRT: The lighting is switched to full brightness (typically bright white light). This will
interrupt a running scenario.
When the SELECT button is pushed on the cabin zone control pad, the ADJUST control pad is
displayed on the right side of the cabin zone control pad.
Button Description
Zone wise Scenario Pushing a zone wise lighting scenario button starts the corresponding scenario
Selection in the assigned area.
e.g. CRUISE The activated button remains green (activated) as long as the scenario is
running.
The available zone wise lighting scenario buttons are displayed on the left side
of the ADJUST control pad.
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the lighting in the assigned area to typically bright
white light.
Note: If the BRT button is activated the scenario is interrupted .
▴ and ▾ Pushing ▴ or ▾ increases or decreases the brightness of the lighting in the
assigned area.
These buttons are disabled when a scenario is running.
OFF Pushing the OFF button turns OFF the lights in the assigned area.
Note: For safety reasons the staircase illumination can not be turned OFF
completely. It will always stay ON at a predefined brightness.
SKIP END Pushing the SKIP END button skips the rest of the running scenario to its end.
Button Description
REPEAT Pushing the REPEAT button repeats the running scenario (infinite loop).
Pushing the button a second time terminates the loop.
RECOV. Pushing the RECOV. button synchronizes back an overridden scenario after
using BRT, ▴, ▾, OFF.
Note: The ▴ and ▾ buttons are only available when a scenario has ended).
HOLD Pushing the HOLD button pauses the scenario. Pushing the button a second
time continues the scenario.
Indicator Description
Brightness Indicates the current visual brightness (in % or graphically).
1. Push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function selector.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector (FAP only).
3. Depending on the time of the day, push the DAY/NIGHT button on the GENERAL CABIN
SETTINGS control pad.
4. Push the SELECT button of the selected cabin zone control pad (e.g. First Class). The ADJUST
control pad for this cabin zone will be displayed.
5. Push any scenario button on the ADJUST control pad to start the corresponding scenario.
6. To turn the lights in the corresponding cabin zone OFF after the scenario, push the OFF button.
7. To increase or decrease the lighting brightness after the scenario in the corresponding cabin zone,
push either ▴ or ▾.
Room Illumination
CREW REST AREA ILLUMINATION
Applicable to: ALL
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the light in the assigned crew rest area to
100 % visual brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button turns the light in the assigned crew rest area to
approximately 50 % visual brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 button turns the light in the assigned crew rest area to
approximately 10 % visual brightness.
HOW TO CONTROL THE CREW REST AREA ILLUMINATION VIA FAP OR MINI FAP
1. Push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function selector.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector (FAP only).
3. To switch ON the crew rest area lighting push BRT on the corresponding control pad.
The crew rest area lighting will illuminate with the corresponding brightness.
4. To set the brightness to a desired value push the corresponding button:
- Push DIM 1 to dim the light in the crew rest area to approximately 50% visual brightness.
- Push DIM 2 to dim the light in the crew rest area to approximately 10% visual brightness.
5. To switch OFF the light in the crew rest area push the active (illuminated) button, i.e. DIM 1, DIM 2
or BRT. The light in the crew rest area will turn OFF.
LAVATORY ILLUMINATION
Applicable to: ALL
Note: For maintenance purpose or for cleaning the lighting logic can be overridden from the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP): Pushing the LAV MAINT hard key will set all lavatory lights to 100%
visual brightness, even if the door is fully open. Refer to Operation of the Lavatory Illumination.
LAVATORY ILLUMINATION CONTROL
The lavatory illumination is controlled by the Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS).
Sensors in the lavatory door frame monitor the door status (door open, door LOCKED or door
UNLOCKED). The door status influences the brightness of the lavatory lights.
Note: In lavatories for handicapped passengers, the ceiling light is constantly at 100% brightness,
independent from the sensors.
GALLEY ILLUMINATION
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the light in the assigned galley to 100% visual
brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button turns the light in the assigned galley to
approximately 50% visual brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 button turns the light in the assigned galley to
approximately 10% visual brightness.
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the light in the assigned galley to 100% visual
brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button turns the light in the assigned galley to
approximately 50% visual brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 button turns the light in the assigned galley to
approximately 10% visual brightness.
STAIRS ILLUMINATION
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Button Description
BRT Pushing the BRT button turns the light in the assigned stairs to 100% visual
brightness.
DIM 1 Pushing the DIM 1 button turns the light in the assigned stairs to
approximately 50% visual brightness.
DIM 2 Pushing the DIM 2 button turns the light in the assigned stairs to
approximately 10% visual brightness.
Note: For safety reasons the stairs illumination can not be turned OFF. It will always stay ON at a
predefined minimum brightness.
HOW TO CONTROL STAIRS LIGHTING VIA FAP OR MINI FAP
1. Push the LIGHTS button on the first level of the function selector.
2. Select a deck from the deck selector (FAP only).
3. To switch stairs lighting to full brightness push BRT on the corresponding control pad.
4. To set the brightness to a desired value push the corresponding button:
- Push DIM 1 to dim the stairs lighting to approximately 50% visual brightness.
- Push DIM 2 to dim the stairs lighting to approximately 10% visual brightness.
5. To switch the stairs lighting to minimum visual brightness push the active (illuminated) button, i.e.
DIM 1, DIM 2 or BRT.
Note: For safety reasons the stairs illumination can not be turned OFF. It will always stay ON at a
predefined minimum brightness.
Miscellaneous Lights
WORK LIGHTS
Applicable to: ALL
The work lights illuminate special working areas for the cabin crewmembers and the attendant seats. It
is a direct down light, similar to the (passenger) reading light. The work lights are manually adjustable
to an angle of +/- 25° and can be individually switched on and off.
WORK LIGHTS LOCATION
The work lights are installed in:
- Entry areas
• Cabin door linings
• Ceiling panels of the attendant stations, next to the cabin attendant seats
• etc.
- Rooms
• Galleys
• Crew Work Stations
• etc.
- Cabin Zones
• Some Passenger Service Units (PSU) above a seat row if a cabin attendant seat is part of this
particular row.
WORK LIGHT SWITCH
The lights are controlled individually by switches near the work light.
The switches are located:
- Next to the lights on a PSU.
- In the cabin door linings.
- Next to the cabin attendant seats (wall-mounted).
- Next to the cabin attendant work areas (wall-mounted)
- On galley switch panels.
READING LIGHTS
Applicable to: ALL
Button / Description
Function
R/L SET Pushing the R/L SET button turns ON all
assigned reading lights.
Note: The function of this button is available
on ground, only. The button is disabled
during flight.
The R/L SET button on the FAPs and mini FAPs
does not show the status of the reading lights
(i.e. the button is not illuminated green when the
reading lights ON).
R/L RESET Pushing the R/L RESET button turns OFF all
assigned reading lights.
Note: The function of this button is available
on ground, only. The button is disabled
during flight.
The R/L RESET button on the FAPs and mini
FAPs does not show the status of the reading
lights.
Function Description
R/L SET Pushing the R/L SET button turns ON reading lights for individual passenger
seats.
R/L RESET Pushing the R/L RESET button turns OFF reading lights for individual
passenger seats.
1. Push the SEAT SETTING button on the first level of the function selector of the FAP to open the
CABIN LIGHTING page.
For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
3. Push the SELECT button of the READING LIGHT control pad. The READING LIGHT SETTINGS
control pad is displayed.
Note: If the cabin crew selects a different seat identifier before the selection was confirmed via the
SELECT button, the current identifier in the target window will be overwritten.
If the cabin crew selects a different seat row number, the current indication for the seat row
number in the target seat window will be replaced. In addition, the seat identifier indication in
the target seat window will be deleted (the seat identifier has to be selected again).
If the cabin lighting control via FAP or mini FAP is not possible follow the procedure to recover a frozen
FAP: Refer to 04-40 Recovering a Frozen FAP
The emergency lighting system supplies basic illumination to the cabin and marks the exits and escape
paths during emergencies.
The emergency lighting system operates independently from the other lighting systems. Some parts of
the emergency lighting system also operate when there is no emergency. Other special items of the
emergency system are integrated parts of the lamps and light units of the normal lighting systems.
The emergency lighting system is controlled and supplied by the Emergency Power Supply Units
(EPSU). The EPSUs are able to supply all emergency lights for a minimum of 10 minutes.
The operation of the emergency lighting system depends on the position of the control switch on the
cockpit overhead-panel (EMER EXIT LT sw) and the position of the control switch on the Flight
Attendant Panels (EMER ON sw) in the cabin. Refer to Emergency Lighting - System Control.
The emergency lighting system has different functions:
- In standard operation:
• Show the way to the exits to leave the aircraft.
- In an emergency:
• Illuminate the cabin, if the general illumination has failed
• Show the way to the exits, if the cabin is full of smoke
• Illuminate the escape paths on the wings
• Illuminate the escape slides.
The purpose of the exit signs is to point out clearly to the passenger the next exit. They are illuminated
when the emergency lighting system is activated.
Red letters and arrows are used on lenses with a light emitting surfaces.
EXIT LOCATOR
Exit Locators, which are visible from every spot of the aisles, are installed to indicate the position of the
exit areas. An Area Call Panel (ACP) is integrated in the housing of the Exit Locators.
Exit Locator
EXIT MARKER
Exit Marker indicate the position of the doors and are installed right above the exits. A transparent
window for a sill light is found at the bottom side of the Exit Marker. The exit marking sign illuminates
the doorsill and the door handles when the emergency lighting system is activated.
Exit Marker
The purpose of the exit signs is to point out clearly to the passenger the next exit. They are illuminated
when the emergency lighting system is activated.
EXIT LOCATOR
Exit Locators, which are visible from every spot of the aisles, are installed to indicate the position of the
exit areas. An Area Call Panel (ACP) is integrated in the housing of the Exit Locators.
Exit Locator
EXIT MARKER
Exit Marker indicate the position of the doors and are installed right above the exits. A transparent
window for a sill light is found at the bottom side of the Exit Marker. The exit marking sign illuminates
the doorsill and the door handles when the emergency lighting system is activated.
Exit Marker
The cabin emergency lights are designed to illuminate the cabin sufficiently to identify the emergency
exit areas. These are the different types of cabin emergency lights:
- Ceiling Emergency LED Lights
- Emergency LED spotlights
- Staircase LED light
CEILING EMERGENCY LED LIGHTS
The Ceiling Emergency LED Lights (CELLI) are installed between two ceiling panels in the upper and
main deck over the main aisles in longitudinal direction. The Ceiling Emergency LED Lights illuminate
the aisles when the emergency lighting system is activated.
Example of Ceiling Emergency LED Lights
The cabin emergency lights are designed to illuminate the cabin sufficiently to identify the emergency
exit areas. These are the different types of cabin emergency lights:
- Ceiling Emergency LED Lights
- Emergency LED spotlights
- Staircase LED light
CEILING EMERGENCY LED LIGHTS
The Ceiling Emergency LED Lights (CELLI) are installed between two ceiling panels in the upper and
main deck over the main aisles in longitudinal direction. The Ceiling Emergency LED Lights illuminate
the aisles when the emergency lighting system is activated.
Example of Ceiling Emergency LED Lights
Door M3 (main deck) has an emergency door light that functions as overwing emergency light. In case
of an emergency the overwing emergency light will guide passengers to the emergency slides.
The escape slide emergency lights illuminate the escape slides of all doors and the area in front of the
slides when they are deployed.
At door M3 (main deck) a special form of escape slide is installed, which leads as an escape path from
the door to the edge of the wing, where the slide goes down. This escape path on the wing is also
illuminated by the Emergency Slide Lights.
The emergency slide lights are integrated into the slides.
COCKPIT WAYLIGHT
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit waylight turns OFF automatically after 60 seconds. Switching ON the cockpit waylight is L1
The status of the doors and slides can be checked at any time via the DOORS / SLIDES page on any
Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
The cabin crew can view the doors / slides status via two pages:
- DOORS / SLIDES page displaying the status of all doors
- DOORS / SLIDES MAIN DECK or DOORS / SLIDES UPPER DECK page.
For more information about the:
- Access of the pages: Refer to 06-40-20 Position of the DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP
- Description of the pages: Refer to 06-40-30 DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP
- Door location: Refer to 09-10-10 Door Location
- Door operation: Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Opening from the Inside, Refer to 09-10-30 Normal
Closing from the Inside
SUMMARY
In some cases, during flight, the CIDS Caution button flashes amber with an information message
indicating the Doors/Slides page.
When the cabin crew selects the corresponding Doors/Slides page:
- there is no associated failure message,
- the information message disappears,
- the CIDS caution button becomes steady amber for the rest of the flight.
OPERATIONAL RECOMMENDATION
When the Caution button flashes on the FAP, with an information message indicating the Doors/Slides
page, the cabin crew must:
- select the Doors/Slides page,
- check there is no associated failure message
If there is no associated failure message, the cabin crew should disregard the caution indication.
The cabin crew can access the DOORS / SLIDES page by pushing the DOOR/SLIDES button on the
first level of the function selector on the FAP.
Pushing a button from the deck selector on the DOORS / SLIDES page displays the
- DOORS / SLIDES ALL page, or
- DOORS / SLIDES UPPER DECK page, or
- DOORS / SLIDES MAIN DECK page.
DOORS / SLIDES All Page on the FAP
Note: As the avionics compartment door is not equipped with a slide, disregard part of the legend
"SLIDE: ARMED & READY".
The status of the doors and slides can be checked at any time on all Flight Attendant Panels (FAPs).
For information about the
- Access of the pages: Refer to 06-40-20 Position of the DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP
- Door location: Refer to 09-10-10 Door Location
- Door operation: Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Opening from the Inside
DOORS / SLIDES All Page on the FAP
Note: As the avionics compartment door is not equipped with a slide, disregard part of the legend
"SLIDE: ARMED & READY".
- All closed doors with armed slides are shown as green rectangles inside the aircraft symbol,
- All unlocked doors are shown as red rectangles outside the aircraft symbol,
- All open doors are shown as red rectangles outside the aircraft symbol, and
- Information about bottle pressure (low) as well as slide condition (disarmed) are shown in amber
text next to the related door.
In addition, the DOORS / SLIDES page provides messages on which the cabin crew has to act: Refer
to 06-40-40 Messages on the FAP
In closed (normal) condition, the avionics compartment door (AVNCS) is marked by a green rectangle.
Note: As the avionics compartment door is not equipped with a slide, disregard part of the legend
"SLIDE: ARMED & READY".
Messages on the FAP for "Check Upper Avionics Door" and Their Related Buttons
In the case the Upper Deck avionics door is detected as not closed (e. g. an unauthorized opening):
- A triple chime sounds.
The air conditioning system and the cabin air distribution system makes sure that air temperature, air
freshness and cabin pressure are comfortable for passengers and crew in the cockpit and the cabin
during all operating conditions.
A mix of fresh and recirculated air flows from the under floor mixer unit through the cabin distribution
lines to the air outlets of the cabin.
The outlets are installed above and below the overhead stowage compartments.
In addition, each passenger has an individual and adjustable air outlet. The different rooms of the cabin
(galleys, lavatories, crew rests) are also equipped with additional air outlets.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
For best passenger and crew comfort a Temperature Control System (TCS) controls the temperature
of the air in the cabin and cockpit, which comes from the cabin air distribution system.
The TCS adjusts and controls the temperature of the air in the Upper Deck, the Main Deck, as well as
in the Lower Deck compartments (necessary for the transport of sensitive cargo and for crew rest
compartments).
It is possible to control the cabin temperature from the
- Cockpit: See Temperature Control via AIR Panel in the Cockpit
- Cabin: See Temperature Control via CIDS Control Panels in the Cabin.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA AIR PANEL IN THE COCKPIT
If the CABIN selector on the AIR overhead panel in the cockpit is not set to the PURS SEL position, the
flight crew must set the cabin temperature.
The controls in the cockpit enable the flight crew to select a temperature for the entire cabin. It is not
possible to control the different temperature areas individually.
For more information about temperature control from the cockpit: Refer to 06-50-30 Position of the Air
Conditioning Controls in the Cockpit.
The air conditioning system and the cabin air distribution system makes sure that air temperature, air
freshness and cabin pressure are comfortable for passengers and crew in the cockpit and the cabin
during all operating conditions.
A mix of fresh and recirculated air flows from the under floor mixer unit through the cabin distribution
lines to the air outlets of the cabin.
The outlets are installed above and below the overhead stowage compartments.
In addition, each passenger has an individual and adjustable air outlet. The different rooms of the cabin
(galleys, lavatories, crew rests) are also equipped with additional air outlets.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
For best passenger and crew comfort a Temperature Control System (TCS) controls the temperature
of the air in the cabin and cockpit, which comes from the cabin air distribution system.
The TCS adjusts and controls the temperature of the air in the Upper Deck, the Main Deck, as well as
in the Lower Deck compartments (necessary for the transport of sensitive cargo and for crew rest
compartments).
It is possible to control the cabin temperature from the
- Cockpit: See Temperature Control via AIR Panel in the Cockpit
- Cabin: See Temperature Control via CIDS Control Panels in the Cabin.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL VIA AIR PANEL IN THE COCKPIT
If the CABIN selector on the AIR overhead panel in the cockpit is not set to the PURS SEL position, the
flight crew must set the cabin temperature.
The controls in the cockpit enable the flight crew to select a temperature for the entire cabin. It is not
possible to control the different temperature areas individually.
For more information about temperature control from the cockpit: Refer to 06-50-30 Position of the Air
Conditioning Controls in the Cockpit.
The air conditioning system can be controlled deck-wise: The entire Upper Deck (UD) is divided into
four Upper Deck zones (zones 1 thru 4) and up to 7 different independently adjustable cabin
temperature zones.
The cabin temperature zones are displayed as blue rectangles, each containing the current
temperature value (°C or °F) on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP. Refer to 06-50-30
Position of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
UD - Typical Temperature Zones and the Cabin Zones
The air conditioning system can be controlled deck-wise: The entire Main Deck (MD) is divided into
four Main Deck zones (zones 5 thru 8) and up to 8 different independently adjustable cabin
temperature zones.
The cabin temperature zones are displayed as blue rectangles, each containing the current
temperature value (°C or °F) on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP. Refer to 06-50-30
Position of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
MD - Typical Temperature Zones and Cabin Zones
The air conditioning system can be controlled deck-wise: The compartments on the Lower Deck (LD),
are divided into two zones (zone 9 and 10) and one independently adjustable cabin temperature zone
per compartment. If installed, the temperature zones are in crew rest compartment(s) inside the
forward and/or inside the aft compartment of the LD.
The cabin temperature zones are displayed as blue rectangles, each containing the current
temperature value (°C or °F) on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP. Refer to 06-50-30
Position of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
LD - Typical Temperature Zones and the Cabin Zones
The temperature for the cockpit and the cabin is controlled separately.
There are two selectors on the AIR panel for temperature control:
- CKPT (Cockpit temperature)
- CABIN (Cabin temperature).
Note: Normally the CABIN selector is in the PURS SEL position to enable the cabin crew to control
the cabin temperature via the FAP and mini FAP and /or AAP if installed.
AIR Conditioning Panel Location
For more information about the AIR conditioning panel in the cockpit: Refer to 02-110-30-21 Air
Conditioning Panel
For information about the temperature control via FAP: Refer to 06-50-30 Position of the
TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
The cabin crew can access the CABIN TEMPERATURE all decks page by pushing the TEMP. button
on the first level of the function selector on the FAP.
Pushing a button from the deck selector on the CABIN TEMPERATURE all decks page displays the:
- CABIN TEMPERATURE MAIN DECK page
- CABIN TEMPERATURE UPPER DECK page.
If there are controllable temperature areas on the Lower Deck (LD) a corresponding CABIN
TEMPERATURE page is displayed.
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
For information about the CABIN TEMPERATURE pages: Refer to 06-50-40 Cabin Temperature
Settings from the Cabin
The temperature control of the cabin is possible from the cockpit or the cabin.
- Refer to 06-50-40 Cabin Temperature Control from the Cockpit
- Refer to 06-50-40 Cabin Temperature Settings from the Cabin
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT TEMPERATURE CONTROL FROM THE CABIN
The cabin crew can manually set the temperature in the entire cabin, on a single deck or in a single
temperature area.
The cabin crew can make the adjustments within a given range on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP),
mini FAP and/or on the Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) (if installed). This range is defined in the
Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) (normally between 18 °C (64 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F)).
The current and the target temperatures of the different cabin temperature areas are indicated on the
CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP, mini FAP and/or on the AAP (if installed).
The ALL RESET button deletes all manual inputs and activates a preselected (CAM defined)
temperature.
The ALL ZONE function enables the cabin crew to adjust the temperature value for all temperature
zones with sensors installed per deck.
Note: Temperature control from the cabin is only possible if the CABIN TEMPERATURE selector on
the cockpit overhead panel AIR is in the PURS SEL position.
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS ON GROUND, PRIOR TO FLIGHT
Set the cockpit and cabin selections for once prior to a flight:
The cabin crew should set all temperature zones to the same value within a range between 23 °C
(73.4 °F) and 24 °C (75 °F) on the CABIN TEMPERATURE pages of the FAP. This is only possible if
the CABIN TEMPERATURE selector on the cockpit overhead panel AIR is in the PURS SEL position.
Note: - On ground, a lower temperature than the recommended 23 °C to 24 °C (73.4 °F to 75 °F)
will unnecessarily increase the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) load.
- In case of a temperature control failure in the cabin (temperature selection via FAP, mini
FAP or AAP is not possible), the flight crew is automatically informed via a corresponding
ECAM alert and can adjust the temperature manually from the cockpit.
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS IN FLIGHT
The cabin crew can adjust the cabin temperature settings on the FAP, mini FAP or AAP. However it is
recommended to do this only if it is necessary.
There are individual air outlets installed for the passengers above their seats in the Passenger Service
Units (PSU), that are integrated into the Over-Head Stowage Compartments (OHSC).
The direction of the air stream can be adjusted by moving the outlet in its socket in as desired.
Operation of an Air Outlet
Air outlets are also installed in the different rooms of the cabin:
- In the galleys,
- In the lavatories,
- At the door areas,
- At the attendant stations, and
- In the crew rest compartments.
The used air from the cabin is extracted through the floor panels and discharged outboard.
Note: The air temperature regulation of a crew rest compartment is always independent from the
cabin temperature selector.
TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT RANGE CONTROLLED FROM THE COCKPIT
: If the CABIN selector is not in the PURS SEL
position, settings between 18 °C (64 °F) / COLD and
30 °C (86 °F) / HOT are possible.
The intermediate position corresponds to a
temperature value of 24 °C (75 °F).
If the CABIN selector is used for temperature adjustments (it is not in the PURS SEL position), a
detailed display of temperature information on the FAP and mini FAP is still possible. However,
selections on the FAP are not possible. The cabin temperature can be changed from the cockpit
only.
Title Description
Deck Selector The deck selector is on the left hand side of the FAP screen.
Pushing one of the deck selector buttons displays the corresponding
detailed CABIN TEMPERATURE page on the FAP.
Aircraft Symbols Touching one of the aircraft symbols displays the corresponding detailed
CABIN TEMPERATURE page.
Temperature Zones The blue rectangles on the aircraft symbols indicate the temperature
zones and their current temperature.
Title Description
Deck Selector Pushing one of the deck selector buttons displays the corresponding
detailed CABIN TEMPERATURE page on the FAP.
Temperature Zones on the The blue rectangles on the aircraft symbols indicate the temperature
Aircraft Symbol zones and their current temperature.
Temperature Zones There is one temperature zone button per indicated temperature zone.
Buttons The text on the button indicates the seat row numbers corresponding to
(e.g. S/R 1-5) the temperature zone.
Pushing a temperature zone button displays an additional temperature
zone control pad. The "active" temperature zone button is displayed in
green and the temperature zone "rectangle" on the aircraft symbol has a
green border.
Title Description
Temperature Zone Control When the cabin crew has pushed a temperature zone button (e.g. S/R 1
Pad -5) the corresponding temperature zone control pad is displayed.
Temperature Zone Control Pad
ALL ZONES RESET The cabin crew can reset per deck the temperature of all temperature
Control Pad zones with sensors installed to a predefined value by pushing the RESET
button on the ALL ZONES RESET control pad. ALL ZONES RESET
Control Pad
ALL ZONES Button Pushing the ALL ZONES button displays the ALL ZONES control pad. Via
the ALL ZONES control pad the temperature in all zones with sensors
installed can be adjusted (corrected). ALL ZONES Temperature Control
Pad
Title Description
Thermometer The thermometer consists of a scale and a bulb.
There are several indicators linked to the thermometer. The indications
are described below.
Current temperature The current temperature in the selected zone is indicated on the scale
of the thermometer and in the bulb of the thermometer (e.g. 24.0 °C
(75.2 °F)).
Target temperature The currently selected target temperature is indicated by a green arrow
pointing on the temperature scale (e.g. 23.0 °C (73.4 °F)).
Adjustment window: The adjustment window (SELECTED TEMPERATURE) indicates the
SELECTED selected target temperature (e.g. 23.0 °C (73.4 °F)). The value can be
TEMPERATURE adjusted via the ▴ and ▾ icons below the adjustment window.
▴ and ▾ icons Pushing the ▴icon increases the cabin temperature.
Pushing the ▾ icon decreases the cabin temperature.
Title Description
Scale The scale indicates the range within which the temperature in all zones
with sensors installed can be corrected (adjusted).
The selected value will decrease or increase the current temperature in
the different cabin zones.
Green Indicator Arrow The green indicator arrow indicates the currently selected value for
temperature adjustment for all zones with sensors installed.
Adjustment Window: The adjustment window indicates the selected temperature adjustment
TEMPERATURE value. The value can be adjusted via the ▴ and ▾ icons below the
CORRECTION adjustment window.
▴ and ▾ Icons Pushing the ▴ icon selects a higher adjustment value.
Pushing the ▾ icon selects a lower adjustment value.
Note: The temperature changes per area should be limited to ±0.5 °C
(±0.9 °F) every 30 min. Disregarding this limitation could lead to
noticeable deviations of the current temperature.
ACCEPT Button Pushing the ACCEPT button applies the temperature adjustment
(correction).
Title Description
Temperature Value In the temperature value display box the preselected temperature (CAM
Display Box defined) is displayed (e.g. 22.0 °C (71.6 °F)).
RESET Button Pushing the RESET button applies the preselected temperature value
to all temperature zones with sensors installed on the displayed deck.
To monitor or control the cabin temperature for a temperature zone follow the steps described below.
1. Push the TEMP. button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the CABIN
TEMPERATURE page of the FAP.
Note: If there is a crew rest compartment installed on the lower deck, an additional temperature
area is displayed on the LD aircraft symbol.
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or push the corresponding
button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
3. Push a temperature zone button to display the related TEMPERATURE ZONE control pad.
4. Push the ▴ icon to increase or push the ▾ icon to decrease the temperature of the selected
temperature zone.
Note: The temperature changes per area should be limited to ±0.5 °C (±0.9 °F) every 30 min.
Disregarding this limitation could lead to noticeable deviations of the current temperature.
To correct the temperature value of all temperature zones with sensors installed follow the steps
described below.
Note: The ALL ZONES function is only applicable per deck.
1. Push the TEMP. button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the CABIN
TEMPERATURE page of the FAP.
Note: If there is a crew rest compartment installed on the lower deck, an additional temperature
area is displayed on the LD aircraft symbol.
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or push the corresponding
button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
3. Push the ALL ZONES button to display the related ALL ZONES control pad.
4. Push the ▴ icon to increase or push the ▾ icon to decrease the temperature value indicated in the
adjustment window.
5. Push the ACCEPT button to apply the temperature correction to all temperature zones on the deck.
A blue card on the FAP page indicates that the correction is accepted and applied.
Note: The current temperature of all individual cabin zones will be corrected by the selected
value.
To reset all zones of a deck to a predefined temperature follow the steps below.
1. Push the TEMP. button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the CABIN
TEMPERATURE page of the FAP.
Note: If there is a crew rest compartment installed on the lower deck, an additional temperature
area is displayed on the LD aircraft symbol.
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or choose the
corresponding button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
3. Push the ALL ZONES button on the right side of the aircraft symbol to display the ALL ZONE
RESET control pad.
4. Push the RESET button on the ALL ZONE RESET control pad to reset all zones to the predefined
temperature (in this case 22 °C (72 °F)).
The current temperature of a zone with a faulty sensor or missing sensor data is indicated as "--" inside
the related blue temperature rectangle in the aircraft symbol. In addition, the indication level of the
animated thermometer on the corresponding TEMPERATURE ZONE control pad is not displayed and "--"
is displayed in the bulb. Nevertheless the SELECTED TEMPERATURE is still displayed and can be
changed with the ▴ or ▾ icon.
If a temperature sensor is faulty or the sensor data is missing the Temperature Control System (TCS)
calculates the average temperature of all other temperature areas. The average temperature is used to
control the temperature of the temperature area with the faulty or missing sensor automatically.
This could lead to low temperatures in less occupied temperature zones (seating areas e.g. First Class).
To avoid this it is possible to increase (or decrease) this calculated temperature value manually via the
normal temperature selection function (▴ or ▾ icon). The adjustment of the current temperature must be
adapted by trying (e.g. according to passenger request).
Note: Due to technical reasons related to the customization of cabin layouts there may be cases where
some cabin temperature sensors are disconnected as per design and therefore the "--" indication
can be a normal condition.
Continued on the next page
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Does any temperature zone on the aircraft symbol indicate "--"? Go to 2 END
2. Does any passenger complain about the temperature in the zone without
sensor information? Go to 3 END
3. On the corresponding CABIN TEMPERATURE xx DECK Page:
1. Push the corresponding temperature zone button and the related
TEMPERATURE ZONE control pad is displayed.
2. Push the ▴ icon to increase or push the ▾ icon to decrease the
temperature of the selected temperature zone, depending on the
customer request.
3. Wait a short time for the change in temperature. Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Is the passenger comfortable with the changes in temperature? END Go to 3
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is very hot air blowing from cabin air outlets in a specific zone? Go to 2 END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
2. To reduce the temperature of the air blowing from the cabin air outlets
follow the actions described below:
1. Push the TEMP. button of the function selector (page bottom) to
display the CABIN TEMPERATURE page of the FAP.
Note: If there is a crew rest compartment installed on the lower
deck, an additional temperature area is displayed on the LD
aircraft symbol.
Typical CABIN TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
3. Push the temperature zone button of the affected zone to display the
related TEMPERATURE ZONE control pad.
4. Push the ▾ icon to decrease the temperature of the selected
temperature zone by 1 °C (1.8 °F).
5. Close any curtains between the different zones (provided that curtains
are installed) in order to reduce the air exchange between the zones.
Wait a while for the changes to take effect. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Is the temperature of the air blowing from the cabin air outlets normal? Go to 5 Go to 4
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
4. If there is another seat available:
Ask the passenger on the affected seat to move to the other seat. Go to 5 Go to 5
5. Make an entry into the cabin logbook mentioning the:
- Fault
- Countermeasures taken. END END
The cabin crew can access the WATER/WASTE page by pushing the WATER/WASTE button on the
first level of the function selector on the FAP.
Pushing a button from the deck selector on the WATER/WASTE page displays the
- WATER/WASTE MAIN DECK page
- WATER/WASTE UPPER DECK page.
Typical WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP - All Decks
tanks and ensures, that the water inside the tanks does not freeze in cold weather conditions.
The potable water distribution system contains:
- A water heater
- A water conditioner
- A heating control unit.
The potable water from the potable water tanks is supplied via a system of distribution lines. Electrically
and/or mechanically operated valves control the potable water distribution system.
Compressed air from the air supply boost system supplies the pressure to move the potable water from
the tanks to the galleys and the lavatories.
WATER QUANTITY INDICATING L1
The water quantity indicating system supplies information about the quantity of the potable water in the
potable water tanks. Two water level sensors measure the level of the potable water.
The potable water quantity is shown on:
- The Flight Attendant Panels (FAPs) on the Water/Waste pages, and on
- The Potable Water Indication Panel (PWIP) of the Potable Water Service Panel (PWSP). This
panel is located on the right side of the belly fairing outside the aircraft.
Continued on the next page
WATER DRAINING L2
The water tanks and the distribution system can be drained through:
- The fill/drain valve and the fill/drain nipple on the Potable Water Service Panel (PWSP), and
- The drain valve, and drain nipple on the Potable Water Drain Panel (PWDP), located near to the
nose landing gear.
Right Hand
Main Deck
Main Deck Floor Lavatories
Aircraft Skin
Forward Potable Water Waste
Drain Panel Forward Aft Service Panel Service Panel
Drain Mast Drain Mast
Potable-Water Line
Waste-Water Line
Toilet-Water Line
There are four waste tanks on board the aircraft. They are located in the aft of the aircraft, near the rear
pressure bulkhead.
Continued on the next page
Each of the two waste tanks for the Main Deck has a capacity of 675 l (178 US Gal). And each of the L2
two waste tanks for the Upper Deck has a capacity of 373 l (99 US Gal). The capacity of all four waste
tanks is in total 2 096 l (554 US Gal).
For each waste tank there is a vacuum toilet subsystem. A single vacuum generator supplies each of
the subsystems with the necessary negative pressure (vacuum). The vacuum generator system is only
deactivated during the cruise phase of a flight.
WASTE-WATER DRAINING SYSTEM L1
The waste-water draining system discards the waste water from the galley sinks, the lavatory
washbasins and the humidifiers overboard.
Waste-Water Draining System
Washbasin
Drain-Valve
Assembly
Main Deck Floor Drain Valve
Aircraft Skin
The waste water flows from the washbasins/sinks in the galleys and lavatories through the drain valves L2
of the drain lines to the drain masts. The drain masts are attached to the outside aircraft structure and
they are heated (ice-protection).
The air supply system supplies pressurized air to the potable water system. The pressurized air moves
the potable water from the potable water tanks to the galleys and the lavatories.
The normal operating pressure of the potable water system is between 35 PSI (2.41 bar) and 41 PSI L2
(2.83 bar).
The system has:
- Two air compressors,
- Two air compressor motor controllers,
- An air manifold assembly,
- A depress valve.
Title Description
Deck Selector Pushing one of the deck selector buttons displays the corresponding
detailed WATER/WASTE page on the FAP.
Aircraft Symbols All decks of the aircraft with water/waste relevant equipment are displayed
on the FAP. Touching one of the symbols displays the WATER/WASTE
per deck page with the detailed information.
Title Description
Deck Selector Pushing one of the deck selector buttons displays the corresponding
detailed WATER/WASTE page on the FAP.
WASTE QUANTITY The WASTE QUANTITY indicator shows the current quantity of waste in
Indicator the waste tanks.
WATER QUANTITY The WATER QUANTITY indicator shows the current quantity of water in
Indicator the water tanks.
WATER SUPPLY Control Pushing the SHUT DOWN button on the WATER SUPPLY control pad
Pad shuts down/reactivates the water supply to the cabin. The cabin crew must
confirm/cancel the shut down/reactivation on a displayed blue card by
pushing either the YES or NO button. Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water Supply
Shut Down Function
AUTO FLUSH Button Pushing the AUTO FLUSH button flushes and drains the most forward
toilets and galley sinks to clean the waste lines. A blue card, reading
AUTO FLUSH ACTIVE indicates that the AUTO FLUSH button was
pushed. Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water/Waste Auto Flush Function
PRE-SELECT Button Pushing the PRE-SELECT button displays the SELECTED QUANTITY
control pad. Refer to 06-60-40-40 Water Quantity Preselection
Title Description
WATER QUANTITY The WATER QUANTITY indicator shows the current quantity of water in
Indicator the water tanks.
The preselected quantity is indicated via a green arrow next to the
WATER QUANTITY symbol.
Title Description
PRE-SELECT Button Pushing the PRE-SELECT button displays the SELECTED QUANTITY
control pad.
Display Box The display box on the SELECTED QUANTITY control pad displays the
selected water quantity in %.
▴ and ▾ Icons Pushing the ▴ or ▾ icons selects a water quantity between 30% and 100%.
Pushing an icon once increases or decreases the quantity in 10% steps.
Note: The preselection function is not available during servicing procedures. If the PRE-SELECT
button is pushed during a servicing procedure the message SERVICING IN PROGRESS is
displayed on the FAP. The cabin crew has to make any preselection prior to the ground
servicing.
WATER/WASTE AUTO FLUSH FUNCTION
The auto flush function flushes and drains the most forward toilets (lavatories) to clean the waste lines
on all decks. The waste is drained to the waste tanks.
CAUTION After the aircraft has landed at an airport with cold weather conditions (temperatures
below freezing point) it is mandatory to start the auto-flush function to prevent the pipes
from freezing.
To make sure that the entire waste line from the forward to the aft fuselage is flushed, the auto flush is
carried out at the most forward toilet.
For the toilets there is no difference whether they are closed or open, a flush cycle will run at the most
forward toilet.
Selecting the AUTO FLUSH button on the WATER/WASTE page of the FAP initiates the procedure
when the aircraft is in the pre-parking position on ground.
During the flush cycle the AUTO FLUSH button is illuminated in green and a blue card displays with the
message AUTO FLUSH ACTIVE.
The auto flush will not start at all lines simultaneously, there will be a short time interval between the
flush cycles. A second flush cycle will start automatically after the first one has finished.
The auto flush function does not work:
- During flight
- If the waste tanks are full
- When the aircraft is in service mode
- If the vacuum generation is not available.
WATER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN FUNCTION
The cabin crew can use the shut down function on the FAP to stop or reactivate the supply of potable
water to all lavatories and galleys.
CAUTION Shutting down (depressurize) the entire water supply system is mandatory:
- After landing at an airport where there is a cold weather condition to prevent the
potable water lines from freezing
- After the circuit breaker(s) COM 1 and /or COM 2 (in the cockpit) were pulled by the
flight crew (during flight or on ground)
- In the case of a (massive) water leakage.
Selecting the water supply SHUT DOWN button on the GENERAL A/C SETTINGS control pad of the
WATER/WASTE page on the FAP initiates the potable water shut down procedure for the entire cabin:
- The SHUT DOWN button turns green
- The cabin crew confirms with YES on the indicated blue card
- The message POTABLE WATER SHUT- DOWN ACTIVE is displayed in the message box
- The indication NO WATER PRESSURE is displayed on the aircraft symbol.
To reactivate the potable water supply push the SHUT DOWN button again.
Note: Depending on the water level inside the tank the shut down or reactivation can take up to a few
minutes.
To preselect the water quantity for a flight follow the steps described below.
1. Push the WATER/WASTE button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the
WATER/WASTE page of the FAP.
Typical WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP - All Decks
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or push the corresponding
button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
3. Push the PRE-SELECT button to display the SELECTED QUANTITY control pad.
4. Use the ▴ or ▾ icons to select the desired water quantity. The selection is displayed in the display
box on the SELECTED QUANTITY control pad. Additionally the selection is displayed with a green
arrow next to the WATER QUANTITY symbol.
Note: The default water quantity is 100%. The quantity can be adjusted in 10% steps. 30% is the
lowest selectable water quantity.
5. Push the PRE-SELECT button to close the SELECTED QUANTITY control pad.
Note: The preselection function is not available during servicing procedures. If the PRE-SELECT
button is pushed during a servicing procedure the message SERVICING IN PROGRESS is
displayed on the FAP. The cabin crew has to make any preselection prior to the ground
servicing.
CAUTION After the aircraft has landed at an airport with cold weather conditions (temperatures
below freezing point) it is mandatory to start the auto-flush function to prevent the pipes
from freezing.
To clean the waste line, flush and drain the most forward toilets (lavatories) as soon as possible after
landing (landing gear down) by following the steps described below:
1. At the FAP: Push the WATER/WASTE button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the
WATER/WASTE page of the FAP.
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or push the corresponding
button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
The auto flush will not start at all lines simultaneously, there will be a short time interval between the
flush cycles. A second flush cycle will start automatically after the first one has finished.
The SHUT DOWN button on the FAP enables the cabin crew to shut down the potable water supply of
the entire aircraft (e.g. in case of a leakage).
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or push the corresponding
button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
3. Push the SHUT DOWN button on the GENERAL A/C SETTINGS control pad.
4. Confirm the shut down of the water supply by pushing the YES button on the blue card.
To reactivate the water supply after a shut down follow the steps described below.
1. Push the WATER/WASTE button of the function selector (page bottom) to display the
WATER/WASTE page of the FAP.
Typical WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP - All Decks
2. To access the desired deck information, touch the related aircraft symbol or push the corresponding
button of the deck selector (located on the left hand side of the screen).
3. Push the active SHUT DOWN button on the WATER SUPPLY control pad.
4. Push the YES button on the blue card to confirm the reactivation of the water supply.
Depending on the water level inside the tank the reactivation of the potable water system can take up
to a few minutes. The SHUT DOWN button turns back grey.
The Smoke Detection (SD) system controls visual and aural smoke warning in the cabin in case of
smoke detection.
In addition, the system indicates smoke sensor INOP messages if a smoke detector has a defect. L2
The smoke sensors of this system are located in the lavatories, rooms, crew rest compartments and L1
System.
For information about the position of the SMOKE DETECTION pages on the CIDS control displays: L1
Refer to 06-70-20 Position of the Smoke Detection System on the FAPand Refer to 06-70-20 Position
of the Smoke Detection System on the Mini FAP.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
For the description of the SD system: Refer to 06-70-30 Description of the Smoke Detection System.
Continued on the next page
For the description of the SMOKE DETECTION page on the FAP: Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Warning
With a SMOKE Reset Button on the FAP.
For the description of the SMOKE DETECTION page on the mini FAP: Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke
Warning with SMOKE RESET Button on the Mini FAP.
Pushing the SMOKE DETECTION button on the FAP function selector displays the SMOKE
DETECTION page. The SMOKE DETECTION page displays the status of the smoke detectors on all
decks of the aircraft. The deck selector buttons are disabled.
Typical SMOKE DETECTION Page on the FAP
Note: The small squares on the decks of the aircraft indicate the location of the smoke detectors.
Selecting the SMOKE DETECTION button on the mini FAP function selector displays the SMOKE
DETECTION page.
A box on the SMOKE DETECTION page displays the status of the smoke detectors of the area that is
controlled by the mini FAP.
Typical SMOKE DETECTION Page on the Mini FAP
If no smoke is detected and all smoke detectors are operating, the SMOKE DETECTION page displays
the SYSTEM OK message.
On the right hand side of the box there is a scroll bar. If there are more messages available than fit in
the box, this is indicated by the scroll bar. More messages are available if the PREV. PAGE and the
NEXT PAGE button are enabled. The cabin crew can use the PREV. PAGE or NEXT PAGE button to
display the additional messages.
The Smoke Detection (SD) system receives signals from smoke detectors that are installed in each
lavatory, IFE control center, room and crew rest compartment.
If smoke is detected in the cabin, the SD system initiates aural and visual warnings that are distributed
via the CIDS for the cabin crew.
If a smoke detector has a fault or does not send any signal the SD system indicates a smoke sensor
fault message (INOP) on the FAP and mini FAP.
CABIN SMOKE WARNING
In the case of smoke in the cabin, there are the following warnings:
1. Aural Warnings
- Triple chime in the cabin, every 30 s.
2. Visual Warnings
- On all FAPs, all mini FAPs: text message with indication of the smoke location (SMOKE hardkey
lighted steady)
- On the AAPs: smoke indicator pushbutton lighted (if available)
- On the AIPs: text message with indication of the smoke location, red LED flashing
- On the ACPs located close to the location of the detected smoke: amber flashing light
- The Smoke Indicator / Call Light (at the respective lavatory or IFE control center) shows the
respective location of the smoke.
If smoke is detected in a lavatory, the illumination of the respective lavatory is switched to a predefined
brightness.
SMOKE IN THE CREW REST COMPARTMENT
If smoke is detected in a CRC, there are the following warnings:
1. Aural Warnings
- A wake-up chime in the respective CRC (duration: 30 s)
- Triple chime every 30 s.
2. Visual Warnings
- The Smoke Indicator / Call Light (at the respective CRC) shows the location of the smoke.
If smoke is detected in a CRC, the illumination of the respective CRC is switched to a predefined
brightness.
In case of smoke detection in the cabin, In addition to the smoke indications on the FAP and mini FAP,
there are also indications on the:
- Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Indication on the Additional Attendant Panel
- Additional Indication Panel (AIP)
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Indication on the Attendant Indication Panel
- Area Control Panel (ACP)
Refer to 06-70-30 Smoke Indication on the Area Call Panel
It is possible to reset the visual and aural warnings (smoke chime, the ACP as well as the AIP
indication) via the SMOKE LAV pb on the related AAP.
Note: The indications on the FAP stay as long as smoke is detected. If there is no more smoke
detected, the Smoke Detection Control Unit (SDCU) resets all visual and aural indications
automatically.
In case of smoke in the cabin the amber segments on the corresponding Area Call Panel (ACP) flash.
Amber Indicators on a Typical ACP
In the case of smoke in the cabin the amber segment on the corresponding Area Call Panel (ACP) will
flash.
Amber Indicator on a Typical ACP
The SEAT SETTINGS system page is used to provide the control pads that control passenger call and
reading light settings per seat. In addition, this page provides controls for the entire and zone wise
PASSENGER CALL RESET and CHIME INHIBIT.
The cabin crew can access the SEAT SETTINGS page on ground and in flight.
For information about the seat setting function: Refer to 06-80-20 Position of the SEAT SETTINGS
Page on the FAP
For information about the passenger call settings: Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - PASSENGER Call
Settings
For information about the reading light settings: Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - Reading Lights
Settings
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
For information about passenger call settings: Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - PASSENGER Call
Settings
For information about reading light settings: Refer to 06-80-30 Seat Settings - Reading Lights Settings.
Title Description
SELECT Button (PASSENGER Pushing the SELECT button on the PASSENGER CALL control pad
CALL control pad) displays the PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS control pad.
When the PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS control pad is displayed
the SELECT button is indicated in green.
Pushing the SELECT button again will "close" the control pad. The
SELECT button will be indicated in grey.
SEAT ROW / SEAT The target seat window displays the selected seat row and seat
IDENTIFIER target window identifier.
When no seat was selected the target seat window is empty.
Title Description
SEAT ROW / SEAT Pushing the navigation controls enables the cabin crew to select an
IDENTIFIER navigation controls individual seat.
- TOP OF THE LIST icon
- SCROLL UP icon
- SCROLL DOWN icon
- BOTTOM OF THE LIST icon.
The Top of the list and BOTTOM OF THE LIST icons move the
selection by a maximum of 10 steps in either direction. If there are not
enough entries for the TOP OF THE LIST icon / BOTTOM OF THE
LIST icon, the respective icon will be disabled.
If there are no further entries above or below the colored bar
(highlight position) the respective SCROLL UP or SCROLL DOWN
icon is disabled.
SELECT Button (SEAT ROW / Pushing the SELECT button for the SEAT ROW selects the indicated
SEAT IDENTIFIER) seat row.
Pushing the SELECT button for the SEAT IDENTIFIER.
SEAT ROW / SEAT The SEAT ROW / SEAT IDENTIFIER indication are two lists:
IDENTIFIER Indication
- A list of the available seat rows on the left hand side of the control
pad
- A list of the available seat identifiers for the selected seat row on
the right hand side of the control pad.
The selected seat is indicated by a light blue bar.
Scroll bars show that there are more entries (seat row names,
respectively seat identifier) available in the selection boxes.
CLEAR Button Pushing the CLEAR button will undo the selection.
INHIBIT Pushing the INHIBIT button inhibits the passenger call function for
individual passenger seats.
INHIBITED SEATS Selection / The INHIBITED SEATS selection / indication box indicates the
Indication box inhibited seats.
The inhibited seats can be enabled again (individually or all at once).
Title Description
INHIBITED SEATS Navigation Pushing the navigation controls enables the cabin crew to select an
Controls individual seat.
- TOP OF THE LIST icon
- SCROLL UP icon
- SCROLL DOWN icon
- BOTTOM OF THE LIST icon.
The TOP OF THE LIST and BOTTOM OF THE LIST icons move the
selection by a maximum of 10 steps in either direction.
If there are not enough entries for the TOP OF THE LIST icon /
BOTTOM OF THE LIST icon, the respective icon will be disabled.
If there are no further entries above or below the colored bar
(highlight position) the respective SCROLL UP or SCROLL DOWN
button is disabled.
ENABLE Button Pushing the ENABLE button enables the passenger call function for a
selected seat in the INHIBITED SEATS selection / indication box.
ENABLE ALL Button Pushing the ENABLE ALL button enables the passenger call function
for all selected seats in the INHIBITED SEATS selection / indication
box.
CALL RESET Buttons There are CALL RESET buttons for cabin areas and rooms. Pushing
a CALL RESET button for a cabin area or the rooms will reset all calls
in that area (the rooms).
CHIME INHIBIT Buttons There are CHIME INHIBIT buttons for cabin areas and rooms.
Pushing a CHIME INHIBIT button for a cabin area or the rooms will
inhibit all calls in that area (the rooms).
The initial status for the indication of the selection boxes and buttons is: L2
- The selection box for the seat row numbers indicates all CAM assigned seat rows. All related
controls are available/enabled.
- The target seat window is empty
- The selection box for the seat identifier of the inhibited seats will be empty and all related controls
will be inhibited
- The INHIBIT and the CLEAR button will be disabled.
3. Push the SELECT button of the PASSENGER CALL control pad. The PASSENGER CALL
SETTINGS control pad is displayed.
After re-selection of a seat row number the current indication for the seat row number in the target seat
window will be replaced, additionally the seat identifier indication in the target seat window will be
deleted (i.e. the seat identifier has to be selected again).
As long as the seat selection (seat row number and seat identifier) is not completed the INHIBIT button
will be inactive.
By pushing the INHIBIT button the corresponding passenger call key corresponding to the seat
selection will be inhibited and the target seat window will be cleared.
In addition, the inhibited seat will appear in the inhibited seats selection/indication box. The INHIBIT
button itself has no status indication.
If the cabin crew did not complete the selection of a seat and the PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS page
is re-selected (page left and selected again), the target seat window will display the previous, not
completed, selection (seat row number and seat identifier).
Note: This indication handling is necessary to prevent misleading system operations, if the
PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS page is active on other FAPs.
L1
Refer to 06-80-30 PAX Call Reset
Refer to 06-80-30 How to Inhibit a Chime
HOW TO INHIBIT A CHIME
Use the SEAT SETTINGS page to inhibit the passenger call chime for individual seats.
When no seat is selected, the passenger call chime inhibit function is disabled and the corresponding
buttons / icons are displayed ghosted.
Typical PASSENGER CALL SETTINGS Control Pad (No Selected Seats)
1. Select the seat for which the passenger call chime shall be inhibited. Refer to 06-80-30 How to
Select A Seat for Passenger Call Functions
2. When the selected seat is displayed in the target seat window, push the INHIBIT button. The
selected seat will be displayed in the INHIBITED SEATS list on the left side of the PASSENGER
CALL SETTINGS control pad.
For information about how to enable the chime for the selected seat(s) again: Refer to 06-80-30 How to
Enable Inhibited Seats
3. To enable a single seat, select a seat with the navigation buttons. The selected seat is highlighted
with a colored bar.
4. Push the ENABLE button. The selected seat will be cleared from the selection box.
5. To enable all inhibited seats, push the ENABLE ALL button. All seats will be cleared from the
selection box.
If there are no entries (inhibited seats) in the inhibited seats selection box , the ENABLE and ENABLE
ALL button will be disabled (ghosted).
To reset the passenger calls in a cabin zone or room, push the CALL RESET button on the control pad
of the desired zone or room.
Title Description
SELECT Button (READING Pushing the SELECT button on the READING LIGHT control pad
LIGHT Control Pad) displays the READING LIGHT SETTINGS control pad.
When the READING LIGHT SETTINGS control pad is displayed the
SELECT button is indicated in green.
Target Seat Window The target seat window displays the selected seat row and seat
identifier.
When no seat was selected the target seat window is empty.
Title Description
SEAT ROW / SEAT Pushing the navigation controls enables the cabin crew to select an
IDENTIFIER Navigation individual seat.
Controls
- TOP OF THE LIST icon
- SCROLL UP icon
- SCROLL DOWN icon
- BOTTOM OF THE LIST icon.
The TOP OF THE LIST and BOTTOM OF THE LIST icons move the
selection by a maximum of 10 steps in either direction. If there are
not enough entries for the TOP OF THE LIST icon / BOTTOM OF
THE LIST icon, the respective icon will be disabled.
If there are no further entries above or below the colored bar
(highlight position) the respective SCROLL UP or SCROLL DOWN
icon is disabled.
SELECT Button (SEAT ROW / Pushing the SELECT button for the SEAT ROW selects the indicated
SEAT IDENTIFIER) seat row.
Pushing the SELECT button for the SEAT IDENTIFIER.
SEAT ROW / SEAT The SEAT ROW / SEAT IDENTIFIER indication are two lists:
IDENTIFIER Indication
- A list of the available seat rows on the left hand side of the control
pad
- A list of the available seat identifiers for the selected seat row on
the right hand side of the control pad.
The selected seat is indicated by a light blue bar.
Scroll bars show that there are more entries available (seat row
names respectively seat identifier) in the selection boxes.
CLEAR Button Pushing the CLEAR button will undo the selection.
R/L SET Button Pushing the R/L SET button turns ON reading lights for individual
passenger seats.
R/L RESET Button Pushing the R/L RESET button turns OFF reading lights for individual
passenger seats.
The initial status for the indication of the selection boxes and buttons is: L2
- The selection box for the seat row numbers indicates all CAM assigned seat rows. All related
controls are available/enabled.
- The target seat window is empty
- The R/L SET and the R/L RESET button is deactivated.
How to select a seat for reading light setting / resetting is described in the LIGHTS chapter. Refer to
06-30-10-30-80 How to Reset an Individual Reading Light
The SYSTEM INFO page provides the status indication of several cabin systems. The cabin crew can
use the SYSTEM INFO page for preflight checks. The following systems/functions are incorporated in
the SYSTEM INFO page:
- CIDS INTERNAL
- FLOOR PANEL
- POWER MANAGEMENT
- MISCELLANEOUS.
The ALL page of the SYSTEM INFO pages displays all relevant messages/failures of the respective
system/function (e.g. CIDS INTERNAL, FLOOR PANEL, etc.) of the entire aircraft. A list box indicates
the relevant messages/failures of the respective system/function.
The list box has a heading for any separate system/function. Each system/function has a separate
selection button. A scroll bar indicates that further messages/failures of a system/function are
available. Scrolling is possible with the NEXT/PREVIOUS buttons.
A special indicator comes up if there are messages/failures (except for the SYSTEM OK message) for
the available systems/functions.
New main messages will be always listed in the first row of the list box. The main messages will be
displayed before already existing main messages. If the cabin crew selects the SYSTEM INFO page,
the first displayed list box content is CIDS INTERNAL. If the CIDS is not supplied with normal and
essential electrical power (full power supply), the systems/functions are not accessible (Refer to Blue
Card).
For further information about the SYSTEM INFO page:
- Refer to 06-90-20 Position of the SYSTEM INFO Page on the FAP
- Refer to 06-90-30 SYSTEM INFO Page
- Refer to 06-90-40 Indications on the SYSTEM INFO Page.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
Selecting the SYSTEM INFO button from the second level of the FAP function selector displays the
SYSTEM INFO ALL page with the CIDS INTERNALS list box. The list box indicates all current
messages/failures.
Position of the SYSTEM INFO Page on the FAP
On the right hand side of the list box there are four available selection buttons.
- CIDS INTERN (CIDS internal information)
- FLOOR PANEL
- POWER MGMT (Power Management)
- MISC (miscellaneous)
All available messages/failures are displayed on the SYSTEM INFO ALL page. A scroll bar located on
the right hand side of the list box indicates that further failures/messages are available.
The cabin crew can use the PREV. PAGE and NEXT PAGE buttons to scroll to through the
failures/messages.
For further information:
- Refer to 06-90-30 SYSTEM INFO Page/Blue Card
- Refer to 06-90-40 Indications on the SYSTEM INFO Page
The following list boxes are available:
- See CIDS INTERNALS
- See FLOOR PANEL HEATING
- See POWER MANAGEMENT
- See MISCELLANEOUS .
CIDS INTERNALS LIST BOX
When the SYSTEM INFO page is displayed the CIDS INTERNALS list box is displayed initially: The
CIDS INTERNALS button is indicated in the active/green status and the respective heading (CIDS
INTERNALS) is displayed on the list box.
An amber arrow in front of a selection button indicates that there are messages/failures available.
If there is no message/failure available the SYSTEM OK message is displayed on the active list box.
If the CIDS is not supplied with the complete electrical power (normal and essential) the system is not
able to detect and collect all necessary data to display them on the SYSTEM INFO page. To indicate
the problem a blue card is displayed:
Blue Card on the SYSTEM INFO Page
Button Description
Pushing the CIDS INTERN button activates the CIDS INTERNALS list
box.
The SYSTEM INFO page provides messages in the MISCELLANEOUS list box as shown in the table
below. The cabin crew has to act on these messages as described below.
The cabin crew can use the CABIN STATUS page to get a general overview of the current cabin
systems status.
There is an CABIN STATUS ALL page and pages for each deck, which has relevant cabin systems.
The different system status are displayed via aircraft symbols. Up to five aircraft symbols may be
displayed on each deck page. The aircraft symbols represent the respective system pages.
The CABIN STATUS button is available on every FAP page. The CABIN STATUS button is located on
the right lower corner of the display.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN STATUS page via the CABIN STATUS button. The CABIN
STATUS button is available on all FAP pages in the lower right corner of the screen.
Typical CABIN STATUS ALL Page
The CABIN STATUS page enables the cabin crew to have an overview of the status of all relevant
cabin systems.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN STATUS page by pushing the CABIN STATUS button in the
lower right corner of any FAP page.
Typical CABIN STATUS ALL Page
The cabin crew can access the CABIN STATUS per deck pages via the deck selector on the CABIN
STATUS ALL page.
Typical CABIN STATUS UPPER DECK Page
The cabin status per deck page provides status information of the selected deck about:
- CABIN LIGHTING: Refer to 06-30-10-20 Position of the Cabin Lighting Pages on the FAP
- DOORS / SLIDES. Refer to 06-40-20 Position of the DOORS / SLIDES Page on the FAP
- TEMPERATURE: Refer to 06-50-30 Position of the TEMPERATURE Page on the FAP
- WATER / WASTE: Refer to 06-60-30 Position of the WATER/WASTE Page on the FAP
Note: Touching an aircraft symbol will display the cabin system page, e. g. DOORS / SLIDES.
The cabin crew can use the CABIN READY signaling function to inform the flight crew that all
passengers have boarded and that the aircraft is ready for take off.
The CABIN READY (ALL) page shows all three decks and their status. There are no deck wise pages
for this function.
Each crew station can report that the corresponding area is ready via the AREA READY button. When
all stations have reported their AREA READY, the purser can report CABIN READY to the flight crew
via the master FAP.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN READY page via a function button (CABIN READY) on the
function selector. (For information about the function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP
Overview).
Typical CABIN READY ALL Decks Page
When the CABIN READY button is green (activated) the purser has
pushed the CABIN READY button to declare the cabin as READY.
If the CABIN READY button is grayed out (disabled) the cabin ready
function is blocked.
When the AREA READY button is gray (enabled) the AREA READY
function is enabled. The cabin crew can declare the area
corresponding to the FAP as READY by pushing the AREA READY
button.
When the AREA READY button is green (activated) a cabin crew
member has pushed the AREA READY button to declare the area
as READY.
To signal to the flight crew that cabin is ready follow the steps described below.
1. Push the CABIN READY button on the function selector to display the CABIN READY ALL decks
page.
Typical CABIN READY ALL Decks Page
2. When all passengers have boarded and are seated push the AREA READY button.
3. If there are areas displayed as not ready contact the corresponding crew station.
4. When the remaining areas are also ready push the CABIN READY button.
The galley cooling system provides cooling capacity for food and beverages stored in trolleys and
trolley compartments in designated galleys.
The galley cooling system uses Air Cooling Units (ACUs) in designated galleys to cool trolley
compartments or individual trolleys Refer to 06-120-30-20 Galley Cooling Principles.
The cabin crew can control and monitor the system from the:
- Flight Attendant Panel (FAP): GALLEY COOLING Page. Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY
COOLING Page on the FAP
- GALLEY COOLING panels installed in the cooled galleys. Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 Galley Cooling
Panel in the Galleys.
Note: Galley cooling starts when the cabin crew switches ON at least one ACU in any of the cooled
galleys.
There is a GALLEY COOLING page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP). The cabin crew can use this
page to monitor and control the galley cooling system.
The cabin crew can access the GALLEY COOLING page by pushing the GALLEY COOLING button on
the second level of the function selector on the FAP.
Typical GALLEY COOLING Page on the FAP
Pushing a button from the deck selector on the GALLEY COOLING page displays the:
- GALLEY COOLING MAIN DECK page or
Continued on the next page
The galley cooling has two independent coolant loops: One of them supplies the galleys on the right
side of the aircraft, the other one supplies the galleys on the left side. The center galleys are supplied
either by the right side or by the left side coolant loop.
The main component of each coolant loop is a Central Refrigeration Unit (CRU) that cools down the
coolant. Pumps distribute the coolant to each cooled galley. Heat exchangers in the galleys, so-called
Air Cooling Units (ACUs), provide the galleys with cold air. This cooled air is used to cool the trolleys
that contain food and beverages.
Galley Cooling - Overview
For more information about the cooling principles in the galleys: Refer to 06-120-30-20 Galley Cooling
Principles.
An Air Cooling Unit (ACU) provides cool air in a cooled galley to trolley compartments or trolleys.
There are two different principles to supply the trolleys with cooled air:
- See : Air Over
- See : Air Through.
Note: An aircraft can have both types of trolleys: air through and air over.
Both types are optional.
AIR OVER
With the air over principle, the whole trolley compartment, where trolleys are stored, is supplied with
cooled air by the Air Cooling Unit (ACU) of the galley. The cooled air enters the trolley compartment at
the rear wall and circulates around the trolleys. Subsequently, the heated air is led back to the ACU.
Air Over Principle
AIR THROUGH
With the air trough principle, a trolley itself is supplied with cooled air by the ACU of the galley. The
cooled air enters the trolley at the rear wall and circulates inside the trolley. Subsequently, the heated
air is led back to the ACU.
Air Through Principle
PRE-CONDITIONING
Applicable to: ALL
In order to provide galley cooling as soon as possible, the system has a PRE-CONDITIONING mode.
In this mode, the galley cooling system cools down the coolant while the Air Cooling Units (ACUs) on
the aircraft are still OFF.
The cabin crew must activate the PRE-CONDITIONING mode on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) to
start the galley cooling system.
Note: After activating the PRE-CONDITIONING mode, it takes approximately 20 min until the gallley
cooling system is ready.
After the 20 min the cabin crew can activate any ACU at any time. The corresponding ACU(s)
will provide cooled air at once.
Each cooled galley has a GALLEY COOLING panel that controls the status of the related
ACU.
The following pages and panels are available to control the galley cooling system:
- Cockpit controls: Refer to 06-120-30-40-20 Cockpit Controls
- GALLEY COOLING panel in the galley: Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 Galley Cooling Panel in the
Galleys
- GALLEY COOLING page on the FAP/mini FAP: Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY COOLING
Page on the FAP/Mini FAP.
Cockpit Controls
COCKPIT CONTROLS
Applicable to: ALL
Galley cooling starts automatically when the corresponding controls in the cockpit are set to ON.
Note: However, the cabin crew must switch ON every Air Cooling Unit (ACU) individually via the
GALLEY COOLING panel in order to provide cooled air to the compartments/trolleys.
Each cooled galley has a GALLEY COOLING panel that controls the status of the related
ACU.
Location of the Control Panels in the Cockpit
Cabin Controls
Each Air Cooling Unit (ACU) can be switched ON or OFF via the temperature selector on the GALLEY
COOLING panel in a designated galley. Control lights indicate the status of the ACU
(ON/OFF/FAULT/TEMP WARNING).
The GALLEY COOLING panel consists of:
- An ACU FAULT indicator
- A TEMPERATURE WARNING indicator
- An ACU ON indicator
- An ACU/AC circuit breaker
- An ACU temperature selector.
Note: The GALLEY COOLING panel is customized and can be different in each galley. The following
illustration shows a typical galley cooling panel.
Typical GALLEY COOLING Panel
Control/Indicator Description
ACU FAULT Indicator If the ACU FAULT indicator is ON the ACU is faulty. This requires
maintenance.
TEMP WARNING Indicator If the TEMP WARNING indicator comes ON, the temperature in the
cooled compartment does not correspond to the selected value.
In this case the cabin crew must check if the compartment doors are
completely closed.
The TEMP WARNING indicator will go OFF when the temperature has
reached the selected value.
The cabin crew can use the following pages on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) and mini Flight
Attendant Panel (mini FAP) to control the galley cooling:
- The GALLEY COOLING page on the FAP Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY COOLING Page on
the FAP
- The GALLEY COOLING page on the mini FAP Refer to 06-120-30-40-30 GALLEY COOLING Page
on the Mini FAP.
NOT ACTIVE If the status is NOT ACTIVE, one of the following may be the
cause:
- The system is ready to operate but all ACUs are OFF.
- The system is currently not available for galley cooling
because:
- The system is starting and self-testing or
- The cooling performance is needed for the purpose of
avionics ground cooling (if installed) or
- The galley cooling system is in PRE-CONDITIONING
mode and all ACUs are OFF.
- The system is switched OFF via the cockpit COOLG pb.
- There is no electrical power available.
–– There is no status information about the ACU available.
Status Description
ON The ACU is ON
OFF The ACU is OFF
– – (no status available) There is no status information about the ACU available.
SELECTED
The SELECTED box displays the target temperature for the selected ACU. The cabin crew
has set this temperature on the GALLEY COOLING panel in the corresponding galley.
UNIT/ACTUAL
The UNIT/ACTUAL box displays the current temperature of the trolley compartment, that is
cooled by the selected ACU.
Optionally, if there are additional sensors installed in the trolleys, the UNIT/ACTUAL box lists
all the trolleys and compartments, that are supplied with cooled air by the selected ACU.
Next to the listed trolleys and compartments, the current temperature shows.
Note: This option depends on the customer version.
Location of the ACUs (4)
The locations of the galleys with ACUs are shown on the aircraft symbol. The cooled galleys are
green when they have power and operate normally. They are gray when they are OFF.
In case of a failure or limited operation, the related galley is amber and a message appears in
the list box (see Message Box).
Message Box (5)
The MESSAGE box only appears in case of a failure. Additionally, the CAUT button in the upper
left corner of the FAP comes ON in amber. If there are further messages, the NEXT PAGE
button will be active. To get back to the previous messages the PREV PAGE button is available.
For more information about the error messages: Refer to 06-120-50 Error Messages.
Pre-Conditioning (6)
The purpose of the PRE-CONDITIONING mode is to cool down the coolant prior to the
operation the ACUs.
Pushing the PRE-CONDITIONING button starts the PRE-CONDITIONING mode. Cooling will
be available at any ACU as soon as the cabin crew switches the corresponding ACU ON. .
For information about how to use the PRE-CONDITIONING mode:Refer to 06-120-40 How to
Switch ON the Air Cooling Unit.
Status Description
MAINTNANCE The galley cooling system is not available because:
- A system test is running or
- The coolant is currently filled.
COCKPT OFF The flight crew has switched OFF the galley cooling system via the
COOLG pb on the overhead panel in the cockpit.
SYS OFF All ACUs are OFF. Therefore there is no cooling demand.
Status Description
ON The ACU is ON
OFF The ACU is OFF
– – (no status available) There is no status information about the ACU available.
SELECTED
The SELECTED box displays the target temperature for the selected ACU. The cabin crew
has set this temperature on the GALLEY COOLING panel in the corresponding galley.
UNIT/ACTUAL
The UNIT/ACTUAL box displays the current temperature of the trolley compartment, that is
cooled by the selected ACU.
Continued on the next page
Optionally, if there are additional sensors installed in the trolleys, the UNIT/ACTUAL box lists
all the trolleys and compartments, that are supplied with cooled air by the selected ACU.
Next to the listed trolleys and compartments, the current temperature shows.
Note: This option depends on the customer version.
Location of the ACUs (4)
The locations of the galleys with ACUs are shown on the aircraft symbol. The cooled galleys are
green when they have power and operate normally. They are gray when they are OFF.
In case of a failure or limited operation, the related galley is amber and a message appears in
the list box (see Message Box).
Message Box (5)
The MESSAGE box only appears in case of a failure. Additionally, the CAUT button in the upper
left corner of the FAP comes ON in amber. If there are further messages, the NEXT PAGE
button will be active. To get back to the previous messages the PREV PAGE button is available.
For more information about the error messages: Refer to 06-120-50 Error Messages.
Pre-Conditioning (6)
The purpose of the PRE-CONDITIONING mode is to cool down the coolant prior to the
operation the ACUs.
Pushing the PRE-CONDITIONING button starts the PRE-CONDITIONING mode. Cooling will
be available at any ACU as soon as the cabin crew switches the corresponding ACU ON. .
For information about how to use the PRE-CONDITIONING mode:Refer to 06-120-40 How to
Switch ON the Air Cooling Unit.
SYSTEM STATUS
The system status box provides information about the status of the galley cooling system.
The following system status are possible:
Status Description
Status Description
ON The ACU is ON
OFF The ACU is OFF
– – (no status available) There is no status information about the ACU available.
SELECTED
The SELECTED box displays the target temperature for the selected ACU. The cabin crew has
set this temperature on the GALLEY COOLING panel in the corresponding galley.
UNIT/ACTUAL
The UNIT/ACTUAL box displays the current temperature of the trolley compartment, that is
cooled by the selected ACU.
Optionally, if there are additional sensors installed in the trolleys, the UNIT/ACTUAL box lists all
the trolleys and compartments, that are supplied with cooled air by the selected ACU. Next to
the listed trolleys and compartments, the current temperature shows.
Note: This option depends on the customer version.
In order to start galley cooling in a designated galley, the cabin crew must switch ON the corresponding
Air Cooling Unit (ACU) via the temperature selector on the galley cooling panel in the related galley.
Note: - All ACUs have to be switched ON individually via the GALLEY COOLING panel in the
related galley.
- The GALLEY COOLING panel is customized and can be different in each galley. The
following illustration shows a typical GALLEY COOLING panel.
Typical GALLEY COOLING Panel
Note: After switching ON the ACU, it will take approximately 20 min until the system is ready and the
ACU will provide cooled air.
The cabin crew can switch OFF each Air Cooling Unit (ACU) via the temperature selector on the
GALLEY COOLING panel in the related galley.
Note: - The cabin crew must switch OFF each ACU individually via the GALLEY COOLING panel
in the related galley.
- The GALLEY COOLING panel is customized and can be different in each galley. The
following illustration shows a typical GALLEY COOLING panel.
Typical GALLEY COOLING Panel
The Air Through principle will only work with trolleys made for this cooling principle. They have air inlet
and outlet openings in the doors. These openings must fit on the gaskets of the air-ducts of the Air
Cooling Units (ACUs).
To stow the cooled trolleys follow the steps described below:
1. Ensure that the appropriate trolley (Air Over/Air Through) is inserted into the designated trolley
compartment.
2. Close the latches to secure the trolley in position.
ERROR MESSAGES
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0109
GENERAL
If one part of the Supplemental Cooling System (SCS) fails, cooling performance is reduced.
The Supplement Cooling System has two Central Refrigeration Units (CRU). A failure of one CRU
does not lead to a complete loss of any coolant loop. The other CRU is still able to supply 70% of the
required cooling capacity for the ACUs in the cooled galleys.
If error messages appear on the FAP, the cabin crew can not recover any of them by an action.
However for some errors the cabin crew should make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL).
See second table.
ERROR MESSAGES
If the following error messages appear on the Flight Attendant panel (FAP) there are no crew actions
necessary.
Message Description
AUTOMATIC POWER SAVING ACTIVE The electrical load management has switched OFF one or
PAY ATTENTION TO POSSIBLE more cooling components.
TEMPERATURE WARNINGS
GALLEY COOLING NOT AVAILABLE The GALLEY COOLING is not available. The maintenance
DUE TO MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES crew is performing ground servicing or system tests.
TRIGGERED BY GROUND SUPPORT
PANEL OR OMT IN THE COCKPIT
SYSTEM OPERATING The GALLEY COOLING is not available because:
GALLEY COOLING NOT YET ACTIVE
- The avionics ground cooling is active with priority or
- The system is operating for PRE-CONDITIONING or
- The system is starting.
Note: - This message appears only at the startup
of the SCS when the electrical power was
shut down completely.
- This message disappears automatically
after a maximum of 14 min after the
startup.
If the following error messages appear on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP), the cabin crew must
monitor the temperature and store the food/beverages in a correct environment. Make an entry into the
Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL).
Message Description
COOLING UNIT FAILURE An ACU component has failed and therefore the unit does
NO COOLING OF: not provide cooling.
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc.
WARNING Health Hazard!
Without sufficient cooling, food can no
longer be good.
COOLING UNIT TEMPERATURE An ACU has detected too high temperature in a cooling
WARNING compartment for a long time.
NOT SUFFICIENT COOLING OF:
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc.
ONE SYSTEM SIDE FAULT (coolant loop A single component or several components have failed.
1 or 2 failure) Thus the coolant loop 1 or 2 has failed.
NO COOLING OF: The GALLEY COOLING is not available in any galleys
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc. associated with the coolant loop 1 or 2.
ERROR MESSAGES
Applicable to: MSN 0110-0249
GENERAL
If one part of the Supplemental Cooling System (SCS) fails, cooling performance is reduced.
The Supplement Cooling System has two Central Refrigeration Units (CRU). A failure of one CRU
does not lead to a complete loss of any coolant loop. The other CRU is still able to supply 70% of the
required cooling capacity for the ACUs in the cooled galleys.
If error messages appear on the FAP, the cabin crew can not recover any of them by an action.
However for some errors the cabin crew should make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL).
See second table.
ERROR MESSAGES
If the following error messages appear on the Flight Attendant panel (FAP) there are no crew actions
necessary.
Message Description
LOAD SHEDDING ACTIVE The electrical load management switched OFF one or
PAY ATTENTION TO POSSIBLE more cooling components.
TEMPERATURE WARNINGS
SYSTEM OPERATING FOR AVIONICS The GALLEY COOLING is not available because the
COOLING avionics ground cooling is active with priority.
GALLEY COOLING NOT ACTIVE WHILE
CABIN HOT
SYSTEM OPERATING FOR The GALLEY COOLING is not available because the
PRECOOLING system is operating for PRE-CONDITIONING.
NO GALLEY SELECTED FOR COOLING
SYSTEM STARTING The GALLEY COOLING is not available because the
GALLEY COOLING NOT YET ACTIVE system is starting.
Note: - This message appears only at the startup of
the SCS when the electrical power was shut
down completely.
- This message disappears automatically after
a maximum of 40 s after the startup.
GALLEY COOLING NOT AVAILABLE The GALLEY COOLING is not available. The maintenance
DUE TO MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES crew is performing ground servicing or systems tests.
TRIGGERED BY GROUND SUPPORT
PANEL
GALLEY COOLING NOT AVAILABLE The GALLEY COOLING is not available. The maintenance
DUE TO MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES crew is performing ground servicing or systems tests.
TRIGGERED BY OMT IN THE COCKPIT
If the following error messages appear on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP), the cabin crew must
monitor the temperature and store the food/beverages in a correct environment. Make an entry into the
Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL).
Message Description
PARTIAL SYSTEM FAULT One of the CRU fails.
COOLING PERFORMANCE MAY BE
AFFECTED WHEN AIRCRAFT ON WARNING Health Hazard!
GROUND Without sufficient cooling, food can no
PAY ATTENTION TO POSSIBLE longer be good.
TEMPERATURE WARNINGS
Note: - If the temperature of a compartment exceeds
its level for a longer period, a temperature
warning will appear on the related GALLEY
COOLING panel.
- The cabin crew must monitor the temperature
in the related galley if it stores temperature
sensitive food or beverages.
COOLING UNIT FAILURE An ACU component fails and therefore the unit does not
NO COOLING OF: provide cooling.
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc.
WARNING Health Hazard!
Without sufficient cooling, food can no
longer be good.
COOLING UNIT TEMPERATURE An ACU has detected too high temperature in a cooling
WARNING compartment for a long time.
NOT SUFFICIENT COOLING OF:
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc.
LEFT SIDE SYSTEM FAULT A single component or several components have failed.
NO COOLING OF: Thus the left coolant loop has failed.
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc. The GALLEY COOLING is not available in any galleys
associated with the left coolant loop.
RIGHT SIDE SYSTEM FAULT A single component or several components have failed.
NO COOLING OF: Thus the right coolant loop has failed.
GAL XXX, GAL YYY, etc. The GALLEY COOLING is not available in any galleys
associated with the right coolant loop.
COMPLETE SYSTEM FAULT A combination of failures which prevent the operation of
NO COOLING OF: both coolant loops have occurred.
ALL GALLEYS The complete system has failed and the GALLEY
COOLING is not available.
The GALLEY COOLING page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) displays: COMPLETE SYSTEM
FAILURE / NO COOLING OF: ALL LOCATIONS and the TEMP WARNING light of all switched ON
Air Cooling Units (ACU) is ON.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Note: Do not reset the SCS more than once.
A combination of failures prevents the operation of both coolant loops.
1. Is the SCS switched ON in the cockpit? (The COOLG pb at the VENT
panel is pressed in and the OFF light is extinguished.) Go to 3 Go to 2
2. Ask the flight crew to switch ON the SCS.
Is the error message "COMPLETE SYSTEM FAILURE" still displayed on
the FAP? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. Ask the flight crew to reset the SCS once.
Note: Inform the flight crew that it is not recommended to reset the
SCS more than once.
Note: The procedure to reset the SCS is described in the FCOM.
Is the error message "COMPLETE SYSTEM FAILURE" still displayed on
the FAP after the reset? Go to 6 Go to 4
4. Monitor the GALLEY COOLING page on the FAP for 40 minutes. The
error message "COMPLETE SYSTEM FAILURE" must not be displayed
again.
Is the error message displayed again within 40 minutes after the reset? Go to 6 Go to 5
5. The SCS is operative.
If the SCS was reset: Make an entry into the cabin logbook that the SCS
was reset. END END
6. The complete SCS has failed and galley cooling is not available.
Make an entry into the cabin logbook that the SCS is inoperative. END END
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE IFE AND SEAT POWER CONTROL PAGES
Applicable to: ALL
The IFE POWER pages provide information about the power status of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
equipment as well as seat power supply.
Seat power supplies the following:
- PED power outlet
- Seat functions (e.g. actuation)
- IFE components (e.g. screen, handset etc.).
The following IFE POWER pages are available at the FAP:
- IFE POWER ALL page
- IFE POWER UPPER DECK page
- IFE POWER MAIN DECK page, and, depending on the layout,
- IFE POWER LOWER DECK page.
On the deck related pages (MAIN DECK, UPPER DECK, LOWER DECK), the status (ON/OFF) of seat
power groups and IFE equipment can be controlled via corresponding control pads.
The IFE POWER pages may be protected by an access code. This depends on the customized
definition of CIDS (Cabin Intercommunication Data System) via the Cabin Assignment Module (CAM).
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The cabin crew can access the IFE POWER page by pushing the IFE POWER button on the function
selector. (For information about the function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview)
IFE POWER Button on a Typical Function Selector
The cabin crew can access the IFE POWER - ALL page by selecting the IFE POWER button from the
function selector.
The IFE POWER - ALL page gives an overview of the seat power related states. The details of the
power states are displayed on the respective deck pages.
Typical IFE POWER — ALL Page
Note: Typically, the seat power columns do not end/start at the doors as displayed graphically on the
aircraft symbol. The details of the power columns are displayed on the corresponding deck
related IFE POWER page.
On the IFE POWER - ALL page the status of the MAIN DECK and the UPPER DECK is displayed via
seat power columns in aircraft symbols for the two decks. The color of the seat power column indicates
their status:
Color Status
Green The corresponding seat power column is switched ON and power is available.
The status will still indicate green, if only a few of the seats of a seat power
column have failed.
Note: Seat power must be available to use PED power. PED power can be
switched independently via the PED POWER pb-sw on the hardkey
row below the FAP: Refer to FAP Operation..
Amber The corresponding seat power column is switched OFF (manually or
automatically).
The displayed seat power columns can be switched ON or OFF on the deck related IFE POWER
pages.
The IFE POWER pages may be protected by an access code, depending on the Cabin Assignment
Module (CAM) definition. When the IFE POWER pages are access code protected, an ENTER
ACCESS CODE control pad pops up when the cabin crew selects one of the deck selector buttons on
the IFE POWER - ALL page.
When the cabin crew has entered the access code, the IFE POWER page for the corresponding deck
is displayed.
If the entered code was wrong, a blue card with the following message will be displayed on the ENTER
ACCESS CODE control pad: ACCESS CODE INCORRECT. ENTER ACCESS CODE AGAIN.
Gray OFF
Gray OFF
The different IFE POWER pages may display different IFE related power group control pads. Some of
the IFE related power groups can be controlled from every deck.
Refer to the table below for details about the control features of typical IFE related power groups.
When a seat power group is ON, the corresponding column is green. When a seat power group is
OFF, the corresponding column is amber.
Gray OFF
The different IFE POWER pages may display different IFE related power group control pads. Some of
the IFE related power groups can be controlled from every deck.
Refer to the table below for details about the control features of typical IFE related power groups.
Gray OFF
Gray OFF
The different IFE POWER pages may display different IFE related power group control pads. Some of
the IFE related power groups can be controlled from every deck.
Refer to the table below for details about the control features of typical IFE related power groups.
Gray OFF
Gray OFF
The different IFE POWER pages may display different IFE related power group control pads. Some of
the IFE related power groups can be controlled from every deck.
Refer to the table below for details about the control features of typical IFE related power groups.
On the IFE POWER LOWER DECK page only the IFE related power controls (individual control
buttons for different IFE equipment) are displayed.
Note: Depending on the Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) definition, the IFE POWER pages may be
protected by an access code:Refer to 06-130-30 IFE POWER PAGE Access Code.
Typical IFE POWER LOWER DECK Page
For controlling the IFE related power groups, there are up to seven control pads available. Each power
group has its own control pad and ON/OFF button.
The color of the ON/OFF button indicates the current power status.
Gray OFF
The status of the IFE power in the seat rows is indicated by the:
- Color of the ON/OFF button
- Text in the field below the seat row indication
- Color of the seat column on the aircraft symbol.
Use the IFE POWER pages to turn OFF or ON the power of a seat power group.
Follow the steps below:
1. On the FAP, select the IFE POWER button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview).
Typical IFE POWER — ALL Page
2. Select a deck (here for example MAIN DECK) via the deck selector. (For information about the deck
selector: Refer to Operation of FAP). Typically, an ENTER ACCESS CODE control pad pops up.
3. Enter the access code and confirm your entry by pushing ENTER on the ENTER ACCESS CODE
control pad. If the access code is correct, the IFE POWER MAIN DECK page will be displayed.
4. On the SEAT POWER COLUMNS control pad select the ON/OFF button of the FWD CENTER
group.
If the button was ON it will turn gray and the power of the seat group is turned OFF.
If the button was OFF it will turn green and the power of the seat group is turned ON.
Use the IFE POWER pages to turn OFF or ON the power of an IFE power group.
Follow the steps below:
1. On the FAP, select the IFE POWER button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview).
Typical IFE POWER — ALL Page
2. Select a deck (here for example MAIN DECK) via the deck selector. (For information about the deck
selector: Refer to Operation of FAP). Typically, an ENTER ACCESS CODE control pad pops up.
3. Enter the access code and confirm your entry by pushing ENTER on the ENTER ACCESS CODE
control pad. If the access code was correct, the IFE POWER MAIN DECK page will be displayed.
Use the IFE POWER pages to turn OFF or ON the power of an IFE power group.
Follow the steps below:
1. On the FAP, select the IFE POWER button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). Typically, an ENTER ACCESS
CODE control pad pops up.
Typical IFE POWER Page Access Code Control Pad
2. Enter the access code and confirm your entry by pushing ENTER on the ENTER ACCESS CODE
control pad. If the access code was correct, the IFE POWER — ALL page will be displayed.
3. Select the MAIN DECK via the deck selector. (For information about the deck selector: Refer to
Operation of FAP). The IFE POWER MAIN DECK page will be displayed.
If there was a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) event and the power supply trips, the cabin crew can switch the
power ON again. However, the procedure described below is only an Airbus recommendation and may
only be applied if it is in accordance with the airline policy.
The power supply of a seat column has tripped when the following indications appear on the FAP
IFE POWER page: a text indication TRIPPED, the corresponding button is OFF (gray), and the
column on the aircraft symbol is amber.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Inform the passengers of the affected column that the power will be reset.
1. Ask the passengers of the affected column: Was there an event prior to
the power loss in the affected column? Go to 2 Go to 8
2. Ask the passengers of the affected seat group: Was it a removable
cause? Go to 3 Go to 6
3. If there was a removable cause to the power loss in the affected seat
group, and the corresponding button on the FAP is not disabled (grayed
out):
1. Remove the cause and wait for 3 min.
2. Switch ON the power for the affected column on the FAP and wait for
approximately 5 min.
Note: Do not reconnect the PED that may have caused the GFI!
Is power available again for the remaining PED? END Go to 4
4. If there is still no power available in the affected column, and the
corresponding button on the FAP is not disabled (grayed out):
1. Ask all passengers of the affected column to disconnect all the PED
and wait for 3 min.
2. Switch ON the power for the affected column on the FAP and wait for
approximately 5 min.
3. One by one reconnect the PED.
Do not reconnect the PED that may have caused the GFI!
Is power available again? END Go to 5
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
5. If the reset was not successful:
Repeat the procedure.
Note: It is possible to do a maximum of 3 resets, after that the
corresponding button will be disabled (grayed out). Go to 3 Go to 15
6. If there was no removable cause to the power loss in the affected column:
1. Ask the passengers of the affected seat group to disconnect all PED.
2. Switch OFF the related Seat Group Switch (SGS)
3. Switch ON the power for the affected column on the FAP and wait for
approximately 5 min.
4. Switch ON the SGS.
5. One by one reconnect the PED.
Is power available again? END Go to 7
7. If there is still no power available in the affected column:
1. Ask the passengers of the affected seat group to disconnect all the
PED.
2. Switch OFF the SGS.
Note: The power of the affected seat group must remain disabled
during the flight.
3. Switch ON the power for the affected column on the FAP.
4. Make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL), mentioning:
- The affected seat group.
- Countermeasures taken. END END
8. If there was no event prior to the power loss:
1. Ask all passengers of the affected column to disconnect all PED.
2. Switch OFF all Seat Group Switches (SGS) of the affected column
and wait for 3 min.
3. Switch ON the power for the affected column on the FAP and wait for
approximately 5 min.
Note: The cabin crew can repeat the switching ON via the FAP.
However, it is possible to do a maximum of 3 resets, after
that the corresponding button will be disabled (grayed out).
Did the button and the column on the aircraft symbol turn green? Go to 9 Go to 12
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
9. If the button and the column on the aircraft symbol are green:
1. Switch ON one by one the SGS of the affected column.
2. Check the color of the button and the column each time an SGS was
switched on.
Did the button and the column on the aircraft symbol remain green? Go to 11 Go to 10
10. The button is OFF (gray) and the column is amber: The last SGS has
tripped the power supply. The fault must be in the seat group to which the
SGS belongs.
1. Switch OFF the SGS of the faulty seat group and wait for 3 min.
2. Switch ON all remaining SGS, if there are any left.
Do NOT switch ON again the faulty SGS .
3. Switch ON the power for the affected column on the FAP and wait for
approximately 5 min.
Did the button and the column on the aircraft symbol turn green? Go to 11 Go to 15
11. When the button and the column on the aircraft symbol are green:
Reconnect the PED one by one.
Is power available? END Go to 12
12. Is the button green and the column amber? Go to 13 Go to 15
13. If the button is green and the column is amber:
Wait for approximately 5 min. Go to 14 Go to 14
14. Are both the button and the column green? END Go to 15
15. When the reset was not successful:
Make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL), mentioning:
- The affected seat column / seat group.
- Countermeasures taken. END END
The FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING page can be selected via a function button (FLOOR TEMP.)
on the function selector. (For information about the function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP
Overview)
Position of the FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTINGS Page on the FAP
The FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTING page can be selected via a function button (FLOOR TEMP.)
on the function selector.
Position of the FLOOR TEMPERATURE SETTINGS Page on the Mini FAP
Related to the selected deck, the temperatures of all installed Heated Floor Panels (HFPs) can be
adjusted on this page. There is a single button for each HFP (e.g. Upper Deck: DOOR 1 RH). Pushing
one of these buttons displays the corresponding control pad.
The bar graph indicates the current HFP temperature value. The temperature adjustment is indicated
by a green arrow on the right side of the temperature bar graph.
The cabin crew can use the related pushbuttons ( ▴ or ▾) to change the temperature steps of 0.5 within
a range of 1 to 5 (See TEMPERATURE SETTINGS - VALUE TABLE).
Note: A "heating" symbol is displayed in the bulb of the thermometer symbol until the temperature
setting value is reached.
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS - VALUE TABLE
Selectable Temperature Values Temperature at HFP [°C]
5 28–32
4.5 26–30
4 24–28
3.5 22–26
3 20–24
2.5 18–22
2 16–20
1.5 14–18
1 12–16
Select the FLOOR TEMP. function button from the function selector to get access to the FLOOR
TEMPERATURE SETTING page on the mini FAP. Related to the selected deck, the temperatures of
all installed Heated Floor Panels (HFPs) can be adjusted on this page. There is a single button for
each HFP (e.g. Upper Deck: DOOR 1 RH). Pushing one of these buttons displays the corresponding
control pad.
The bar graph indicates the current HFP temperature value. The temperature adjustment is indicated
by a green arrow on the right side of the temperature bar graph.
Continued on the next page
The cabin crew can use the related pushbuttons ( ▴ or ▾) to change the temperature steps of 0.5 within
a range of 1 to 5.
Note: A "heating" symbol is displayed in the bulb of the thermometer symbol until the temperature
setting value is reached.
For air humidification there is a humidifier installed in the flight crew rest area.
For more information about the flight crew rest area: Refer to 02-70-10 Flight Crew Rest Compartment
- Introduction.
HUMIDIFIER
The humidifier (humidification system) consists of:
- A humidifier control unit
- An evaporation unit containing a fiberglass pad
- A relative humidity sensor
- A water-valve assembly (water from the potable water system).
The humidifier humidifies the air in the cabin crew area up to an level of 25 % relative humidity at a
temperature of 23 °C.
The humidification system works according to the cold evaporation principle. The pad inside the L2
evaporation unit is kept moist by water sprayed on the pad. Dry and preheated air passes through the
pad. The evaporating water of the pad humidifies the air. The humidity level is controlled by the
humidity control unit which is connected to the relative-humidity sensor and the water-valve assembly.
Humidification starts at a flight level above 26, 000 ft, and stops two hours prior to the top of descend to L1
allow complete drying of the pad prior to landing to avoid the risk of biological contamination.
The crewmembers can monitor and control the humidifier via the mini FAP in the crew rest area. The
current status or any error conditions are displayed on the HUMIDIFICATION page.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
For the crew rest compartments and the showers there are electrical heaters installed.
Note: The electrical heating function for the FCRC is linked to the humidification function: If the
heating function is turned OFF, the humidifier in the FCRC is turned OFF, too.
The status of the humidifier on the mini FAP does not change immediately after turning OFF
the heating function.
For more information about the FCRC: Refer to 02-70-10 Flight Crew Rest Compartment - Introduction
For more information about the showers: Refer to 06-180-10 General Information about Shower
Control.
CABIN HEATERS
The electrical cabin heaters are used for air-conditioning and to compensate the water evaporation
cooling effects of the humidifier in the FCRC and the showers.
For information about the humidifier: Refer to 06-150-10 General Information about Humidification.
The crewmembers can monitor and control the cabin heaters via the mini FAP in the crew rest areas
and the FAP. The current status or any fault conditions are displayed on the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL
HEATERS page.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The cabin crewmembers can access the HUMIDIFICATION page on the mini FAP by pushing the
HUMID. function button of the first level on the function selector.
Typical Humidification Page
Crewmembers can access the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the FAP by pushing the
CABIN HEATER function button on the second level of the function selector.
Typical CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS Page on the FAP
POSITION OF THE CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS PAGE ON THE MINI FAP
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
Crewmembers can access the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the mini FAP in the crew
rest area by pushing the CABIN HEATER function button on the first level of the function selector.
Typical CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS Page
The HUMIDIFICATION page on the mini FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the
humidification function.
The cabin crew can access the HUMIDIFICATION page by pushing the HUMID. function button on the
first level of the function selector of the mini FAP.
Typical Humidification Page
Title Description
Status Field The status field indicates the name of the humidifier and its status in the
same line.
- ON indicates that the humidifier is ON
- OFF indicates that the humidifier is OFF
- --- indicates a fault or that there is no status information available about
the humidifier.
If there is more than one humidifier available for control, there will be a list
displayed in the status field.
Title Description
RESET Pushing the RESET button resets the indicated humidifier.
ON/OFF Pushing the ON/OFF button turns the humidifier ON or OFF.
The humidifier is ON when the button is green (activated). The humidifier is
OFF when the button is gray (enabled).
For the crew rest areas and the showers there are electrical heaters installed.
Note: The electrical heating function for the FCRC is linked to the humidification function: If the
heating function is turned OFF, the humidifier in the FCRC is turned OFF, too.
The status of the humidifier on the mini FAP does not change immediately after turning OFF
the heating function.
The CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the FAP and mini FAP enables the crew to monitor
and control the heating function.
Note: The cabin crew can select a temperature on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page. It is possible
to select a temperature when the heaters are turned OFF. However this will not turn the
heaters ON automatically. To start the heating the cabin crew has to turn ON the cabin via the
CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page.
The cabin crew can access the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page on the FAP or mini FAP by
pushing the CABIN HEATER function button on the first level of the function selector.
Note: The function control for the electrical heaters is the same on the FAP or the mini FAP
Title Description
Status Field The status field indicates the name of the cabin heater and its status in the
same line.
- ON indicates that the cabin heater is ON
- OFF indicates that the cabin heater is OFF
- --- indicates a fault or that there is no status information available for the
cabin heater.
RESET Pushing the RESET button resets the indicated cabin heater.
ON/OFF By default the cabin heater is ON.
The cabin heater is ON when the button is green (activated). The cabin
heater is OFF when the button is gray (enabled).
Pushing the ON/OFF button turns the cabin heater ON or OFF.
Note: If the cabin heater is OFF, it is still possible to select a temperature
on the TEMPERATURE page. However the cabin heater will not
turn ON automatically.
Note: The electrical heating function is linked to the humidification function: If the heating function is
turned OFF, the humidifier in the FCRC is turned OFF, too.
The status of the humidifier on the mini FAP does not change immediately after turning OFF
the heating function.
Humidification starts automatically above a flight level of 26, 000 ft and stops two hours prior to the top
of descent. However, the cabin crew can:
- Turn the humidifier ON or OFF.
- Reset the humidifier if there is a fault.
Typical Humidification Page
3. Push the ON/OFF button on the HUMIDIFICATION page to turn the humidifier ON. The button turns
green.
HOW TO RESET THE HUMIDIFIER
To reset the humidifier follow the steps described below:
1. Push the HUMID. function button on the first level of the function selector on the mini FAP to display
the HUMIDIFICATION page.
2. Push the RESET button on the HUMIDIFICATION page. The humidification system will restart
(hardware reset).
Additional electrical heaters are installed in the crew rest area and the showers. The CABIN
TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page on the FAP and the mini FAP enables the crew to
monitor and control the heating function.
Note: The cabin crew can select a temperature on the CABIN TEMPERATURE page. It is possible
to select a temperature when the heaters are turned OFF. However this will not turn the
heaters ON automatically. To start the heating the cabin crew has to turn ON the cabin heaters
via the CABIN TEMP. CONTROL HEATERS page.
Via the CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL HEATERS page the cabin crew can turn the cabin heaters
ON or OFF.
- Turn the cabin heaters ON or OFF. By default the cabin heaters are ON.
Note: The Flight Crew Rest Compartment (FCRC) is equipped with electrical heaters. The
electrical heating function is linked to the humidification function: If the heating function is
turned OFF, the humidifier in the FCRC is turned OFF, too.
The status of the humidifier on the mini FAP does not change immediately after turning
OFF the heating function.
- Reset the cabin heaters if there is a fault.
The Electromechanical Window Shade (EMWS) replace the standard window blinds. The EMWS
provide the shading of the passenger compartment by means of two electromechanically driven blinds.
The basic functions of the EMWS are:
- Two-level mechanical shading of the passenger compartment: Refer to 06-160-40 Description of
Electromechanical Window Shades
- Local control by the passenger (minisuite control unit or buttons on the window pane): Refer to
06-160-40 How to Operate the Window Blinds via the Local Controls
- Central crew control via the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP): Refer to 06-160-30 Position of the
WINDOW SHADES Page on the FAP
- Crew control unit on the minisuite shroud (aisle side)
- Mechanical override (for safety reasons): Refer to 06-160-50 How to Use the Mechanical Override
to Operate the Window Shades.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The Electromechanical Window Shades (EMWS) replace the standard Airbus window blinds on the
entire Upper Deck (UD).
The electromechanical window shades can be operated manually with a mechanical override tool
(hexagonal screwdriver).
Override tools are stowed in the stowage boxes of the cabin attendant seats on the Upper Deck (UD).
Typically the stowage location of the override tools is in the respective left seat of a double attendant
seat, referring to flight direction.
The cabin crew can access the WINDOW SHADES page by pushing the WINDOW SHADES button on
the function selector. (For information about the function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP
Overview).
WINDOW SHADES Button on a Typical Function Selector
The WINDOW SHADES CONTROL pages on the FAP enable the cabin crew to monitor and control
the electromechanical window shades.
The cabin crew can access the WINDOW SHADES CONTROL ALL decks page by pushing the
WINDOW SHADES button of the function selector. For more information about the function selector:
Refer to 04-20-10 Operation of the FAP.
The cabin crew can access the WINDOW SHADES CONTROL page for a specific deck by touching
the related aircraft symbol or by pushing the corresponding button of the deck selector on the
WINDOW SHADES CONTROL ALL decks page.
Typical WINDOW SHADES CONTROL Page
To operate the window blinds from the FAP follow the steps below.
1. Push the WINDOW SHADES button on the function selector of the FAP to access the WINDOW
SHADES CONTROL page.
For information about the function selector: Refer to Operation of the FAP.
Typical WINDOW SHADES CONTROL Page
2. Push the FIRST CLASS SELECT button. The FIRST CLASS control pad will be displayed.
3. To open the window shades of the LEFT, RIGHT, or LEFT & RIGHT seats, push the respective
OPEN button.
4. To bring the window shades of the LEFT, RIGHT, or LEFT & RIGHT seats to the mid position, push
the respective MID button.
5. To close the window shades of the LEFT, RIGHT, or LEFT & RIGHT seats, push the respective
CLOSE button.
HOW TO OPERATE THE WINDOW BLINDS VIA THE LOCAL CONTROLS H10
SUSTAINED MODE
To operate the window shades with the sustained mode, follow the steps below.
Continued on the next page
1. Press and hold the ▾ or the ▴ pushbutton for longer than 0.5 seconds.
When you have tapped on the ▾ pushbutton, the translucent window blind moves down first. When
the translucent window blind has moved entirely down, the opaque window blind moves down, too.
When you have tapped on the ▴ pushbutton, the opaque window blind moves up first. When the
opaque window blind has moved entirely up, the translucent window blind will move up, too.
2. To stop the moving window blind, release the pushbutton.
HOW TO USE THE MECHANICAL OVERRIDE TO OPERATE THE WINDOW SHADES H11
To move up/down the window blind(s) manually, use the provided manual override tool, a hexagon
screwdriver.
HOW TO GET THE OVERRIDE TOOL FROM ITS STOWAGE LOCATION
The override tools are stowed in the stowage boxes of the cabin attendant seats in the zones where
the Electromechanical Window Shades (EmWS) are installed. Typically, the override tools are stowed
in the respective left seat of a double attendant seat, in flight direction.
Note: A placard indicates the location of the manual release tools:
- Manual release tool for the oxygen boxes in the Passenger Service Unit (PSU)
- Manual override tool (hexagon screwdriver) to operate the electromechanical window
shades manually.
1. Use the latch of the stowage box of the cabin attendant seat to open the cover.
2. Open the pouch and remove the hexagon screwdriver.
HOW TO OPERATE THE WINDOW SHADES MECHANICALLY
1. Insert the hexagon screwdriver into the hole between the two pushbuttons.
2. Slightly push the hexagon screwdriver downwards. The ball-shaped head of the hexagon
screwdriver will mechanically connect to the window blind drive.
3. Turn the hexagon screwdriver counterclockwise to move up the window blind(s).
Turn the hexagon screwdriver clockwise to move down the translucent window blind.
Note: The opaque window blind cannot be moved down manually.
To entirely move up (or down) the window blind(s), approximately ten full turns of the hexagon
screwdriver are necessary.
Note: If both, the translucent and the opaque window blind are down, they will move up at the
same time.
4. Remove the hexagon screwdriver from the hole.
5. Restore the hexagon screwdriver to the pouch in the stowage box of the cabin attendant seat.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. When operating the window shades via any (electronic) control: Did one
or more window shades stop moving at the wrong position? Go to 2 END
2. To reset the controller of the affected window shade, follow the steps
described below.
1. Go to the faulty window(s).
2. Push both local pushbuttons (▴/▾) in the window pane at the same
time and keep holding them for approximately 5 s.
The pushbuttons will start to flash when the software was reset.
3. Use the local pushbuttons to operate the window blinds. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Is it possible to move the window shades without any problems? END Go to 4
4. When the reset was not successful:
Make an entry into the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL), mentioning:
- The affected seat.
- Countermeasures taken. END END
The SHOWER CONTROL page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to control and monitor the
showers.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
A WATER QUANTITY indicator indicates the available water. Additionally there is a control pad for
each shower unit that provides:
- Information about the shower status
- Indication of the remaining shower time
- ON / OFF control
- Timer reset
- Cleaning Mode control.
Before a passenger can take a shower, the cabin crew must activate the shower from the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP). Before switching ON the showers at the FAP, the cabin crew has to make sure
that the water system is pressurized.
When a passenger has taken a shower and has left the shower room and the shower has been
cleaned, the cabin crew must deactivate the shower from the FAP.
For more information about the operation of the shower: Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start a Shower
from the FAP.
The cabin crew can access the SHOWER CONTROL page by pushing the SHOWER button on the
second level of the function selector on the FAP. (For information about the function selector: Refer to
Cabin Systems from FAP Overview)
Typical SHOWER CONTROL Page
The SHOWER CONTROL page on the FAP enables the cabin crew to monitor and control the shower
function.
The cabin crew can access the SHOWER CONTROL page by pushing the SHOWER function button
on the second level of the function selector of the FAP.
Typical SHOWER CONTROL Page
Title Description
SHOWER UNIT x For each shower unit there is a control pad on the SHOWER CONTROL
page.
ON/OFF Button Pushing the ON/OFF button on the SHOWER UNIT control pad
activates/deactivates the corresponding shower.
RESET TIMER Button Pushing the RESET TIMER button after a shower activation resets the timer
for the shower time. When the timer is reset the shower is ready for use.
Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start a Shower from the FAP
Title Description
CLEAN MODE Button Pushing the CLEAN MODE button when the shower is vacant after its use
starts the cleaning mode. Refer to 06-180-40 How to Start the Cleaning Mode
on the FAP
SHOWER STATUS The SHOWER STATUS field on the SHOWER UNIT control pad indicates the
status of the corresponding shower unit. The following statuses are possible:
- SHOWER OFF
- READY FOR USE
- SHOWER LOCKED PREHEATING
- CLEANING MODE
- SHOWER IN USE
- SHOWER IN USE - PAUSED
- SHOWER IN USE - DOOR OPEN
- NO DATA
- SHOWER INOP.
Shower Status for details of the shower status.
REMAINING TIME The remaining shower time is indicated in minutes and in a progress bar on
the SHOWER UNIT control pad.
The green arrow above the progress bar indicates the preset time out
warning. It is positioned relatively to the set total water time (shower time).
The remaining shower time is indicated by a blue bar before the time out
warning: It decreases from the right to the left.
The remaining shower time is indicated by an amber bar after the time out
warning.
SHOWER TIME The SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad enables the cabin crew to set
SETTINGS the TOTAL WATER TIME and the TIME OUT WARNING.
TOTAL WATER TIME The cabin crew can set the TOTAL WATER TIME by pushing the ▴ or ▾ icons
on the SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad. If the maximum time is
reached the ▴ icon is disabled. If the minimum time is reached the ▾ icon is
disabled.
The corresponding time is indicated in the text box and on the progress bars
of the SHOWER UNIT control pads.
The maximum shower time is 10 min. The minimum shower time is 5 min.
The default is 5 min.
Title Description
TIME OUT WARNING The cabin crew can set the TIME OUT WARNING by pushing the ▴ or ▾ icons
on the SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad. If the maximum time is
reached the ▴ icon is disabled. If the minimum time is reached the ▾ icon is
disabled.
The corresponding time is indicated in the text box and on the progress bars
of the SHOWER UNIT control pads.
The minimum time-out time is 0 s. The maximum time-out time is 1 min. Refer
to 06-180-40 How to Set a Time-Out Warning from the FAP
WATER QUANTITY The WATER QUANTITY control pad indicates the available amount of
available potable water on the aircraft in %.
SHOWER STATUS
Message Description
SHOWER OFF When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER OFF, the
shower is off.
SHOWER LOCKED When the cabin crew has pushed the ON/OFF button to activate the
PREHEATING shower function the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status
SHOWER LOCKED PREHEATING. To get this status the cabin crew must
push the ON/OFF button.
READY FOR USE When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status READY FOR USE,
the passenger can start the shower via the WATER CONTROL pb located
in the shower.
SHOWER IN USE When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER IN USE
a passenger is taking a shower.
SHOWER IN USE - When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER IN
PAUSED USE-PAUSED a passenger is taking a shower but the water is not running.
SHOWER IN USE - When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER IN USE -
DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN a passenger is taking a shower but the shower door is open.
Note: Normally the water stops running when the door of the shower is
open.
Message Description
CLEANING MODE When the passenger has left the shower room it must be cleaned. The
cabin crew must push the CLEAN MODE button to activate the cleaning
mode. The SHOWER STATUS field will indicate the status CLEANING
MODE.
In this mode the door of the shower can remain open while water is running
to rinse the shower.
During the cleaning mode the cleaning person can activate the water flow
three times by pushing the WATER CONTROL pb each time.
NO DATA When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status NO DATA, the data
flow from and to the shower control unit is disturbed. The cabin crew
should not activate the shower or start the cleaning mode. If the message
persists on the FAP make an entry into the digital cabin logbook.
SHOWER INOP When the SHOWER STATUS field indicates the status SHOWER INOP
the shower is inoperative. It can not be activated anymore. The cabin crew
must make an entry into the digital cabin logbook.
The cabin crew control and monitor the shower function via the SHOWER CONTROL page on the
FAP. There is a FAP located at U1L near the shower rooms.
1. Push the SHOWER button on the second level of the function selector to display the SHOWER
CONTROL page.
2. Push the ON/OFF button on the SHOWER UNIT control pad of the desired shower.
Pushing the ON/OFF button activates the shower: The SHOWER STATUS field displays the
message SHOWER LOCKED / PRE-HEATING This indicates to the cabin crew that the water to
the shower is preheating.
3. Wait until the preheating has finished and the SHOWER STATUS displays the message SHOWER
LOCKED.
4. Push the RESET TIMER button.
The default shower time is 5 min.
Note: There is no predefined time-out warning.
Shower time and time-out warning values can be changed by pushing the corresponding ▴ or ▾
icons on the SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad when the showers are OFF.
Pushing the RESET TIMER button activates the TIME REMAINING indication inside the shower
unit. The lighted TIME REMAINING indication comes on, which indicates to the passenger that the
shower is ready for use.
Note: By default, the shower time is set at 5 min with no time-out warning. If less passengers are
on board the shower time may be increased in steps of 1 min to a maximum time of 10 min.
When the water in the shower compartment is running, the SHOWER STATUS will display the
message SHOWER IN USE.
The time counter on the FAP page will indicate the remaining shower time to the cabin crew.
The cabin crew can set the shower time on the SHOWER TIME SETTINGS control pad on the
SHOWER CONTROL FAP page.
The shower time can only be set if both showers are off (SHOWER STATUS = SHOWER OFF).
1. If the showers are ON but no passengers are using the showers push the ON/OFF buttons.
The ON/OFF buttons will turn from green to gray and the ▴ or ▾ icons on the SHOWER TIME
SETTINGS control pad will be enabled.
2. Use the ▴ or ▾ icons to increase or decrease the shower time in steps of 1 min to a maximum time
of 10 min. 5 min is the minimum shower time.
Note: By default, the shower time is set at 5 min with no time-out warning. If less passengers are
on board the shower time may be increased in steps of 1 min to a maximum time of 10 min.
3. Push the ON/OFF button(s) to activate the shower(s).
The cabin crew can set a time-out warning on the TIME SETTINGS area on the FAP. The time-out
warning indicates to the passenger in the shower compartment, that the shower time will be over soon.
When the time-out time is reached the time-out warning stops the water flow in the shower.
For example, if the TOTAL WATER TIME is set to 5 min, and the cabin crew set a time-out warning of
30 s, the water flow in the shower compartment will stop after 4 min and 30 s. To restart the water flow
for the remaining shower time, the passenger must push the WATER CONTROL pb.
The time-out warning can only be set if both showers are off (SHOWER STATUS = SHOWER OFF).
1. If the showers are ON but no passengers are using the showers push the ON/OFF buttons.
The ON/OFF buttons will turn from green to gray and the ▴ or ▾ icons on the SHOWER TIME
SETTINGS control pad will be enabled.
2. Use the ▴ or ▾ icons to increase or decrease the time-out warning in steps of 10 s to a maximum
time of 60 s.
3. Push the ON/OFF button(s) to activate the shower(s).
The cleaning mode provides water to enable the shower compartment to be cleaned after use.
1. Push the SHOWER button on the second level of the function selector to display the SHOWER
CONTROL page.
2. Push the CLEAN MODE button on the SHOWER UNIT control pad of the corresponding shower.
Pushing the CLEAN MODE button enables the cabin crew to clean the shower after use.
Note: The cleaning mode overrides the shower door switch, which allows the cleaning of the
shower with the door open and the water running.
When the CLEAN MODE is ON, the REMAINING TIME indication on the FAP page flashes until the
CLEAN MODE stops.
3. Push the WATER CONTROL pb, located in the shower compartment .
The water flow is activated to the shower hose. The water flow can be activated three times for a
maximum duration of 10 seconds each time by pressing the WATER CONTROL pb.
Note: During the CLEAN MODE the water heater does not come on.
4. Replace the handheld shower head to the wall supply elbow on the slide bar. Make sure that the
wall supply elbow is slid up on the slide bar to the highest position.
This will have the effect that residual water will drip out, ensuring that no bacteria can grow in the
shower hose. Any residual disinfectants will drip out of the shower hose, too. The shower hose
must be empty in order to avoid frost bursting.
5. Deactivate the shower on the FAP:
a. Push the SHOWER button on the second level of the function selector to display the SHOWER
CONTROL page.
b. Push the ON/OFF button on the SHOWER UNIT control pad of the desired shower. Pushing the
ON/OFF button deactivates the shower.
The Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) enables the cabin crew to report digitally cabin defects or anything
that concerns the cabin. The DCL is intended to replace the common paper aircraft logbook.
The cabin crew can access the DCL via the FAP.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "example" in the title.
The example will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would show.
The corresponding description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The DCL is organized in several screens:
- HOME page - Refer to 06-200-30 HOME Page
- USER REGISTRATION page - Refer to 06-200-30 USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE Pages
- FLIGHT INFORMATION page - Refer to 06-200-30 FLIGHT INFORMATION Page
- CREATE DEFECT REPORT page - Refer to 06-200-30 CREATE DEFECT REPORT Page
- SCRATCH PAD page - Refer to 06-200-30 SCRATCH PAD Page
- CABIN STATUS (LOGBOOK) page - Refer to 06-200-30 Logbook Pages Overview.
All reports are first stored in a scratch pad. The reports in the scratch pad can be updated, deleted or
moved into the logbook. If a report is in the logbook it can not be updated or deleted anymore.
Note: The cabin crew members who enter the cabin defect reports must ensure that the crew
member responsible for the cabin is aware about all safety related defect reports. The Airline
normally appoints the crewmember responsible for the cabin per flight phase (e.g. flight crew,
ramp agent, purser).
The pages of the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) have several different general elements. Their position
and function are described below.
GENERAL ELEMENTS OF THE DCL PAGES
General Elements of the DCL Pages
STATUS BAR
The status bar displays the:
- Status of the DCL
- Error messages
- Information about the entered defect.
SCROLL BAR
If a page contains more information than the screen can display, a scroll bar will indicate to the
cabin crew that more information is available. The green slider of the scroll bar shows the current
position on the page. To view the other information, the cabin crew can use the PREV or NEXT
button. If there is no previous or next page available, the PREV or NEXT button will be inactive.
Continued on the next page
DECK SYMBOL
The deck symbol indicates the location of the selected section or the selected defect location on the
aircraft depending on the defect.
MENU BAR
The menu bar has three buttons for navigation and help.
Pushing the HELP button opens the help topic for the currently selected function.
Pushing the HOME button opens the start page of the DCL (DCL HOME page).
Pushing the BACK button opens the previously visited page.
TEXT BOX
The text box offers the cabin crew the possibility to enter individual comments for a defect report. A
virtual keyboard can be used to enter the text. See Virtual keyboard.
VIRTUAL KEYBOARD
The cabin crew can use the virtual keyboard to enter all data that is need for a report.
BUTTONS
There are two kinds of selection buttons:
- Selection buttons that initiate an action
- Selection buttons that indicate a selection.
SELECTION BUTTONS THAT INDICATE A SELECTION
Button/Status Description
Active The function of the button is available. Pushing the button will
activate the corresponding action.
Engaged When selections can be made, pushing the button engages it. The
green color indicates the selection.
Button/Status Description
Toggle button Pushing this button will toggle between different functions
The pages of the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) have several different general elements. Their position
and function are described below.
SCREEN LAYOUT OF THE DCL PAGES
Screen Layout of the DCL Pages
STATUS BAR
The status bar displays the:
- Status of the DCL
- Error messages
- Information about the entered defect.
SCROLL BAR
If a page contains more information than the screen can display, a scroll bar will indicate to the
cabin crew that more information is available. The green slider of the scroll bar shows the current
position on the page. To view the other information, the cabin crew can use the PREV or NEXT
button. If there is no previous or next page available, the PREV or NEXT button will be inactive.
Continued on the next page
DECK SYMBOL
The deck symbol indicates the location of the selected section or the selected defect location on the
aircraft depending on the defect.
MENU BAR
The menu bar has three buttons for navigation and help.
Pushing the HELP button opens the help topic for the currently selected function.
Pushing the HOME button opens the start page of the DCL (DCL HOME page).
Pushing the BACK button opens the previously visited page.
TEXT BOX
The text box offers the cabin crew the possibility to enter individual comments for a defect report. A
virtual keyboard can be used to enter the text. See Virtual keyboard.
BUTTONS
There are two kinds of selection buttons:
- Selection buttons that initiate an action
- Selection buttons that indicate a selection.
SELECTION BUTTONS THAT INDICATE A SELECTION
Button/Status Description
Active The function of the button is available. Pushing the button will
activate the corresponding action.
Engaged When selections can be made, pushing the button engages it. The
green color indicates the selection.
Toggle button Pushing this button will toggle between different functions
Button/Status Description
Virtual keyboard Pushing this button will display a virtual keyboard.
HOME PAGE
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020
When the cabin crew has selected the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP), the DCL HOME page is displayed.
Example of a DCL HOME Page
HOME PAGE
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0009, 0023-0249
When the cabin crew has selected the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP), the DCL HOME page is displayed.
Example of a DCL HOME Page
The USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE USER page displays when the cabin crewmember pushes the
USER button on the HOME page.
The registered users are listed (SELECT USER list) below the REGISTER NEW USER control pad.
The USER REGISTRATION / CHANGE USER page has two control pads:
- REGISTER NEW USER
- SELECT USER.
When the cabin crew has selected the FLIGHT button on the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) HOME
page, the FLIGHT INFORMATION page opens.
Note: Normally the flight crew enters the flight information. The cabin crew does not to access this
page.
Example of a FLIGHT INFORMATION Page
When the cabin crew has selected the FLIGHT button on the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) HOME
page, the FLIGHT INFORMATION page opens.
Note: The flight crew enters the flight information.
FLIGHT INFORMATION Page (Example)
Defect reports can be created via the CREATE DEFECT REPORT pages. The first and central
CREATE DEFECT REPORT page is the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION page.
The cabin crew has three possibilities to create a defect report via the CREATE DEFECT REPORT -
SELECTION page:
- Pushing the LOCATION button or
- Pushing the MAJOR FUNCTION button or
- Pushing the MOST COMMON COMPONENTS button.
The only difference between the two possibilities is the input order. The result will be the same.
After pushing the LOCATION or MAJOR FUNCTION or MAJOR FUNCTION button the cabin crew is
directed through several pages for input.
Defect reports can be created via the CREATE DEFECT REPORT pages. The first and central
CREATE DEFECT REPORT page is the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION page.
The cabin crew has four possibilities to create a defect report via the CREATE DEFECT REPORT -
SELECTION page:
- Pushing the LOCATION button or
- Pushing the MAJOR FUNCTION button or
- Pushing the MOST COMMON COMPONENTS button or
- Pushing the KEYWORD SEARCH button.
The only difference between the possibilities is the input order. The result will be the same.
After pushing the LOCATION or MAJOR FUNCTION or MOST COMMON COMPONENTS or
KEYWORD SEARCH button the cabin crew is directed through several pages for input.
Navigation on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT Pages
The displayed deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION page corresponds to the
selected deck for a previous defect report.
The displayed deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECTION page corresponds to the
selected deck for a previous defect report.
The LOCATION - SEAT AREA page enables the cabin crew to select:
- All seats on a deck
- A seat region
- A single seat
- A combination of seat region(s) and single seat(s).
The LOCATION - SEAT AREA page enables the cabin crew to select:
- All seats on a deck
- A seat region
- A single seat
- A combination of seat region(s) and single seat(s).
1. Push the USER button on the HOME page of the DCL to display the USER REGISTRATION page.
1. Push the USER button on the HOME page of the DCL to display the USER REGISTRATION page.
If a cabin crewmember is not listed on the USER REGISTRATION page, follow the steps described
below for the login:
Example of a DCL HOME Page
1. Push the USER button on the HOME page of the DCL to display the USER REGISTRATION page.
2. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the USER ID on the REGISTER NEW USER control
pad on the USER REGISTRATION page . Push the OK button on the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page
to confirm the entered user id. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will close and the user id will be
displayed in the corresponding text box.
3. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the NAME. Push the OK button on the VIRTUAL
KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered name. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will close and the
name will be displayed in the corresponding text box.
4. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the PASSWORD. Push the OK button on the
VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered password. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will
close and the password will be displayed in asterisk (*) in the corresponding text box.
5. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to confirm the PASSWORD. Push the OK button on the
VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered password. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will
close and the password will be displayed in asterisk (*) in the corresponding text box.
6. Confirm and save the entries with the REGISTER NEW USER button. The USER REGISTRATION
page will close and the DCL HOME page will open. The name of the previously registered user will
be displayed in the USER text box. The user is automatically logged in.
If a cabin crew member is not listed on the USER REGISTRATION page, follow the steps described
below for the login:
Example of a DCL HOME Page
1. Push the USER button on the HOME page of the DCL to display the USER REGISTRATION page.
2. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the USER ID on the REGISTER NEW USER control
pad on the USER REGISTRATION page . Push the OK button on the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page
to confirm the entered user id. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will close and the user id will be
displayed in the corresponding text box.
3. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the NAME. Push the OK button on the VIRTUAL
KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered name. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will close and the
name will be displayed in the corresponding text box.
4. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to enter the PASSWORD. Push the OK button on the
VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered password. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will
close and the password will be displayed in asterisk (*) in the corresponding text box.
5. Use the VIRTUAL KEYBOARD button to confirm the PASSWORD. Push the OK button on the
VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page to confirm the entered password. The VIRTUAL KEYBOARD page will
close and the password will be displayed in asterisk (*) in the corresponding text box.
6. Confirm and save the entries with the REGISTER NEW USER button. The USER REGISTRATION
page will close and the DCL HOME page will open. The name of the previously registered user will
be displayed in the USER text box. The user is automatically logged in.
Note: The cabin crew members who enter the cabin defect reports must ensure that the crew
member responsible for the cabin is aware about all safety related defect reports. The Airline
normally appoints the crew member responsible for the cabin per flight phase (e.g. flight crew,
ramp agent, purser).
Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in the cabin using keyword search.
In this example the defect is a dirty return to cabin sign next to a galley on the main deck.
To create a defect report in the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) for this defect, follow the steps below.
Example of a DCL HOME Page
1. Push the CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the DCL HOME page. The CREATE REPORT
page will display on the screen.
3. Push the button for the deck for which the defect has to be reported.
The selected deck will be indicated in the corresponding text box and the aircraft symbol will display
the corresponding deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.
4. Push the KEYWORD SEARCH button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.
The CREATE DEFECT REPORT - KEYWORD SEARCH page will display on the screen.
5. To search for a specific component (e.g. RETURN TO CABIN SIGN) simply enter some characters
of a word of the component (e.g. the first three characters of the word CABIN).
After each single key press, the list of components is reduced to those components matching the
entered characters.
6. To enter a part of another word for searching the component (e.g. RETURN TO CABIN SIGN)
simply add a blank and enter some characters of the next word of the component (e.g. the first
three characters of the word RETURN).
7. Push the RETURN TO CABIN SIGN button. The SELECT DEFECT page will display on the screen.
8. Push the DIRTY button. The SELECT AREA page will display on screen.
9. Push the GALLEY button. The SELECT LOCATION - GALLEY page will display on screen.
10.Push the GM22 button to select the galley 22 in the forward cabin. The CREATE DEFECT
REPORT page displays and all selections from the previous steps are indicated in the
corresponding text boxes.
11.Push the SEVERITY button. The CHANGE SEVERITY page displays on the screen.
12.Push the MEDIUM button, for example.
13.Push the SAVE button to save the defect report into the scratch pad.
Note: The cabin crew members who enter the cabin defect reports must ensure that the crew
member responsible for the cabin is aware about all safety related defect reports. The Airline
normally appoints the crewmember responsible for the cabin per flight phase (e.g. flight crew,
ramp agent, purser).
Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in the cabin.
In this example the defect is a flickering wash-table light in a lavatory on the main deck.
To create a defect report in the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) for this defect, follow the steps below.
Example of a DCL HOME Page
1. Push the CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the DCL HOME page. The CREATE DEFECT
REPORT page will display on the screen.
3. Push the button for the deck for which the defect has to be reported.
The selected deck will be indicated in the corresponding text box and the aircraft symbol will display
the corresponding deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.
4. Push the LOCATION button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page will display
on the screen.
5. Push the LAVATORY button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page. The
LAVATORY page will display on the screen.
6. Push the LM14 button to select the lavatory 14 in the forward cabin. The SELECT MAJOR
FUNCTION page for LAVATORY LM14 will display on the screen.
7. Push the LIGHT button. The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for LAVATORY, LM14, LIGHT will
display on the screen.
8. Push the SPECIAL LIGHTS button. The SELECT COMPONENT page will display on the screen.
9. Push the WASHTABLE LIGHTS button. The SELECT DEFECT page will display on the screen.
10.Push the FLICKERING button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT page displays and all selections
from the previous steps are indicated in the corresponding text boxes.
11.Push the SEVERITY button. The CHANGE SEVERITY page displays on the screen.
12.Push the MEDIUM button, for example.
13.Push the SAVE button to save the defect report to the scratch pad.
Note: The cabin crew members who enter the cabin defect reports must ensure that the crew
member responsible for the cabin is aware about all safety related defect reports. The Airline
normally appoints the crew member responsible for the cabin per flight phase (e.g. flight crew,
ramp agent, purser).
Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in the cabin.
In this example the defect is a flickering wash-table light in a lavatory on the main deck.
To create a defect report in the Digital Cabin Logbook (DCL) for this defect, follow the steps below.
Example of a DCL HOME Page
1. Push the CREATE DEFECT REPORT button on the DCL HOME page. The CREATE DEFECT
REPORT page will display on the screen.
3. Push the button for the deck for which the defect has to be reported.
The selected deck will be indicated in the corresponding text box and the aircraft symbol will display
the corresponding deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.
4. Push the LOCATION button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page will display
on the screen.
5. Push the LAVATORY button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page. The
LAVATORY page will display on the screen.
6. Push the LM14 button to select the lavatory 14 in the forward cabin. The SELECT MAJOR
FUNCTION page for LAVATORY LM14 will display on the screen.
7. Push the LIGHT button. The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for LAVATORY, LM14, LIGHT will
display on the screen.
8. Push the SPECIAL LIGHTS button. The SELECT COMPONENT page will display on the screen.
9. Push the WASHTABLE LIGHT button. The SELECT DEFECT page will display on the screen.
10.Push the FLICKERING button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT page displays and all selections
from the previous steps are indicated in the corresponding text boxes.
11.Push the SEVERITY button. The CHANGE SEVERITY page displays on the screen.
12.Push the MEDIUM button, for example.
13.Push the SAVE button to save the defect report to the scratch pad.
Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in a seat area.
In the example the defect is a PED connectivity / in-seat power - internet operation malfunction at
several seats on the main deck.
Example of a DCL HOME Page
3. Push the button for the deck for which the defect has to be reported.
The selected deck will be indicated in the corresponding text box and the aircraft symbol will display
the corresponding deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.
4. Push the LOCATION button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page will display
on the screen.
5. Push the SEAT AREA button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page. The
SEAT AREA page will display on the screen.
10.Push the IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT button. The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT will display on the screen.
11.Push the SEAT POWER SUPPLY button. The SELECT COMPONENT page for SEAT POWER
SUPPLY will display on the screen.
13.Push the MALFUNCTION button. The initial CREATE DEFECT REPORT page displays and all
selections are indicated in the corresponding text boxes.
14.Push the SEVERITY button. The CHANGE SEVERITY page displays on the screen.
15.Push the MEDIUM button, for example, then confirm the selection with the OK button.
Below is an example of how to create a defect report for a defect in a seat area.
In the example the defect is a PED connectivity / in-seat power - internet operation malfunction at
several seats on the main deck.
Example of a DCL HOME Page
3. Push the button for the deck for which the defect has to be reported.
The selected deck will be indicated in the corresponding text box and the aircraft symbol will display
the corresponding deck on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT page.
4. Push the LOCATION button. The CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page will display
on the screen.
5. Push the SEAT AREA button on the CREATE DEFECT REPORT - SELECT AREA page. The
SEAT AREA page will display on the screen.
10.Push the IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT button. The SELECT MAJOR FUNCTION page for
IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT will display on the screen.
11.Push the SEAT POWER SUPPLY button. The SELECT COMPONENT page for SEAT POWER
SUPPLY will display on the screen.
13.Push the MALFUNCTION button. The initial CREATE DEFECT REPORT page displays and all
selections are indicated in the corresponding text boxes.
14.Push the SEVERITY button. The CHANGE SEVERITY page displays on the screen.
15.Push the MEDIUM button, for example, then confirm the selection with the OK button.
To view the defect reports in the logbook follow the steps described below:
Example of a DCL HOME Page
1. Push the CABIN STATUS button on the HOME page. The CABIN STATUS page will display on the
screen.
2. Push the CABIN STATUS button on the CABIN STATUS page. The DEFECT REPORT LISTING
page will display on the screen.
To view the defect reports in the logbook follow the steps described below:
Example of a DCL HOME Page
1. Push the CABIN STATUS button on the HOME page. The CABIN STATUS page will display on the
screen.
2. Push the CABIN STATUS button on the CABIN STATUS page. The DEFECT REPORT LISTING
page will display on the screen.
TELEPHONY service is inhibited automatically and the NO MOBILE signs in the cabin are ON. At
an altitude of 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) aircraft height over terrain the NO MOBILE signs in the
cabin turn OFF automatically to indicate that the mobile telephony is available.
Note: When the aircraft descends and reaches an altitude below 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft)
aircraft height over terrain the NO MOBILE signs turn ON and active mobile phone calls will
automatically disconnect within 1 min.
The cabin crew can control and monitor the cabin connectivity services and functions via a connectivity
user interface. The connectivity user interface (CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application) runs on
the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP). Refer to 06-210-20 Position of the Cabin Connectivity Application on
the FAP.
Note: The INTERNET CONNECTIVITY is part of the IFE system. In case of failures, the cabin crew
should also check the IFE Crew Terminal for detailed information.
Via the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application on the FAP the cabin crew can:
- Turn ON/OFF the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service and/or the WIRELESS CONNECTION
(WLAN) function
- Turn ON/OFF the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Activate/deactivate the QUIET MODE
- View the status information about the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service
- View the status information about the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Reset faulty services
- Reset the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system
- View the status of the
- Ground connection
- In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) connection
- Avionic data.
Note: The cabin crew must not turn OFF the WLAN connection if the TELEMEDICINE application is
installed and activated.
NO MOBILE SIGNS
When the passenger signs (NO MOBILE signs) are ON, this indicates that mobiles phones must be
switched to a non-transmitting mode (flight mode) or OFF. The passenger signs will automatically
turn OFF when reaching 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) aircraft height over terrain and will
automatically turn ON again at an altitude below 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) aircraft height over
terrain.
The passenger signs will be ON under the following conditions: L2
- The aircraft altitude is lower than 4 000 m ( app rox.13300 ft) aircraft height over terrain
- The aircraft is flying over a country without a license to operate a mobile telephony service.
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY service button is deactivated (gray).
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY service is faulty. There is an amber indication on the SERVICE
OVERVIEW page.
- The corresponding switch in the cockpit has been switched ON.
Continued on the next page
L1
Note: The passengers can use the Internet and telephony service of their provider on ground
before and after the flight.
Therefore the NO MOBILE signs turn OFF automatically in the following flight phases:
- Flight phase 1: Boarding
- Flight phases 10 and 11: Taxi after landing and disembarkation.
QUIET MODE
The cabin crew can use the QUIET MODE to restrict the mobile phone functions to Short Message
Service (SMS) and to a restricted communication via packet oriented data services. Passengers will
not be able to make or receive calls on their mobile phones when the QUIET MODE is activated.
service is inhibited automatically and the NO MOBILE signs in the cabin are ON. At an altitude of
4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) above ground level the NO MOBILE signs in the cabin turn OFF
automatically to indicate that the mobile telephony is available.
Note: When the aircraft descends and reaches an altitude below 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft)
above ground level the NO MOBILE signs turn ON and active mobile phone calls will
automatically disconnect within 1 min.
OPERATION BY THE CABIN CREW L1
The cabin crew can control and monitor the cabin connectivity services and functions via a connectivity
user interface. The connectivity user interface (cabin connectivity application) runs on the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP).
The cabin crew can:
- Enable/disable the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY and/or the WIRELESS CONNECTION
- Enable/disable the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Enable/disable the QUIET MODE
- View the status information about the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY
- View the status information about the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Reset faulty functions
- Reset the cabin connectivity system
- View the status of the
- Ground connection
- In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) connection (if configured accordingly)
- Avionic data.
NO MOBILE SIGNS
When the passenger signs (NO MOBILE signs) are ON, this indicates that mobiles phones must be
switched to a non-transmitting mode (Flight Mode) or OFF. The passenger signs will automatically
deactivate when reaching 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) above ground level and will automatically
turn ON again at an altitude below 4 000 m (approx. 13 300 ft) above ground level.
Continued on the next page
- The aircraft altitude is lower than 4 000 m ( app rox.13300 ft) above ground level.
- The aircraft is flying over a country without a license to operate a mobile telephony service.
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY button is deactivated (gray).
- The MOBILE TELEPHONY function is faulty. There is an amber indication on the SERVICE
OVERVIEW page.
- The corresponding switch in the cockpit has been switched ON.
L1
Note: The passengers can use the Internet and telephony service of their provider on ground
before and after the flight.
Therefore the NO MOBILE signs turn OFF automatically in the following flight phases:
- Flight phase 1: Boarding
- Flight phases 10 and 11: Taxi after landing and disembarkation.
QUIET MODE
The cabin crew can use the QUIET MODE to restrict the mobile phone functions to Short Message
Service (SMS) and to a restricted communication via packet oriented data services. Passengers will
not be able to make or receive calls on their mobile phones when the QUIET MODE is activated.
The cabin crew can use the connectivity user interface to monitor and control the cabin connectivity
application. The connectivity user interface can be accessed via the APPLICATION MENU on the
Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
Example of an Application Menu on the FAP
Connectivity: ACTION
If the SERVICE button is green, the corresponding service is turned ON.
Pushing the SERVICE button turns ON/OFF the corresponding service for the
entire cabin and for the connected cabin systems.
When the SERVICE button is green, the corresponding service is ON.
If the SERVICE STATUS is OK, the corresponding service is available in the
entire cabin and for the connected cabin systems.
Pushing the SERVICE button when it is green, will turn OFF the corresponding
service.
If the SERVICE button is gray, the corresponding service is turned OFF. Pushing
the SERVICE button when it is gray, will enable the corresponding service for the
entire cabin and for the connected cabin systems. The corresponding service will
be available if the SERVICE STATUS is OK.
If the SERVICE button is inhibited, the corresponding service is not available.
If the SERVICE button is green and inhibited:
The SERVICE button is inhibited because the Portable Equipment and Wireless
(PEW) switch is activated by the cockpit crew.
If the cockpit crew deactivates the PEW switch in the cockpit the SERVICE
buttons get enabled.
If the SERVICE button is gray and inhibited:
The SERVICE button is inhibited because:
- The PEW switch is activated by the cockpit crew or
- The corresponding service is starting.
Deactivating the PEW switch in the cockpit will enable the corresponding
SERVICE button.
Button/Indicator Description
The WLAN button turns ON/OFF the WLAN function in the entire cabin.
If the WLAN button is green, all Cabin Wireless LAN Units (CWLUs) are operating
and WLAN is available in the entire cabin. Pushing the WLAN button when it is
green will disable the WLAN function for the entire cabin.
Note: The cabin crew must not disable the WLAN function if the
TELEMEDICINE application is activated.
If the WLAN button is gray, the WLAN function is not available in the entire cabin.
Pushing the WLAN button when it is gray,, will enable the WLAN function for the
entire cabin, if it is available and the system is OK.
If the WLAN button is green and is inhibited, the WLAN access is limited in the
cabin.
The reason may be:
- All CWLUs faulty
- At least one CWLU is resetting
- The PEW switch is activated by the cockpit crew
- A flight phase is active, where no WLAN is allowed.
If the WLAN button gray and is inhibited, the WLAN function is not available in the
entire cabin.
The reason may be:
- At least one CWLU is starting or resetting
- There is a radio error
- The PEW switch is activated by the cockpit crew
- A flight phase is active, where no WLAN is allowed.
If the QUIET MODE button is green, the QUIET mode is activated and the mobile
telephone connection is OFF.
Note: However, it is still possible to send and receive text messages and to use
packet oriented data services of the mobile phone.
Pushing the QUIET MODE button when it is green deactivates the QUIET MODE.
If the QUIET MODE button is gray, the quiet mode is deactivated and the mobile
telephone service is ON.
Pushing the QUIET MODE button when it is gray activates the QUIET MODE.
Button/Indicator Description
Note: Use the RESET button(s) before using the RESET ALL button.
Only if a reset with the RESET button is not successful, use the RESET
ALL button.
Pushing the RESET ALL button will reset the entire system.
Note: The RESET ALL button does not solve the following problems:
- Satellite connection:
- The cabin crew must use the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
controls to check the satellite connection. If necessary, the cabin
crew can reset the satellite connection via the IFE POWER page.
Refer to 06-130-30 IFE POWER MAIN DECK Page.
- The flight crew must enable the satellite connection via the
corresponding cockpit controls.
- Seat connection problems: The cabin crew must use the IFE controls
to reset the seat(s).
When the cabin crew has selected the CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
the SERVICE OVERVIEW page is displayed.
The SERVICE OVERVIEW page has two tables and corresponding info boxes:
CONNECTIVITY table:
- View the status information about the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY
- View the status information about the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Enable/disable the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY and/or the WIRELESS CONNECTION
- Enable/disable the MOBILE TELEPHONY service
- Enable/disable the QUIET MODE
- Reset faulty functions
- Reset the cabin connectivity system
EXTERNAL SYSTEMS table:
- View the status of the
- Ground condition
- In Flight Entertainment (IFE) connection (if configured accordingly)
- Avionic data.
Button/Indicator Description
Connectivity: ACTION
If the SERVICE button is green, the corresponding service function is enabled.
Pushing the SERVICE button enables/disables the corresponding service for the
whole cabin and for the connected cabin systems.
When the SERVICE button is green, the corresponding service is enabled.
If the SERVICE STATUS is OK, the corresponding service is available in the
whole cabin and for the connected cabin systems.
Pushing the SERVICE button when it is green, will disable the corresponding
service.
If the SERVICE button is gray, the corresponding service function is disabled.
Pushing the SERVICE button when it is gray, will enable the corresponding
service for the whole cabin and for the connected cabin systems. The
corresponding service will be available if the SERVICE STATUS is OK.
Button/Indicator Description
Pushing the WLAN button enables/disables the WLAN function in the whole
cabin.
If the WLAN button is displayed in green, all Cabin Wireless LAN Units (CWLUs)
are operating and WLAN is available in the whole cabin. Pushing the WLAN
button when it is green will disable the WLAN function for the whole cabin.
Note: The cabin crew must not disable the WLAN function if the
TELEMEDICINE application is activated.
If the WLAN button is displayed in gray, the WLAN function is not available in the
whole cabin.
Pushing the WLAN button when it is gray, will enable the WLAN function for the
whole cabin, if it is available and the system is OK.
If the QUIET MODE button is green, the QUIET mode is activated and the mobile
telephone connection is disabled.
Note: However, it is still possible to send and receive text messages and to use
packet oriented data services of the mobile phone.
Pushing the QUIET MODE button when it is green deactivates the QUIET MODE.
If the QUIET MODE button is gray, the quiet mode is deactivated and the mobile
telephone service is enabled.
Pushing the QUIET MODE button when it is gray activates the QUIET MODE.
Pushing the RESET ALL button will reset the entire system.
Note: The RESET ALL button does not solve the following problems:
- Satellite connection: The flight crew must enable it via the
corresponding cockpit controls.
- Seat connection problems: The cabin crew must use the In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE) controls to reset the seat(s).
The cabin crew can access the WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY page by pushing the corresponding
DETAILS button on the SYSTEM MONITORING page.
On the WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY page the details for the cabin internet connection are displayed.
Cabin Connectivity Application WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY Page
Button/Indicator Description
The aircraft symbols display the availability of the Cabin Wireless
Aircraft Symbols
LAN Units (CWLU) per deck.
Button/Indicator Description
Green: All CWLU are operating, WLAN is switched ON.
CWLU There are four Cabin Wireless LAN Units (CWLU) in the cabin:
Two on each deck.
If a CWLU icon is displayed in green it is operating.
Button/Indicator Description
If a CWLU icon is displayed in yellow it is not operating.
By default, all services of the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system are active when the SERVICE STATUS
icon for the corresponding service on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page is green. Refer to 06-210-30
Cabin Connectivity Application - SERVICE OVERVIEW Page.
HOW TO TURN ON THE INTERNET CONNECTIVITY SERVICE
By default, the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service activates and deactivates automatically. However,
the cabin crew can manually turn ON the service when it is available and if the system was manually
turned OFF.
The system is available after takeoff at 460 m (1 500 ft) above ground level and at approx. 250 m (800 L2
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding button on the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP).
2. Push the SERVICE button for the internet connectivity service on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page.
The SERVICE button toggles to green, and the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service is ON.
3. To return to the CIDS application on the FAP, press the CIDS hardkey below the FAP screen.
HOW TO TURN OFF THE INTERNET CONNECTIVITY SERVICE
By default, the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service activates and deactivates automatically. However,
the cabin crew can manually turn OFF the service.
Should it be necessary to turn OFF the function, follow the instructions below:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding button on the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP).
2. Push the SERVICE button for the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY service on the SERVICE
OVERVIEW page. The SERVICE button will toggle to gray, and the INTERNET CONNECTIVITY
service will turn OFF.
3. To return to the CIDS application on the FAP, press the CIDS hardkey below the FAP screen.
HOW TO TURN ON THE WIRELESS LAN FUNCTION FOR THE WHOLE CABIN
Applicable to: MSN 0135-0165, 0168-0190
By default the cabin connectivity application is active (ON). The system activates automatically in the
flight phase CRUISE, and deactivates when this flight phase ends.
However, the cabin crew can turn ON the system manually in the CRUISE phase if the automatic
activation did not work:
Access the Cabin Connectivity Application via the corresponding icon on the FAP and if required, enter
the password:
- Refer to 06-210-20 Position of the Cabin Connectivity Application on the FAP
- Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN ??? Reference not found ???.
Push the WLAN ON button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page . It will toggle to green, and the WLAN
function will be available in the whole cabin.
HOW TO TURN ON THE WIRELESS LAN FUNCTION FOR THE ENTIRE CABIN
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0134, 0167, 0200-0249
By default the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application is ON. The system activates automatically
in the flight phase CRUISE, and deactivates automatically when this flight phase ends.
However, the cabin crew can manually turn ON the system in the CRUISE phase if the system was
manually turned OFF:
In order to turn ON the Wireless LAN function for the entire Cabin:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding icon on the Flight H34
HOW TO TURN OFF THE WIRELESS LAN FUNCTION FOR THE WHOLE CABIN
Applicable to: MSN 0135-0165, 0168-0190
Access the Cabin Connectivity Application via the corresponding icon on the FAP and if required, enter
the password:
- Refer to 06-210-20 Position of the Cabin Connectivity Application on the FAP
- Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application LOG IN ??? Reference not found ???.
Push the WLAN ON button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page. It will toggle to gray and the WLAN
function will be turned OFF in the whole cabin.
Note: Don't turn OFF the WLAN function in the whole cabin if the TELEMEDICINE application is
activated.
HOW TO TURN OFF THE WIRELESS LAN FUNCTION FOR THE ENTIRE CABIN
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0134, 0167, 0200-0249
By default the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application is ON. The system activates automatically H35
in the flight phase CRUISE, and deactivates automatically when this flight phase ends.
However, the cabin crew can manually turn OFF the system in the CRUISE phase:
In order to turn OFF the Wireless LAN function for the entire cabin:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding icon on the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP).
2. Push the WLAN button on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page. The button will toggle to gray and the
WLAN function will be turned OFF in the entire cabin.
Note: Do not turn OFF the WLAN function in the entire cabin if the TELEMEDICINE application
is active.
the aircraft altitude is above 4 000 m (approx 13 300 ft) above ground level. It automatically
deactivates when one of the below applies:
- The flight phase CRUISE ends.
- The aircraft altitude is below 4 000 m (approx 13 300 ft) above ground level.
- The aircraft is flying over a country without a license to operate a mobile telephony service.
- Any electronic medical equipment is in use.
However, the cabin crew can manually turn OFF the MOBILE TELEPHONY service in the CRUISE
phase.
In order to manually turn OFF the MOBILE TELEPHONY service proceed as described below:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding button on the FAP.
2. Push the SERVICE button for the MOBILE TELEPHONY service on the SERVICE OVERVIEW
page (Refer to 06-210-30 Cabin Connectivity Application - SERVICE OVERVIEW Page). The
button toggles to gray, and the MOBILE TELEPHONY service is OFF.
CMT", check the IFE Crew Terminal (CT) for detailed information.
In order to reset a faulty service follow the steps described below:
1. Access the CABIN CONNECTIVITY system application via the corresponding button on the Flight
Attendant Panel (FAP).
2. Push the RESET button for the faulty service.
3. If the reset was not successful, make an entry into the digital cabin logbook: Refer to 06-200-40
How to Create a Defect Report.
Note: It is also possible to use the RESET ALL button, if the reset for a service failed.Refer to
06-210-40 How to Reset all Cabin Connectivity Services.
A reset of the Internet Connectivity or Mobile Telephony Service is necessary if one of these services
are displayed as faulty on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page.
In order to reset a faulty cabin connectivity service follow the steps described below:
1. Access the Cabin Connectivity Application via the corresponding button on the Flight Attendant
Panel (FAP).
2. Push the RESET button corresponding to the faulty service.
3. If the reset was not successful, make an entry into the digital cabin logbook: Refer to 06-200-40
How to Create a Defect Report.
A reset of the Internet Connectivity or Mobile Telephony Service is necessary if one of these services
are displayed as faulty on the SERVICE OVERVIEW page.
In order to reset faulty cabin connectivity services follow the steps described below:
1. Access the Cabin Connectivity Application via the corresponding button on the Flight Attendant
Panel (FAP).
2. Push the RESET ALL button.
3. If the reset was not successful, make an entry into the digital cabin logbook: Refer to 06-200-40
How to Create a Defect Report.
The Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS) is designed to help the flight crew to observe the cabin.
The CVMS allows the flight crew to monitor the cabin without going outside the cockpit (video stream L2
Note: Not all areas of the cabin can be monitored via the cameras.
The cabin crew can view the video images on the FAPs. It is possible to select the views of the
individual cameras.
Note: In the description, and if provided, in the operation, you may find illustrations that are not
customized. This will be indicated by the word "typical" in the title.
The typical illustration will usually display more functions than a customized illustration would
show.
A typical description and operation includes all information necessary to operate the
concerned system.
The following table displays the CVMS camera views in relation to the cabin areas:
The cabin crew can observe the cabin via the Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS). The cabin crew
can access the CVMS application via the FAP by pushing the SELECT button on the CVMS control
pad.
Position of the CVMS Application on the FAP
When the cabin crew has selected the Cabin Video Monitoring System (CVMS) application on the
FAP, the CVMS START page is displayed.
Typical CVMS Application START Page
Button Description
Pushing the CREW button will open the video pages of the CVMS application.
Note: The video pages may be protected by a login. If that is the case, the CVMS
LOGIN page will be displayed upon pushing the CREW button.
Pushing the MAINT button will display the system BITE status and the set-up.
The maintenance pages are protected by a login.
Note: The maintenance pages are provided for the maintenance personnel and for not
the cabin crew.
When the CVMS pages are protected by a password, and the cabin crew pushes the CREW button on
the CVMS START page, the CVMS LOGIN page is displayed.
Typical CVMS Application LOGIN Page
Title Description
Key pad Pushing the buttons 1 to 9 of the key pad enters the login code. The code is
displayed in *.
CLEAR Pushing the CLEAR button will delete the entered code from the text box
ENTER Pushing the ENTER button will confirm the entered code to the system and
grant access to the CVMS pages.
BACK Pushing the BACK button will display the CVMS START page.
Text box The text box displays the entered code in *.
When a cabin crewmember has logged into the Cabin Video Monitoring System, the CVMS HOME
page is displayed.
Typical CVMS Home Page
Title Description
Video Window The video window shows the video images of the selected camera.
Aircraft Deck Symbol The aircraft deck symbol displays the camera configuration on the selected
deck. The cameras are displayed in blue, green and gray.
The green camera symbols indicate the currently displaying cameras.
Blue = The images of the corresponding camera are currently not
displayed.
Green = The images of the corresponding camera are currently
displayed.
Gray = The data connection to the corresponding camera is lost.
QUAD VIEW Button Pushing the QUAD VIEW button displays the QUAD VIEW CVMS page.
Title Description
UPPER Button Pushing the UPPER button displays:
- Upper Deck aircraft symbol
- The active (selected) video images in the video window.
MAIN Button Pushing the MAIN button displays:
- Main Deck aircraft symbol
- The active (selected) video images in the video window.
LOCK Button Pushing the LOCK button displays the LOGIN page.
HOME Button Pushing the HOME button displays the predefined home view in the video
window.
CAMERA NAME Button Pushing the CAMERA NAME button enables or disables the display of the
camera name in the upper left corner of the video window.
SEND FD Button Pushing the SEND FD button sends the current video images to the Flight
Deck.
When a cabin crewmember has selected the QUAD VIEW button on the CVMS HOME page the
QUAD VIEW page is displayed.
Typical CVMS QUAD VIEW Page
Title Description
Video Window The video window is divided into four panes. Each pane shows the video
images of the selected camera.
Aircraft Deck Symbol The aircraft deck symbol displays the camera configuration on the selected
deck. the cameras are displayed in blue, green and gray The green camera
symbols indicate the currently displaying cameras.
Blue = The images of the corresponding camera are currently not displayed.
Green = The images of the corresponding camera are currently displayed.
Gray = The data connection to the corresponding camera is lost.
UPPER Button Pushing the UPPER button displays:
- Upper Deck aircraft symbol
- The active (selected) video images in the video window.
Title Description
MAIN Button Pushing the MAIN button displays:
- Main Deck aircraft symbol
- The active (selected) video images in the video window.
LOCK Button Pushing the LOCK button displays the LOGIN page.
HOME Button Pushing the HOME button displays the predefined home view in the video
window.
CAMERA NAME Button Pushing the CAMERA NAME button enables or disables the display of the
camera name in the video window.
SEND FD Button Pushing the SEND FD button sends the current video images to the System
Display (SD) in the cockpit.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
07-10 Description
Description........................................................................................................................................... 1
07-20 Location
Location ............................................................................................................................................... 1
07-40 Containers
Description........................................................................................................................................... 1
Manual Unlocking ................................................................................................................................ 2
Test Port .............................................................................................................................................. 3
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
The fixed oxygen system of the cabin provides oxygen in the cabin (passengers and cabin crew), and
in the crew rest compartments:
- Automatically, in case of cabin depressurization, when the cabin altitude is above 13 800 ft.
- Manually, if the flight crew presses the MASK MAN ON pb.
The fixed oxygen system of the cabin has:
- High-pressure oxygen bottles
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Each high-pressure bottle is located behind the right-hand sidewall lining of the forward cargo L2
compartment.
- A pressure-reducer transmitter on each bottle L1
L2
This transmitter is connected to the high-pressure oxygen bottle, and supplies oxygen to the
regulators for distribution to the entire system.
- Two regulators with supply valves, that provide oxygen to all cabin occupants. L1
These valves provide cabin occupants with a continuous flow of oxygen, and regulate this oxygen L2
Each supply line has two shutoff valves that can isolate the supply line in the engine-burst area. L2
In case either supply line ruptures in the engine-burst area, both associated shutoff valves will
automatically isolate the affected section of the supply line. Oxygen is still supplied to the masks in
the affected section, via interconnected lines from the other deck.
- Masks L1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LOCATION H55
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0007
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0009, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0216,
0225-0229, 0241-0244
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LOCATION
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE
Applicable to: ALL
Operational Sequence
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
The cabin oxygen system automatically operates via the altitude pressure switch (located in the
avionics compartment) or via the Oxygen System Control Unit (OSCU) when the cabin altitude is
above 13800 feet.
To manually operate the system, the flight crewmember presses the MASK MAN ON pb
SYSTEM OPERATION
When the system is activated:
- The shut of valve of each oxygen regulator opens L2
- The oxygen flows into the supply lines (main deck and upper deck) L1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
- Oxygen supply begins when the passenger pull the mask towards their seat.
The masks receive pure oxygen, under positive pressure, at a rate governed by the cabin altitude L2
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
Oxygen masks are stowed in oxygen containers and are released after oxygen containers are opened.
Each container supplies 2 to 7 persons with oxygen.
Oxygen Masks Container
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
MANUAL UNLOCKING
Applicable to: ALL
The unit door can be opened with the Manual release Tool (MRT). Insert the pin-end of the tool into the
operating rod of the pneumatic door latch, and push. The door unit opens.
Manual Unlocking
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
TEST PORT
Applicable to: ALL
Closed Position
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Test Position
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
To stop the flow oxygen to individual oxygen masks, move the valve operating lever downward to the
closed position.
Valve operating lever
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
If the oxygen masks have dropped inadvertently (for example: due to turbulence or hard landing), the
cabin crew should perform the following actions:
- Inform the cockpit crew immediately
- Do not attempt to stow the dropped oxygen mask
- Check if due to pulling at the masks, the release pin has been removed.
Valve operating lever with release pin removed
If the release pins are removed ,if possible, try to insert them again:
- To insert the release pin again, verify that the valve operating lever is the open position
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
08-20-20-20 Description
Crew Work Station (CWS) Components.............................................................................................. 1
08-20-30-20 Description
Main Deck (MD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description ......................................... 1
Upper Deck (UD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description........................................ 1
08-20-40-20-20 Location
IFE Control Terminal Location ............................................................................................................. 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
08-20-40-20-30 Description
Screen Layout ......................................................................................................................................1
Touch Screen Features........................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-30 Keyboard
Keyboard..............................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-60 CD-Player
CD-Player.............................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-70 DVD-ROM
DVD-ROM ............................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-100 Printer
Printer...................................................................................................................................................1
08-20-40-110 Fax
Fax .......................................................................................................................................................1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
08-20-70 Indications
Indications on the FAP......................................................................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
08-30-40 Seats
08-30-40-20 Operation
How to Reset Inoperative Seats (IFE Components) ............................................................................1
08-30-70 Video
08-30-70-10 General
General Information about the Video System ......................................................................................1
08-40-30 Video
08-40-30-30 Video On Demand (VOD)
08-40-30-30-20 Operation
How to Start a Video on Demand Movie ..............................................................................................1
08-40-40 Audio
08-40-40-20 Broadcast Audio
08-40-40-20-10 Description
Broadcast Audio...................................................................................................................................1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
08-40-50 Telephone
08-40-50-10 In-Seat Telephone
08-40-50-10-10 Description
Telephone Handset for All Classes...................................................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The purpose of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system is to provide passengers with in-flight
entertainment services.
IFE SYSTEM USERS
The IFE system users are :
- Cabin crewmembers who configure and maintain the operation of the system during flight
- Passengers who use the entertainment features of the system
- Maintenance personnel who configure, troubleshoot, and repair the system during maintenance
periods.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The aircraft has a Crew Work Station (CWS) and two Remote Control Centers (RCC). The cabin crew
uses the control centers to monitor and control the IFE system.
IFE Control Center Location Overview
The IFE control center is a part of the Crew Work Station (CWS).
The CWS is located aft of door M1L below the main deck forward stairs .
Crew Work Station Location
The cabin crew can monitor the status of the IFE and control the IFE services from a Remote Control
Center (RCC).
The aircraft has two RCCs:
- One is on the forward Upper Deck (UD):
- One is on the aft Upper Deck (UD):
FORWARD UPPER DECK RCC
The forward Upper Deck RCC has a:
- Crew Terminal (CT)
- RCC MAIN pb-sw.
- Credit Card Reader (CCR)
- Telephone Handset
AFT UPPER DECK RCC
The aft Upper Deck RCC is provided with a:
- Crew Panel (CP)
General
The aircraft has three IFE Control Terminals for the cabin crew to interact with the IFE system:
- Two Crew Terminals (CT)
One CT is located in the Crew Work Station (CWS) on the Main Deck. The other CT is located in
the forward Remote Control Center (RCC) on the Upper Deck.
- One Crew Panel (CP).
The CP is located in the aft RCC on the Upper Deck.
The Crew Terminal (CT) provides an In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) interface for cabin crew and
maintenance personnel. A connected keyboard or the touchscreen function enables the user to make
entries.
The CT screen on-screen menus provide:
- Video source assignment to the cabin zone
- Entertainment and Passenger Address (PA) assignment to the cabin zone
- Peripherals control, including preview of video and audio
- Audio and video input assignment control
- Assigning channels to Passenger Control Unit (PCU) channels on a per zone basis.
Crew Terminal (CT)
CREW PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
The Crew Panel (CP) is slightly smaller than the Crew Terminal (CT) and provides also an IFE
interface for the cabin crew and maintenance personnel. A connected keyboard or the touchscreen
function enables the user to make entries.
The CP has the same on-screen menus as the CT:
- Video source assignment to the cabin zone
- Entertainment and PA assignment to the cabin zone
- Peripherals control, including preview of video and audio
- Audio and video input assignment control
- Assigning channels to Passenger Control Unit (PCU) channels on a per zone basis.
Crew Panel (CP)
Location
The aircraft has a total of three IFE Control Terminals, two Crew Terminals (CT) and one Crew Panel
(CP). They are part of the IFE Control Centers (CWS and RCC) and are at eye level.
MAIN DECK
There is one CT in the CWS on the Main Deck (MD). The CWS is below the forward stairs at door M1
Refer to 08-20-20-10 Crew Work Station (CWS) Location.
UPPER DECK
There is one CT in the forward Upper Deck (UD) RCC. The UD forward RCC is at door U1R. A CP is
located at door U3R. Refer to 08-20-30-10 Upper Deck (UD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Location.
Description
SCREEN LAYOUT
Applicable to: ALL
The IFE Control Terminal has several different screens. Each screen has various elements to convey
information and to provide control of the system. Cabin crewmembers control the IFE system by
touching these elements on the screen.
The different types of elements on the screens are described in the following table:
KEYBOARD
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew uses the keyboard to enter data at the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) Control Terminal in
order to control the IFE system.
Example of a Keyboard
The cabin crew uses the Credit Card Reader (CCR) to logon to the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
system or to pay for air-to-ground telephone calls or for facsimiles.
The CCR decodes tracks of magnetic cards and sends the decoded information to the IFE Control L3
The cabin crew uses the Smart Card Reader (SCR) to read out the information of their IDs.
The Smart Card Reader decodes tracks of magnetic cards and sends the decoded information to the L3
DVD PLAYER
Applicable to: ALL
The DVD player is part of the IFE system and is situated in an IFE control center. It is used to provide
music, video, or game entertainment for the passengers.
The DVD player is usually controlled via the IFE control interfaces. However, it can also be controlled
manually via its controls on the front panel.
DVD Player Front Panel
The Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player is usually controlled via the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE)
control interfaces. However, it can also be controlled manually via its controls on the front panel:
1. Insert a DVD.
2. Push the PLAY pb to start the playback.
3. Push the STOP pb to stop the playback.
4. Push the REVERSE SKIP pb or the FORWARD SKIP pb, to navigate through the sections and
chapters of the DVD,
CD-PLAYER
Applicable to: ALL
DVD-ROM
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
On the DVD-ROM the IFE media is stored. Normally it is not necessary for the cabin crew to operate
the DVD-ROM.
The IFE telephone handset is part of the IFE system and is in an IFE control center. It is used to make
air-to-ground and IFE control center-to-seat calls.
IFE Telephone Handset
- Cursor Key:
Using the cursor key enables the user to navigate on the LCD menu.
- Telephone OFF Key
Pressing the TELEPHONE OFF key disconnects the telephone from the network.
- Telephone ON Key
Pressing the TELEPHONE ON key connects the call.
- VOLUME ▴/▾ Keys
Pressing the volume ▴/▾ keys increases / decreases the telephone audio level.
- CHANNEL ▴/▾ Keys
Pressing the channel ▴/▾ keys increases / decreases the channel number (audio / video at a
passenger seat).
- Dial Keys
Telephone numbers or text can be entered via dial keys.
- Microphone
The microphone converts the passenger voice into electrical signals that are transmitted to the
telephone partner.
- Call Key
Pressing the CALL key calls a cabin crewmember. The key lights up to indicate that the call was
made. Pressing
- VIDEO / AUDIO Key
Pressing the VIDEO / AUDIO key toggles between the audio and video mode (at a passenger seat).
- Reading Light Key
Pressing the READING LIGHT key turns the reading light ON or OFF.
- Credit Card Slot
Swiping a credit card through the credit card slot reads out the credit card data for billing the
telephone call costs.
PRINTER
Applicable to: ALL
The printer is part of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system and is in an IFE control center. It is used
to print data from the IFE control interface.
Printer Controls and Indicators
The function of the controls (pushbuttons) and indicators are listed below:
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS OF THE PRINTER
Control/Indicator Description
FAULT indicator The FAULT indicator comes ON in amber to
indicate a power-on-self-test fault or any other
equipment fault during operation.
PAPER ALARM indicator The PAPER ALARM indicator comes ON in amber
to indicate that the printer is out of paper.
ABORT pushbutton Pushing the ABORT pb cancels the current print
job. All following print jobs will not be cancelled.
Control/Indicator Description
SLEW pushbutton Pushing the SLEW pb advances the paper to the
next cue mark or continuously advances the paper
if the pushbutton is held.
TEST pushbutton Pushing the TEST pb performs a diagnostic test of
the printer and produces a test printout.
PRNTR pushbutton / PRNTR indicator Pushing the PRINTER pb turns ON or OFF the
printer. It is a toggle pushbutton.
The PRNTR indicator comes ON in green (three
green lines) when the printer is ON.
Pushing the PRNTR pb when the printer is ON,
resets the printer.
FAX
Applicable to: ALL
USB PORT
Applicable to: ALL
The USB port provides the possibility to connect peripheral components (e.g. a keyboard, a printer or a
smart card reader) to the IFE Control Terminal.
POWER OUTLET
Applicable to: ALL
The IFE control center has a power outlet for Portable Electronic Devices (PED). The power outlet is
controlled via the PED POWER sw that is also located in the IFE control center: Refer to 08-20-40-200
PED Power Switch for IFE Control Center Power Outlet
Note: The power outlet is for maintenance purposes only (e.g. to supply power to laptops for
uploading software), as indicated by the placard that is below the power outlet.
The power outlet supplies 110 V at 60 Hz.
The power outlet is compatible with North American and European standard connectors. L2
The power outlet has protection features that prevent electrical shocks that could occur, if the outlet is
not used correctly (e.g. inserting foreign objects into the outlet). It also has integrated sensors to
release power only when a plug is engaged.
Each power outlet has an LED indicator that indicates the current power status:
IPORT
Applicable to: ALL
The Crew Work Station (CWS) has a CWS MAIN POWER sw. By switching it (ON or OFF) power is
supplied or removed from the CWS.
CWS Main Power Switch
The Remote Control Center (RCC) has an RCC MAIN POWER sw.
The cabin crew can use the RCC MAIN POWER sw to supply power to the RCC, or to remove power
from the RCC.
Typical RCC MAIN POWER Switch
The PAX SYS pb-sw controls the power supply for the passenger PAX cabin systems, including the
In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system.
CAUTION The PAX SYS pb-sw is an emergency pushbutton-switch! A regular use of this
pushbutton-switch can result in damage of passenger system components.
DESCRIPTION
The PAX SYS pb-sw is a hardkey on any Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) in the cabin. Refer to 04-20-10
General Information on the Flight Attendant Panel.
Note: The PAX SYS pb-sw can also be in the IFE control center(s).
Power for the PAX cabin systems will only be available if all PAX SYS pb-sw are ON, including the
PAX SYS sw in the cockpit.
PAX SYS Hardkey on the FAP
The PAX SYS pb-sw removes the power from the cabin systems:
- IFE control center equipment
- Video/Audio equipment (in-seat displays, handsets)
- Passenger seat functions
- Outlets for Portable Electronic Devices (PED)
- IFE Center equipment (in the EEbay)
- Cabin Connectivity equipment, if installed
- Satellite television equipment, if installed
- Other PAX equipment.
Note: Depending on the customization of the aircraft, not all of the above listed systems may be
installed.
Continued on the next page
For a reset, the cabin crew must push the PAX SYS pb-sw to remove power from the systems, and
push the PAX SYS pb-sw again after max. 5 min to supply power to the systems again. It takes approx.
10 min until all systems have rebooted and are running again.
OPERATION
The intended use of the PAX SYS pb-sw is to remove the power from the passenger (PAX) cabin
systems in an emergency (e.g. smoke).
However, and if in accordance with the airline policy, the cabin crew can use the PAX SYS pb-sw to
reset the PAX cabin systems via a power cycle.
Note: A reset via the PAX SYS pb-sw will affect all cabin systems (see list above). Check all other
possibilities for individual resets, i.e. via hardware switches or via software, before the use of
the PAX SYS pb-sw. Refer to the Fault Recovery Procedures for the cabin systems in this
manual.
For a reset (power cycle), the cabin crew must push the PAX SYS pb-sw to remove power from the
systems, and push the PAX SYS pb-sw again to supply power to the systems again.
CAUTION Wait at least 10 min after the power removal. Then push the PAX SYS pb-sw again, to
avoid computer corruption.
It takes approx. 10 min until all systems have rebooted and are running again.
There is a guarded PED POWER sw in the IFE Control Center that controls the power supply for the
PED power outlet of the IFE Control Center on of the stowage next to it.
When the PED POWER sw is pressed in and lit (ON position) power is supplied to the PED power
outlets.
When the PED POWER sw is out and not lit (OFF position), power is removed from the PED power
outlets.
Note: PED power is switched OFF automatically, when the aircraft flaps are used e.g. for landing.
Example of a PED POWER Switch
The cabin crew can switch ON or OFF the Portable Electronic Devices PED power in the entire cabin
via the PED POWER sw (hardkey) on any Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) in the cabin.
PED Power Switch for Passenger PED Power
When the PED POWER sw is pressed in and lit (ON position) power is supplied to the power outlet.
When the PED POWER sw is not pressed in and not lit (OFF position), power is removed from the
power outlet.
Note: PED power is switched OFF automatically, when the aircraft flaps are used e.g. for landing.
WORKLIGHT SWITCH
Applicable to: ALL
A worklight in the IFE Control Station provides light in the work table area. The WORKLIGHT sw is a
rocker switch and sets the worklight to BRIGHT, DIM or OFF.
Typical Work Light Switch
INDICATOR LIGHT
Applicable to: ALL
The indicator light in the Crew Work Station (CWS) enables the cabin crew to monitor the status of the
power outlet unit in the stowage.
When the indicator light is OFF the stowage outlet unit is not in use.
When the indicator light is ON the stowage outlet unit is in use.
For information about the power outlet: Refer to 08-20-40-140 Power Outlet
For more information about the PED POWER switch: Refer to 08-20-40-200 PED Power Switch for IFE
Control Center Power Outlet
At the beginning of a flight the IFE system powers up automatically when power is supplied to the
aircraft. Once initial operating system and network operating system start-up sequences are complete,
the software applications start.
If the IFE system was shut down by the previous crew, the current crew must power up the IFE system
via the:
- PAX SYS pb-sw
- CWS MAIN PWR pb-sw
- RCC MAIN PWR pb-sw
- Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) IFE POWER page on the Flight Attendant Panel
(FAP).
In order to power up the IFE system follow the steps described below:
1. Check the status of the PAX SYS sw. Turn it ON if it is OFF.
2. Check the status of the CWS MAIN PWR sw. Turn it ON if it is OFF.
3. On the FAP, select the IFE POWER button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). An ENTER ACCESS CODE control
appears.
4. Enter the access code and confirm your entry by pushing ENTER on the ENTER ACCESS CODE
control pad. If the access code is correct, the IFE POWER - ALL page displays.
5. Select MAIN DECK via the deck selector. (For information about the deck selector: Refer to
Operation of FAP). The IFE POWER MAIN DECK page displays.
6. On the IFE POWER - MAIN DECK page, check the status of the following ON/OFF buttons:
- IFE CENTER control pad
- RCC (Remote Control Center) control pad
- CABIN WORKSTATION control pad.
If one of the IFE related ON/OFF buttons is OFF, push the corresponding button(s) to turn the
corresponding power ON. A gray button will turn to green (ON status).
The IFE system will take approximately 5 to 10 minutes to power up.
Before leaving the aircraft, the cabin crew can shut down the IFE system. This includes closing the
flight on the Crew Terminal (CT) and switching OFF the power of the IFE system via the IFE POWER
page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP). Follow the instructions below.
1. Close the flight on the CT via the CLOSE FLIGHT screen: Refer to How to Close a Flight.
2. On the FAP, select the IFE POWER button from the function selector. (For information about the
function selector: Refer to Cabin Systems from FAP Overview). An ENTER ACCESS CODE control
pad appears.
Typical IFE POWER Page Access Code Control Pad
3. Enter the access code and confirm your entry by pushing ENTER on the ENTER ACCESS CODE
control pad. If the access code is correct, the IFE POWER - ALL page displays.
4. Select MAIN DECK via the deck selector. (For information about the deck selector: Refer to
Operation of FAP). The IFE POWER - MAIN DECK page displays.
5. On the IFE POWER - MAIN DECK page, select the ON/OFF button of the:
- IFE CENTER control pad
- CREW WORK STATION control pad
- RCC control pad.
The buttons will turn to gray instead of green (status OFF).
If desired, the cabin crew can switch OFF the power to the IFE System also via the provided
pushbutton-switches:
1. At the FAP, push the PAX-SYS pb-sw.
2. At the Crew Work Station, push the CWS MAIN PWR pb-sw.
3. At the RCCs, push the RCC MAIN PWR pb-sw.
The IFE System is now powered OFF via CIDS and via the provided switches.
In case of smoke detection in an IFE control center (Crew Work Station or well equipped Remote
Control Center ), it will be shut off automatically.
However it is also possible to shut off the power of an IFE control center via the local power switch in
the IFE control center or via the CWS pb in the cockpit.
Power can only be restored to the IFE control center via the switch / pushbutton from which the power L2
this will be indicated on the IFE POWER page on the FAP: The button of the corresponding IFE control
center will be gray (active but not activated).
Note: If the cabin crew uses the local power switch to shut off the IFE control center, there is no FAP
indication.
LOCAL POWER SWITCH IN THE IFE CONTROL CENTER
In case of smoke in the IFE control center, the local smoke detection indicator light comes ON. If there
is no automatic power shut off, the cabin crew must use the local power switch (in the CWS or the
RCC ) to shut off the power of the IFE control center.
For information about the location of the IFE control center power switches:
- Refer to 08-20-20-20 Crew Work Station (CWS) Components
- Refer to 08-20-30-20 Main Deck (MD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description
- Refer to 08-20-30-20 Upper Deck (UD) Remote Control Center (RCC) Components Description
.
If it is not possible for the cabin crew to shut off the power of the IFE control center locally, the flight
crew can do this via the CWS pb on the overhead panel in the cockpit.
CWS PUSHBUTTON IN THE COCKPIT
If smoke is detected in an IFE control center, the CWS pb in the cockpit is illuminated and on the
ECAM the message "Smoke detected in the CWS" is indicated.
If there was no automatic power shut off or the cabin crew was not able to shut off the IFE control
center via the local switch, the flight crew must use the CWS pb to shut off the IFE control center.
The CWS pb is located on the overhead panel among the ENTERTAINMENT pushbuttons.
For information about the IFE POWER pages: Refer to 06-130-10 General Information about the IFE
and Seat Power Control Pages.
For more information about the smoke detection indicators of the IFE control center: Refer to 08-20-60
IFE Control Center Smoke Detection Indicator.
If smoke was detected, there will be several indications in the cabin and in the cockpit. For information
about the smoke detection system: Refer to 06-70-10 General Information About the Smoke Detection
(SD) System.
The IFE Control Center has a smoke detection system with a smoke detection indicator.
If smoke is detected, the following aural and visual alerts are triggered in the cockpit and the cabin:
Depending on the customers CAM assignment the message IFE CENTER LOSS OF COOLING is
displayed on the FAP if the IFE center has lost the ventilation to cool its components. The message is
displayed on the FAP SYSTEM INFO page in the MISCELLANEOUS list box.
For more information about the MISCELLANEOUS list box: Refer to 06-90-30 SYSTEM INFO Page
The message informs the cabin crew that there is no cooling for the IFE center. This could lead to
overtemperature in the IFE center. In case of overtemperature the IFE center will switch off
automatically.
If the IFE center has switched off automatically the cabin crew should make an entry into the Digital
Cabin Logbook (DCL). For more information about the DCL: Refer to 06-200-20 Position of the Digital
Cabin Logbook on the FAP
If the IFE control center has a malfunction, a reset of the IFE control center is a way of quick recovery and
has limited impact on the passengers system.
How to recover the IFE control center if the screen of the IFE control terminal freezes or the IFE
control terminal shuts down.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Is the IFE control terminal screen frozen or is the IFE control terminal off? Go to 2 END
2. At the IFE control center:
- Switch OFF the IFE control center MAIN POWER switch and wait for
three minutes.
- Switch ON the IFE control center MAIN POWER switch and wait for
10 minutes to ensure a complete boot up of the equipment.
Note: During the restarting process of the IFE control center, the
IFE control terminal screen will become blank. Touch it to
reactivate it.
Is the LOG IN or MAIN MENU screen displayed on the IFE control
terminal? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. To ensure that the IFE control terminal operates normally:
- Log in to the system.
- Check several menus from the menu bar.
Does the IFE control terminal operate normally? Go to 4 Go to 4
4. Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the IFE faults mentioning the:
- Faulty IFE component(s), if identified
- Countermeasures taken. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Does the credit card reader read the inserted credit card? Go to 2 END
2. Clean the credit card reader head:
- Pass the card reader cleaner card in the normal passing direction with
the felt side of the card facing towards the reader head.
Note: To clean the head, any of the four edges of the card may be
used. Each edge of the card withstands up to 100 cleaning
passes.
- Slide a credit card through the credit card reader and check for correct
function. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. Is the credit card reader function available again? END Go to 4
4. The credit card reader function is not available.
Enter the fault information into the cabin logbook. END END
The cabin crew functions include all functions that are controlled and monitored by the cabin crew only.
Cabin Crew Functions Overview
For information about the IFE Software for the Cabin Crew refer to the Panasonic Flight Attendant
Manual.
For information about the IFE Software for the Cabin Crew refer to the Panasonic Flight Attendant
Manual.
For information about the IFE Software for the Cabin Crew refer to the Panasonic Flight Attendant
Manual.
For information about the IFE Software for the Cabin Crew refer to the Panasonic Flight Attendant
Manual.
Description
TBD
Operation
The cabin crew can turn the power of the landscape camera OFF (and ON) via the IFE POWER
page.Refer to 06-130-50 How to Turn OFF/ON the Landscape Camera.
Note: The cabin crew can use the ON/OFF button on the IFE POWER page to reset the landscape
camera.
PED POWER
Applicable to: ALL
In-seat power outlets are provided on board the aircraft to supply power to Personal Electronic Devices
(PED), for example laptops on board the aircraft. The power outlet supplies 110 V at 60 Hz.
The power outlet is compatible with North American and European standard connectors. L2
The power outlet has protection features that prevent electrical shocks that could occur, if the outlet is
not used correctly (e.g. inserting foreign objects into the outlet). It also has integrated sensors to
release power only when a plug is engaged.
Example of a Power Outlet
L1
Each power outlet has an LED indicator that indicates the current power status:
Passenger functions are available at each passenger seat. Passengers can control these functions
from their seat.
Passenger Functions Overview
The passenger handset is stored in a cradle located in the passenger seat. When the passenger
handset is stored, the PCU / telephone side shows. The PCU / telephone side has the controls and
indicators for the passenger service and passenger entertainment as well as the telephone controls.
To use the passenger handset as a communicator, telephone or as a game controller, the passenger
can pull it out of the cradle and operate it hand-held.
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE PASSENGER HANDSET FUNCTIONS
The passenger handset has keys on both sides.
The keys operate the:
- Control Unit Functions See Passenger Handset - Control Unit Functions
- Communication functions: Refer to 08-40-20 Passenger Handset - Communication Functions
- Telephone function: Refer to 08-40-50-10-10 Telephone Handset for All Classes
PASSENGER HANDSET - CONTROL UNIT FUNCTIONS
Passenger Handset - Control Unit Functions
Title Description
ENTER Pressing the ENTER confirms selections on the LCD or the in-seat
display.
Title Description
VOLUME ▴ ▾ Pressing the VOLUME ▴ ▾ key increases or decreases the volume of the
headset.
READING LIGHT ON/OFF Pressing the READING LIGHT ON/OFF turns the reading light ON.
Pressing the key a second time turns the reading light OFF.
Microphone The microphone converts the passenger voice into electrical signals that
are transmitted to the telephone partner.
Audio/Video Control The following audio/video controls are available on the handset:
- Pressing the ■◂ key rewinds the running audio/video
- Pressing the □ key stops the running audio/video
- Pressing the ▸■ key fast forwards the running audio/video
- Pressing the ▸■■ key plays or pause the selected or running
audio/video
- Pressing the ■◂◂ key skips to the beginning of the running
audio/video
- Pressing the ▸▸■ key skips to the end of the running audio/video.
ATTENDANT CALL Pressing the ATTENDANT CALL activates the call function. The cabin
crew is informed visually or aurally.
Pressing the ATTENDANT CALL a second time deactivates the call
function.
Mode key Pressing the mode key selects the corresponding mode and activates
the related control on the handset and the in-seat display.
CHANNEL ▴ ▾ Pressing the CHANNEL ▴ ▾ key scrolls the available channels. The LCD
indicates the selected channel.
Display (LCD) This display shows the channel number that is set by the CHANNEL ▴ ▾
key. The LCD is usually dark. Pushing any of the handset keys increases
the brightness of the display.
Speaker The bearer of the telephone can hear the caller via the speaker.
Title Description
START The user can use the START for interactive games. The function of this key
depends on the selected game.
SELECT The user can use the SELECT for interactive games. The function of this key
depends on the selected game.
INTERNET Pressing the INTERNET ACCESS starts an internet browser on the in-seat
ACCESS display unit.
E-MAIL ACCESS Pressing the E-MAIL ACCESS starts an E-mail application on the in-seat display
unit.
Title Description
Cursor Pressing the cursor key enables the user to navigate on the in-seat display unit
menu.
Shoot (left and right) The user can use SHOOT keys for interactive games. The function of these keys
depend on the selected game.
QWERTY keyboard The user can use the QWERTY keyboard to enter text or numbers.
1, 2, 3, 4 The user can use the 1, 2, 3, 4 keys for interactive games. The functions of these
keys depend on the selected game.
Credit Card Slot Swiping a credit card through the credit card slot reads out the credit card data for
billing the telephone call costs.
TELEPHONE OFF Pressing the TELEPHONE OFF disconnects the telephone from the network.
TELEPHONE ON Pressing the TELEPHONE ON connects the call.
Operation
Description
BROADCAST AUDIO
Applicable to: ALL
Description
Title Description
TELEPHONE OFF Pressing the TELEPHONE OFF disconnects the telephone from
the network.
Title Description
ENTER key Pressing the ENTER key will confirm the menu options from the
LCD.
Microphone The microphone converts the passenger voice into electrical
signals that are transmitted to the telephone partner.
Dial Keys Telephone numbers or text can be entered via dial keys.
TELEPHONE ON Pressing the TELEPHONE ON connects the call.
LCD The LCD displays menus, system status, numbers, etc.
Speaker The voice of the caller is received via the speaker.
Credit Card Slot Swiping a credit card through the credit card slot reads out the
credit card data for billing the telephone call costs.
INTERNET CONNECTION
Applicable to: ALL
For connecting to the internet via Ethernet each passenger seat has an RJ-45 port.
Depending on the type of seat and the class the port can be situated in the armrest or next to the
in-seat display. Typically the ethernet port is situated next to other ports that are provided for the
passenger.
Typical Ports at a Passenger Seat
VIDEO PORT
Applicable to: ALL
The passenger seats are equipped with an auxiliary video jack. Passengers can connect an external
DVD player to watch their own video DVD at their seat.
Depending on the type of seat and the class the port can be situated in the armrest or next to the
in-seat display. Typically the video port is situated next to other ports that are provided for the
passenger.
Typical Ports at a Passenger Seat
USB PORT
Applicable to: ALL
The passenger seats are equipped with a USB port. Passengers can connect an external device at
their seat.
Depending on the type of seat and the class the port can be situated in the armrest or next to the
in-seat display. Typically the USB port is situated next to other ports that are provided to the
passenger.
Typical Ports at a Passenger Seat
The passenger seats have power outlets where the passengers can connect their Personal Electronic
Devices (PEDs).
An indicator light on the side of the aisle seat comes ON, when one or more passengers in the seat row
use their power outlet.
POWER OUTLET
Example of a Power Outlet
The power outlet has protective features that prevent electrical shocks in the event of misuse (e.g. the
insertion of a foreign object in the outlet). The power outlet has sensors to ensure the release of power
only when a plug is engaged.
Each power outlet has a Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator that indicates the current power status: L1
Note: The seat may also have an emergency path marking element. Do not confuse this element
with the PED POWER IN USE indicator.
The screens are black on all the in-seat and wall-mounted display units of the In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE) system, throughout the cabin.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Does the IFE control terminal screen still work? Go to 4 Go to 2
2. If the IFE control terminal screen does not work/is frozen:
Refer to 08-20-80 How to Recover a Frozen IFE Control Terminal.
Note: Apply the instructions to reset the frozen screen, then return to
this Function Recovery Procedure (FRP).
Is the IFE control terminal screen still frozen? Go to 11 Go to 3
3. Are the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units throughout the cabin
operational again? END Go to 4
4. On the IFE control terminal screen:
Check the FUNCTIONS page and/or the SYSTEM STATUS page.
Are there any error messages/indications on the FUNCTIONS page
and/or the SYSTEM STATUS page? Go to 5 Go to 6
5. On the FUNCTIONS page (IFE control terminal screen):
Reset the corresponding function.
Are the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units throughout the cabin
operational again? END Go to 6
6. On the FAP:
Select the IFE POWER page.
Check the following:
- Are all columns green on the IFE POWER MAIN DECK and the IFE
POWER UPPER DECK page? Go to 9 Go to 7
7. If all columns on the IFE POWER pages are amber:
Switch ON the power of all columns and wait for 5 min.
Are all columns green on the IFE POWER MAIN DECK and the IFE
POWER UPPER DECK page? Go to 8 Go to 11
8. Are the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units throughout the cabin
operational again? END Go to 9
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
9. On the FAP:
1. Push the PAX SYS pb-sw to shut off the power of the entire IFE
system.
2. Wait for 5 min.
3. Push the PAX SYS pb-sw again to turn ON the power of the entire IFE
system.
Are all columns green on the IFE POWER MAIN DECK and the IFE
POWER UPPER DECK page? END Go to 10
10. If the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units are still black throughout
the cabin:
Refer to 04-40 CIDS Reset After Cabin System Failure(s) in Flight or on
Ground with Passengers on Board.
Note: Apply the instructions in the CIDS Reset FRP, then return to this
FRP.
Are the in-seat and the wall-mounted display units throughout the cabin
operational again? END Go to 11
11. The IFE system is inoperative.
Inform the flight crew and enter the following information in the cabin
logbook:
- The details of the failure
- The countermeasures taken. END END
Note: Power for the cabin PAX systems will only be available if all PAX SYS pb-sw are ON, including
the PAX SYS sw in the cockpit.
How to Recover a PAX Power Failure in the Entire Cabin (In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) System and
Seat Power)
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. If there is no power available to the IFE system and the seats throughout
the cabin but the aircraft has power:
Check the PAX SYS pb-sw on the nearest Flight Attendant Panel (FAP). Go to 2 Go to 2
2. Is the PAX SYS pb-sw in the ON position? Go to 4 Go to 3
3. If the PAX SYS pb-sw is in the OFF position:
Ask the other cabin crewmembers why the PAX SYS pb-sw is switched
OFF. If there is no reason or if the reason is no longer applicable:
Switch ON the PAX SYS pb-sw.
Are the seats and the IFE system supplied with power? END Go to 4
4. If the PAX SYS pb-sw is in the ON position on the nearest FAP and there
is still no power for the IFE system and the seats:
Contact the cabin crewmembers at the other FAP(s) and ask them to
make sure that the PAX SYS pb-sw at their FAP is in the ON position. Go to 5 Go to 5
5. Are all PAX SYS pb-sw in the ON position and is power available for the
IFE system and the seats in the whole cabin? END Go to 6
6. The power failure cannot be reset.
Inform the passengers.
Ask the Chief Purser to make an entry in the cabin logbook about the
failure, and to specify the countermeasures taken. END END
How to determine if a Portable Electronic Device (PED) Power Failure affects a Seat or a Seat
Group
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
A passenger indicates a problem with the PED power outlet.
If it is not possible to operate a PED via a PED power outlet, determine if
the failure affects a single seat or a seat group:
1. Is the PED POWER pb-sw (hardkey) below the FAP screen in the ON
position? Go to 3 Go to 2
2. At the FAP:
Turn the PED POWER pb-sw OFF, then ON.
Is PED power available now? END Go to 3
3. At the FAP:
- Push the IFE POWER button on the function selector on the FAP
screen.
- If necessary, enter the login password for the IFE POWER pages.
Does one of the seat columns display in amber on the IFE POWER - ALL
page? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The PED power failure affects a seat group.
For information about how to recover PED power for a seat group: Refer
to 08-40-90 How to Recover PED Power for a Seat Group. END END
5. The PED power failure affects a single seat.
For information about how to recover PED power for a single seat: Refer
to 08-40-90 How to Recover PED Power for a Single Seat. END END
How to Recover Portable Electronic Device (PED) Power for a Single Seat
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
Example of a Power Outlet
1. At the seat:
Check the Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator of the PED power outlet.
Unplug the PED.
Is the LED green, when the PED is not plugged into the outlet? Go to 5 Go to 2
2. Is the LED red, when the PED is not plugged into the outlet? Go to 3 Go to 4
3. There is no power available for PED usage.
This is due to a failure. Go to 11 Go to 11
4. Is the LED OFF, when the PED is not plugged into the outlet? Go to 11 Go to 5
5. At the seat:
Plug the PED into the PED power outlet .
Does the PED work? END Go to 6
6. At the seat:
Check the indicator LED of the PED power outlet.
Is the LED green, when a PED is plugged into the outlet? Go to 7 Go to 9
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
7. Power is available.
If the PED does not work, there must be a bad contact. Try a different
PED power outlet at another seat.
Does the PED work at the other PED power outlet? Go to 11 Go to 8
8. The PED is not working.
Inform the passenger. END END
9. Is the LED red or OFF, when a PED is plugged into the outlet? Go to 10 Go to 6
10. The PED requires more power than the PED power outlet can supply.
Do not connect this PED to the PED power outlet. END END
11. Make an entry into the cabin logbook about the PED failure. Make sure to
include:
- The affected seat
- The countermeasures taken. END END
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. If the IFE POWER page is not already displayed at the FAP:
- Push the IFE POWER button on the function selector on the FAP
screen.
- If necessary, enter the login password for the IFE POWER pages.
- Select the deck on which the seat column is indicated in amber via the
deck selector.
Is there a message in the text field of the affected seat group indicating
LOW POWER? Go to 2 Go to 3
2. If LOW POWER is indicated, temporarily there is no power available for
PED usage. When there is sufficient power available again, PED power
will be reactivated automatically.
Inform the passengers. END END
3. Is the ON/OFF button gray and disabled? Go to 7 Go to 4
4. Check the Seat Group Switch (SGS).
Is the SGS of the affected seat group switched OFF? Go to 5 Go to 7
5. Ask the other crew members if it is OK to switch ON the SGS of the
affected seat group.
Is it OK to switch ON the SGS switch? Go to 6 Go to 7
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
6. For switching the SGS follow the sequence below:
1. Ask the passengers of the seat group to of disconnect all PEDs from
the PED power outlets.
2. Switch ON the SGS.
3. Reconnect the PED in the seat row
Do all PED work again? END Go to 7
7. The power failure can not be reset.
Inform the passenger(s). If there are seats available in another seat
group, ask the passenger(s) to move.
Ask the Chief Purser to make an entry into the cabin logbook about the
PED failure mentioning the:
- Affected seats
- Countermeasures taken. END END
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
09-10-20 Description
Outside View of the Passenger Door................................................................................................... 1
Inside View of the Passenger Door...................................................................................................... 5
Components of the Passenger Door.................................................................................................... 9
09-10-30 Operation
Risk of Injury at the Passenger Door Frame........................................................................................ 1
Normal Operation of the Passenger Doors from the Inside ................................................................ 2
Normal Operation of the Passenger Doors from the Outside .............................................................. 4
Manual Operation of the Passenger Doors from the Inside................................................................. 8
Manual Operation of the Passenger Doors from the Outside.............................................................. 9
Emergency Operation of the Passenger Doors ................................................................................. 10
09-20-20 Operation
Slide and Slideraft Operation............................................................................................................... 1
Manual Inflation ................................................................................................................................... 3
Slide Extension .................................................................................................................................... 3
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
DOOR LOCATION
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has 8 pairs of doors (= 16 passenger doors, all classified as type “A” doors):
- 5 pairs of doors on the Main Deck (M1L/M1R to M5L/M5R)
Note: The passenger doors M3L/M3R are for emergency use only.
- 3 pairs of doors on the Upper Deck (U1L/U1R to U3L/U3R).
Passenger Doors - Location
Type “A” door dimensions: Width =1 262 mm and Height = 1 930 mm. L2
DOOR NUMBERING
Applicable to: ALL
DOOR ASPECT
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0165, 0168-0190, 0204-0207, 0210-0225, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
DOOR ASPECT
Applicable to: MSN 0167, 0200-0203, 0208-0209, 0226-0229, 0241-0244
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0028-0057, 0086-0090, 0101-0116, 0123, 0132-0135, 0141, 0147, 0153-0174, 0182-0249
The aircraft doors can only be opened and closed manually but not electrically from the outside.
Due to a failure of the electrical controls on the outside of the aircraft, not commanded door motion has
occurred.
The consequences of this failure are:
- Not commanded motion (close or open direction) of the passenger door, when the door handle is
lifted up from either outside or inside.
- Door closing while the door is used for emergency evacuation. In this case, the affected door could
be potentially unusable for evacuation.
In consequence, the electrical controls (open and close) will be deactivated. However, it will still be
possible to open or close the door manually from the outside. There will be no change in operation from
the inside.
All passenger doors are type “A” doors and are equipped with an escape slide.
Although the passenger doors may look different depending on the slide installation, they have the
same door components and the operation is the same for all doors.
Example of a Main Deck Passenger Door
3. Red CABIN PRESSURE VISUAL WARNING Indicator: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with
Slide and Pressure Indicators.
4. DOOR AND SLIDE INDICATION PANEL (DSIP): Refer to 09-10-20 Door and Slide Indication
Panel (DSIP).
5. SLIDE ARMED INDICATOR: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with Slide and Pressure
Indicators.
6. LENS in the OBSERVATION WINDOW: Refer to 09-10-20 Lens in the Observation Window.
7. OBSERVATION WINDOW: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with Slide and Pressure
Indicators.
8. BUZZER (behind the door lining): Refer to 09-10-20 Buzzer.
9. Arming Lever PLASTIC COVER: Refer to 09-10-20 Arming Lever Plastic Cover.
10.SLIDE ARMING LEVER: Refer to 09-10-20 Slide Arming Lever with Safety Pin.
11.SAFETY PIN: Refer to 09-10-20 Slide Arming Lever with Safety Pin.
12.FRAME ASSIST HANDLES: Refer to 09-10-20 Frame Assist Handle.
13.DOOR ASSIST HANDLES: Refer to 09-10-20 Support Arm and Door Assist Handle.
14.SUPPORT ARM: Refer to 09-10-20 Support Arm and Door Assist Handle.
Note: As the passenger doors always open in flight direction, the support arm is on the right side of
all doors on the left hand side. For doors on the right hand side the support arm is on the left
side.
All passenger doors are type “A” doors and are equipped with an escape slide.
Although the passenger doors may look different depending on the slide installation, they have the
same door components and the operation is the same for all doors.
Example of a Main Deck Passenger Door
4. DOOR AND SLIDE INDICATION PANEL (DSIP): Refer to 09-10-20 Door and Slide Indication
Panel (DSIP).
5. SLIDE ARMED INDICATOR: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with Slide and Pressure
Indicators.
6. LENS in the OBSERVATION WINDOW: Refer to 09-10-20 Lens in the Observation Window.
7. OBSERVATION WINDOW: Refer to 09-10-20 Observation Window with Slide and Pressure
Indicators.
8. BUZZER (behind the door lining): Refer to 09-10-20 Buzzer.
9. Arming Lever PLASTIC COVER: Refer to 09-10-20 Arming Lever Plastic Cover.
10.SLIDE ARMING LEVER: Refer to 09-10-20 Slide Arming Lever with Safety Pin.
11.SAFETY PIN: Refer to 09-10-20 Slide Arming Lever with Safety Pin.
12.FRAME ASSIST HANDLES: Refer to 09-10-20 Frame Assist Handle.
13.DOOR ASSIST HANDLES: Refer to 09-10-20 Support Arm and Door Assist Handle.
14.SUPPORT ARM: Refer to 09-10-20 Support Arm and Door Assist Handle.
Note: As the passenger doors always open in flight direction, the support arm is on the right side of
all doors on the left hand side. For doors on the right hand side the support arm is on the left
side.
UNLOCKED Indicator
The UNLOCKED indicator comes ON red when the DOOR
CONTROL HANDLE was lifted.
CLOSE Pushbutton
The cabin crew uses the CLOSE pb to close the passenger door.
The CLOSE pb comes ON white (active) as soon as the
OPEN pb is pushed. It stays ON until the door is back in front of
the door frame.
To close the door, press and hold the CLOSE pb until the door
stops automatically in front of the door frame.
Releasing the CLOSE pb at any time will stop the door
movement.
UNLOCKED Indicator
The UNLOCKED indicator comes ON red when the DOOR
CONTROL HANDLE was lifted.
In Normal Operation
If the slide inflation bottle pressure is low, the SLIDE NOT
READY indicator comes ON in red (without time limit) to inform
the line maintenance crew.
Note: The indication comes ON 35 min after the aircraft has
touched the ground to avoid any confusion to the cabin
crew.
CLOSE Pushbutton
The cabin crew uses the CLOSE pb to close the passenger door.
The CLOSE pb comes ON white (active) as soon as the
OPEN pb is pushed. It stays ON until the door is back in front of
the door frame.
To close the door, press and hold the CLOSE pb until the door
stops automatically in front of the door frame.
Releasing the CLOSE pb at any time will stop the door
movement.
BUZZER
There are two different buzzers at each door:
- One is part of the DSIP
- The other one is installed in the door itself.
Both are not visible, they are covered by the door lining.
Note: Depending on customer option, one or both buzzer(s) can be deactivated.
BUZZER IN THE PASSENGER DOOR
The BUZZER is in the upper area of the door (behind the door lining) and next to the SLIDE
ARMING LEVER.
The buzzer sounds if:
- There is differential cabin pressure.
- The CABIN PRESSURE visual warning indicator in the OBSERVATION WINDOW flashes red.
- The DOOR CONTROL HANDLE was lifted for more than 3°.
BUZZER IN THE DSIP
The BUZZER inside the DSIP sounds if:
- The Slide Arming Lever is in the Armed position and the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE was lifted
for more than 29°.
Note: Not available for US customers.
- The SLIDE NOT READY indicator on the DSIP flashes red.
Note: Optionally, the BUZZER sounds for 2 s at the beginning of each door movement if the
crewmember has pressed either the DSIP OPEN pb or the DSIP CLOSE pb.
PLASTIC COVER
A transparent PLASTIC COVER protects the SLIDE ARMING LEVER against inadvertent movement.
The cover is normally in the closed position during all flight phases. Access to the lever is not directly
possible (the SAFETY PIN is not installed and the SLIDE ARMING LEVER is in the Armed position).
To get access to the SLIDE ARMING LEVER, manually move the cover (the cabin crew can install the
SAFETY PIN after setting the SLIDE ARMING LEVER to the Disarmed position). When the cabin crew
has installed the SAFETY PIN, the PLASTIC COVER stays in the open position.
The cabin crew uses the SLIDE ARMING LEVER to arm or disarm the slide.
HOW TO ARM THE SLIDE
1. Remove the SAFETY PIN.
2. Move he SLIDE ARMING LEVER into the forward position (lever points towards Armed ▸ on the
placard).
3. Lower the PLASTIC COVER.
Continued on the next page
Note: The forward position is associated with the aircraft flight direction.
Note: The slide arming lever must be moved fully forward.
HOW TO DISARM THE SLIDE
1. Lift the PLASTIC COVER.
2. Move the SLIDE ARMING LEVER into the aft position (lever points towards ◂ Disarmed on the
placard) .
3. Install the SAFETY PIN.
Note: The forward position is associated with the aircraft flight direction.
Note: The slide arming lever must be moved fully aft.
SAFETY PIN
The SAFETY PIN secures the SLIDE ARMING LEVER only in the ◂ Disarmed position. When the
lever points to the Armed ▸ position, it covers the socket of the SAFETY PIN and an installation of the
SAFETY PIN is not possible.
When the SAFETY PIN is not needed, it should be kept in a safe place.
Note: It is proposed to stow the SAFETY PIN inside a wall-mounted Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS)
next to the corresponding door:
1. Open the flap at the bottom of the CAS (between seat pan and aircraft floor).
2. On the inner side of the flap there are two pockets. The SAFETY PIN should be stowed
inside the outboard pocket (the inboard pocket is normally used to stow the manual release
(O2-) tool).
3. Let the flag of the SAFETY PIN hang out of the pocket, so that it is stowed loose inside the
pocket.
The cabin crew uses the SLIDE ARMING LEVER to arm or disarm the slide.
HOW TO ARM THE SLIDE
1. Remove the SAFETY PIN.
2. Move he SLIDE ARMING LEVER into the forward position (lever points towards Armed ▸ on the
placard).
3. Lower the PLASTIC COVER.
Continued on the next page
Note: The forward position is associated with the aircraft flight direction.
Note: The slide arming lever must be moved fully forward.
HOW TO DISARM THE SLIDE
1. Lift the PLASTIC COVER.
2. Move the SLIDE ARMING LEVER into the aft position (lever points towards ◂ Disarmed on the
placard) .
3. Install the SAFETY PIN.
Note: The forward position is associated with the aircraft flight direction.
Note: The slide arming lever must be moved fully aft.
SAFETY PIN
The SAFETY PIN secures the SLIDE ARMING LEVER only in the ◂ Disarmed position. When the
lever points to the Armed ▸ position, it covers the socket of the SAFETY PIN and an installation of the
SAFETY PIN is not possible.
When the SAFETY PIN is not needed, it should be kept in a safe place.
Note: Usually the SAFETY PIN is stowed inside a wall-mounted Cabin Attendant Seat (CAS) next to
the corresponding door:
1. Open the compartment door at the lower part of the CAS.
2. On the inner side of the compartment door, there are at least two pockets installed. Facing
the CAS, stow the SAFETY PIN inside a pocket except the left hand pocket dedicated to
the MRT (Manual Release (O2-) Tool) only.
3. Let the flag of the SAFETY PIN hang out of the pocket, so that it is stowed loose inside the
pocket.
4. Close the compartment door of the CAS.
Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT LOCK
A FLIGHT LOCK is an actuator similar to a hook, installed in each passenger door behind the door
lining. A FLIGHT LOCK secures the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE in the lower (locked) position.
The FLIGHT LOCK ensures that the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is locked during the flight phases
CLIMB and DESCENT (beginning at a speed of 65 kt up to an altitude of 24 000 ft).
If there is no electrical power available or a fault is detected, the FLIGHT LOCK is always in the
unlocked position. If the FLIGHT LOCK is in the unlocked position, a message on the ECAM reminds
the flight crew to advise the cabin crew to observe the faulty door.
To access the related crew procedure Refer to 14-90 Flight Lock Actuator Fault ??? Reference not
found ???.
GUST LOCK
The GUST LOCK secures the passenger door in its fully open position.
During the normal closing procedure, initiated with the CLOSE pb, the GUST LOCK is disengaged
automatically.
Only when electrical power is not available, the GUST LOCK must be disengaged manually by lifting
the GUST LOCK lever before the door can be moved to the closed position.
The GUST LOCK is always in the forward door frame, either above or below the SUPPORT ARM (see
following table).
GUST LOCK
The GUST LOCK secures the passenger door in its fully open position.
During the normal closing procedure, initiated with the CLOSE pb, the GUST LOCK is disengaged
automatically.
Only when electrical power is not available, the GUST LOCK must be disengaged manually by lifting
the GUST LOCK lever before the door can be moved to the closed position.
The GUST LOCK is always in the forward door frame, either above or below the SUPPORT ARM (see
following table).
WARNING Make sure that passengers, especially children, do not touch or get in contact with the
protruding door frame fitting during boarding and disembarkment. There is a risk of
injury at the sharp edge of the protruding door frame fitting.
6. Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (the door lifts and moves outwards of the door frame).
7. On the DSIP:
- The LOCKED indicator goes OFF.
- The UNLOCKED indicator comes ON.
- The OPEN pb becomes active.
8. The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS change from the LOCKED to the UNLOCKED indication.
9. On the DSIP, press and hold the OPEN pb:
- The door opens in forward direction.
- Releasing the OPEN pb interrupts the opening movement.
- When the fully open position is reached, the UNLOCKED indicator goes OFF and the FULLY
OPEN indicator comes ON.
10.Check on the DSIP that the FULLY OPEN indicator is displayed. In this case, the GUST LOCK is
engaged.
2. Push against the flap and grasp the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
3. Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to the horizontal green line.
Note: The slide is automatically disarmed, when the door is opened from the outside.
4. The OPEN pb and the CLOSE pb become active.
5. Press and hold the OPEN pb:
- The door opens at first in the outboard direction, then the door moves in the forward direction.
- Releasing the OPEN pb interrupts the opening.
- The door locks in its fully open position (GUST LOCK engaged).
6. Lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into its recess.
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0028-0057, 0086-0090, 0101-0116, 0123, 0132-0135, 0141, 0147, 0153-0174, 0182-0249
2. Push against the flap and grasp the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
3. Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to the horizontal green line.
Note: The slide is automatically disarmed, when the door is opened from the outside.
4. The OPEN pb and the CLOSE pb become active.
5. Press and hold the OPEN pb:
- The door opens at first in the outboard direction, then the door moves in the forward direction.
- Releasing the OPEN pb interrupts the opening.
- The door locks in its fully open position (GUST LOCK engaged).
6. Lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into its recess.
The aircraft doors can only be opened manually but not electrically from the outside.
Due to a failure of the electrical controls on the outside of the aircraft, not commanded door motion has
occurred.
The consequences of this failure are:
- Not commanded motion (close or open direction) of the passenger door, when the door handle is
lifted up from either outside or inside.
- Door closing while the door is used for emergency evacuation. In this case, the affected door could
be potentially unusable for evacuation.
In consequence, the electrical controls (open and close) will be deactivated. However, it will still be
possible to open the door manually from the outside. There will be no change in operation from the
inside.
Ident: 09-10-30 00004960.0001001 / 02-Nov-10
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0025, 0077-0083, 0098, 0119, 0127, 0136-0140, 0142, 0150, 0178
Impacted by: 00025370.0001001
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0028-0057, 0086-0090, 0101-0116, 0123, 0132-0135, 0141, 0147, 0153-0174, 0182-0249
The aircraft doors can only be closed manually but not electrically from the outside.
Due to a failure of the electrical controls on the outside of the aircraft, not commanded door motion has
occurred.
The consequences of this failure are:
- Not commanded motion (close or open direction) of the passenger door, when the door handle is
lifted up from either outside or inside.
- Door closing while the door is used for emergency evacuation. In this case, the affected door could
be potentially unusable for evacuation.
In consequence, the electrical controls (open and close) will be deactivated. However, it will still be
possible to close the door manually from the outside. There will be no change in operation from the
inside.
2. Push against the flap and grasp the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
3. Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to the horizontal green line.
Note: The slide is automatically disarmed, when the door is opened from the outside.
4. Pull the door outboard, then move it in forward direction until the fully open position is reached and
the GUST LOCK is engaged.
Note: Do not use the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to move the door.
5. Lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into its recess.
MANUAL CLOSING FROM THE OUTSIDE
1. Manually disengage the GUST LOCK .
2. Push against the flap and grasp the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE.
3. Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to the horizontal green line.
Note: Do not use the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE to move the door.
4. Move the door manually in aft direction and stop the door movement when facing the door frame.
5. Push the door towards the door frame.
6. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE into its recess.
Note: The door is mechanically closed, latched and locked when the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE is
flush with the door surface.
WARNING For your safety, remain in the assist space and continue to firmly grasp the FRAME
ASSIST HANDLE.
For operating or monitoring the passenger doors, the cabin crew has several controls and indicators.
The indicators at the passenger doors are most important when the door is operated, i.e. opened or
closed. See Controls and Indicators at the Passenger Door.
For more information about the operation of the passenger doors:
- Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Opening from the Inside
- Refer to 09-10-30 Normal Closing from the Inside.
In addition to the indicators at the passenger doors, the cabin crew can monitor the status of all of the
passenger doors via the DOORS / SLIDES page on the Flight Attendant Panel (FAP).
For more information about the DOORS / SLIDES page on the FAP :Refer to 06-40-10 General
Information about the DOORS / SLIDES Page.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS AT THE PASSENGER DOOR
Depending on the status of the passenger door the status of the indicators change too.
Control/Indica Door Opening Door Open Door Closing Door Closed Door Closed
tor Process Process and Armed
SLIDE Disarmed Disarmed Disarmed Disarmed Armed
ARMING
LEVER
SLIDE ARMED Off Off Off Off On
Indicator
SAFETY PIN Installed Installed Installed Installed Not installed
DOOR Lift Fully lifted Lower Fully lowered Fully lowered
CONTROL
HANDLE
DSIP LOCKED Off Off Off On On
Indicator
DSIP On Off On Off Off
UNLOCKED
Indicator
DSIP OPEN pb Active Off Active Off Off
DSIP Active Active Active Off Off
CLOSE pb
DSIP FULLY Off On Off Off Off
OPEN Indicator
Control/Indica Door Opening Door Open Door Closing Door Closed Door Closed
tor Process Process and Armed
DOOR Unlocked Unlocked Unlocked Locked Locked
LOCKING
INDICATIONS
WARNING Do not leave an open cabin door unattended. A safety strap will NOT prevent
passengers or crewmembers from falling out!
Note: The safety strap rolls up automatically during removal procedure. The cabin crew must ensure
that the safety strap is fully retracted into its recess before closing the door.
FULLY OPEN INDICATOR IS NOT ON ALTHOUGH THE DOOR IS IN THE FULLY OPEN POSITION H56
The FULLY OPEN indicator is not ON although the door is in the fully open position.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Does the passenger door seem to be fully open and is the FULLY OPEN
indicator on the DSIP OFF? Go to 2 END
2. Are both, the OPEN pb and the CLOSE pb on the DSIP active
(illuminated white)? Go to 3 END
3. The door is fully open but the indication is not correct:
In order to re-initialize the indicators of the door position, follow the steps
described below:
1. Push the CLOSE pb on the DSIP to fully close the door again.
2. When the door is facing the door frame, grasp one of the DOOR
ASSIST HANDLES and pull the door inwards, into the door frame.
3. Fully lower the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE .
The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS change from UNLOCKED to
LOCKED.
The indications on the DSIP change as follows:
- The UNLOCKED indicator goes OFF
- The LOCKED indicator comes ON.
4. To open the door: Fully lift the DOOR CONTROL HANDLE (the door
lifts and moves outwards of the door frame).
The DOOR LOCKING INDICATIONS change from LOCKED to
UNLOCKED.
The indications on the DSIP change as follows:
- The LOCKED indicator goes OFF
- The UNLOCKED indicator comes ON
- The OPEN pb becomes active.
5. Push and hold the OPEN pb on the DSIP:
- The door opens in forward direction.
- When the final door opening position is reached, the UNLOCKED
indicator goes OFF and the FULLY OPEN indicator comes ON. Go to 4 Go to 4
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
4. Is the FULLY OPEN indicator ON and the OPEN pb deactivated? END Go to 5
5. Repeat closing and then reopening the door. : Step 3 - Close and Open
Procedure.
If the indications do not change, close the door again (closed, latched
and locked position), and use another door.
Note: If the door is open and the GUST LOCK engaged, the door may
be used for boarding and disembarking.
However, inform the other crewmembers about the door status,
so nobody pushes the OPEN pb on the DSIP!
ECAM ALERT DOOR XXXX POS FAULT TRIGGERED IN THE COCKPIT H57
The flight crew advises the cabin crew that an ECAM alert DOOR xxxx POS DET FAULT has been
triggered.
ACTION RESULT/SOLUTION
YES NO
1. Can the door be re-opened? Go to 2 Go to 4
2. The cabin crew must:
Check that the related slide is disarmed.
Note: If the slide is armed, the cabin crew must disarm the slide. Go to 3 Go to 3
3. 1- Fully lift the door control handle (on the DSIP, the UNLOCKED
indicator comes ON red) and wait for at least 30 seconds then,
2- Fully lower the door control handle (on the DSIP, the LOCKED
indicator comes ON green) and wait for at least 30 seconds .
When the procedure is completed, inform the flight crew
Is the ECAM alert still present? Go to 4 Go to 5
4. The cabin crew should:
wait for further instructions from the flight crew . END END
5. The defect is cleared,
the cabin crew wait for further instructions from the flight crew for the
continuation of the flight. END END
The emergency evacuation system is designed to enable passengers, in the case of an emergency, to
evacuate the aircraft quickly.
The A380 is equipped with a total of 16 evacuation devices.
In the case of ditching, 14 of the 16 evacuation devices can be used as a raft:
- 8 sliderafts on the Main Deck at Doors M1, M2, M4 and M5
- 6 sliderafts on the Upper Deck at Doors U1, U2 and U3
There are three types of evacuation devices installed on the A380:
- Door-mounted sliderafts at doors M1, M2, M4 and M5
- Fuselage-mounted sliderafts at doors U1, U2 and U3
- Belly fairing mounted overwing ramp/slide at doors M3.
Note: The ramp/slides at doors M3L and M3R are not equipped with raft capability.
Slide Arrangement
M1 Slide Overview
M1 Head End
The sliderafts provided for the UD are located at U1, U2 and U3.
In the case of ditching each UD slideraft has a rated capacity of 65 persons. The overload capacity is
85 persons.
The UD sliderafts are not portable.
SLIDE DEPLOYMENT
The deployment and inflation of the slide are automatically initiated when the door is opened in the
ARMED mode.
During the deployment sequence, the slide is kept folded until the pressure is sufficient to separate the
restraint device (in order to make sure that the deployment occurs in a controlled sequence). The
restraint devices have a fuse pin which breaks when the pressure is sufficient.
As the door opens, the slide drops off the packboard. It drops down below the doorsill.
The speed lacing releases and the slide inflates.
The A380 slide inflation system consists of aspirators, hoses and a tribrid inflator: L2
- A coolant reservoir.
- And a control valve.
The gas generator contains the propellant charge which initially burns to create the hot gases that are
injected into the coolant reservoir.
The cooled gas is transferred to the control valve and sent to the inflation nose and finally to the
aspirators and the evacuation device.
MANUAL INFLATION
Applicable to: ALL
The Manual Inflation pb (MIP) is a spring loaded pushbutton, which is located in the upper right side of
the door frame.
If the slide, slideraft does not inflate automatically, press the MIP pb when it becomes red..
SLIDE EXTENSION
Applicable to: ALL
M1 SLIDE EXTENSION
An extendable slide is necessary at doors M1 to cover the various range of sill heights that may be
produced by different aircraft attitudes in a crash situation.
The extendable portion of the M1 slide is connected at the toe end. When the M1 slide extension is not
in use it is restrained by upper and lower flaps, which are speed laced together.
The slide extension is automatically activated when a predefined aircraft attitude exists. In the event of
a tail tip (Nose up attitude, above 2.5 ± 0.5 degrees), the slide extension will be deployed automatically
in order to ensure that the slide reaches the ground.
In the case of a change in the aircraft attitude or the slide extension does not deploy, the cabin
crewmember will be warned by:
- The visual SLIDE NOT READY on the DSIP
- A buzzer that will sound for 120 seconds.
In the case of ditching the M1 slide extension will not be deployed.
Note: The slide extensions at doors M1 do not have raft capability.
M1 Slide Extension
M3 OVERWING RAMP/SLIDES
Applicable to: ALL
M3 OVERWING RAMP/SLIDES
The A380 overwing exits at M3 are equipped with a ramp/slide. One at M3 left and one at M3 right.
The ramp/slide deploys automatically when the door is opened in the ARMED mode.
The ramp/slide inflates on the wing facing aft.
A barber pole is located on top of the ramp to indicate that the ramp/ slide is ready to use.
Note: During an on ground evacuation the cabin crew must instruct passengers to run on the ramp ,
follow the directional arrows and to jump into the slides 2 by 2 using both lanes.
Note: In the case of ditching, when the ditching pb-sw is pressed to the "ON" position by the flight
crew ,the M3L/M3R slides deployment is inhibited.
M3 Ramp/Slide
The upper deck slide may be used as a safe means of evacuating the aircraft with both of the inflation
tubes deflated.
The words FOR DEFLATED SLIDE USE are written on the door sill tubing.
Note: The instructions on the door sill tubing are only visible when the slide is deflated.
The cabin crewmember must lie flat on the floor to read the instructions.
These instructions will enable cabin crew and passengers to use the upper deck slide when it is fully
deflated.
UPPER DECK SLIDE DEFLATED USE
Note: The cabin crew must ask for assistance of people on the ground to:
- Hold on tightly to the toe end of the slide, while pulling the slide outwards.
1. Lie flat on the floor. Reach out of the door. Place your hand under the upper part of the slide
compartment where the pouch is located.
Note: The pouch is located approximately in the middle of the door sill.
2. Open the pouch and remove the strap.
3. Once the strap is removed from the pouch, pass the strap through one of the frame assist handles
located on either side of the door. Pull on the strap to ensure that it is secured.
4. Firmly grasp the strap with both hands, this will provide support when stepping on to the deflated
slide.
5. Descend from the aircraft door backward, then place your feet into the deflated slide. Stand and
turn to face the slide surface.
6. Holding onto the strap with both hands, descend the slide, walk the first few steps, then slide until
you reach the ground.
The electrical connector is located within a small velcro tunnel on the girt. The electrical connector will
automatically break-away as the slideraft separates from the aircraft.
Note: The electrical connector is identical at all the main deck doors.
Electrical Connector
The Upper Deck slideraft release handle is located on the upper tube of the slideraft. To disconnect the
slide raft from the aircraft.
- Open the flap
- Remove the release handle from the pouch
- Pull the release handle
The action of pulling the handle will release the slideraft from the girts and the inflation hose system.
Note: The pulling force needed to pull the slideraft release handle to detach the upper deck
slideraft from the aircraft is 40 kg. Therefore, the cabin crewmember may need to request
assistance from the raft occupants .
The slide light harness will disconnect when the slideraft has dropped.
The slideraft is still connected to the aircraft by the mooring line.
To separate the slideraft from the aircraft:
- Cut the mooring line using the knife which is in the pouch located at the doorsill end of the slideraft.
The survival kit is located in the Upper Deck door lining. The survival is protected by a quick release
cover, which can removed easily in the case of a ditching.
The survival kit is located in the Upper Deck door lining. The survival is protected by a quick release
cover, which can removed easily in the case of a ditching.
Upper Deck Survival Kit Location
RAFT CAPACITY
Applicable to: ALL
RAFT CAPACITY
Mode MD (8 rafts) UD (6 rafts) Total amount
Normal Mode 508 passengers 390 passengers 898 passengers
Overload Mode 523 passengers with 336 passengers with 3 859 passengers
largest raft lost rafts lost
Note: Capacity of rafts has been rated with an average weight of 77 kg per person.
RAFT CAPACITY PER SLIDE RAFT
Door M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 U1 U2 U3
Capacity
Rated 60 70 N/A 62 62 65 65 65
Overload 72 87 N/A 72 74 85 85 85
TSO
rating
Overload 112 112 112
TC rating
CANOPY INSTALLATION
Applicable to: ALL
The canopy is stowed in a pouch that is directly above the slideraft. A canopy is a wind resistant plastic
sheet, used to protect a slideraft in the case of poor weather conditions such as wind and rain. Its bright
orange color makes it very visible, and easy to find.
Canopy
The survival kit contains the necessary survival equipment to survive for an extended period of time.
The survival kit contains the following items:
1. One survival manual
2. One Signalling mirror (heliograph).
The signalling mirror is used to attract attention, and may be seen for many kilometers even on a
hazy day.
To use the signalling mirror:
- Slowly bring the mirror to eye level and look through the sighting hole. A bright spot will be seen
(this is the aim indicator).
- Hold the mirror close to the eye and turn until the aim indicator is on target.
- Reflect the sunlight from the mirror on to the target and continuously sweep the horizon.
3. One dye marker sea
The dye marker sea provides a luminescent color around the slideraft, so that the slideraft may be
identified from a distance.
To use the sea dye marker:
- Unseal the packet of sea dye marker.
- Deploy the sea dye marker into the water, from the upwind end of the slideraft (this will be the
doorsill end of the slideraft).
4. A whistle that will function after immersion in water.
The whistle is part of the signalling equipment to attract attention.
5. Two lithium battery flashlights
6. One water bailer
The water bailer is used to remove excess water from the slideraft.
7. One sponge, dehydrated
The sponge is used to remove water from the slideraft. The slideraft must be kept as dry as
possible.
8. One packed water purification tablets (contents 50 tablets)
These are used to purify salt water into drinking water.
9. Three water storage bags
10.Two flares, hand held signal, aerial
11.First Aid Kit
The First Aid Kit contains medial equipment for minor injuries.
- 14 Antibiotic Ointment
- 2 Canteen of water (contents 1 pint)
- 12 Bandage sterile compress (packet 2 x 2)
- 2 Bandage sterile compress (packet 4 x 4)
Continued on the next page
- 3 Triangular slings
- 32 adhesive strip bandages
12.Two clamp repair kit
The patch kit with instructions for use is provided, to repair tears in the inflation chambers.
13.One raft management guide
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The following diagrams illustrate the threshold heights that corresponding to the required landing gear
positions for recovery situations.
AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
Aircraft Configurations
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
10-10-20 Location
Location of the EVAC Control Panel in the Cockpit ............................................................................. 1
Location of the EVAC Signaling Controls in the Cabin ........................................................................ 1
10-10-30 Description
Description of the EVAC Signaling Controls in the Cockpit ................................................................. 1
Description of the EVAC Signaling Controls in the Cabin.................................................................... 2
Description of the Aural and Visual Alerts in the Cabin ....................................................................... 5
10-10-40 Operation
How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cabin........................................................................... 1
How to Request an EVAC Signaling from the Cabin ........................................................................... 2
How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cockpit ........................................................................ 3
How to Cancel an EVAC Command from the Cabin............................................................................ 5
How to Reset the Aural and Visual Alerts in the Cabin via the Control Panels.................................... 6
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) controls the evacuation signaling in all cabin areas
and in the cockpit with its Emergency Evacuation Signaling (EVAC) system in case of an impending
emergency evacuation of the aircraft.
The aural and visual signals of the EVAC system indicate to the crew and the passengers that the
evacuation process must be started at once.
EVAC SIGNAL ACTIVATION
The Emergency Evacuation Signaling (EVAC) can be activated from the:
- Overhead control panel in the cockpit (EVAC panel)
- An FAP in the cabin if authorized by the flight crew.
EVAC SIGNAL ACTIVATION PRIORITY
The priority, who can activate the EVAC signal, is controlled via a switch on the cockpit overhead
control panel (CAPT & PURS sw). The switch has two positions for EVAC authorization:
- Captain & Purser (CAPT & PURS position)
- Captain (CAPT position).
If the cabin crew is not authorized to initiate the evacuation signals (CAPT position) they can still
request evacuation. The request is displayed on the pilot's switch panel to be confirmed or reset.
EVAC SIGNAL INDICATION
The EVAC activation can be indicated on the following indication panels / control panels in the cabin:
- AIP
- AAP
- FAP
- Mini FAP.
In addition, the passengers and the crew are alerted by the aural warning distributed via the:
- Cabin attendant loudspeakers
- Passenger compartment loudspeakers.
The cockpit has the following indicators:
- EVAC COMMAND indicator on the EVAC panel
- EVAC horn in the cockpit.
EVAC RESET
The aural and visual EVAC signals can be reset from the control panels in the cabin (EVAC RESET
hardkey / pushbutton). The Cabin Assignment Module (CAM) defines which control panel can reset the
EVAC signaling in which zone, area or deck.
EVAC CANCELLATION
The EVAC condition can be cancelled from:
- the cockpit (COMMAND pb)
- the EVAC CMD on the FAP or the AAP (as an option).
Note: The cabin crew may cancel the EVAC command (e.g. after performing a preflight check)
from the related FAP or AAP (as an option) EVAC CMD pb from which the evacuation was
initiated.
The flight crew can always cancel an EVAC condition from the cockpit.
For information about the location of the EVAC control panel in the cockpit: Refer to 02-110-20
Communications
The evacuation signaling can be activated, reset and cancelled from the control panels in the cabin.
There are two kinds of EVAC control hardkeys / pushbuttons:
- EVAC COMMAND
- EVAC RESET.
EVAC COMMAND hardkeys are typically located on the FAP: Refer to 04-20-10 Location of the
MP-FAP(s)
EVAC RESET hardkeys / pushbuttons can be located on the:
- FAP: For information about the location of the FAP: Refer to 04-20-10 Location of the MP-FAP(s)
- Mini FAP: For information about the location of the mini FAP: Refer to 04-20-10 Location of
Mini-FAPs
- AAP: For information about the location of the AAP: Refer to 04-20-10 Location of AAPs
EVAC Panel
HORN OFF pb The flight crew uses the HORN OFF pb to turn OFF the
aural alert in the cockpit.
Hardkey Description
The cabin crew can use the EVAC COMMAND hardkey on the FAPs
to:
- Activate an evacuation signaling if authorized by the flight crew
EVAC (CAPT & PURS sw on the EVAC panel in the cockpit)
COMMAND - Request an evacuation signaling if not authorized by the flight
crew to activate an evacuation signaling (CAPT & PURS sw on
the EVAC panel in the cockpit)
- Cancel the evacuation signaling from the FAP from which the
evacuation was activated.
The cabin crew can use the EVAC RESET hardkey to turn off the
EVAC RESET evacuation aural alert in the cabin as well as the EVAC indication on
the AIPs.
For more information about the cockpit controls: Refer to 02-110-30-23 EVAC Panel
EVAC CONTROL ON THE MINI FAP
Note: Mini FAPs with an EVAC RESET hardkey are optional.
Hardkey Description
The cabin crew can use the EVAC RESET hardkey to turn off the
EVAC RESET evacuation aural alert in the cabin as well as the EVAC indication on
the AIPs.
Pushbutton Description
The cabin crew can use the EVAC RESET pb to turn off
EVAC RESET pb the evacuation aural alert in the cabin as well as the
EVAC indication on the AIPs.
If the EVAC command was activated the cabin crew and the passengers are alerted by aural and
visual signals in the cabin.
AURAL EVAC SIGNAL
The EVAC signal is distributed throughout the whole cabin via the cabin loudspeakers.
VISUAL EVAC SIGNAL
The visual EVAC signals are indicated on:
- Flight Attendant Panel (FAP)
- Mini FAP
- Additional Attendant Panel (AAP) (optional)
- Additional Indication Panel (AIP).
FAP / MINI FAP
On all FAPs and mini FAPs the EVAC RESET hardkey flashes red.
AAP
Optionally there is an EVAC RESET on AAPs which flashes red.
AIP
On the AIP the red indicator flashes and typically the message EMERGENCY ALERT is displayed.
Depending on the position of the CAPT & PURS sw in the cockpit, there are three possibilities how an
evacuation signaling can be activated on the aircraft:
- Activation from the cabin: See EVAC Signaling Activated by the Cabin Crew
- Request from the cabin and confirmation by the cockpit: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Request an
EVAC Signaling from the Cabin
- Activation from the cockpit: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cockpit
EVAC SIGNALING ACTIVATED BY THE CABIN CREW
When the CAPT & PURS sw on the EVAC panel in the cockpit is in CAPT & PURS position the cabin
crew can activate an EVAC signaling.
EVAC Controls on a Typical FAP
Push the EVAC CMD hardkey on a FAP in the cabin to activate the
EVAC signaling.
The EVAC CMD hardkey illuminates in green (only on the FAP from
which the evacuation signaling was activated).
The EVAC RESET hardkey flashes in red on the FAPs / mini FAPs.
(Optionally, an EVAC RESET pb flashes on the AAPs.)
Note: If the CAPT & PURS sw in the cockpit is in the CAPT
position the flight crew must confirm the request for the
evacuation signaling before the EVAC RESET hardkey
flashes red. Refer to 10-10-40 How to Request an EVAC
Signaling from the Cabin
For more information about the evacuation indicators in the cabin: Refer to 10-10-10 Emergency
Evacuation (EVAC) Signaling
Depending on the position of the CAPT & PURS sw in the cockpit, there are three possibilities how an
evacuation signaling can be activated on the aircraft:
- Activation from the cabin: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cabin
- See Request from the cabin and confirmation by the cockpit
- Activation from the cockpit: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cockpit
EVAC SIGNALING INITIATED BY THE CABIN CREW AND CONFIRMED BY THE FLIGHT CREW
When the CAPT & PURS sw on the EVAC panel in the cockpit is in the CAPT position the cabin crew
can only request an EVAC signaling. The flight crew must confirm the request in order to activate an
EVAC signaling.
EVAC Controls on a Typical FAP
The pushed EVAC CMD hardkey illuminates in green (only on the FAP
from which the evacuation was activated)
When the flight crew has confirmed the evacuation the EVAC RESET
hardkey on the control panels in the cabin (FAP, mini FAP) flashes in red.
(Optionally, an EVAC RESET pb flashes on the AAPs.)
For more information about the evacuation indicators in the cabin: Refer to 10-10-10 Emergency
Evacuation (EVAC) Signaling
Depending on the position of the CAPT & PURS sw in the cockpit, there are three possibilities how an
evacuation signaling can be activated on the aircraft:
- Activation from the cabin: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Activate the EVAC Signaling from the Cabin
- Request from the cabin and confirmation by the cockpit: Refer to 10-10-40 How to Request an
EVAC Signaling from the Cabin
- Activation from the cockpit: See EVAC Signaling Activated by the Flight Crew
EVAC SIGNALING ACTIVATED BY THE FLIGHT CREW
EVAC Panel
It is only possible to cancel an EVAC command from the cabin if it was activated from the cabin.
Note: The flight crew can cancel an EVAC command at any time from the cockpit.
To cancel an EVAC command from the cabin the cabin crew must push the EVAC CMD hardkey on
the FAP, from which the EVAC signaling was activated, a second time.
EVAC Controls on a Typical FAP
HOW TO RESET THE AURAL AND VISUAL ALERTS IN THE CABIN VIA THE CONTROL PANELS
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew can reset the aural and visual alerts in the cabin via the EVAC RESET hardkey on
FAPs / mini FAPs or via the EVAC RESET pb on AAPs, depending on the data from the Cabin
Assignment Module (CAM).
Note: The EVAC/RESET hardkey light will remain flashing red until the cabin crew cancels the EVAC
command from the initial FAP or the flight crew cancels it from the cockpit controls.
EVAC RESET FROM A FAP
EVAC Controls on a Typical FAP
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
11-10-20 Location
Zone Overview..................................................................................................................................... 1
List of Symbols..................................................................................................................................... 2
Emergency Equipment in the Cockpit.................................................................................................. 4
Emergency Equipment in the Upper Deck........................................................................................... 9
Emergency Equipment in the Main Deck........................................................................................... 18
Emergency Equipment in the Lower Deck......................................................................................... 28
11-20-20 Description
Description........................................................................................................................................... 1
11-20-30 Operation
Operation ............................................................................................................................................. 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
11-50-20 Operation
Operation..............................................................................................................................................1
This chapter provides descriptive and operational information on the emergency equipment.
The location of emergency equipment on board the aircraft is indicated by placards.
ZONE OVERVIEW
Applicable to: ALL
The following illustrates the aircraft zones 1 to 10, their corresponding locations on the various aircraft
decks.
Zone Overview
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Applicable to: ALL
Megaphone
Crash Axe
Flashlight
Fire Gloves
Crow Bar
The following illustration the emergency equipment that is in the cockpit and their corresponding
locations.
Refer to List of Symbols
Location of the Flashlights
The following illustrate the emergency equipment that is in the cockpit and their corresponding
locations.
Refer to List of Symbols
Location of the Flashlight
The following illustration shows zone 1 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 1
The following illustration shows zone 1 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 1
The following illustration shows zone 1 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 1
The following illustration shows zone 2 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 2
The following illustration shows zone 2 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 2 H60
The following illustration shows zone 3 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 3
The following illustration shows zone 3 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 3
The following illustration shows zone 4 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 4
The following illustration shows zone 4 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 4
The following illustration shows zone 5 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 5
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
The following illustration shows zone 5 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 5 H61
The following illustration shows zone 6 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 6
The following illustration shows zone 6 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 6
The following illustration shows zone 6 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 6
The following illustration shows zone 7 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 7
The following illustration shows zone 7 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 7
The following illustration shows zone 7 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 7
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0167, 0178-0184, 0190-0249
The following illustration shows zone 8 of the aircraft and the emergency equipment in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 8
Applicable to: MSN 0007-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
The following illustration shows zone 8 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 8
The following illustration show zone 9 of the aircraft and the applicable emergency equipment that is
located in this zone.
Emergency Equipment Zone 9
Applicable to: MSN 0023-0030, 0046, 0080-0105, 0108-0112, 0123-0127, 0135, 0139-0140, 0153-0164, 0178-0184, 0190, 0204-0207,
0210-0216, 0225
Note: Crew and passenger life vests have the same function and parts, but differ in color
(orange/pink for crew and yellow for passenger life vests).
Continued on the next page
For detailed instructions on how to don a life vest: Refer to How to Don a Life Vest.
Note: Crew and passenger life vests have the same function and parts, but differ in color
(orange/pink for crew and yellow for passenger life vests).
MAIN PARTS OF LIFE VESTS L2
Pull the red tag to inflate the life vest outside of the
aircraft.
GENERAL
The life vest for infant is a flotation device provided for infants weigh up to 16 kg(35 lb).
The infant life vest is manually activated self-inflated.
DESCRIPTION
The infant life vests consists of:
- A dual chamber attached to a harness securing the life vest to the wearer
- Two carbon dioxide cylinders attached to the manual inflation systems
- Two oral tube inflation systems
- A light system assembly and a battery attached to the harness
- A tether line.
1. Remove the infant life vest from its pouch and unroll it.
2. Place the infant life vest over the head of the infant and pull it down around the neck.
3. Place one infant's leg over waistbelt harness loop and pull snug but not tight.
4. Run the waistbelt harness around back of the infants's waist and back to the front.
5. Close the buckle below the life vest.
6. Adjust the waistbelt by pulling the loose end.
7. Pull the red inflator tags to inflate the infant life vest.
8. Oral inflation:
CAUTION ORAL INFLATION PRIOR TO GAS INFLATION WILL CAUSE EXCESSIVE
PRESSURE WHICH MAY BURST THE LIFE VEST.
Use the oral inflation system if more or less pressure in the life vest is necessary:
- Blow into the tube to inflate
- Press the valve to deflate the life vest.
GENERAL
The life vest for infant is a flotation device provided for infants weigh up to 16 kg(35 lb).
The infant life vest is manually activated self-inflated.
Main Parts of Life Vest Infant
GENERAL
The baby survival cot is a flotation device provided for babies that are:
- Aged from 0 to 18 months
- Weigh up to 16 kg(35 lb)
- Measure up to 0.84 m(33 in) in length.
DESCRIPTION OF THE BABY SURVIVAL COT
Main Parts of the Baby Survival Cot
- The baby survival cot has two air apertures at the stern (head end) and is supplied with PVC
windows, one at each end and one at each side, so the baby can be monitored.
- Webbing straps are attached to the cot to form a three point lifting strap. The strap is used to carry
the cot, either by hand or over the shoulder.
- The tether is 3 min length and is used to lower the cot into the water or can be attached around the
waist of the parent.
- A whistle is attached to the baby survival cot.
- A water operated battery and a lamp is attached to the cot to help location in darkness. The water
operated battery is left to hang under the water line.
Continued on the next page
Inflation System
Note: The tether line can be tied around the waist of an adult as a life line.
Lowering by the Tether Line
OPERATION
WARNING It is recommended to use the Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) when fighting a
fire. Smoke from the fire and gas from the fire extinguisher may cause irritation of the
eyes and respiratory organs.
GENERAL
The aircraft is equipped with handheld flashlights stored in a bracket. The flashlights are located at all
cabin crew and flight crew stations.
Flashlight
GENERAL
The aircraft is equipped with handheld flashlights stored in a bracket. The flashlights are located at all
cabin crew and flight crew stations.
Flashlight
DESCRIPTION
A LED confirms that the flashlight is ready for use.
The flashlight is activated when the flashlight is removed from the bracket.
The light operating time is 4 hours.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION L2
CRASH AXE
The aircraft is equipped with crash axes. These crash axes are used to:
- cut through light structures
- remove panels
- get access to hidden areas for fire fighting.
Their handles are insulated in order to protect against electric shocks.
Crash Axe
GENERAL
The purpose of the megaphone for the cabin crew is to give instructions to the passengers e. g. in case
of Passenger Address PA system failures.
Refer to How to use a Megaphone.
Megaphone
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION L2
3. Press the squeezing handle and speak slowly in a loud and clear voice.
ESCAPE ROPE
The escape rope is located in the cockpit.
Information about the escape rope is available in the following section:
Refer to Escape Rope.
DEMONSTRATION KIT
The aircraft is equipped with a demonstration kit which contains the following:
- demo life vest
- demo oxygen mask
- demo seat belt
- safety card.
Demonstration Kit
1. The Light Emitting Diode (LED) goes ON to confirm that the ELT is transmitting a distress signal.
2. The ARMED/ON/OFF sw: The switch is in the ARMED position. The crew uses this switch to turn
the ELT manually ON.
3. The antenna enable the successful transmission of the distress signal.
4. The TEST sw will be used for a self test by the maintenance crew. L2
OPERATION L1
1. Activate the beacon by switching the ARMED/ON/OFF sw to the ON position. In the ARMED
position the beacon will be activated automatically by water contact.
2. The red LED goes ON a steady state and an aural indication confirm that the ELT is transmitting a
distress signal.
3. Pull out the antenna.
TRANSMITTER UNIT
Transmitter Unit
GENERAL
Applicable to: ALL
The Protective Breathing Equipment PBE supplies oxygen to the crew in the case of fire, smoke and
toxic gases.
The PBE:
- Protects the user's eyes and respiratory system
- Enables the cabin crewmember to move around the cabin
For the location of the PBE's:Refer to 11-10-10 General Information about Emergency Equipment
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
PBE container
The tamper indicator (if installed) visible on the container, must be intact before use, as indicated in the
preflight checklist.
The Protective Breathing Equipment PBE works with a closed breathing circuit.
The oronasal mask enables expired air will to be regenerated, enriched with oxygen and inhaled again.
PBE
OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
1. Open the container, by removing the lid. Take the sealed bag out, and remove the PBE from the
sealed bag.
2. Don the PBE hood by sliding both hands (with palm facing each other) inside the neck seal
opening. Adjust the PBE hood on the head, with the nose and the mouth close to the oronasal
mask.
3. Pull the adjustment straps forward to actuate the regeneration system. A rushing noise of oxygen
entering the hood will be heard for a short period and the PBE hood will start to inflate. The hood is
now operating for a minimum of 15 min.
4. Pull the adjustment straps back to secure the oronasal mask high on the nose for a tight seal.
WARNING - Push long hair through the neck seal into the hood to avoid leakages. Hair that
protrudes through the neck seal could ignite if brought into direct contact with flame.
- Do not place any plait-like hairstyles and necklaces in the sealing area. They must
be positioned above the neck seal inside the hood. The neck seal must not be
damaged when putting on the mask. Be especially careful with glasses, sharp edged
necklaces and earrings.
WARNING Do not smoke or become exposed to fire or flame after removing the PBE, because hair
may be saturated with oxygen.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The aircraft may be equipped with supplemental medical equipment for emergencies:
The supplemental medical equipment may consist of:
- Defibrillator
- Medical kits
- Medical outlets.
The following illustration shows the location of the medical outlet in the upper deck zone 4.
The following illustration shows the location of the medical outlet in the main deck zone 5.
The following illustration shows the location of the medical outlet in the main deck zone 8.
The following illustration shows the location of the medical outlet in the upper deck zone 4.
The following illustration shows the location of the medical outlet in the main deck zone 5.
The following illustration shows the location of the medical outlet in the main deck zone 8.
MEDICAL OUTLETS
Applicable to: ALL
CAUTION Only authorized persons, who are familiar with the operation of the medical equipment,
may use this device.
Medical Outlet
1. Receptacle 115 V AC / 60 Hz
2. ON/OFF pb / indicator
3. Fuse 10 A
4. Protection cover
HOW TO OPERATE THE 115 V AC OUTLET
1. Connect a 115 V AC medical equipment to the related receptacle.
2. Push the ON/OFF pb.
3. Switch ON the medical equipment at the device, if necessary .
Power rates:
Continued on the next page
115 V AC / 1 000 VA
60 Hz
HOW TO TAKE THE MEDICAL OUTLET OUT OF OPERATION
1. Switch OFF the medical equipment.
2. Push the ON/OFF pb. The indicator goes OFF.
3. Disconnect the medical equipment from the related receptacle.
4. Close the cover of the medical outlet panel.
5. Push in the spring loaded quick-release fastener until it engages with a snap. The fastener must be
flush with the cover.
DESCRIPTION
Applicable to: ALL
The portable oxygen bottle with a mask attached provides oxygen can supply first aid oxygen to
passengers or cabin crewmembers. The portable oxygen bottle can also supply oxygen during cabin
depressurization [(flow must be set to4 l/min (liters per minute)].
The portable oxygen bottle is able to supply oxygen at a flow rate of 2 l/min or 4 l/min. The flow rate
is indicated in the window above the gauge.
The ON-OFF control knob enables the user to open the oxygen valve and to select the desired flow
rate
When the portable oxygen bottle is full, it is able to supply oxygen for approximately 120 minutes at
2 l/min and 60 minutes at 4 l/min. It must be attached to a mask when placed aboard an aircraft in a
ready to use condition.
The oxygen source is a high-pressure bottle, with a capacity of 310 l(11 ft³). In Normal condition of L2
Temperature, Pressure and Dry (NTPD) in the bottle is 127.6 bar(1 850 PSI) .
L1
The portable oxygen bottles are installed in brackets with quick-release clamps. For more information
about locations refer to Cabin Emergency Equipment Layouts:
Refer to 11-10-10 Main Deck Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview Refer to 11-10-10 Upper Deck
Emergency Equipment Cabin Overview Refer to 11-10-10 Crew Rest Area Emergency Equipment
Overview
OPERATION
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin crew should use the portable oxygen bottle as follows:
1. Remove the portable oxygen bottle from its ready-to-use location.
2. Remove the mask from the stowage bag, ensure that the mask is attached to the oxygen outlet, and
put the mask on the user's face, covering the user's nose and mouth.
3. Turn the ON-OFF control knob counter clockwise to the 2 l/min (liters per minute) or 4 l/min position
to start the flow of oxygen. Ensure that the number is centered in the window above the gauge for
oxygen to flow correctly. Check the flow indicator of the mask to ensure that oxygen is flowing.
Note: Cabin crew must monitor the gauge when the oxygen is in use.
Display window
4. When using the portable oxygen unit, oxygen does not flow until the "2" is centered in the window
and the ON-OFF control knob is in the 2 l/min detent position. When adjusting oxygen flow from
2 l/min to 4 l/min the oxygen does not flow until the "4" is centered in the window above the
gauge and the ON-OFF control knob is in the 4 l/min detent position.
WARNING When dispensing oxygen, the ON-OFF control knob must be adjusted to either the 2
l/min or 4 l/min detent and the number "2" or the number "4" is centered in the
window above the gauge. Attempted use with the ON-OFF control knob to any other
position can cause the flow of oxygen to stop completely, which may cause personal
injury or death of the user.
5. While the portable oxygen bottle unit is in use, periodically check the visual flow indicator on the
mask to ensure that there is oxygen flowing to the mask.
6. Do not turn the ON-OFF control knob past the stop at the 4 l/min setting. Do not use hand or fist to
turn the control knob for ON-OF. If you try to turn the ON-OFF control knob past the detent at the
"4" position, oxygen flow from the portable oxygen unit stop. Forcing the ON-OFF control knob past
the "4" position damages the portable oxygen unit. Damaged portable oxygen unit must be serviced
by an authorized service center.
ON/OFF Flow Valve
7. When the user no longer requires oxygen from the portable oxygen bottle, turn the ON-OFF control
knob clockwise until a red band appears in the window. The flow of oxygen stops.
8. Put the mask back in the stowage bag and return the portable oxygen bottle to its stored position.
Note: When moving or transporting the portable oxygen bottle, be sure to keep a firm grasp on
the portable oxygen bottle and do not allow it to drop.
Portable Oxygen Devices
WARNING Prevent pressurized oxygen from coming in contact with oil, grease, flammable
solvents, contaminated tools, or other combustible material, because this may cause a
fire or explosion, and result in serious personal injury or death.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
12-10 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Preflight checklists are performed in accordance with Operator policies, procedures and local
Aviation Authority requirements.
The preflight checklist are usually performed before the departure of flights from originating stations
and transit stops when a crew change has taken place.
The preflight checklists have been developed to ensure that specific cabin items and systems are fully
operational.
These checklists can be divided into two categories: Safety related items, and commercial items.
The preflight checklists for should include the following items:
• Loose cabin emergency equipment
• Crew seats
• Passenger Address (PA) system
• Cabin interphone system.
It is important that these first items may be checked correctly, and that they are fully operational. Some
of these items, if inoperative, may impact the Master Minimum Equipment List (MMEL), and possibly
affect flight operations.
• In-flight Entertainment (IFE) system
• Galleys
• Lavatories
• Flight Attendant Panel (FAP) functions and Mini FAP
• First and business class seat operation.
A full check of the cabin systems, that provide passenger services and comfort, will benefit Operators,
customers and crewmembers alike.
The preflight checklists have to be completed in a limited amount of time (maximum of 30 min ).
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the Chief Purser delegate preflight tasks for the preflight
checklists in advance, to maximize time and resources.
Note: In the event of irregular flight operations where the amount of time between cabin crew
boarding and passenger boarding has been significantly reduced. It is the responsibility of the
Chief Purser to prioritize the items of the preflight checklists in order of importance. All safety
related preflight checklist items mandated by operator policies, procedures and local aviation
authority must take priority over all other items.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
For an overview of the emergency equipment in the crew rest areas Refer to 11-10-20 Zone 9
Lower Deck Zone 9.
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
A wide range of emergency equipment is installed on board the aircraft, to provide crewmembers with
the tools to deal effectively with emergency or medical situations that can occur during a flight. The
preflight inspection takes place before the departure of each originating flight or transit stop, when
there is a cabin crew change. Each crewmember is responsible for the preflight inspection, and the
completion of the cabin emergency equipment checklists for all cabin emergency equipment assigned
to their work station.
The cabin emergency equipment preflight inspection is an integral part of the cabin emergency
equipment preflight checklist, and ensures that each piece of equipment is fully operational, before the
departure of each flight. During the equipment inspection, crewmembers are required to check:
• Gauges
• Security seals
• Expiration dates
• Status indicators
The cabin emergency equipment preflight checklists specifies the equipment location, and the quantity
of each piece of equipment for that location.
CAUTION Any discrepancies discovered during the preflight inspection must be reported to the
Chief Purser. The Chief Purser should report the discrepancies to the flight crew and
the maintenance personnel.
CRASH AXE
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
Note: There are no placards to indicate the location of
the crash axe.
DEMONSTRATION KIT
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
2. Ensure that each demonstration kit pouch contains
the following:
• Demonstration seat belt (1)
• Demonstration life vest (1)
• Demonstration oxygen mask (1)
3. Check of each piece of equipment to ensure that it is
in good condition and ready for use.
FLASHLIGHT
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
2. Ensure that the LED flash interval on the flashlight is
between 3 sand 6 s.
3. Check that the flashlight is properly stowed into its
retention bracket.
Note: if the flash interval is longer, between 6 s to 10 s,
this indicates that the flashlight battery is low.
Notify the Chief Purser.
MEGAPHONE
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
2. Press the trigger located on the handhold. Listen for
an audible “popping" sound. This is the indication that
the megaphone is operative.
3. Ensure that the megaphone is correctly stowed and
secured.
CRASH AXE
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
Note: There are no placards to indicate the location of
the crash axe.
DEMONSTRATION KIT
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
2. Ensure that each demonstration kit pouch contains
the following:
• Demonstration seat belt (1)
• Demonstration life vest (1)
• Demonstration oxygen mask (1)
3. Check of each piece of equipment to ensure that it is
in good condition and ready for use.
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
2. Visually check that the ELT switch is on ARMED
position.
FACE SHIELD
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
FLASHLIGHT
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
2. Ensure that the LED flash interval on the flashlight is
between 3 sand 6 s.
3. Check that the flashlight is properly stowed into its
retention bracket.
Note: if the flash interval is longer, between 6 s to 10 s,
this indicates that the flashlight battery is low.
Notify the Chief Purser.
HALON FIRE EXTINGUISHER
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
2. Check the pressure gauge to ensure the indicator
needle is at FULL.
3. Check that the safety device is intact.
4. Ensure that the fire extinguisher has been correctly
restowed and secured.
MEGAPHONE
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
2. Press the trigger located on the handhold. Listen for
an audible “popping" sound. This is the indication that
the megaphone is operative.
3. Ensure that the megaphone is correctly stowed and
secured.
RESUSCITATION MASK
1. Check that the location and quantity are correct.
M5L M5R
In/On CAS In/On CAS
1 Crew life vest 1 Crew life vest
1 Manual release tool 1 Flashlight
1 PBE 1 Manual release tool
1 PBE
On panel aft of CAS
1 Flashlight In a box, under last row of seats
1 Halon fire extinguisher 1 Halon fire extinguisher
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
In galley
1 Megaphone
1 ELT
M5L M5R
Under CAS Under CAS
1 Crew life vest 1 Crew life vest
1 PBE 1 PBE
1 Manual release tool 1 Manual release tool
On panel behind CAS On panel behind CAS
1 halon fire extinguisher 1 halon fire extinguisher
1 flashlight 1 flashlight
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
Into OHSC Into OHSC
5 Therapeutic oxygen units 5 Therapeutic oxygen units
In stowage inside galley Installed at trolley fit housing
1 Megaphone 1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
1 First aid kit
1 Emergency medical kit
1 AED
1 ELT
1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
1 First aid pouch
1 Supplementary emergency medical kit
1 Resuscitation mask
1 Face shield
FWD Center
In/On CAS
1 Crew life vest
1 Flashlight
1 Manual release tool
1 PBE
In stowage
1 Halon fire extinguisher
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
U1L U1R
In/On CAS facing aft In/On CAS facing aft
1 Crew life vest 1 Crew life vest
1 Manual release tool 1 Manual release tool
1 PBE 1 PBE
1 Fire fighting gloves
In/On CAS facing FWD
In/On CAS facing FWD 1 Crew life vest
1 Crew life vest 1 PBE
1 PBE
On door frame lining FWD of door U1R
On door frame lining FWD of door U1L 1 Flashlight
1 Flashlight
On door frame lining aft of door U1R
On door frame lining aft of door U1L 1 Flashlight
1 Flashlight
In stowage near CAS facing FWD
In stowage near CAS facing FWD 2 Baby survival cots
2 Demo kits 2 Demo kits
1 ELT 10 Extension safety belts
1 Halon fire extinguisher 1 Halon fire extinguisher
1 Megaphone 8 Infant life vests
2 Oxygen cylinders and masks 4 Spare life vests
2 Oxygen cylinders and masks
U2L U2R
In/On CAS In/On CAS
1 Crew life vest 1 Crew life vest
1 Flashlight 1 Flashlight
1 Manual release tool 1 Manual release tool
1 PBE 1 PBE
In stowage aft of door U2L In stowage aft of door U2R
2 Demo kits 2 Baby survival cots
1 Halon fire extinguisher 10 Extension safety belts
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask 2 Demo kits
1 Halon fire extinguisher
8 Infant life vests
4 Spare life vests
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
U3L U3R
In/On CAS In/On CAS
1 Crew life vest 1 Crew life vest
1 Fire fighting gloves 1 Manual release tool
1 Manual release tool 1 PBE
1 PBE
On door frame lining
On door frame lining 1 Flashlight
1 Flashlight
Inside sofa
Inside/Behind sofa 1 Halon fire extinguisher
1 Halon fire extinguisher 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
1 Megaphone
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
In galley
1 Crash axe
8 Infant life vests
4 Spare life vests
2 Baby survival cots
There are eight (8) crew stations on the upper deck of the A380, seven (7) of which are mandatory.
U2L U2R
In CAS In CAS
1 Manual release tool 1 Manual release tool
1 Crew life vest 1 Crew life vest
1 PBE 1 PBE
On side frame of CAS On side frame of CAS
1 Flashlight 1 Flashlight
In stowage of business class In stowage of business class
1 Halon fire extinguisher 1 Halon fire extinguisher
2 Demonstration kits 1 First aid kit
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask 8 Infant life vests
2 Baby survival cots 4 Adult life vests
1 Resuscitation mask 2 demonstration kits
1 Face shield 1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
10 Extension seat belts
1 Resuscitation mask
1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
U3L U3R
In CAS In CAS
1 Manual release tool 1 Manual release tool
1 Crew life vest 1 Crew life vest
1 PBE 1 PBE
1 Pair of protection gloves
In door frame lining
1 Resuscitation mask
1 Flashlight
1 Face shield
Into side bin behind sofa
In door frame lining
1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
1 Flashlight
Inside sofa
Into side bin behind sofa
1 Halon fire extinguisher
1 Megaphone
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
1 First aid kit
1 Supplementary raft accessories kit
1 First aid pouch
Inside sofa
1 Halon fire extinguisher
1 Oxygen cylinder and mask
In galley
1 Crash axe
8 Infant life vests
4 Adult life vests
2 baby survival cots
Before the departure of each flight, one crewmember must be assigned to inspect each of the crew rest
areas. This check should include the preflight inspection of all emergency equipment, to verify the
location, quantity and serviceability of all emergency equipment in the crew rest areas.
Before the departure of each flight, one crewmember must be assigned to inspect each of the crew rest
areas. This check should include the preflight inspection of all emergency equipment, to verify the
location, quantity and serviceability of all emergency equipment in the crew rest areas.
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Preparing a galley for a long flight can be divided into three main tasks:
1. The preflight check, that ensures all the galley equipment is fully operational
2. The preflight check, that ensures that the correct number of meals, and sufficient catering supplies
have been boarded for the flight
3. The preparation of the galley itself, and the preparation of pre– departure services.
A thorough galley preflight check and galley preparation are required to ensure the quality of in-flight
services.
This section concentrates on checking the various types of equipment located in the aircraft galleys,
and how to check that it is fully operational before departure. Inoperative equipment can adversely
affect the quality of the in-flight service.
The galley preflight check is completed by the cabin crewmember designated to work in the galley for
the duration of the flight. After the galley cabin crewmember has completed all assigned safety-related
preflight checks, they will then proceed to their galley and complete the galley preflight checks.
CAUTION Any defective or inoperative items, including tripped circuit breakers, fail and fault lights
that come on must be immediately reported to the Chief Purser. The Chief Purser must
then inform the flight crew and the maintenance personnel.
CAUTION Any defective or inoperative items, including tripped circuit breakers, fail and fault lights
that come on must be immediately reported to the Chief Purser. The Chief Purser must
then inform the flight crew and maintenance personnel.
STEP 1.
- Check that all circuit breakers are closed (there should be no tripped circuit breaker).
STEP 2.
- Check the galley electrical panel to verify that the red fault light indicators of the galley cooling
system are off.
STEP 3.
- Set the galley cooling selector to the correct position. This position will depend on the items
contained in the trolleys that are attached to the cooling system.
- The selector has optional two settings: BEVERAGE ONLY or MEALS AND BEVERAGES. Select
the appropriate setting.
STEP 1.
- Press the POWER ON pb to turn on the coffeemaker.
The cooffeemaker heater tanks will the start to heat.
STEP 2.
- Press the LOW WATER and LAMP TEST pb. All the lamps must come on.
Continued on the next page
STEP 1.
- Press the ON/OFF pb to start the espresso maker. The ON/OFF indicator light will come on.
When the espresso maker is warm, the yellow READY LED indicator will come on.
STEP 2.
- Place the coffee cup under the coffee pod holders and press the SMALL CUP pb or the LARGE
CUP pb to check that the espresso maker operates correctly.
- Empty the coffee cup then place it under the steam outlet.
- Press the STEAM pb to ensure that the steam function operates correctly. Press the STEAM pb
again to stop the process.
Note: For a detailed description, Refer to 03- 90 - 40 Espresso Maker
STEP 1.
- Make sure the door is correctly locked. The door knob must be in the LOCK position.
- Press the ON/OFF pb on the oven control module to switch the oven on.
The oven will perform a self-test. After the self-test is finished, the display shows the stand-by screen.
STEP 2.
- Press the + pb or - pb to select one of the standard programs.
- Press the SELECT pb to select a program.
- Press the START/PAUSE pb to start the program.
The START/PAUSE light will illuminate and the selected program will start.
- Check on the display that the program is started, then press the CLEAR/STOP pb to stop the
running program.
The oven will return to the stand-by mode.
- Check the display shows the stand-by screen.
Note: For a detailed description, Refer to 03 - 90 - 40 Steam Oven
WARNING Do not operate the oven if it is empty. Do not place metallic items inside the oven.
STEP 1.
- Open the door, check the oven for cleanliness and that there are no objects inside.
- Press the ON/OFF pb to turn the oven on
- Check that “.0” appears on the display.
STEP 2.
- Place something in the oven (for example a bread roll).
- Press the 1 pb
- Press the START pb to initiate the heating process.
After the heating process has completed a chime will sound and the oven will stop heating.
- Open the door, check that the inner light and fan work.
Note: for a detailed description, Refer to JAMCO Microwave Oven Description and Operation
STEP 1.
- Inspect the interior of the warming oven for cleanliness
- Check the interior of the warming oven to ensure that are no objects inside
- Close the door of the warming oven. Ensure that the door latch is fixed and that the secondary door
latch is in the locked position.
STEP 2.
- Press the ON pb to turn on the oven.
The warming oven takes approximately 15 minto heat up. After 15 minthe warming oven switches to
the HOLD mode. The HOLD mode indicator light will come on.
- Open the door of the warming oven to check that it is heated correctly.
CAUTION The warming oven will be hot. Always use an oven glove to check the oven for heat.
Never put your bare hand into a hot oven.
Continued on the next page
Note: For a detailed description, Refer to SELL Warming Oven Description and Operation
STEP 1.
- Press the ON/OFF pb to turn on the chiller. LEDs must flash in sequence and then in the opposite
sequence.
- Check that the display shows “INITIALIZING”.
Note: If the chiller does not start correctly check the associated LED on the circuit breaker panel in
the galley. Then notify the Chief Purser.
STEP 2.
The previous function selected (Freezer/Refrigerator/Wine Chiller) will appear on the display.
- Press the ON/OFF pb to start this function, or press the MODE pb to select another mode.
- Then press the ON/OFF pb to start the new function.
The selected function will then appear on the display, and the green ON LED indicator will come on.
Note: If “UNIT FAILED” appears on the display and the FAIL LED indicator comes on notify the Chief
Purser.
Note: If the internal temperature of the Chiller remains above the programmed temperature for a long
period of time, the target and current temperatures will appear on the display. In addition the
TEMP WARNING LED indicator will come on in yellow. Ensure the door is fully closed then
notify the Chief Purser.
Note: If the latch of the door is not in the locked position during the cooling process “DOOR NOT
LOCKED” will appear on the display. Secure the latch to the locked position.
Note: for a detailed description, Refer to BRITISH AEROSPACE Freezer Description and Operation
STEP 1.
- Check the trash compactor for any damage.
- Ensure that all the door latches, door handles and restraint latches operate correctly.
STEP 2.
- Press the ON pb. The ON LED indicator will come on.
CAUTION If the trash compactor shuts down automatically, the red FAIL LED indicator will come
on and the trash compactor is not available. In this case shut off the trash compactor
immediately and notify the Chief Purser.
Note: Check that the two short flaps are attached to the relevant vertical sides of the box to avoid
jamming during compaction.
Note: If the door is not fully closed the “ CHECK MIDDLE DOOR” or” CHECK FRONT DOOR”
messages will appear on the display.
The ”READY TO COMPACT” message will then appear on the display.
STEP 1.
- Check the overall condition of the trash compactor for any damage.
- Ensure that all the door latches, door handles and restraint latches operate correctly.
STEP 2.
- Open the main door, ensure that the middle door is locked ( tap the middle door with your foot)
- Install the trash box correctly, and ensure that the box grips are wrapped around the trash box.
- Close and latch the trash compactor main door.
STEP 3.
- Press the POWER ON pb, the message display will come on, this will indicate that the trash
compactor is ready to use.
- Ensure the trash compactor is securely stowed.
Note: For a detailed description, see chapter "Cabin Layout", section "Galleys", "Trash Compactor",
paragraph "Description".
STEP 1.
- Using the interphone call the upper deck to coordinate the trolley lift preflight check with a cabin
crewmember working on the upper deck.
STEP 2.
- The cabin crewmember working on the main deck will control the trolley lift using the operating
panel pushbuttons to test the following functions:
Continued on the next page
STEP 1.
- Check the general condition of all trolleys for cleanliness, dents, sharp edges, evidence of wear (for
example loose trim).
STEP 2.
Check the operation of the following:
- Trolley movement: The trolley should move freely. Test the cart movement, and check for the ease
of movement on and off the mushroom catch.
- Doors open and close correctly.
- Ensure that the door hold magnet, holds the trolley door fully open.
- Chilled air is freely circulating to all the trolleys attached to the galley cooling system.
- Correct braking action, verify that the trolley does not move when the brake is on.
- Latches Lock correctly.
STEP 3.
- Close and lock the trolley doors.
Continued on the next page
CAUTION All trolleys must be secured correctly when not in use, also during taxi, takeoff,
turbulences and landing.
The upper deck aft staircase barrier is composed of a double black and yellow strap that prevents
trolleys from falling on to the stairs.
CAUTION The barrier must be installed at all times when the trolleys are in use.
STEP 1.
- Ensure that the straps are correctly stowed in the retracted position.
Continued on the next page
STEP 2.
Install the barrier and check the overall condition of the barrier components.
- Unroll both straps by pulling the bar
- Attach the buckles to the hooks on the opposite wall.
- Check the overall condition of the straps, ensure that the straps are not frayed or damaged
- Return the barrier to the stowed retracted position
- Check that both straps unroll and retract normally.
To perform the Galley Cooling System / Supplementary Cooling System preflight check, two user
interfaces may be checked.
A - IN THE GALLEY: GALLEY COOLING SYSTEM PANEL
Galley Cooling System Panel Overview
- Check the galley electrical panel to ensure that there are no fault indications on the galley cooling
panel. The ACU ON indicator light must be on. If the ACU FAULT light indicator is on, make an
entry to the aircraft logbook. For a detailed description of the galley electrical panel preflight check,
Refer to Galley Electrical Panel Preflight Check
Continued on the next page
- On the FAP Cooling page, check that the system status is "active". Selecting the required deck,
verify that the cooling units temperatures are compliant with the temperature selected. In case of a
cooling system failure error messages will appear on the FAP. In this case, make an entry to the
aircraft logbook. For a detailed description of the ACU error messages on FAP page, Refer to FAP
pages - Error Messages
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
The cabin communication systems on board the aircraft are vital to the safe operation of a flight.
The operational check of the cabin interphone system and the Passenger Address (PA) system is
performed by using the handsets located at each cabin crew station.
GETTING STARTED
The Chief Purser will initiate the cabin interphone and PA system preflight check by making the
following announcement:
“Cabin crew at stations for cabin interphone and PA check”.
All cabin crewmembers should go to their respective stations and standby for the initial cabin
interphone preflight check announcement.
To ensure that the cabin interphone and the PA system operate correctly from every station, every
cabin crewmember should check in. To do this, pass the checks from left to right to ensure that the
cabin interphone and PA system is operative at all stations.
For example, the Chief Purser will start the check at M1L, by announcing:
“Cabin interphone check door M1L”. The next cabin crewmember to check in will be M1R, who will
announce: “Cabin interphone check or PA check door M1R”.
Note: Cabin crewmembers must listen carefully to the check in announcements in order to follow the
sequence and be prepared for their prompt. Cabin crewmembers must clearly state their
respective crew station.
The checks will be performed in the following order:
M1L→M1R
M2L→M2R
M3L→M3R
M4L→M4R
M5L→M5R
U3L→U3R
U2L→U2R
U1L→U1R
USL→USR(*)
The Upper Stairs cabin crewmember will be the last cabin crewmember to check in for both the cabin
interphone (cabin to cabin preflight check), and the PA preflight check.
* If this cabin crewmember is onboard.
When the cabin interphone preflight check has been completed, all cabin crewmembers must remain
at their stations and be prepared for the PA system preflight check.
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM PREFLIGHT CHECK
Chief Purser Cabin Crewmembers
Step 1. Step 1.
- Check that the Area Call Panel (ACP) and
To start the PA check:
Attendant Information Panel (AIP) are
- Press the PTT pb on the handset
displaying the correct signals.
- Announce: “PA Check M1L”
- Press the PTT pb on the handset.
- Check in by clearly announcing the crew
station over the PA. For example: “PA Check
M3R”
Step 2. Step 2.
- Reset Handset. - Reset the handset.
Note: If crewmembers do not reset or stow the
handset correctly after each
announcement, the PA will be blocked.
Other crewmembers will not be able to
use the PA system.
The random passenger call tests should be performed in each zone of every cabin to ensure that the
passenger call system operates correctly.
This should be completed by two cabin crew, one on each side of the cabin, one on the left hand side
and one on the right hand side. These two cabin crewmembers will randomly check the passenger call
system.
STEP 1.
- Press the CABIN CREW CALL pb on the passenger service unit (PSU). There will be a single Hi
chime over the loudspeakers in the immediate area.
STEP 2.
- Check that:
• The cabin crew call light on the PSU comes on
• The blue light on the corresponding Area Call Panel (ACP) comes on
• The corresponding Attendant Indication Panel (AIP) will display a message identifying the
location of the cabin crew call.
STEP 3.
- Ensure that all the CABIN CREW CALL pb have been reset.
Note: The cabin crew calls can be reset using CALL RESET function on the FAP.
The function of the emergency lighting system is to provide sufficient light in the cabin and outside the
aircraft to ensure that:
- Safe and rapid evacuation of the aircraft, in darkness, and in a smoke filled cabin is possible
- Light is available in the cabin when no aircraft power supply is available.
The emergency lighting can be controlled manually by:
- Setting the EMER EXIT LT sw on the cockpit overhead panel to ON
- Pressing the EMER ON pb on the FAP
The emergency lighting can also be controlled automatically, when the EMER EXIT LT sw on the
cockpit overhead is in the ARM position. This will enable the emergency lighting system to come on
automatically when normal or essential power is lost.
When there is no power available to the aircraft, the emergency lighting system is powered by an
independent battery from the aircraft's Emergency Power Supply Unit's (EPSU). This will provide
sufficient power to operate the emergency lighting system for 10 min.
In the cabin, these lights come on:
- The ceiling emergency lights
- The EXIT signs:
• EXIT locators in the aisles
• EXIT markers above the passengers doors
• Additional EXIT signs.
- Floor Path Marking System (FPMS) lights which can include photoluminescent lighting instead of
LEDs and also:
• Seat Mounted Floodlights, to provide lighting in the main aisles (if installed)
• Wall Mounted Floodlights, to provide lighting in areas in front of monuments
• Edge Mounted Floodlights, to provide lighting in the cross aisles and, in front of monuments (if
installed)
• Exit identifiers that provide lighting in the door area.
- The emergency spotlights
Note: The center LED of a spotlight is part of the general illumination. The four outer LEDs of the
emergency light system come on during this test.
- The emergency light LEDs in the Understep LED Light (ULLIS)
Note: Most of the LEDs in LED light strips of the Understep LED Lights (ULLIS) are part of the
general illumination. With this test, only the small number of the emergency light LEDs with
regular distances between the LEDs come on.
- All other emergency lights.
The exit signs, the auxiliary lights and all other emergency lights come on in
- The lavatories
- The flight crew rest compartment(s) (if installed)
- The lower deck facility stairhouse(s) (if installed)
- The lower deck faciilities (if installed)
- The cabin crew rest compartment(s) on the main and upper deck (if installed)
- All other crew and passenger compartments (if installed).
The exit marking and exit location signs come on automatically when:
• The landing gear is extended.
• The no smoking signs are switched ON.
• There is a loss of cabin pressure.
Inoperative emergency lighting may have an impact on the MMEL (ATA Chapter 33–51–00), and,
therefore may have operational restrictions and consequences.
The preflight check of the emergency lighting system may be carried out independently on each deck.
However, the preflight check must be coordinated between the main deck and the upper deck.
CAUTION Any
light
malfunct
ions
detecte
d by the
cabin
crew
should
be given
to the
Chief
Purser.
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Before the departure of each flight the Chief Purser and the Upper Deck Purser must check that all the
FAP's and all the Mini-FAP's screens are operative.
This is done by navigating through the principle pages:
• Cabin Status page
• Doors/Slides page
• Waste Water page
• Lights page
• Temperature page
• Smoke page
Thus, they must check the status of the different cabin systems using the Forward Attendant Panel
(FAP) and Mini-FAP.
If the FAP's and/or Mini-FAP screen are frozen, they must ask the flight crew to perform a CIDS reset
as per FCOM procedure.
Before the departure of each flight the Chief Purser must check the Flight Attendant panel (FAP) to
verify the status of the water and waste tanks. This is to ensure that:
• Sufficient water is available for each flight
• Sufficient space is available in the waste tanks, to accept the amount of waste from the lavatories
and galleys.
• The water system supplies potable water from the potable water tanks to the galleys, lavatories,
water heaters as well as any other additional equipment that requires water.
• The waste system moves the waste from the toilets and galleys to the holding tanks.
• The quantity indicating system displays the quantity of potable water and waste in the tanks. These
indications are displayed on the water and waste page on the FAP.
STEP 1.
- Select the Waste/Water hard key from the main menu. This will display the Water and Waste ALL
Page, that describes the arrangement of the lavatories for each deck.
STEP 2.
- Select the deck you want to consult by touching the deck on the touch screen. This screen will
display the water/waste status for the deck you have selected, for example the main deck.
STEP 3.
- On the upper left side of the page, the two waste tanks are displayed (one for the right side, and
one for the left side of the aircraft). The contents of the tanks are indicated in gray, and are
displayed as a percentage.
- Check that the waste tank is empty.
STEP 4.
The water quantity is clearly indicated on the FAP. The water content is indicated in blue. As the water
content is preselected, there will be a green arrow on the left hand side to indicate the percentage of
water required for the flight.
- Check that the contents indicated in blue are at the same level as the green arrow. This indicates
that the correct amount has been boarded.
Note: Any discrepancies or malfunctions (blue cards) must be reported to the flight crew and
maintenance personnel as soon as possible.
The water and waste quantities must be confirmed to the flight crew as correct before
departure.
The door and slide status should be checked on the FAP preflight check. This check should be
completed by the Chief Purser at the FAP at M1L.
STEP 1.
- Select the CABIN STATUS icon on the FAP, touch the CABIN STATUS icon.
- Select the DOORS/SLIDES icon.
STEP 2.
The FAP DOORS/SLIDES page must reflect the current door status, for example, if M1L and M2L are
open, the FAP will reflect this by showing a red rectangle outside the aircraft symbol.
- Check that the door and slide status is correct . The CAUT light must not be on.
Note: When the CAUT light is flashing with a message to enter the Doors/Slides page. Go to the
Doors/Slides pages to determine the origin of the caution message. Notify the flight crew and
maintenance immediately.
If the caution message is due to low slide bottle pressure on one of the doors
SLIDE NOT READY indicator on the DSIP of the related door will come on .
DOORS/SLIDES PAGE SYMBOLS AND INDICATORS
SYMBOL INDICATOR
Door open Red rectangle outside the aircraft symbol
Door closed with slide DISARMED Amber rectangle inside the aircraft symbol. SLIDE
DISARMED is written in amber text next to the
related door.
Door closed with slide ARMED Green rectangle inside the aircraft symbol. SLIDE
ARMED is written in amber text next to the related
door.
Slide Pressure The SLIDE PRESSURE is written in amber text
next to the related door.
STEP 1.
On the FAP application menu, select the connectivity key
STEP 2.
On the service overview page, the cabin crew must check that:
STEP 1.
On the FAP application menu, select the connectivity key
STEP 2.
On the service overview page, the cabin crew must check that:
- In the "On/Off" column, the "ON" indication are displayed (green indication)
- In the "System State" column, the "OK" indication are displayed (green icon)
- In the "Action" column:
- The "WLAN ON" key is activated (green indication)
- The "PAX sign on" key is activated (green indication)
- If required, the "Quiet Mode ON" key is deactivated (grey indication).
Note: In case of system malfunction (i.e. In the "System State" column, the "faulty" indication is
displayed associated with an amber icon) Refer to 06-210-40 How to Reset a Faulty Cabin
Connectivity Service
On ground, in the "Service Availability" column, the "NA" indication is displayed associated
with a grey icon.
STEP 1.
On the FAP application menu, select the connectivity key
STEP 2.
On the service overview page, the cabin crew must check that:
- The "ON" key (green indication) in the "On/Off" column is activated
- The "OK" indication (green indication) in the "SYSTEM STATE" column is displayed
- The "WLAN ON " key (green indication) in the "ACTION" column is activated.
Note: On ground, in the "service availability" column , the indicator is always on the NA status (Grey
indication).
● If the "ON" key is grey:
The cabin crew must press the "ON" key to enable the internet connectivity.
The "ON" key will become green.
● If the indicator, in the "SYSTEM STATE" column, is faulty (Amber indication) :
please Refer to 06-210-40 How to Reset a Faulty Cabin Connectivity Service
Note: If the reset is not successful (function is still faulty), the cabin crew should request the flight
crew to perform a complete reset of the system.
● If the "WLAN ON" key is grey:
The cabin crew must press the "WLAN ON" key to enable the WLAN function.
The "WLAN ON" key will become green.
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
The aim of the In-Flight Entertainment (IFE) system checklist is to ensure that all functions of the
system are fully operational before the departure of each flight. As the duration of the A380 flights may
be in excess of 15 h, the most important commercial facility for passenger comfort and enjoyment is
the IFE. The IFE system has many functions, such as:
• In-seat audio and video
• In-seat audio and video control
• Passenger Announcement (PA) system
• Passenger service system
• Passenger flight information system (moving map)
• In-seat power
• On board telephones.
The Cabin Management System (CMS) controls the IFE system. The IFE operator will interact with the
system using the interactive Cabin Management Terminal (iCMT). The iCMT screens are located in the
cabin workstation, and in each of the Remote Control Centers (RCC) on board the aircraft.
The IFE preflight check is accomplished by using a “Sweep Focused Checklist”. For the “Sweep
Focused Checklist cabin crewmembers are designated to a zone of the aircraft, to check the various
IFE functions in all seat rows in all cabins.
GETTING STARTED
To complete the IFE preflight check in the allocated time, it is highly recommended that, during the
preflight briefing, the Chief Purser assigns cabin crewmembers to check each zone.
The IFE preflight check takes place immediately after the safety–related preflight checklist. The Chief
Purser, who will be the IFE operator, should make a PA announcement to notify the cabin
crewmembers that the IFE checklist is about to begin. Each cabin crewmember should be equipped
with a set of headphones, and go to their respective zones.
As soon as the cabin crewmembers are in place and ready to begin the preflight check, the Chief
Purser should announce each type of function check required over the PA system.
Step 1.
- Select the safety demonstrations from the
VIDEO PA option in the main menu screen.
Select the announcement and the zones, then
select PLAY on the touch screen.
Step 1.
- Announce: “Safety Demo Check”.
- Sweep zone to check:
Note: The other entertainment services cannot be • Passenger screen display
activated while the Safety Demo is on. A • Cabin speakers
message will appear on the screen to • Overhead monitors
remind the IFE operator. - Confirm zone check complete.
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
Cabin crew seats are provided for the cabin crewmembers at each door. The location and distribution
of cabin crew seats is based on:
• Regulations
• Aircraft type
• Operators requirements
Cabin crew seats are required to be fully operational before the departure of each flight, and therefore
require a preflight check.
The cabin crew seat preflight check includes:
• A general visual inspection of the cabin crew seat condition and structure.
• Automatic seat pan return (the seat pan will fold up when not in use), to ensure that exit paths are
not obstructed in the event of an emergency.
• Restraint system: All cabin crew seats are equipped with a combined safety belt, and retractable
shoulder harness with a single action release rotary buckle (turning the buckle will release the
restraint system).
CAUTION Any cabin crew seat malfunction must be immediately reported to the Chief Purser so
that corrective action can be taken before the flight departure
The cabin crew seats preflight check should include an inspection of the following components to
ensure that the seats are fully operational:
SEAT UNIT
- Visually check the overall condition of the cabin crew seat:
• Condition of restraint system seat belt attachments. For example: Missing, frayed, damaged.
• Rotary buckle.
• Seat structure. For example: Sharp edges, loose headrests or seat cushions.
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
- Pull the shoulder harness out gently from the crew seat. The shoulder harness must move smoothly
from the housing.
- Pull down sharply on the shoulder harness, this action must cause the shoulder harness to lock.
- Attach the restraint system:
Insert the lap strap and shoulder harness attachments into the opening located on sides of the
rotary buckle: A “clicking” noise will confirm that they are correctly inserted, and locked.
Continued on the next page
CAUTION This part of the preflight check must be completed while the cabin crewmember is
seated. This will enable the cabin crewmember to adjust the restraint system to their
own requirements and prepare their crew seat for takeoff.
The preflight check of the aircraft lavatories consists of a safety–related check and an operational
equipment check of the following equipments.
Note: Any equipment that does not function correctly must be reported to the Chief Purser. The Chief
Purser must inform the flight crew and the maintenance personnel.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
13-10 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
13-20 Abbreviations
Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM) Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are those
recommended by Airbus.
Should an operator wish to incorporate their own customized procedure, the operator can do so by
using dedicated tools.
The SOPs are the normal cabin crew operating procedures for standard aircraft operations. The SOPs
are continuously updated and revised. Revisions take into account the feedback received from all
operators, in addition to the results of continuous monitoring of the aircraft's in-service life.
The CCOM procedures that are marked "Airworthiness Related" provide procedures and
limitations that are mandatory, in order to meet cabin safety airworthiness requirements.
These procedures are validated by the Airbus Office of Airworthiness. Modifications to these
procedures must be reviewed by the Operator's National Aviation Authorities for acceptance.
The Airworthiness Related Procedures are indicated by "Airworthiness Related" on the
affected procedure page header. An entire procedure may be airworthiness related, or only part
of a procedure may be airworthiness related.
In the case that only on a certain part of a procedure is airworthiness related, this is indicated
by (AR) written in green beside the impacted part of the procedure.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ABBREVIATIONS
Applicable to: ALL
ABBREVIATIONS
DESIGNATION ABBREVIATION
Captain CAPT
Chief Purser CHIEF PURS
Upper Deck Purser U PURS
Cabin Crewmember CC
All Cabin Crewmember ALL CC
Upper Stairs Cabin Crewmember US CC
Cabin Crewmember responsible for an exit PRIM CC
FWD Facing Cabin Crewmember FWD CC
AFT Facing Cabin Crewmember AFT CC
Inboard INBD
Outboard OUTBD
Able Bodied Passenger ABP
Forward FWD
Middle MID
AFT AFT
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
A safe flight starts with good planning, and good planning for a flight starts with briefings. Briefings are
a very important part of any flight preparation.
Different briefings take place before the flight:
The Purser to cabin crew preflight briefing The flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing
An effective briefing is a valuable tool for cabin crew and flight crew to help manage errors and achieve
a successful outcome.
OBJECTIVES OF CREW BRIEFINGS
The briefing should provide a clear picture of the flight and build a common understanding amongst the
crew of the expectations of the flight.
A successful briefing should be short, interesting and detailed, and should include teamwork,
communication, coordination, planning and anticipating possible events:
Many cabin crew and flight crew are faced with the challenge of
constantly working with different colleagues, often with
colleagues that they have never met or worked with before.
However, they are expected to work in very close proximity for
long periods of time. In this case, it is important to quickly
establish teamwork and synergy.
Good team performance depends on synergy, which means
working together. Synergy is a vital ingredient to effective
teamwork.
The conditions for synergy are:
- A shared goal
TEAM BUILDING AND TEAMWORK - A clear crew structure
- Clear task allocation
- Team spirit
- Good Leadership.
The structure of the cabin crew ensures that each cabin crew
member has a specific role and specific duties related to that
role. The application of good Crew Resource Management
(CRM) within a crew creates the right balance for the crew to
work as an effective team.
For a team to be successful, they must be able to talk to each
other, share information, listen to each other and be assertive,
when necessary.
A good briefing must encourage open, interactive
ENCOURAGE OPEN communication between all crewmembers, emphasizing the
COMMUNICATION importance of questions, input from crewmembers, and
exchanging information.
The briefing should be relevant and appropriate to the flight. It should highlight the specific details of
the flight. A briefing should be prepared for each individual flight otherwise it may become routine and
repetitive.
The Purser should:
- Plan and prepare the briefing
- Select the relevant information before the briefing.
B for Brief:
A briefing should be as the word suggests, “brief”. The Purser should keep the briefing short to ensure
that the attention of all cabin crew is focused on the most important points.
C for Clear and Concise:
The briefing must be understood by all cabin crew. It should be interactive, and encourage cabin crew
to share information and ask questions. The Purser should adopt good communication methods to
encourage feedback.
SETTING THE TONE FOR EFFECTIVE TEAMWORK
The briefing is the starting point for a high performance team. The Purser must create an environment
where open, interactive communication is encouraged. The Purser can use some practical
communication skills to create such an environment, using positive language and appropriate body
language. For example, the use of the word “we” encourages all cabin crew to participate and
contribute to the flight.
The purser should:
• Use professional and friendly language
• Listen with patience and not interrupt others
• Ask the cabin crew if they have any questions or comments
• Encourage the cabin crew to exchange information and ideas at all times
• Ensure all cabin crew are involved in the briefing
• Answer questions directly
• Use eye contact, as appropriate.
THE PURSER TO CABIN CREW PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
As previously mentioned the briefing should focus on the most important points relevant to the flight.
The cabin crew briefing should cover the following points:
• Introductions: The preflight briefing must always start with professional, respectful introductions, It
is important that the Purser invites the cabin crew to introduce themselves, particularly as they may
not already know each other.
• Flight details: For example, the flight number, destination(s), departure time, estimated time of
arrival, aircraft registration.
Continued on the next page
• Special flight information: For example, passenger loads, special requirements for passengers,
any identified maintenance issues that may affect the flight.
• Workload distribution, task sharing and responsibilities: Clearly define the duties and
responsibilities for each member of the cabin crew, to ensure that they are all aware of their own,
and each others, role. The Purser should take into account the rank and operating experience of
the cabin crew when distributing the tasks. The Purser should ask safety related questions to
ensure that each cabin crew understands their position on board the aircraft.
• Crew Communication and Coordination: Encourage the cabin crew to immediately report and
communicate any unusual, abnormal or emergency situation to the Captain and the Purser. The
Purser should then ensure that each crew member has a clear picture of the situation.
• Review of the operating procedures: To ensure that the cabin crew understand the importance of
performing their duties in accordance with the Operator’s Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
and emergency procedures. When the procedures are understood and adhered to, they provide a
common ground and understanding for the entire crew, and ensure crew coordination at all times.
• Questions: It is important to provide the cabin crew with the opportunity to ask questions, in order
to clarify that the entire cabin crew has understood the items discussed during the briefing. Many
Operators have cabin crew based in different locations throughout the world. The Purser should
take into account such cultural aspects and remember that not all crewmembers may have the
same understanding.
Note: Cabin crew must be encouraged to report to the Purser, or the flight crew, anything that they
feel may compromise the safety of the flight.
THE FLIGHT CREW TO CABIN CREW PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
Although the work of the flight crew and cabin crew is very different in nature, the flight crew and the
cabin crew work as one crew, with a common goal, the safe completion of the flight.
The sharing of information from the cockpit to the cabin, and from the cabin to the cockpit is essential
to the safety of the flight.
The most important Standard Operating Procedure an Operator can adopt to ensure flight crew and
cabin crew communication and coordination is a flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing. The
flight crew to cabin crew briefing should encourage open two-way communication, teamwork and
coordination.
The pre-flight briefing should include the following topics:
• Introductions: The flight crew to cabin crew preflight briefing must always start with professional,
respectful introductions,
• The en-route weather: To determine if areas of turbulence are anticipated during the flight and to
manage and secure the cabin in a timely manner.
• The estimated flight time: The flight time may be shorter or longer than expected. This information
will help the Purser with time management to organize cabin activities.
Continued on the next page
CREW COMMUNICATION
Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Effective communication between cabin crew and flight crew is essential. It is a key element in setting
the tone for the management of the flight. Communication enables cabin crew to contribute to the
decision-making process and to enhance situational awareness in normal and abnormal situations.
Communication is essential for the safe operation of the aircraft as many accident analyses have
indicated that communicating information between the cabin and the cockpit is vital to flight safety.
STATISTICAL DATA - BACKGROUND INFORMATION
STATISTICAL DATA
A survey of pilot safety representatives and cabin crew stated that:
• 37 % of the Cabin Crew
• 60 % of the pilots
Thought that communication between flight and cabin crew was adequate.
CREW RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (CRM)
CRM can be defined as the effective use of all available resources (e.g. all crew, aircraft systems
and supporting facilities), to achieve safe and efficient operations (EU-OPS and ICAO)
Initially, CRM was for flight crew only. Today, it is a mandatory part of all cabin crew training in
EASA and FAA operating regions and many countries throughout the world.
It helps crew to be:
• Objective
• Effective
CRM reviews topics such as:
• Situational awareness
• Effective communication
• Planning and decision-making
• Stress awareness
• Human factors
COMPANY CULTURE
The company should encourage good communication between the flight crew and the cabin crew
and provide all employees with:
• The marketing policy (e.g. service-orientation)
Continued on the next page
REPORTING
Reporting is another means of communication that enables the cabin crew to inform the flight crew,
safety management or maintenance crew when an unusual event occurs. It is a good way to reduce
or eliminate the risk of incidents/accidents or deviations to procedures.
The cabin crew should function as an extension of the flight crew, to ensure safety in the cabin and
should never hesitate to report to the flight crew when they think that the safety of the cabin is
threatened.
They should raise their situational awareness during operations such as:
DE/ANTI-ICING OPERATIONS:
- A very light coating of snow or ice on the wings can lead a dramatic outcome.
FUELING/DEFUELING:
- Threat of fuel leaks, fire
Passengers can also be a great source of information, and may sometimes be the first to bring
information to cabin crew regarding:
• The cabin (noise, fumes, smoke, fire, loose objects…)
• Other passengers behavior
• Aircraft condition (window seals, wings, fuselage…)
Any event or incident should also be reported if it is believed that:
• The safety of the operation can be improved
• SOPs are not efficient enough
• Some events/incidents should be reviewed during training in order to reduce their
occurrences.
The report of an event/incident can be delivered in different ways:
AURAL:
- The content of the report must be concise, as precise as possible with a clear terminology to
report problems and the actions taken (e.g. oven fire)
WRITTEN:
- The reporting process in the logbook should be as simple as possible and well documented,
including details as to what, where and when (e.g. oxygen used during the flight and needs
to be replaced)
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS AFFECTING CREW COMMUNICATION
Several factors can deteriorate communication between crew:
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
FLIGHT PHASES
Applicable to: ALL
FLIGHT PHASES
The following flight phases are applicable to cabin operations:
Flight Phases
1. Boarding: Begins when the first passenger enters the aircraft, and ends when all the aircraft doors
have been closed.
2. Pushback: Begins when the jetway is removed, and ends when the aircraft is pushed back.
3. Taxi before Takeoff : Begins with the pushback from the gate, and ends when the aircraft begins
the takeoff roll.
4. Takeoff and Initial Climb: Begins when the takeoff roll starts, (all people onboard are seated with
their seat belts fastened) and ends when the cabin crew are allowed to leave their seats.
5. Final Climb: Begins when the cabin crew leave their seats, and ends when seat belt signs are
switched off, after climb.
6. Cruise: Begins when the seat belt signs are switched off and ends when the seat belt signs are
switched on before descent.
7. Top of Descent: Begins when the aircraft starts to descend, and ends before the approach.
8. Approach: Begins at 10 000 ft (approximately 10 minutes before touchdown), and ends with the
cabin ready signal to the flight crew.
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
9. Final Approach and Landing: Begins when the cabin crew are required to take their seats and to
end when the aircraft leaves the active runway.
10.Taxi after Landing: Begins when the aircraft leaves the active runway, and ends when the seat
belts signs are switched off after the final parking position is reached and the aircraft is at a
complete stop.
11.Disembarkation: Begins when the jetway is positioned, and ends when the last passenger has left
the aircraft
12.After Passenger Disembarkation: Begins when all passengers have disembarked, and ends
either at the next boarding, or when the cabin crew leaves the aircraft.
Note: The critical phases of flight are 3, 4, 9 and 10: Taxi before Takeoff, Takeoff and Initial climb,
Final Approach and Landing, Taxi after Landing.
STERILE COCKPIT
Applicable to: ALL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note: All CAS marked in RED must be occupied during take off and landing.
TABLE OF CAS TO BE OCCUPIED IN THE UD
All cabin attendant seats (CAS) to be occupied during take-off and landing are indicated by the exact
position (e.g. inboard, if there are two CAS installed side by side) in the row called "CAS". The viewing
direction is given in this row additionally (e.g. facing "aft"). The "AREA" row describes where these
CAS are located, which is normally a door area. The cabin attendants of each area are responsible to
observe the related "ZONE" of the cabin layout.
ZONE 1 2 3
AREA U1L U1R U1L U1R U2L U2R U3L U3R
CAS forward forward aft aft aft aft forward forward
Note: All CAS to be occupied by the cabin crew are marked with a placard: "SEAT MUST BE
OCCUPIED DURING TAKE OFF AND LANDING".
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE UD L2
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Example: In ZONE 1 only 70 of the 72 installed passenger seats (97,2%) are visible from the CAS at
U1L / U1R Fwd position. In total 146 of the 178 installed passenger seats of the UD are visible (rating =
82%).
ZONE 1 2 3
AREA U1L U1R U1L U1R U2L U2R U3L U3R
CAS forward forward aft aft aft aft forward forward
Note: All CAS to be occupied by the cabin crew are marked with a placard: "SEAT MUST BE
OCCUPIED DURING TAKE OFF AND LANDING".
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE UD L2
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The required rating of the direct visibility per zone must exceed 50%, and must be greater than 80% on
each deck.
Example: In ZONE 1 all of the 14 installed passenger seats (100%) are visible from the CAS at U1L /
U1R Fwd position, whereas only 44 of the 58 passenger seats (75%) are visible in ZONE 2 from the
CAS at U1L / U1R Aft position. In total 72 of the 90 installed passenger seats of the UD are visible
(rating = 80%).
Note: All CAS marked in RED must be occupied during take off and landing.
TABLE OF CAS TO BE OCCUPIED IN THE MD
All Cabin Attendant Seats (CAS) to be occupied during take-off and landing are indicated by the exact
position (e.g. inboard, if there are two CAS installed side by side) in the row called "CAS". The viewing
direction is given in this row additionally (e.g. facing "aft"). The "AREA" row describes where these
CAS are located, which is normally a door area. The cabin attendants of each area are responsible to
observe the related "ZONE" of the cabin layout.
ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1R M2L M2R M3L M4L M4R
CAS aft aft aft inboard aft inboard aft aft aft
outboard outboard outboard
Note: All CAS to be occupied by the cabin crew are marked with a placard: "SEAT MUST BE
OCCUPIED DURING TAKE OFF AND LANDING".
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note: All CAS marked in RED must be occupied during take off and landing.
TABLE OF CAS TO BE OCCUPIED IN THE MD
All Cabin Attendant Seats (CAS) to be occupied during take-off and landing are indicated by the exact
position (e.g. inboard, if there are two CAS installed side by side) in the row called "CAS". The viewing
direction is given in this row additionally (e.g. facing "aft"). The "AREA" row describes where these
CAS are located, which is normally a door area. The cabin attendants of each area are responsible to
observe the related "ZONE" of the cabin layout.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1R M2L M2R M3L M4L M4R
CAS aft aft aft inboard aft inboard aft aft aft
outboard outboard outboard
Note: All CAS to be occupied by the cabin crew are marked with a placard: "SEAT MUST BE
OCCUPIED DURING TAKE OFF AND LANDING".
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE MD L2
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1R M2L M2R M3L M3R M4L M4R
CAS aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft
inboard inboard inboard outboard outboard
Note: All CAS to be occupied by the cabin crew are marked with a placard: "SEAT MUST BE
OCCUPIED DURING TAKE OFF AND LANDING".
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE MD
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Example: In ZONE 5 all of the 88 installed passenger seats (100%) are visible from the CAS at M1L /
M1R Aft position, whereas only 72 of the 135 passenger seats (53%) are visible in ZONE 6 from the
CAS at M2L / M2R Aft inboard position. In total 366 of the 429 installed passenger seats of the MD are
visible (rating = 85%). The number might exceed a higher number than the total seats. This theoretical
number is caused by the fact, that some seats can be seen from two different ZONES.
ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1C M1R M2L M2R M3L M3 M4L M4R
R
CAS aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft
inboard inboard outboard outboard
Note: All CAS to be occupied by the cabin crew are marked with a placard: "SEAT MUST BE
OCCUPIED DURING TAKE OFF AND LANDING".
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ZONE 5 6 7 8
AREA M1L M1C M1R M2L M2R M3L M3R M4L M4R M5L M5R
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ZONE 5 6 7 8
CAS aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft aft
inboar inboar outboa outboa outboa outboa
d d rd rd rd rd
Note: All CAS to be occupied by the cabin crew are marked with a placard: "SEAT MUST BE
OCCUPIED DURING TAKE OFF AND LANDING".
RATING OF DIRECT VIEW SEATS PER ZONE IN THE MD L2
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
Applicable to: ALL
PREFLIGHT BRIEFING
The Preflight Briefing is the starting Block for a high-performance crew. The aim of the briefing is to
organize the crew activities, to ensure that the workload is evenly distributed amongst the crew.
WHY - To highlight:
• Safety and security standards
• Cabin crew performance expectations
• The chain of command
- To encourage:
• A high level of safety
• Communication / Crew Resource Management (CRM)
• Teamwork
• Crew Coordination
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
HOW it must be - The Pursers must prepare the safety briefing in advance, the briefing should
done be relevant, and appropriate to the flight.
- The Pursers must welcome the crew
- All cabin crewmembers should be able to see and hear the Pursers
- The Pursers should speak clearly
- It is important that every cabin crewmember knows their allocated work
position, and their safety responsibilities.
- The briefing should be understood by all the cabin crewmembers.
- Give the cabin crewmembers the opportunity to ask question
- The Pursers must respect time constraints
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
WARNING The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is the first indication of residual cabin
pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual warning, and starts to lift the door
control handle, a second aural warning will come on. In this case, fully lower the
door control handle to the closed position.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR, there is a risk that the cabin door will
open violently due to the cabin not being fully depressurized.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
WARNING The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is the first indication of residual cabin
pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual warning, and starts to lift the door
control handle, a second aural warning will come on. In this case, fully lower the
door control handle to the closed position.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR, there is a risk that the cabin door will
open violently due to the cabin not being fully depressurized.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
WARNING The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is the first indication of residual cabin
pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual warning, and starts to lift the door
control handle, a second aural warning will come on. In this case, fully lower the
door control handle to the closed position.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR, there is a risk that the cabin door will
open violently due to the cabin not being fully depressurized.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
WARNING The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is the first indication of residual cabin
pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual warning, and starts to lift the door
control handle, a second aural warning will come on. In this case, fully lower the
door control handle to the closed position.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR, there is a risk that the cabin door will
open violently due to the cabin not being fully depressurized.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
WARNING The red CABIN PRESSURE visual warning is the first indication of residual cabin
pressure.
If the cabin crew fails to notice the visual warning, and starts to lift the door
control handle, a second aural warning will come on. In this case, fully lower the
door control handle to the closed position.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN THE DOOR, there is a risk that the cabin door will
open violently due to the cabin not being fully depressurized.
FLAP..................................................................................................................................PUSH IN
DOOR CONTROL HANDLE...................................................................GRASP AND LIFT FULLY
The slide is automatically disarmed, when the doors are opened from the outside.
DOOR.............................................................................................................................PULL OUT
DOOR.................................................................................................................PUSH FORWARD
Do not use the door control handle to move the door.
GUST LOCK lever ............................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PRE-PASSENGER BOARDING
CHIEF PURSER PURSERS CABIN CREWMEMBERS
- Pre-flight check of emergency equipment.
- Perform security checks, if required.
- Report to Captain: Emergency - Report to Chief Purser: - Report to Pursers: Emergency
equipment discrepancies Emergency equipment equipment discrepancies
found during the pre-flight discrepancies found during the found during the pre-flight
checks. pre-flight checks. checks.
End of Pre- Passenger Boarding
BOARDING
CHIEF PURSER PURSERS CABIN CREWMEMBERS
- Go to assigned boarding station
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
BOARDING
- Brief passengers - Assist unaccompanied
minors, handicapped persons,
families.
- Monitor the amount of
baggage and ensure correct
stowage (overhead bins,
under seats)
- Check that exit and paths are
clear of obstructions
- Check that aisles and
cross-aisles are clear of
obstructions
- Distribute extension and/or
baby seat belts, if necessary
- Manage the passenger flow
(cabin and stairs)
- Ensure that passengers
comply with "No Smoking"
regulations, as applicable.
- Ensure that passenger
seating complies with seating
regulations, as applicable.
- Check that Able-Bodied
Passengers (ABPs) that are
seated at exits.
- Report to Captain: Any - Report to Chief Purser: Any - Report to Pursers: Any
unusual or abnormal situations unusual or abnormal situations unusual or abnormal
situations
End of BOARDING
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
BEFORE PUSHBACK
CHIEF PURSER PURSERS CABIN CREWMEMBERS
- Go to assigned door
- Perform the Door Arming Procedure, and cross check the opposite door
- Acknowledge that door checks - Report to Chief Purser: Confirm that doors are armed and
have been received crosschecked
- Check FAP door page
Check that:
- Passengers are seated with
seat belts fastened
- Stowage of passengers and
crew baggage complies with
regulations
- Lavatories are vacant and
secured
- Social areas are vacant and
secured
- Crew rest areas are vacant
doors are locked
- Galleys are secured, all
catering items are correctly
stowed and latched
- Passengers do not use the
forward and rear stairs
- Exits and escape paths are
clear of obstructions
- Cabin curtains are open and
secured
- Report to Captain: Confirm - Report to Chief Purser: - Report to Pursers: Confirm
passengers count Confirm passengers count passengers count
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
FINAL CLIMB
CHIEF PURSER PURSERS CABIN CREWMEMBERS
- Adjust cabin lighting - Check lavatories
- Close cabin curtains
- Report to Chief Purser - Report to Pursers
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CRUISE
CHIEF PURSER PURSERS CABIN CREWMEMBERS
- Chief Purser may decide, in - Regularly update the Chief - Frequently monitor lavatories,
the absence of instructions Purser galleys and cabin including
from the flight crew, to - Check regularly theFAP stairs, lifts, social areas (at
discontinue non-safety related least every 15 minutes)
tasks during turbulence - Check that the fire detection
- Check regularly FAP systems have not been
disabled or tampered with
- Regularly report to Purser
- Ensure passenger and crew
compliance with all lighted
signs, placards and
crewmembers instructions
- Ensure that passengers use
only permitted electronic
devices
- Maintain communication with - Maintain communication with - Maintain communication with
Flight Crew, Pursers and cabin Chief Purser Pursers
crewmembers - Enter cabin maintenance items - Inform purser of cabin
- Enter cabin maintenance items or any emergency equipment maintenance items or use of
and any emergency equipment use into the cabin logbook. any emergency equipment that
use into the cabin logbook. should be entered in the cabin
logbook
- Organize crew rest : Hand over - Take over the responsibilities
of responsibility to Purser. of the Chief Purser, while the
Complete the "Handover Chief Purser is on his/her crew
sheet" rest break.
Report to flight crew: Any
unusual or abnormal situations
- Report to Flight crew: Any - Report to Chief Purser: Any - Report to Pursers: Any
unusual or abnormal situations unusual or abnormal situations unusual or abnormal situations
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
TOP OF DESCENT
CHIEF PURSER PURSERS CABIN CREWMEMBERS
- Make preliminary - Open cabin curtains
announcement to start Check that:
securing the cabin - Passengers are seated, with
seat belt fastened
- Stowage of passengers and
crew baggage complies with
regulations
- Social areas are vacant and
secured
- Crew rests areas are vacant.
Crew rest doors are closed
and locked
- Galleys are secured, and all
catering items correctly stowed
- Any equipment items to are
stowed as required
- PED equipment is shut off
- Passengers do not use forward
and rear stairs
- Exit and escape paths are
clear of obstructions
- Aisles and cross-aisles are
clear of obstructions
- Complete and close the cabin - Report to Chief Purser: Any - Report to Pursers: Any cabin
Logbook. cabin maintenance items and maintenance items and use of
Note: All the reported items use of any emergency any emergency equipment.
should be validated in equipment.
the logbook at the top
of descent. However,
additional items can
be added at any time
before the closure of
the flight.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
TOP OF DESCENT
- Ask for any special ground
assistance
- Request all updated arrival
information
APPROACH
CHIEF PURSER PURSER CABIN CREWMEMBERS
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
APPROACH
When the Fasten Seat Belt signs - Ensure cabin crew secure the When the Fasten Seat Belt signs
come on: cabin for landing. come on, ensure that:
- Perform the Cabin Preparation - Passengers are seated, with
for Landing announcement. seat belts fastened
- Stowage of passenger and
crew complies with
regulations
- Ensure passenger and crew
compliance with all lighted
signs, placards and
crewmember instructions
- Tray tables are in the upright
and locked position, cup
holders are stowed
- Seat backs are in the upright
position, armrests and
foot-rests are correctly
stowed.
- Lavatories are vacant and
secured
- Social areas are vacant and
secured
- Crew rests areas are
unoccupied. Crew rest doors
are locked and closed
- Galleys are secured, and all
catering items are correctly
stowed
- TV monitors and In-Flight
Entertainment (IFE)
equipment are stowed
- Passengers comply with
Portable Electronic Devices
(PED) restrictions
- Any equipment, items are
stowed, as required
- Exit and escape paths are
clear of obstructions
- Aisles and cross-aisles are
clear of obstructions
- Passengers
Continued ondothe
not next
use page
forward and rear stairs
UAE A380 13-70 P 10/12
CCOM 06-Oct-16
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP)
CABIN CREW DUTIES
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
APPROACH
- Report to the Flight crew - Report to Chief Purser "Cabin - Report to Purser "Cabin
"Cabin ready for landing". ready for landing" ready for landing"
Press the CABIN READY FAP Take designated crew seat and Take designated crew seat
pushbutton, if installed secure harness for landing. and secure harness for
landing.
- Adjust the cabin lighting
- Take designated crew seat and
secure harness for landing.
- Perform silent review
CAUTION The cabin crew must remain seated (except to perform a safety related duty) until:
- The aircraft arrives on to the stand
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
DISEMBARKATION
CHIEF PURSER PURSERS CABIN CREWMEMBERS
- Go to disembarking station
- Control the access to stairs
- Manage the flow of
passengers (cabin and stairs)
- Ensure that passengers
comply with "NO SMOKING"
regulations, as applicable
- Disembarkation of disabled
passengers.
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this section is provide operators with recommendations and guidance material for the
use of the A380 cabin stairs between the main deck and the upper. These recommendations provide
guidance for the use of the cabin stairs in normal and abnormal operations.
Note: Deviations from these recommendations may arise from individual airline policy and therefore
must be addressed by the operator to their National Aviation Regulatory Authority.
In the following sections the use of the forward and rear stairs are treated according to the phase of
flight.
BOARDING
Applicable to: ALL
This phase of flight begins when the first passenger enters the aircraft and ends when the aircraft
doors have been closed.
Use of the Forward Stairs
In the case that the aircraft boarding takes place using the main deck only, passengers seated on the
upper deck should use the forward stairs to reach their seats.
To avoid queuing on or in front of the stairs it is recommended that operators use procedures, such as:
- Boarding by zone or seat row (boarding the rear of the cabin first)
- Cabin crew to manage the flow of passengers on and around the stairs
The cabin crewmembers should use the forward stairs during this phase only to assist, guide and
support passengers to climb the stairs. If a passenger requires further help (once they are on the
stairs), the passenger should be directed to another cabin crewmember at the top of the stairs. This is
to:
- Keep cabin crewmember movement to a minimum during the boarding process
- Avoid cross flows on the stairs, which may increase the boarding time
- Avoid a reduction of the number cabin crewmembers on each deck.
When both decks are used for boarding the use of the stairs may be restricted.
To ensure an efficient boarding process, the operator should establish procedures to ensure that:
- All passengers seated on the main deck use the main deck jetway(s)
- All passengers seated on the upper deck, use the upper deck jetway(s)
Use of the Rear Stairs
The rear stairs may be used for passenger boarding.
This phase begins when the aircraft is pushed back from the gate and ends when the aircraft begins
the takeoff roll.
- Passengers must not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase
- Cabin crewmembers should not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase except to perform
safety related duties.
This phase begins when the aircraft begins the takeoff roll (all people on board are seated with their
seat belts fastened) and ends when the cabin crewmembers are allowed to leave their seats.
- Passengers must not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase
- Cabin crewmembers must not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase
CLIMB
Applicable to: ALL
This phase of flight begins when the cabin crewmembers are allowed to leave their seats and ends
when the seat belt signs are switched off.
- The forward stairs and the rear stairs must not be used by passengers
- The forward stairs and the rear stairs may be used by cabin crewmembers, unless prohibited by the
flight crew.
Note: The cabin crewmembers may be allowed to leave their crew seats before the Fasten Seat Belt
signs are switched off for passengers, for example, to prepare for the in-flight service. Both the
aisles and the stairs, provide an adequate level of safety and the cabin crewmembers may be
allowed to use the stairs during this phase of flight.
The final decision on this issue and the exact time when the cabin crew is allowed to leave
their seats, is subject to the operator's policy in accordance with the National Aviation
Regulatory Authority.
CRUISE
Applicable to: ALL
CRUISE
This phase begins when the Fasten Seat Belt signs are switched off and ends when the Fasten Seat
Belt signs are switched on before descent.
Cabin crewmembers should monitor the stairs to ensure that passengers are not sitting or staying on
the stairs.
CAUTION At any one time the number of passengers on the stairs must not exceed the number of
oxygen masks available.
Note: The forward and rear stairs must not be used for transporting meals, drinks etc.. from one deck
to another during the flight. For this purpose the trolley lifts, which are standard equipment
onboard the A380, must be used.
Use of the Forward Stairs
- Passengers and cabin crewmember's may use the forward stairs during this phase
Note: The forward stairs must not be used for transporting meals, drinks etc.. from one deck to
another during the flight. For this purpose the trolley lifts, which are standard equipment
onboard the A380, must be used.
Cabin crewmembers should monitor the stairs to ensure that passengers are not sitting or staying on
the stairs.
Use of the Rear Stairs
- Passengers and cabin crewmembers may use the rear stairs during this phase.
Note: The rear stairs is located in the direct vicinity of the rear upper galley. Passengers will have to
walk through the galley when using the rear stairs. It is common practice that passenger use of
the galley areas is not prohibited, however, it should not be encouraged.
USE OF THE FORWARD AND REAR STAIRS DURING TURBULENCE
When an encounter with turbulence is expected, the Fasten Seat Belt signs will be switched on, a PA
announcement will be made requesting all passengers to return to their seats immediately and to
fasten their seat belts.
Note: Passengers and cabin crew may only use the stairs to return to their allocated seats,
depending on the severity of the turbulence.
INITIAL DESCENT
Applicable to: ALL
This phase begins when the Fasten Seat Belt signs are switched on before descent and ends when the
cabin crewmember's are required to take their seats.
- Both stairs must not be used by passengers during initial descent
- Both stairs may be used by cabin crewmembers
Note: The cabin crewmembers will take their seats when required. This may be after the Fasten Seat
belt signs are switched on for passengers. Both the aisles and the stairs provide an adequate
level of safety, the cabin crewmembers may use the stairs during this phase.
The final decision on this issue and the exact time when the cabin crewmembers are required
to take their seats, is subject to the operator's policy in accordance with the operators National
Aviation Regulatory Authorities.
This phase begins when the cabin crewmembers are required to take their seats and ends when the
aircraft leaves the active runway.
- Passengers must not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase
- Cabin crewmembers should not use the forward or rear stairs
This phase begins when the aircraft leaves the active runway and ends when the Fasten seat belts
signs are switched off after the final parking position is reached.
- Cabin crewmembers should not use the forward and rear stairs during this phase.
- Passengers must not use the forward or rear stairs during this phase.
CAUTION Cabin crew must ensure that all passengers remain seated with their seat belts securely
fastened until:
- The aircraft has reached the final parking position and the Fasten Seat Belt signs are
switched off.
DISEMBARKATION
Applicable to: ALL
This phase begins when the when the Fasten Seat Belt signs are switched off after the final parking
position is reached and ends when the last passenger has left the aircraft.
USE OF THE FORWARD STAIRS
- If the jetway(s) are used only on the main deck, the forward stairs should be used by the upper deck
passengers to reach the exit(s).
The cabin crewmembers located in the vicinity of the stairs on the upper deck and on main deck, must
manage the flow of passengers to prevent crowding on , or at the end of the stairs.
- If both decks are used for disembarkation the forward stairs should be restricted
- Cabin crewmembers may use the forward stairs during this phase
USE OF THE REAR STAIRS
- Passengers can use the rear stairs for disembarkation
- Cabin crewmembers may use the rear stairs during this phase.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Chief Purser
“CABIN CREW AT DOORS, ARM SLIDES AND CROSS CHECK ......................................... ORDER
Cabin crew responsible for door
DOOR CLOSED, LATCHED AND LOCKED ............................................................................CHECK
Cabin Crew
GREEN MECHANICAL FLAGS ARE CORRECTLY DISPLAYED ...........................................CHECK
DSIP LOCKED INDICATORS IS ON........................................................................................CHECK
SLIDE ARMING LEVER PLASTIC COVER...................................................................................LIFT
SAFETY PIN..........................................................................................................................REMOVE
SLIDE ARMING LEVER ...............................MOVE FULLY FORWARD TO THE ARMED POSITION
SLIDE ARMING LEVER PLASTIC COVER............................................................................. LOWER
SAFETY PIN.............................................................................................................................. STOW
SLIDE ARMING LEVER ......................................................................CHECK IN ARMED POSITION
CROSS CHECK DOORS ................................................................................................... CONDUCT
To crosscheck that the slides are armed, the cabin crewmember must walk over to the opposite door
and visually check that the slide arming lever is in the armed position.
"SLIDES ARMED AND CROSSCHECKED".................. REPORT TO PURSER OR CHIEF PURSER
Chief Purser and Purser
DOORS / SLIDES FAP PAGE ................................................................................................ SELECT
Chief Purser and Purser
ALL DOORS CLOSED AND ALL SLIDES ARMED..................................................................CHECK
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CHIEF PURS
CABIN CREW AT DOORS, DISARM DOORS AND CROSS CHECK .................................... ORDER
PRIM CC
SAFETY PIN...........................................................................................REMOVE FROM STOWAGE
SLIDE ARMING LEVER PLASTIC COVER...................................................................................LIFT
SLIDE ARMING LEVER .................................... MOVE FULLY AFT TO THE DISARMED POSITION
SAFETY PIN...........................................................................................................................INSTALL
SLIDE ARMING LEVER ................................................................ CHECK IN DISARMED POSITION
CROSSCHECK DOOR....................................................................................................... CONDUCT
To crosscheck that the doors are disarmed, the cabin crewmember must walk over to the opposite
door and visually check that the slide arming lever is in the disarmed position.
DOORS DISARMED AND CROSSCHECKED.............. REPORT TO PURSER OR CHIEF PURSER
CHIEF PURS
DOORS / SLIDES FAP PAGE ................................................................................................ SELECT
CHIEF PURS
ALL DOORS CLOSED AND ALL SLIDES DISARMED............................................................CHECK
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CC
ACCESS CODE.................................................................................................. ENTER ON KEYPAD
CC
COCKPIT DOOR .................................. STAND IN FRONT OF THE DOOR FACING THE COCKPIT
● If entry is authorized by the flight crew
- The flight crew unlocks the door via the DOOR LOCK switch.
- The keypad's green light comes on steady, and indicates that door is unlocked.
CC
DOOR ........................................................................................................................ PUSH TO OPEN
● If entry is unauthorized by the flight crew
- The cockpit door remains locked , and cannot be opened.
- The keypad 's red light comes on steady
- The keypad is inhibited for a predetermined time.
Note: The locking time-period of 5t o20 minis predetermined by the operator. .
● If there is no reaction from the flight crew
CC
ACCESS CODE ...................................................................................... RE-ENTER ON KEYPAD
Repeat the above procedure.
● If there is no reaction from the flight crew, after the second request
CC
FLIGHT CREW........................................................................................CALL VIA INTERPHONE
Establish contact with the flight crew and request access to the cockpit.
● If the flight crew does not answer the cabin crew interphone call:
CC
THE FOLLOWING EMERGENCY PROCEDURE................................................................APPLY
CC
EMERGENCY ENTRY CODE................................................................... ENTER, AND PRESS #
A buzzer will sound continuously in the cockpit and the keypad's green light flashes. After a
preselected time between 15 and 120 s, the keypad's green light comes on steady, and the cabin
crew can then push the door open.
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CC
DOOR ...................................................................................................................PUSH TO OPEN
1st method
CC
CKPT DOOR SWITCH...........................................................................................................UNLOCK
Unlock switch position must be maintained to unlock the door.
The green LED comes on, on the keypad.
CC
COCKPIT DOOR..........................................................................................................................PULL
The door can only be opened by pulling it during switch activation.
2nd method
CC
DEAD BOLT ................................................................................................................................TURN
CC
COCKPIT DOOR..........................................................................................................................PULL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
OPENING
UNLOCK pb......................................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD
As soon as the UNLOCK pb is pressed, a red unlock indicator appears to show that the window is
unlocked.
CONTROL HANDLE.................................................................................................. ROTATE AFT
This will release the window from its fixed structure.
CONTROL HANDLE....................................................................................... PULL BACKWARDS
This will move the window panel backwards.
At the end of travel, the window is locked in the open position.
CLOSING
UNLOCK pb......................................................................................................PRESS AND HOLD
CONTROL HANDLE..................................................................................................... PUSH FWD
The control handle must be pushed until the window panel is in front of its fixed frame.
CONTROL HANDLE.................................................................................................ROTATE FWD
This will move the window panel into its frame.
The window is closed and locked, when the red indicator on the control handle is no longer visible.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The safety briefing will prepare passengers for an emergency by providing them with information
regarding the location and operation of emergency equipment that they may have to operate in the
case of en emergency.
Passengers who are well briefed are better prepared for an emergency.
WHAT the The Passenger Safety Briefing should include the following:
Passenger Safety
- Smoking regulations
Briefing must
- Back of the seat to be in the upright position and the tray table stowed
include
- Location of the emergency exits
- Location and the use of floor proximity escape path markings
- Stowage of hand baggage
- Restrictions on the use of portable electronic devices
- The location and contents of the safety briefing card
Passengers must receive a demonstration of the following:
- The use of safety belts and/or safety harnesses, including how to fasten and
unfasten the seat belts and/or safety harnesses
- The location and use of oxygen equipment. Passengers must also be briefed to
extinguish all smoking materials when oxygen is used.
- The location and use of life vests, if required.
Individual safety briefings
An individual safety briefing must be provided to a passenger who is unable to
receive information contained in the standard safety briefing. These passengers
may be;
- Visually impaired
- Hearing impaired
WHERE When the cabin crewmembers perform a demonstration, they should stand in their
assigned brief and secure areas, in the cabin.
When an audio visual presentation is provided cabin crewmembers should stand in
their assigned brief and secure area in the cabin and point to the exits..
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
HOW it must be Passenger briefings and safety demonstrations are the same for both decks, and
done must be performed in a standardized manner:
- The speaker must clearly enunciate passenger briefings, and should pause
between sentences
- Cabin crewmembers must simultaneously perform the safety demonstration, and
their gestures should reflect the speaker's step-by-step instructions in real time.
To clearly point out areas or safety items within the aircraft: The cabin
crewmember should ensure that their fingers (on both hands) are together, and
point towards the indicated area.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LDCRC/MDCRC/UDCRC/FCRC
A preflight inspection of the crew rest compartment emergency equipment must be completed.
A security check of the crew rest compartments should be completed before each flight departure.
WARNING 1. During the flight, the occupancy of the crew rest compartments are limited to the
total number of bunks and / or seats that are installed in the compartment
2. The occupancy of the crew rest compartments may only be used by operating
crewmembers who are trained in the use of emergency equipment, emergency
procedures and the systems of the crew rest compartments
3. Smoking is prohibited in the crew rest compartments
4. The crew rest compartment is limited to the stowage of the crewmembers
personal baggage only. The stowage of cargo or passenger baggage is
prohibited.
- During taxi, takeoff, final approach landing, the crew rest compartments must be:
- Unoccupied
- Doors closed and locked.
- During the flight, when the crew rest compartments are occupied, the occupants must ensure
that their seat belts are fastened while seated or lying down.
LOWER DECK CREW REST COMPARTMENT (LDCRC)
The stairwell hatch must remain open, and secured with the hatch retainers, at all times when the
LDCRC is occupied.
To isolate the LDCRC from cabin noise, the stairwell door should be closed, but the stairwell hatch
must remain open and secured.
In case of smoke or fire in the LDCRC or in the cargo compartments, the stairwell hatch must be
closed, in order to isolate these compartments.
CAUTION The LDCRC stairwell hatch may only be closed when the LDCRC is
unoccupied/evacuated.
A post-flight security inspection of the crew rest compartments must be performed before the cabin
crew disembark from the aircraft.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CAUTION The ground area beneath the exits intended for emergency evacuation and slide
deployment must be kept clear. Operators will need to designate such exits, taking into
account their ground servicing and catering operations.
The flight crew must notify the cabin crew before beginning to refuel/defuel.
CABIN PREPARATION BEFORE REFUELING/DEFUELING
The cabin crew must coordinate actions with the flight crew to ensure that:
Captain
FASTEN SEAT BELT SIGNS................................................................................................... OFF
NO SMOKING SIGNS ................................................................................................................ON
Chief Purser
CABIN LIGHTING.......................................................................................................................ON
The cabin lighting must be on to enable identification of the emergency exits.
The cabin crew must check the following:
Cabin crewmembers
CABIN CURTAINS ..................................................................................... OPEN AND SECURED
EXITS ...................................................................................... CLEAR OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS
AISLES AND CROSS-AISLES................................................ CLEAR OF ANY OBSTRUCTIONS
PASSENGER BRIEFING BEFORE REFUELLING/DEFUELLING
Chief Purser
PASSENGER BRIEFING .............................................................................................. PERFORM
Cabin crewmembers
PASSENGER COMPLIANCE..............................................................................................CHECK
DOOR AND EXIT PREPARATION DURING REFUELING/DEFUELING
Cabin crewmembers
AT DOORS........................................................................................................................ REMAIN
At least one cabin crew member must be stationed at each door, and must be prepared for an
emergency , if required.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The purpose of this section is to provide operators with recommendations and guidance material for
the use of the Onboard Mobile Telephony System (OMTS). These recommendations provide guidance
for the use of the Onboard Mobile Telephony System in normal and abnormal operations.
These recommendations are applicable provided the OMTS function is installed and activated.
PASSENGER BRIEFINGS
The use of the OMTS onboard the aircraft must be clearly explained to passengers in order to
maintain aircraft safety by ensuring passenger compliance with lighted signs, placards, and
crewmember instructions.
Passenger announcements should be made prior to and during passenger boarding to ensure that
passengers are aware and reminded of the restrictions that apply to the use of mobile phones, and
other transmitting devices onboard the aircraft.
PRE-DEPARTURE BRIEFING
It is recommended that the following information is included in the pre-departure passenger briefing:
- Instruct passengers to pay attention to the lighted "No Mobiles" cabin signs, and placards, which
will indicate when the system may or may not be used.
- Clearly brief the passengers on the "No Mobiles" lighted signs, clearly emphasizing that all
mobile telephones must be switched off when the "No Mobiles" lighted signs come on and the
associated chime sounds.
- Inform passengers that in the case of an emergency the service will be disabled.
- Inform passengers that only mobile phones are allowed to be used when the onboard service is
available. All other phones or communication devices for instance satellite telephones must
remain switched off during the entire flight.
Note: It is strongly recommended that in order not to distract passengers from the cabin safety
briefing, that the mobile phone briefing is performed separately. (This should describe the
operator’s policies and procedures).
CABIN CREW AWARENESS
- The cabin crew should monitor passenger use of mobile phones during all phases of flight and,
when necessary, ensure passenger compliance.
- The cabin crew should be alert to passenger misuse of mobile phones.
- Increase flight crew and cabin crew communication and co-ordination to manage interference or
other safety related problems related to the use of mobile phones.
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
- The cabin crew should be aware of the correct procedures to disable the Onboard Mobile
Telephony System service, if required.
Refer to 06-210-30 How to Turn ON/OFF the Mobile Telephony Service
This procedure is applicable provided the OMTS function is installed and activated.
NORMAL OPERATION
When the altitude has reached 13 124 ft (4 000 m), the OMTS is automatically enabled.
On the FAP, SERVICE OVERVIEW page of the CABIN CONNECTIVITY application:
MOBILE TEL. CONNECTION.......................................................................................CHECK ON
The service status availability indicator should be green and, the Service key should be ON and
green .
When the OMTS is available, the NO MOBILE cabin signs go off (and optionally an associated
chime sounds).
Note: During night flights, the voice calls can be switched off by pressing the Quiet Mode key on
the FAP page. In this case, calls will be limited to E-mail and SMS only.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
This procedure is applicable provided the OMTS function is installed and activated.
NORMAL OPERATION
When the altitude has reached 13 124 ft (4 000 m), the OMTS is automatically enabled.
On the FAP, SERVICE OVERVIEW page of the CABIN CONNECTIVITY application:
MOBILE TEL. CONNECTION ...................................................................................... CHECK ON
The service availability indicator should be green and, the ON/OFF key should be ON and green .
When the OMTS is available, the NO MOBILE cabin signs go off (and optionally an associated
chime sounds).
Note: During night flights, the voice calls can be switched off by pressing the Quiet Mode ON key
on the FAP page. In this case, calls will be limited to E-mail and SMS only.
● If the use of mobiles phones must be interrupted during the flight:
On the FAP, SERVICE OVERVIEW page of the CABIN CONNECTIVITY application:
PAX Sign ON key ..................................................................................................................ON
When the PAX Sign ON key is selected, a single chime will sound (If installed).
CABIN CREW .................................................................................... INFORM PASSENGERS
The cabin crew must make an announcement requesting passengers to turn off their mobile
phones.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
DANGEROUS GOODS
Applicable to: ALL
INTRODUCTION
Many everyday items and substances can be dangerous when transported by air.
Due to the variations in temperature and pressure during a flight, some of these items may leak or
break, generating toxic fumes or possibly starting a fire.
Employee’s who may come into contact with dangerous goods need to be aware of the nature of such
goods, their potential for causing incidents and accidents and how they should be dealt with.
DEFINITION
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) defines dangerous goods as;
“Articles or substances which are capable of posing a risk to health, safety, property or the environment
and which are shown in the list of dangerous goods in the technical instructions or which are classified
according to those instructions.”
DANGEROUS GOODS REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS RECOMMENDATIONS
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the International Air Travel Association (IATA)
provide guidance material for Operators who wish to develop their dangerous goods training programs.
The ICAO and IATA guidance material is updated annually and provides Operators with an excellent
source of information on dangerous goods.
EASA, the FAA and many Aviation authorities require that Operators provide dangerous goods training
for cabin crew during initial and recurrent training.
This training should include :
1. The risks involved in carrying dangerous goods by air.
2. How to deal with a dangerous goods incident onboard the aircraft.
DANGEROUS GOODS CLASSIFICATION
Dangerous goods are classified into hazard classes. Each hazard class is divided into several sections
and specific labels are applied to each one of these classes and/or sections.
A system of diamond-shaped placards and labels are used to identify dangerous goods. Different
colors and symbols, such as a flame for flammables or skull and crossbones for poisons, identify the
dangers associated with the product.
Note: These symbols are as Known at the time of the publication and are subject to revision.
Operators should refer to the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations.
Class 1 : Explosives
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Class 2: Gases
Class 2.1 Flammable Gas: Gases, which ignite on contact with an ignition
source, such as acetylene and hydrogen
Class 2.2 Non-Flammable Gases: Gases, wich are neither flammable nor
poisonous.
Class 2.3 Poisonous Gases : Gases liable to cause death or serious injury
to humans if inhaled for example hydrogen cyanide
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Class 4.3: Dangerous When Wet Solid substances that emit a flammable
gas when wet or react with water when wet, such as sodium and potassium.
Class 5.2 Organic Peroxides Are thermally unstable substances that may
undergo heat generating, self-accelerating decomposition. These substances
are sensitive to impact or friction, or may create a dangerous reaction when in
contact with other substances. These substances may be explosive and burn
rapidly. Some examples are, fertilizers and pool chemicals.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Class 6.1 Toxic substances Those substances that are liable to cause
death or injury if swallowed, inhaled or absorbed through the skin. Examples
are pesticides, poisons and mercury.
Class 8: Corrosives
Corrosive substances can dissolve organic tissue or severely corrode certain
metals for example, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid contained in batteries.
Class 9: Miscellaneous
Hazardous substances such as dry ice and magnets.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
If a catering box is available, the cabin crew can use it to store the bags containing the dangerous
goods.
Dangerous goods should be stored in a location that is as far away from the cockpit and passengers as
possible. The cabin crew may use an aft galley or aft lavatory, if possible. However, boxes or plastic
bag(s) must not be stored against the pressure bulkhead or fuselage wall.
If the cabin crew uses a lavatory to store dangerous goods, boxes should be put on the floor, bag(s)
should be stowed in an empty waste container, and the lavatory door should be locked from the
outside. Using the lavatory to store the dangerous goods will prevent fumes from entering the cabin.
Note: In a pressurized aircraft, if a lavatory is used, any fumes will be vented away from passengers.
When moving a box that contains dangerous goods, the cabin crew must ensure that the opening
remains upward. When moving a bag, the cabin crew must ensure that the receptacle containing the
dangerous goods remains upright.
Regardless of the location of the catering box or bag, the cabin crew must secure them firmly to
prevent them from moving.
REPORTING A DANGEROUS GOODS INCIDENT
The cabin crew and flight crew should coordinate to complete an Air Safety Report following a
dangerous goods incident. In many countries this report is mandatory. This report should include:
- The date of the incident or accident, or the discovery of undeclared or incorrectly declared
dangerous goods
- The flight number and flight date
- A description of the goods and the location found in the cabin
- The type of packaging, and the packaging specification marking on it
- Passenger details, e.g. seat number, name, address
- Crew actions
- Any other relevant information.
The cabin crew must enter the details of the incident in the aircraft maintenance logbook, so that the
maintenance personnel can replace the dangerous goods kit (if installed) and repair any damage to the
cabin caused by the incident.
On Arrival
After landing, notify the ground personnel of all the known facts about the Dangerous Goods item and
where it is stowed.
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN AN IN-FLIGHT DANGEROUS GOODS
INCIDENT
When dangerous goods are discovered in the cabin, this may be an indication of other problems, such
as:
Continued on the next page
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PREVENTION STRATEGIES
Dangerous goods are regularly and routinely carried on passenger and all cargo aircraft and present
little hazard in transport provided they are correctly identified, packaged and handled. But, Dangerous
Goods can be potentially harmful to passengers and crew if they release smoke or fumes in the cabin
or develop into an on-board fire.
Therefore, both the operator and the cabin crew should take the following preventive actions:
• Display notices for passengers at check-in areas, ticket sales desks, etc.
• Ensure that the regulations regarding the transportation of dangerous goods are strictly adhered to
by ground personnel, passengers and the cabin crew and flight crew
• Provide detailed and precise procedures for dangerous goods handling and emergencies to all
employees who may come into contact with dangerous goods.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
14-10 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
14-60 Depressurization
ABNORMAL CABIN ALTITUDE...........................................................................................................1
Depressurization Warnings ..................................................................................................................2
█ Cabin Depressurization █................................................................................................................3
█ Crew rest compartment depressurization █ ....................................................................................4
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
14-100-60 Ditching
Planned Ditching - Unplanned Ditching ............................................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM) Abnormal/Emergency procedures are those
recommended by Airbus.
Should an operator wish to incorporate their own customized procedure, the operator can do so by
using dedicated tools.
Abnormal/Emergency procedures are synchronized with the Flight Crew Operating Manual (FCOM)
Not-Sensed Procedures and/or Quick Reference Handbook (QRH), requiring flight and cabin crew to
communicate and cooperate.
Abnormal/Emergency procedures, specific to the cabin crew, concern smoke/fire fighting,
depressurization, etc.
The Abnormal/Emergency procedures are continuously updated and revised. Revisions take into
account the feedback received from all operators, in addition to the results of continuous monitoring of
the aircraft's in-service life.
The CCOM procedures that are marked "Airworthiness Related" provide procedures and
limitations that are mandatory, in order to meet cabin safety airworthiness requirements.
These procedures are validated by the Airbus Office of Airworthiness. Modifications to these
procedures must be reviewed by the Operator's National Aviation Authorities for acceptance.
The Airworthiness Related Procedures are indicated by "Airworthiness Related" on the
affected procedure page header. An entire procedure may be airworthiness related, or only part
of a procedure may be airworthiness related.
In the case that only on a certain part of a procedure is airworthiness related, this is indicated
by (AR) written in green beside the impacted part of the procedure.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The cabin crew is responsible for effectively dealing with in-flight emergencies that involve smoke and
fire. The following factors are important to enable cabin crew to correctly manage a smoke or fire event
in-flight.
FIGHT THE FIRE
The cabin crew must be aware of the importance of taking immediate and aggressive action to
determine the source of the smoke/fire.
The cabin crew must take action to:
- Rapidly evaluate the situation
- Determine the source of the smoke/fire
- Access the fire, if necessary
- Fight the fire, using firefighting equipment, and/or any other appropriate item that is rapidly available
(e.g. non-alcoholic beverages, including carbonated drinks, coffee, tea, juice)
- Smother the fire by using wet pillows, or wet blankets, in order to stop the fire from igniting again.
COMMUNICATE AND COORDINATE
The cabin crew must be aware of the importance for the need for on effective crew communication and
coordination. When smoke/fire is detected, the cabin crew must immediately inform:
- The flight crew
- The Chief Purser
- The cabin crewmembers that are on other decks.
FIRE PREVENTION
The cabin crew must be vigilant and pay attention to any unusual odors, noises, unusual system
behavior that may be an indication of a possible fire.
- Lavatories, including the associated smoke detector and wastebin fire extinguisher
- Galleys, ensuring that no flammable materials, such as paper napkins, and towels are not left near
or in heated galley equipment. The cabin crew monitor the galley electrical panels for fault
indications and tripped circuit breakers.
- The cabin must regularly monitored for fire hazards.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers are designed to provide protection from overheating, due to an abnormal electrical
load on a piece of equipment. The circuit breaker will trip automatically when a predetermined electrical
load is detected. When the circuit breaker trips this will result in the total or partial deactivation of the
affected electrical installation.
Circuit breakers that relate to cabin items, such as lights, entertainment systems, etc..., may be used to
isolate equipment in the event of smoke and fire, in accordance with the operator's policy.
WARNING Do not reset a tripped circuit breaker, because this may cause more damage to the
equipment, may affect other electrical equipment, may cause an overheat and/or
smoke.
Cabin reports of tripped circuit breakers should be reported to the flight crew immediately, and entered
in the maintenance logbook.
LITHIUM BATTERIES FIRES
Lithium batteries are commonly used to power aircraft cabin equipment (Defibrillators, Passenger
inflatable seat belts, flashlights, Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) ...etc) and consumer equipment (PEDs).
These batteries can be either lithium batteries (disposable) or lithium-ion batteries (rechargeable).
Both types are capable of ignition and subsequent explosion due to overheating. The resulting fire can
flare repeatedly as each cell ruptures and releases its contents.
Based on testing by the Fire Safety Branch of the FAA, the following procedures are recommended for
fighting a fire of a lithium type battery-powered PED regardless if the battery is disposable or
rechargeable:
- Relocate passenger away from the device, use halon, halon replacement or water fire extinguisher
to prevent the spread of the fire to adjacent battery cells and materials
- Pour water , or other non-alcoholic liquid , from any available source over the cells immediately
after extinguishing the fire.
Note: Only water or other non-alcoholic liquid can provide sufficient cooling to prevent re-ignition
and/or spreading of the fire to adjacent batteries. Significant cooling is needed to prevent
the spread of fire to additional cells in a battery pack.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CLASSES OF FIRE
Applicable to: ALL
- Wood
- Cloth
- Paper
- Rubber
- Plastic
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
- Oils
- Grease
- Aircraft fuel
- Hydraulic fluid
- Tar
- Flammable gases
- Coffeemakers,
- Ovens
- Wiring
- Circuit breakers
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
- Magnesium
- Titanium
- Zirconium
- Sodium
Note: For Lithium batteries fires :Refer to 14-20 Guidelines for In-flight Smoke and Fire Management
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS APPLICABLE TO EACH THE CLASS OF FIRE
The cabin crew should select the appropriate fire extinguisher according to the type of fire, class A, B,
C or D:
1. Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher - For class B or C fires
2. Water Extinguisher - For class A fires
3. Dry Chemical Extinguishers - For class A, B, or C fires
4. Extinguisher with Halogenated Hydrocarbons, designated as Halon Extinguishers or BCF
Extinguishers (BCF = Bromochlorodiflouromethane) - For class A, B, or C fires
WARNING When a halon extinguisher is used on a class A fire, the affected area must be
dampened with water afterward to prevent the fire from re-ignition.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The cabin crew must be aware of the potential sources of smoke onboard the aircraft, and must
familiarize themselves with these areas, in order for crewmembers to determine the source of the
smoke, and take immediate action. Hidden areas include:
- Crown area: This area is above the ceiling panels. This overhead area includes wiring bundles,
control surface cables, the passenger emergency oxygen system, parts of the air conditioning
system, and parts of the aircraft In-Flight Entertainment System (IFE).
- Dado panels: These are the vents that are at the foot of the sidewall panels, on each side of the
cabin. Most aircraft air conditioning systems supply conditioned air from the cabin ceiling. This
conditioned air then flows from the top of the cabin to the bottom, it then exits via the return grills,
and finally leaves the aircraft via the outflow valves.
- Triangle area: This area is below the floor outboard of the cargo area. this area hosts hydraulic lines,
electrical components and wiring bundles.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Firefighting methods are different depending on the location and the source of the fire.
However, there are some general guidelines that the cabin crew should be observe.
FIRES IN HIDDEN AREAS
Smoke emissions from sidewall panels and ceiling panels may indicate a hidden fire. In some cases
smoke may appear some distance from the source.
When the cabin crew suspects a fire in a hidden area, for example, behind a panel, they should try to
locate a "hot spot". A "hot spot" is an abnormally warm area. A "hot spot" is usually a good indicator as
to where the source of the fire is.
Note: To find the "hot spot", the cabin crew should move the back of their hand along the panels to
find the hottest area.
This is because, the skin on the back of the hand is thinner and, is more sensitive to
temperature changes than the palm.
It may be necessary to remove or lever panels to insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher. Use a crash
axe that has an insulated handle to lever panels.
CAUTION Be very careful when removing, or levering panels, because some of these areas may
contain essential wiring or aircraft systems.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GALLEY SMOKE/FIRE
GALLEY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
The source of smoke/fire in the galley areas is usually due to the malfunction of electrical
equipment, such as, coffee makers, water boilers, ovens etc..
When the source of the smoke/fire has been identified as coming from a piece of electrical
equipment, the cabin crew must:
- Switch off the power
- Pull the associated circuit breaker, that is located on the galley electrical panel
OVEN FIRES
In the case of an oven fire, the cabin crew must:
- Keep the oven door closed, to deprive the fire of oxygen. In many cases the fire will extinguish by
itself.
- Switch off the power to the oven
- Pull the associated circuit breaker, on the galley electrical panel
If the situation worsens, the cabin crew must:
- Don a PBE and fire gloves for protection
- Open the oven door slightly, just enough to insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher
- Insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher, and discharge the fire extinguisher
- Close the oven door
- Repeat the procedure as necessary
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Firefighting procedures require a team of at least three cabin crewmembers, because a team effort is
the most effective way fight a fire. The firefighting roles are defined as follows:
• The Firefighter
• The Communicator
• The Assistant Firefighter
The three roles are complimentary because tasks are performed simultaneously, in order to optimize
the firefighting effort.
• The Firefighter: The first cabin crewmember to find the fire becomes the Firefighter. This cabin
crewmember must:
- Alert other cabin crewmembers
- Obtain the nearest fire extinguisher (consider the use of a PBE)
- Immediately locate the source of the fire
- Fight the fire
• The Communicator: The second cabin crewmember to arrive on the scene becomes the
communicator, this cabin crewmember must:
- Inform the flight crew of the fire, give the following information:
Location of the fire
Source of the fire
Severity/Density of the fire (color of the smoke/odor, and how it is effecting people)
Firefighting progress
Number of extinguishers used
Time that the firefighting action began
- Maintain the communication link between the cabin and the flight crew, via an interphone that is
near the fire fighting scene.
- Provide the flight crew with an accurate description of the firefighting effort, and of the situation
in the cabin
• The Assistant Firefighter: The third cabin crewmember to arrive on the scene, becomes
The Assistant Firefighter, and must:
- Provide extra firefighting equipment
- Support and coordinate the firefighting effort
- Remove flammable material from the area
- Must be prepared to replace the Firefighter, and exchange roles with the Firefighter, if required.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
• Support cabin crewmembers: These cabin crewmembers are not directly involved in the
firefighting effort, will be required to provide assistance (e.g. to relocate passengers, administer
first-aid, calm and reassure passengers).
After any fire or smoke occurrence, one crewmember should be assigned to monitor the affected
area for the remainder of the flight, and should regularly report to the Chief Purser.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The Firefighter, the Communicator and the Assistant Firefighter perform their roles and actions
SIMULTANEOUSLY.
FIREFIGHTER
OTHER CREWMEMBERS .................................................................................................. ALERT
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................... OBTAIN
Take the nearest appropriate fire extinguisher. Consider the use of a PBE.
SOURCE OF THE FIRE ................................................................................................... LOCATE
FIRE EXTINGUISHER ................................................................ DISCHARGE AT BASE OF FIRE
FIREFIGHTING EFFORT ...............................................................................................MAINTAIN
● When the fire is out:
AFFECTED AREA ...................................................................................................... DAMPEN
The affected area should be dampened to prevent the fire from re-ignition.
COMMUNICATOR
FLIGHT CREW ..........................................................NOTIFY IMMEDIATELY VIA INTERPHONE
Use the interphone, to prevent smoke from contaminating the cockpit. Give the following
information:
- Location of the fire
- Source of the fire
- Severity/Density (color of smoke/odor, and how it is affecting people)
- Firefighting progress
- Number of extinguishers used
- Time firefighting action began.
COMMUNICATION WITH FLIGHT CREW .....................................................................MAINTAIN
INSTRUCTIONS FROM FLIGHT CREW............. COMMUNICATE TO CABIN CREWMEMBERS
ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................PROVIDE
FIREFIGHTING.............................................................................SUPPORT AND COORDINATE
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
● If necessary:
REPLACE FIREFIGHTER......................................................................................... PREPARE
PBE .................................................................................................................................... DON
SUPPORT CREWMEMBERS
PASSENGERS AND PORTABLE OXYGEN............................. MOVE FROM IMMEDIATE AREA
FIREFIGHTING EFFORT .........................................................................ASSIST AND SUPPORT
PASSENGERS......................................................................................... CALM AND REASSURE
● When the fire is out
DEDICATED CREWMEMBER............... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
The affected area must be monitored for the remainder of the flight. Regular reports must be
made to the Chief Purser.
Smoke that comes from sidewall panels, ceiling panels and vents may indicate a hidden fire. In some
cases, smoke may appear far from the real source
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE.....................................................................................APPLY
SOURCE OF SMOKE.............................................................................................................LOCATE
REASON FOR SMOKE ..................................................................INVESTIGATE AND DETERMINE
Note: To determine the source of a potential fire, crewmembers should check for "hot spots" on
panels. Move the back of the hand along the panels to find unusually hot areas.
● WHEN "HOT SPOT" IS LOCATED
AREA........................................................................................................... ACCESS WITH CARE
CAUTION When gaining access behind panels, be aware of the presence of wiring bundles.
Make a careful incision in the panel to insert extinguisher nozzle, or lever the panel
to gain access.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER................................................................................................DISCHARGE
DEDICATED CREWMEMBER .................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
The affected area must be monitored for the remainder of the flight. Regular reports must be
made to the Chief Purser.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
FLIGHT CREW
SMOKE LAVATORY SMOKE .......................................................................CREW AWARENESS
Maintain contact with the cabin crew to follow up on the status of the fire.
WARNING Do not open the lavatory door. First, check the door for heat. Move the back of the
hand along the panel of the lavatory door, to determine temperature and presence
of fire.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Check the lavatory wastebin fire extinguisher, and search all the lavatory stowage areas for
the presence of smoke/fire.
END OF PROC
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The type of smoke/fire from a passenger seat/seat area will determine the class of fire that must be
dealt with.
The source of smoke/fire may come from the IFE screen, the ISPSS outlets, the seat boxes located
under the passenger seats or a PED being trapped within the seat.
......................................................................................................................................................................
● If smoke/fire is detected in the seat /seat area:
CABIN CREW/COCKPIT CREW COMMUNICATION ................................................. ESTABLISH
The cabin crew must update the cockpit crew on the progress of the event.
SOURCE OF THE SMOKE/FIRE ..................................................................................... LOCATE
● If the source of the smoke/fire is coming from electrical equipment of the seat:
PAX SYS sw ........................................................................................................................OFF
The PAX SYS sw is located in the cockpit, on the CWS, the RCC and optionally on the FAP.
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE.................................................. APPLY IF REQUIRED
Refer to 14-20 Basic Cabin Fire Fighting Procedure
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
FLIGHT CREW
SMOKE MAIN (UPPER) XX CWS SMOKE.................................................. CREW AWARENESS
Maintain contact with the cabin crew.
Note: XX indicates the location of the affected Cabin Work Station (CWS) (e.g. 1L).
Note: Only the FAP Smoke page, and the Smoke light on the respective FAP/AAP panel remain
on until all smoke has dissipated.
● If situation is cleared.
AFFECTED CWS(RCC)......................... MONITOR FOR THE REMAINDER OF THE FLIGHT
To ensure that the CWS (RCC) remains clear of smoke.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Galley smoke/fire occurrences can be caused by electrical equipment malfunction for example,
coffee makers, ovens, water boilers etc..
● If the source of the smoke/fire is identified from a piece of electrical equipment:
ELECTRICAL POWER .............................................................................................................OFF
APPLICABLE CIRCUIT BREAKER ........................................................................................PULL
Circuit breakers are located on the galley's centralized electrical panel. Pulling the applicable
circuit breaker should stop the smoke/fire.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Oven smoke/fires occurrences may be caused by the oven contents, such as, food or grease
deposits. Electrical malfunctions may be another source.
OVEN DOOR...............................................................................................................KEEP CLOSED
Note: By keeping the oven door closed, the fire will usually extinguish itself.
OVEN POWER .............................................................................................................................. OFF
CIRCUIT BREAKER .................................................................................................................... PULL
The applicable oven circuit breaker is located on the galley's centralized electrical panel.
● IF SMOKE OR FIRE IS STILL PRESENT:
PBE AND FIRE GLOVES........................................................................................................ DON
OVEN DOOR.......................................................................................................OPEN SLIGHTLY
Note: Open the oven door slightly, just enough to insert the nozzle of the fire extinguisher into
the oven.
(*) FIRE EXTINGUISHER...........................................................................................DISCHARGE
(*) OVEN DOOR.................................................................................................................. CLOSE
(*) FIREFIGHTING................................................................................ REPEAT AS NECESSARY
(*) Repeat last three steps of the procedure, as necessary.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Smoke/fire in overhead bins may be caused by the contents (i.e. electronic device, spare lithium
battery) or electrical malfunction in the Passenger Service Unit (PSU).
The firefighter, the assistant firefighter, the communicator and the support crewmembers must
conduct their tasks simultaneously.
● When smoke is coming from an overhead bin:
FIREFIGHTER AND ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
PBE ..........................................................................................................................................DON
FIREFIGHTER
FIRE EXTINGUISHER ........................................................................................................... TAKE
Note: Consider the use of fire gloves.
ASSISTANT FIREFIGHTER
WATER OR NON-ALCOHOLIC LIQUID................................................................................ TAKE
Note: Water or non-alcoholic liquid is required if the fire involves lithium battery.
SUPPORT CREWMEMBERS
PASSENGERS ............................................................................................................ RELOCATE
COMMUNICATOR
FLIGHT CREW ..........................................................NOTIFY IMMEDIATELY VIA INTERPHONE
FIREFIGHTER
OVERHEAD BIN .............................................................................................. CHECK FOR HEAT
Using the back of the hand, feel the overhead bin to determine the temperature and presence of
fire.
(*)OVERHEAD BIN ............................................................................................. OPEN SLIGHTLY
Enough to pass the nozzle of the fire extinguisher.
CAUTION Opening the overhead bin more than necessary can cause contamination of the
cabin with smoke, and can result in smoke inhalation.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
END OF PROC
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The roles of the firefighter, assistant firefighter and communicator must be distributed according to
the basic firefighting procedure.
In the case of PED, IFE based tablet or spare lithium battery fire in the cabin or when notified by the
flight crew:
POWER SOURCE ................................................................................................................ REMOVE
When possible, the cabin crew must unplug the device (eg: PED, IFE based tablet etc..) or switch off
the power source.
● If there are flames:
FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... TAKE
Consider the use of a PBE and fire gloves.
HALON EXTINGUISHER........................................................................................... DISCHARGE
Halon extinguisher must be discharged to suppress the flames prior to cool down the PED or the
Spare lithium battery.
WARNING Liquids may turn into steam when applied to a hot battery.
END OF PROC
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
END OF PROC
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note: The amber smoke indicator, the SMOKE RESET pb and the SMOKE RESET hard key
on the FAP smoke page remains ON until the smoke has dissipated.
CC
LDCRC .................................................... CHECK FOR THE PRESENCE OF SMOKE AND FIRE
Search all the bunks, closets, stowage compartments and lavatory (if installed).
● If smoke or fire is visible:
BASIC FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURE ..........................................................................APPLY
Use a portable fire extinguisher.
WARNING The main exit hatch and the emergency hatch must remain closed until arrival.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The smoke curtain is used only when the cabin crew determine that excessive smoke/fire from the
main deck will inhibit passenger evacuation from the upper deck.
Forward Smoke Curtain Operation
The forward smoke curtain is located in the ceiling above the forward staircase.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The forward stairs smoke curtain lever is located behind a panel. This panel is located on the right
hand side bulkhead (when facing the flight direction). To operate the forward smoke curtain:
- Push the flap open to access the smoke curtain lever
- Push the lever down until the smoke curtain is fully deployed
- Hook the smoke curtain ties onto the receptacles which located on each corner of the staircase.
This will secure the smoke curtain.
This completes the forward smoke curtain operation.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The smoke curtain is used only when the cabin crew determine that excessive smoke/fire from the
main deck will inhibit passenger evacuation from the upper deck.
Aft Smoke Curtain Operation
The aft smoke curtain is located in the stair frame of the aft staircase.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The aft stairs smoke curtain recessed grip is located on the right hand side of the aft stair frame
(when facing aft).
To operate the aft smoke curtain:
- Pull the recessed grip to open the smoke curtain cover
- Pull the loops to remove the curtain from the stowage
- Move the curtain along the track until the curtain is fully deployed around the top of the aft
staircase
- Engage the press studs, to secure the smoke curtain to the stair frame.
Note: The three press studs are located in the upper, central and lower part of the curtain and
their counterpart are located on the sidewall.
This completes the aft smoke curtain operation.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
EMERGENCY CALLS
Applicable to: ALL
In the event if an abnormal or an emergency situation in the cabin, any cabin crewmember may make
this call.
EMERGENCY ALERT
CAPTAIN CHIEF PURSER CABIN CREW
- Using the PA announce "Chief - Go immediately to the cockpit to be - Stop all activities; secure any
Purser to Cockpit, please!" briefed by the captain. equipment that is being used.
- Go to designated crew station and
standby the interphone ready for
Chief Purser's briefing
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Brief the Chief Purser . Ask the captain for the following
information:
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PASSENGER PREPARATION
FLIGHT CREW CHIEF PURSER
- Turn on the NO SMOKING/FASTEN SEAT BELT signs If the captain's duties permit, the captain will make the initial
- If duties permit, make a PAannouncement to the announcement.
passengers of the nature of the emergency. If this is not possible for the captain to make the
Note: For psychological reasons, the flight crew announcement, the Chief Purser will make the initial
should make the initial announcement to the announcement to the passengers stating:
passengers.
- The nature of the emergency and the captains intentions
- The need to prepare the cabin
- Follow the instructions of cabin crew members.
Make the Emergency Announcement containing the
following:
- Brace positions
- Locations of exits
- Loose items
- ABPs
- Safety card review
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
● If there is no communication from the flight crew and, a catastrophic situation exists in the
cabin, the cabin crew should initiate the evacuation
CHIEF PURSER/CABIN CREWMEMBER
To initiate an evacuation use whatever means are available.
- Use the PA system, megaphone or shout the evacuation commands "EVACUATE, EVACUATE" "SEAT BELTS
OFF"
In the case of an abnormal or emergency situation during the takeoff or landing such as;
- Imminent impact or,
- Aircraft damage
The command to brace for impact should be given as a minimum warning to passengers.
The brace command can be initiated by the flight crew or the cabin crew.
BRACE COMMANDS - UNPLANNED EMERGENCY LANDING
Flight crew Cabin Crew
If the flight crew are aware of imminent impact. If the cabin crew are aware of imminent impact, or on the
command of the flight crew:
- Using PA announce
"BRACE FOR IMPACT' - Cabin crew must adopt their brace position and shout "
HEADS DOWN, STAY DOWN"
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
EVACUATION GUIDELINES
There are many factors that contribute to the successful evacuation of an aircraft:
- The procedural knowledge of the cabin crew: This includes training, experience and behavior
- The aircraft configuration, the layout of the cabin
- The environment inside and outside the aircraft (e.g., the presence of smoke, fire, the cabin lighting,
and outside conditions)
- The behavior of the passengers, their age, level of fitness and motivation
During an emergency, it is essential for the cabin crew to be able to apply their knowledge of
procedures, and rapidly adapt to the situation.
In the case of a life threatening situation onboard the aircraft, it is essential that the aircraft is
evacuated quickly and efficiently to increase the occupants chances of survival.
Cabin Configuration
The cabin configuration can have an impact on the efficiency of the evacuation.
To enhance the situational awareness skills of the cabin crew, they should be familiar with the cabin
layout, and the areas where congestion may occur, due to:
- The passenger seating density
- The location of galleys, lavatories, bars etc..
- Restricted visibility
- Passengers arriving from different directions to the exits.
Some exits, for example the forward and aft exits, may be under utilized because the majority of
passengers are seated in the mid section of the aircraft and will be drawn towards their nearest exits.
It may be necessary for the cabin crew to redirect passengers to other usable exits to avoid
congestion, and to maximize the use of all the usable exits, in order to evacuate the aircraft as rapidly
as possible.
To achieve this the cabin crew must be aware of what is happening in the cabin.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
One of the key elements to a efficient evacuation is effective crowd control and cabin management by
the cabin crew. The actions and commands of the cabin crew will influence the performance of the
passengers during the evacuation.
1. The objectives for the cabin crewmembers are:
- To quickly establish the passenger flow at each usable exit
- To evacuate the aircraft as quickly as possible.
2. The cabin crew must use positive verbal commands and physical gestures, in order to efficiently
direct passengers towards the exits and assist them down the slides.
Note: Cabin crew must also be prepared to use some physical force, if necessary, to evacuate
some passengers from the aircraft.
The commands used by the cabin crew should be:
- Assertive
- Positive
- Short
- Loud
- Clear
Note: The cabin crew must be assertive and be in complete control of the evacuation.
3. Situational awareness will play a large part in the evacuation process. The cabin crew must be able
to assess not only what is happening at their exit, but also what is happening inside the cabin.
The cabin crewmembers must be able to:
- Assess the flow of passengers from the exits and be aware to changes in the passenger flow rate.
- Be aware of the status of the other exits, especially when redirecting the passengers
- To adapt their actions and commands when the cabin is congested or an exit is dried up, in order
to keep the evacuation flowing and maximize the use of all exits.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
When the cabin crewmember's assigned area is empty, or it is no longer safe to remain onboard the
aircraft, the cabin crewmember should evacuate through the first usable exit.
If an evacuation occurs away from an airfield, the cabin crew should take their assigned emergency
equipment from the aircraft, if the situation permits.
M3 L/R CABIN CREWMEMBERS:
The M3 exits are equipped with ramp/slides.
To check that the ramp/slide is correctly inflated the cabin crewmember must:
- Check that the barber pole is fully inflated, and, visible.
- The M3 cabin crewmembers should use commands, such as:
- “Run and jump"
- "Keep moving"
- “2 by 2”
- Monitor the activity on the ramp/slide from the assist space.
Note: The cabin crew at the M3 exits must continuously monitor the ramp during the evacuation.
The cabin crew must ensure that passengers do not gather on the ramp. It is important to
keep the passengers moving from the ramp and down the slide.
- The cabin crew responsible for the M3 exits should be aware that in order to maintain a
continuous flow of passengers from these exits, crewmembers must establish a sequence to keep
passengers moving through the exits, off the ramp and down the slides.
UPPER DECK FORWARD STAIRS CABIN CREWMEMBER
The U1 doors are the primary exit routes for passengers seated in the forward section of the Upper
Deck.
The cabin crewmember seated at the upper deck forward stairs must direct passengers to the U1
doors.
The primary exit routes for the upper deck are the upper deck doors. Cabin crew should use
good judgement, when deciding to evacuate the upper deck using the stairs.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The cabin crew will be responsible for a large number of passengers until they are assisted by the
rescue and emergency services personnel.
When the cabin crew have evacuated the aircraft they must manage the passengers on the ground,
by:
- Assisting passengers away from the slides
- Directing passengers upwind and away from the aircraft
- Keeping passengers away from, fuel , fire and vehicles
- Assembling the passengers and keeping them together
- Enforcing no smoking and prohibiting the use of mobile phones
- Assisting passengers and giving first aid, when necessary
- Making a passenger headcount, if possible.
- Note: Cabin crewmembers seated near a megaphone should consider taking it from the aircraft to
assist with crowd management post evacuation.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The minimum required cabin crewmembers for the A380-800 is 18, two of which should be the
following senior cabin crewmembers:
- 1 Chief Purser, responsible for the entire cabin, and,
- 1 Purser, responsible for the upper deck.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
- On the ground, he/she takes command of operations until rescue units arrive.
F/O - The First Officer, proceeds to the cabin, and helps with passenger evacuation if necessary.
- On ground, helps passengers , and directs them away from the aircraft.
Note: The cockpit crew must check that the cabin is fully evacuated before leaving the aircraft.
● If it is not possible to reach the passenger cabin
The cockpit crew should evacuate the aircraft via the cockpit windows, by using the escape ropes.
On ground, each crewmember must help passengers, and direct them away from the aircraft.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
WARNING When the door is in “ARMED” mode, the residual CABIN PRESSURE visual and
aural warnings will not trigger in order to indicate the cabin differential pressure.
Indications of cabin differential pressure may be:
- Resistance in the door control handle when it is being lifted to the open position,
using normal force, and/or
- A hissing noise around the immediate area.
If circumstances permit, fully lower the door control handle to the closed position.
Notify the flight crew immediately.
● If the door power assist fails the door will not open automatically:
DOOR ...................................................................................................................PUSH TO OPEN
GUST LOCK .................................................................................................... CHECK ENGAGED
SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED .................................................................... VISUAL CHECK
- (AR) For M3L and M3R: Check that the barber pole is fully inflated (The barber pole is fully
inflated when the slide is correctly inflated)
- (AR) For M1L and M1R: In the case of nose up attitude: a slide extension function is provided
and is confirmed, because the DSIP SLIDE NOT READY indicator does NOT come on.
● If the slide does not inflate:
(AR) MIP .........................................................................................................................PRESS
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note: The Cabin Crew must only press the MIP if the slide is not inflated but is fully
deployed.
SLIDE DEPLOYED AND INFLATED..............................................................................CHECK
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ON GROUND EVACUATION
Applicable to: ALL
Note: The order to evacuate is usually given by the flight crew, however, in clearly catastrophic
circumstances any cabin crewmember may initiate an evacuation.
EVACUATION ORDER ...................................................................................................... RECEIVED
ALL CC
“EVACUATE, EVACUATE, SEAT BELTS OFF” ...................................................................... SHOUT
ALL CC
“LEAVE EVERYTHING, HIGH HEELS OFF” ........................................................................... SHOUT
PRIM CC
FRAME ASSIST HANDLE ....................................................................................................... GRASP
PRIM CC
SLIDE ARMED ......................................................................................................................... CHECK
PRIM CC
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS................................................................................................CHECK SAFE
Check through fresnel lens in the observation window to ensure that the slide deployment are is clear
of:
- Fire
- Smoke
- Obstacles
● If outside conditions are unsafe:
PASSENGERS TO NEAREST USABLE EXIT ............................................................. REDIRECT
EXIT ....................................................................................................................................GUARD
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
END OF PROC
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CAPT
CAPTAIN........................................................................................................ BRIEF CHIEF PURSER
1. Nature of the emergency and intentions
2. Time available to prepare the cabin
Note: Synchronize watches, to assist with time management
3. The signal to brace
4. Signal to remain seated (if, an evacuation is not required)
5. Special instructions
CHIEF PURS
CAPTAIN'S BRIEFING............................................................................................. ACKNOWLEDGE
CHIEF PURS
ALL CABIN CREWMEMBERS................................................................................................... BRIEF
ALL CC
DEMONSTRATION POSITIONS ................................................................................................ TAKE
CHIEF PURS
EMERGENCY ANNOUNCEMENT ......................................................................... PERFORM BY PA
The Chief Purser will brief passengers using the PA.
Note: When reading the announcement, the Chief Purser should pause at key points in order to
allow the cabin crewmembers time to demonstrate, and check passenger compliance.
The emergency announcement contains the following information:
- Brace positions
- The location of exits
- Removal of sharp objects
- Review of the safety information card
- Passenger assistance, able bodied passengers.
ALL CC
DEMONSTRATION.............................................................................................................PERFORM
- Demonstrate the information to the passengers as it is being read
- Demonstrate the brace positions
- Use the safety information card to illustrate the information
ALL CC
CABIN ....................................................................................................................................SECURE
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CAPT
CAPTAIN........................................................................................................ BRIEF CHIEF PURSER
1. Nature of the emergency and intentions
2. Time available to prepare the cabin
Note: Synchronize watches, to assist with time management
3. The signal to brace
4. Special instructions
CHIEF PURS
CAPTAINS BRIEFING ............................................................................................. ACKNOWLEDGE
CHIEF PURS
ALL CABIN CREWMEMBERS................................................................................................... BRIEF
ALL CC
DEMONSTRATION POSITIONS ................................................................................................ TAKE
Cabin crewmembers must take their own lifevests. The cabin crewmembers will don their lifevests
during the demonstration.
CHIEF PURS
EMERGENCY ANNOUNCEMENT ......................................................................... PERFORM BY PA
The Chief Purser will brief passengers using the PA.
Note: When reading the announcement, the Chief Purser should pause at key points in order to
allow the cabin crewmembers time to demonstrate, and check passenger compliance.
The emergency announcement contains the following information:
- Lifevests (location and use)
- Brace positions
- The location of exits
- Removal of sharp objects
- Review of the safety information card
- Passenger assistance, able bodied passengers, and assistance in fitting infant lifevests
ALL CC
DEMONSTRATION.............................................................................................................PERFORM
- Demonstrate the information to the passengers as it is being read
- Demonstrate the brace positions
- Use the safety information card to illustrate the information
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ALL CC
CABIN.......................................................................................................................CHECK SECURE
The cabin secure must also include the following items;
- Remove all service equipment ( cups, pillows, headsets etc..) from the cabin
- Secure all galleys (trolleys and containers stowed and latched)
- Switch off galley power
- Lock all lavatory doors
ALL CC
PASSENGERS ........................................................................................................................ ASSIST
- Move and reseat passengers as required.
- Brief ABPs (Able Bodied Passengers)
- Brief passengers assisting unaccompanied minors, elderly and disabled passengers
PRIM CC
SLIDE IN ARMED POSITION...................................................................................................CHECK
Ensure that the area around the exits are free from all obstructions.
M3 PRIM CC
M3 EXIT .......................................................................................................................DISARM SLIDE
UPPER DECK PRIM CC
ABLE BODIED PASSENGERS (ABPs) SEATED AT EXIT........................................................BRIEF
The Able Bodied Passengers (ABP)s seated at the exit will assist the cabin crewmember during the
evacuation. The cabin crewmember will instruct the ABPs to:
- Hold the passengers back from the exit until the cabin crewmember has attached the survival kit to
the slideraft.
ALL CC
CABIN.......................................................................................................................CHECK SECURE
ALL CC
CABIN SECURE COMPLETED............................................ INFORM PURSER OR CHIEF PURSER
ALL CC
DESIGNATED CREW SEAT ............................................................ TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS
CHIEF PURS
CABIN READY........................................................................................................INFORM CAPTAIN
CHIEF PURS
DESIGNATED CREW SEAT ............................................................ TAKE AND SECURE HARNESS
ALL CC
SILENT REVIEW ................................................................................................................ PERFORM
Review evacuation commands, actions, and responsibilities.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ALL CC
BRACE POSITION..................................................................... ADOPT ON CAPTAIN'S COMMAND
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ALL CC
“OPEN SEAT BELTS, SHOES OFF”........................................................................................SHOUT
PRIM CC
SLIDE ARMED..........................................................................................................................CHECK
M3 PRIM CC
M3 DOOR ............................................................................................................................... DISARM
PRIM CC
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................... CHECK SAFE
● If outside are conditions unsafe:
PRIM CC
PASSENGERS TO THE NEAREST USABLE EXIT......................................................REDIRECT
EXIT.................................................................................................................................... GUARD
● If outside conditions are safe:
PRIM CC
DOOR FRAME ASSIST HANDLE..................................................................................GRASP
PRIM CC
DOOR............................................................................................................................... OPEN
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PRIM CC
ASSERTIVE COMMANDS....................................................................................................... SHOUT
“Come this way”, “Leave Everything”, “Two by Two”.
Note: Instruct passengers to “Inflate lifevests” when passengers are leaving the aircraft.
PRIM CC
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT .............................................MONITOR
Ensure that the slideraft is not overloaded.
PRIM CC
ASSIGNED AREA ................................................................................. CHECK FULLY EVACUATED
The cabin crew responsible for the stairs must ensure that the stairs are empty.
ALL CC
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT....................................................................................................... TAKE
Time permitting, each cabin crewmember takes their designated safety and survival equipment
before leaving the aircraft.
ALL CC
LIFEVEST .............................................................................................................................. INFLATE
ALL CC
SLIDERAFT.............................................................................................................................. BOARD
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT................................................................................................................... DISCONNECT
1. Lift the flap
2. Pull the red tab to release the pin
PRIM CC
MOORING LINE............................................................................................................................ CUT
Use the knife located on the slideraft to cut the mooring line.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
WARNING Remove the survival kit BEFORE opening the door. The survival kit cannot be
retrieved once the aircraft door is open.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT DEPLOYED AND INFLATED........................................................... VISUAL CHECK
● If the slideraft does not inflate:
MIP....................................................................................................................................PUSH
PRIM CC
“STAND BACK, STAND BACK”.......................................................................................... SHOUT
Passengers should be held back during the survival kit attachment to protect the person attaching
the survival kit to the slideraft.
PRIM CC
SURVIVAL KIT LANYARD SNAP HOOK ......................................................................... ATTACH
Attach the survival kit lanyard snap hook to the ring on the slideraft.
PRIM CC
SURVIVAL KIT........................................................................................... THROW OVERBOARD
PRIM CC
ASSIST SPACE ............................................................................................................... OCCUPY
PRIM CC
PASSENGER EVACUATION ........................................................................................ EXPEDITE
PRIM CC
“COME THIS WAY, TWO BY TWO, HURRY, .................................................................... SHOUT
Note: Instruct passengers to “Inflate lifevests” when passengers are leaving the aircraft.
PRIM CC
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT........................................MONITOR
Ensure that the slideraft is not overloaded.
PRIM CC
ASSIGNED AREA............................................................................ CHECK FULLY EVACUATED
PRIM CC
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................. TAKE
Time permitting, each cabin crewmember takes their designated safety and survival equipment
before leaving the aircraft.
ALL CC
LIFEVEST ......................................................................................................................... INFLATE
ALL CC
SLIDERAFT ........................................................................................................................ BOARD
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT ............................................................................................................. DISCONNECT
1. Lift the flap located on the side tube.
2. Pull the disconnect handle.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
END OF PROC
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
UNPLANNED DITCHING
Applicable to: ALL
ALL CC
“ OPEN SEAT BELTS, LIFEVESTS ON” ................................................................................. SHOUT
ALL CC
SLIDE ARMED ......................................................................................................................... CHECK
M3 PRIM CC
(AR) M3 DOOR .......................................................................................................................DISARM
PRIM CC
OUTSIDE CONDITIONS................................................................................................CHECK SAFE
● If outside conditions are unsafe:
PRIM CC
PASSENGERS TO THE NEAREST EXIT .................................................................... REDIRECT
EXIT ....................................................................................................................................GUARD
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
PRIM CC
“COME THIS WAY, TWO BY TWO, HURRY, .....................................................................SHOUT
Note: Instruct passengers to “Inflate lifevests” when passengers are leaving the aircraft.
PRIM CC
NUMBER OF PASSENGERS BOARDING THE SLIDERAFT ....................................... MONITOR
Ensure that the slideraft is not overloaded.
PRIM CC
ASSIGNED AREA ............................................................................CHECK FULLY EVACUATED
(AR) The cabin crew responsible for stairs must visually check that stairs are empty.
PRIM CC
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................TAKE
Time permitting, each cabin crewmember takes their designated safety and survival equipment
before leaving the aircraft.
ALL CC
LIFEVEST..........................................................................................................................INFLATE
ALL CC
SLIDERAFT........................................................................................................................ BOARD
PRIM CC
SLIDERAFT..............................................................................................................DISCONNECT
1. Disconnect the electrical connector (main deck doors)
2. Lift the flap
3. Pull the disconnect handle
PRIM CC
MOORING LINE .......................................................................................................................CUT
Use the knife located on the slideraft to cut the mooring line.
END OF PROC
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
HANDLE COVER....................................................................................................................ROTATE
PANEL RELEASE HANDLE .................................................. PUSH AND TURN IN ANY DIRECTION
Note: When the escape panel is unlocked, the locking indicator becomes red.
ESCAPE PANEL............................................................................................KICK TOWARDS CABIN
THROUGH ESCAPE PANEL ............................................................................................EVACUATE
ON HANDS AND KNEES ........................................................................... MOVE TOWARDS CABIN
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Immediately after the Flight Crew informs the Cabin Crew of possible abnormal cabin pressure the
Cabin Crew must apply the following abnormal cabin altitude procedure :
CABIN CREW.........................................................................................................STOP ACTIVITIES
CABIN CREW........................ TAKE DESIGNATED CABIN CREW SEAT AND SECURE HARNESS
CABIN TO COCKPIT COMMUNICATION........................................................................... MAINTAIN
● If cabin depressurization occurs :
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION .............................................................................................APPLY
Note: The Cabin Crew must apply the CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION procedure upon any
indication of CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION (ref. to chapter 14-60 Abnormal/Emergency
procedures).
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
DEPRESSURIZATION WARNINGS
Applicable to: ALL
A loss of pressurization can be slow - in the case of a small air leak - while a rapid or explosive
depressurization occurs suddenly within a few seconds.
In the case of excessive cabin pressure/depressurization indications in the cabin will successively
alert the cabin crew of a pressurization malfunction.
CABIN INDICATIONS
When the cabin altitude reaches > 9 550 ft the following will happen:
- The EXIT signs will come on
- The cabin lighting comes on 100 % ( or CAM assigned value)
- The FASTEN SEAT BELT and NO SMOKING signs come on
Note: In the case of depressurization, the lavatory RETURN TO SEAT signs do not come on,
and the lavatory occupied sign comes on red.
- A pre-recorded announcement is broadcast advising passengers to return to their seats and
fasten their seatbelts (If installed).
● If the flight crew does not communicate with the cabin crew:
CABIN/COCKPIT COMMUNICATION.................................................................... ESTABLISH
When the cabin altitude reaches 13 800 ft the following will happen:
- The oxygen masks will drop down
- The PA volume increases
- The emergency depressurization messages will be broadcast (If installed).
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION
Applicable to: ALL
WARNING Do not remove your oxygen mask until it is safe to do so. Removing your oxygen
during a depressurization may lead to total incapacitation caused by hypoxia.
● If no seat is available:
FIXED OBJECT....................................................................................GRASP AND HOLD ON
When no seat is available, the cabin crew should wedge themselves between passengers and
hold on.
● If the flight crew does not communicate with the cabin crew:
CABIN/COCKPIT COMMUNICATION..........................................................................ESTABLISH
The cabin crew should, as soon as possible, inform the flight crew of the situation by the
appropriate means, and confirm that the flight crew wear their oxygen masks.
● If no reply from the cockpit:
CABIN CREW .................................................................. EQUIP YOURSELF WITH OXYGEN
CABIN CREW ............................................................................................... ENTER COCKPIT
CABIN CREW ............................................ PROVIDE ASSISTANCE TO THE FLIGHT CREW
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note: To prevent crew incapacitation due to hypoxia, the cabin crew must transfer to portable
oxygen, and consider their post decompression oxygen needs. When deciding to remove
oxygen masks, the cabin crew must use good judgement, and must be aware of any
signs of hypoxia.
FLIGHT CREW ................................................................................................................... CHECK
The cabin crewmember nearest to the cockpit should check on the flight crew in case assistance
is needed.
PASSENGERS AND CABIN............................................................................................... CHECK
The cabin crew should check for passenger injuries and damage to the cabin.
FIRST AID AND OXYGEN............................................................................ GIVE AS REQUIRED
CABIN STATUS ................................................................................ REPORT TO FLIGHT CREW
Report the nature of injuries, and the cabin damage to the flight crew.
● If a depressurization occurs:
- A continuous high chime sounds through the Crew Rest Compartment loudspeakers during five
minutes.
- The oxygen masks drop down automatically from the oxygen container, when the cabin altitude
reaches 13 800 ft
The crew rest occupants must proceed as follows:
OXYGEN MASKS ....................................................................................................................DON
SEAT BELT........................................................................................................................FASTEN
CREW REST OCCUPANTS ..................................................................................... STAY INSIDE
● When the flight crew notifies (via PA) that a safe flight level has been reached:
CABIN CREW .........................................................................................RETURN TO THE CABIN
CABIN CREW ....................................................................TRANSFER TO PORTABLE OXYGEN
Note: To prevent crew incapacitation due to hypoxia, the cabin crew must transfer to portable
oxygen, and consider their post decompression oxygen needs. When deciding to remove
oxygen masks, the cabin crew must use good judgement, and must be alert to any signs
of hypoxia.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The primary access to the MDCRC is the MDCRC door located in the main deck compartment.
The Emergency exit is located forward of the MDCRC, on the lower left side.
● If an emergency evacuation of the MDCRC is required and, the primary access of the
MDCRC is blocked:
EMERGENCY EXIT HANDLES............................................................................................. TURN
The handles must be operated in direction of the arrows.
EMERGENCY EXIT PANEL................................................................................................... PULL
EMERGENCY EXIT......................................................................................................EVACUATE
USING HANDS AND KNEES................................................................................... ENTER FCRC
FCRC MAIN ACCESS DOOR ......................................................................................EVACUATE
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
If a cabin crewmember (CC) becomes incapacitated in the Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
(LDCRC), any available cabin crewmember should:
- Inform the Captain
- Broadcast a Passenger Address (PA) announcement to request the medical assistance of a
doctor, nurse, or other medically trained persons.
The LDCRC should not be occupied during takeoff and landing. However, the captain may adopt a
different procedure and decide to let the incapacitated cabin crewmember stay in the LDCRC, if the
landing is not critical.
WARNING In the case of a life-threatening situation, such as smoke or fire, the incapacitated
cabin crewmember must be immediately evacuated from the LDCRC. If it necessary
to evacuate the LDCRC, the any cabin crewmember must obtain help from two cabin
crewmembers, in order to enable access to the Main Deck (MD).
Note: Two cabin crewmembers should be sufficient to safely lift an incapacitated cabin
crewmember up the ladder.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
The evacuation of an incapacitated cabin crewmember from the LDCRC requires that two cabin
crewmembers be on the main deck (outside the hatch) and that two cabin crewmembers be in the
LDCRC to carry the incapacitated cabin crewmember.
CC 1 and 2
- INCAPACITATED CC ............................................................................................................ CARRY
1. CC 1 must carefully:
- Put their left arm under the left armpit of the incapacitated CC
- Hold up the chin of the incapacitated CC
- Put their right arm under the right armpit of the incapacitated CC
- Hold the arms of the incapacitated CC in the crossed position.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Note: These actions help support the head and neck of the incapacitated CC .
2. CC 2 must put their left arm under the knees of the incapacitated CC , in order to support the legs
of the incapacitated CC .
3. CC 1 and 2 must slowly go up in a synchronized manner while carefully holding on to the
incapacitated CC .
4. CC 1 must put their back against the ladder. CC 2 must firmly hold the handrail with their right
hand.
CC 3 and 4
- AT THE ENTRANCE OF THE LDCRC.................................................................................. ASSIST
• CC 3 must wait at the entrance of the LDCRC and keep the door in the open position.
• CC 4 must help ensure access by removing obstacles from the evacuation path, and must provide
general support by ensuring that there is sufficient lighting in the cabin.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
If a cabin crewmember becomes incapacitated in the Lower Deck Crew Rest Compartment
(LDCRC), the available cabin crewmember should:
- Inform the Captain,
- Make a Passenger Address (PA) to request the medical assistance of a doctor, nurse, or other
trained persons.
The LDCRC should not be occupied during takeoff and landing. However, the captain may adopt a
different procedure and decide to let the incapacitated cabin crewmember stay in the LDCRC, if the
landing is not critical.
WARNING In the case of a life- threatening situation, such as smoke or fire, the incapacitated
cabin crewmember must be evacuated immediately. In such cases, the other cabin
crewmember must request that two cabin crewmembers help to clear the access to
the Main Deck MD
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
- The LEAVE COMPARTMENT sign comes on in red on the PSU of each bunk and on the L1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
TURBULENCE MANAGEMENT
Applicable to: ALL
CABIN GUIDELINES
It is important that the cabin crew perform frequent cabin checks and correctly manage the galleys to
ensure safety and reduce the probability of injuries. Therefore, the cabin crew should:
- Check the cabin frequently and ensure that the cabin is kept tidy
- Minimize the amount of service equipment left on galley and bar (when installed) surfaces. When
items must remain available they should be placed inside draws that are easily accessible
- Ensure that galleys are correctly secured and latched after each service/use.
- Ensure that trolleys and equipment should be correctly stowed after use.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
GALLEY AREAS
Light Turbulence Moderate Turbulence Severe Turbulence
- Ensure that trolleys and - Ensure that trolleys and - Set the brakes on all trolleys
galley equipment that is not in galley equipment that is not in that are in use in their current
use are correctly stowed and use are correctly stowed and location
secured secured
- Place jugs/pots of hot
- If the turbulence is expected beverages on the floor
for a long duration, stow and
- The cabin crew must
secure galley items
immediately sit down. Fasten
- Cabin crewmembers working seat belt/harness.
in the galley areas must take WARNING Cabin
their seats when the galley is crew must
secured. not risk
personal
injury by
continuing
service
during
turbulent
conditions
. The
personal
safety of
the cabin
crew is the
priority.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
When turbulence is anticipated the cabin crew will have a certain amount of time before the turbulence
is encountered to secure the cabin and themselves.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
......................................................................................................................................................................
In the event the upper avionics door is detected as not closed, the cabin crew should proceed as
follow :
RESET CHIME Key............................................................................................................. PRESS
The RESET CHIME key is located on the CHECK AVIONICS DOOR pad displayed on the FAPs
door page .
CABIN/COCKPIT COMMUNICATION..........................................................................ESTABLISH
UPPER AVIONIC DOOR...............................................................................CHECK AND CLOSE
CONFIRM CHECK Key ....................................................................................................... PRESS
The CONFIRM CHECK key is located on the CHECK AVIONICS DOOR pad displayed on the
FAPs door page .
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
There are various types of incapacitation. Depending on the type, on the circumstances, and only
after obtaining appropriate medical recommendations, it may be possible to move an incapacitated
person from one deck to another (i.e. from the main deck to the upper deck, or from the upper deck to
the main deck).
The number of people that may be required to move and carry an incapacitated person from one
deck to another will depend on a number of variables (i.e. the size, weight, and general medical
condition of the incapacitated person, the physical strength of the assistants, etc.). However, three to
four people should be sufficient to lift and carry an incapacitated person.
If medical recommendation to move an incapacitated person is obtained, cabin crewmembers should
request help to clear access to the relocation area (i;e. by removing obstacles from the expected path
and stairs, by opening cabin dividers, etc) or cabin crewmembers should request general support (i.e.
to ensure appropriate and sufficient lighting, etc).
CC
PURSERS............................................................................................................................... INFORM
CC
HELP....................................................................................................................................REQUEST
CC
RELOCATION AREA........................................................ DETERMINE AND ESTIMATE DISTANCE
CC
OBSTACLES .........................................................................................................................REMOVE
“LIFT POSITION” ......................................................................................................................ADOPT
SIGNAL TO START LIFTING .......................................................................................................GIVE
INCAPACITATED PERSON ....................................................................................LIFT CAREFULLY
INCAPACITATED PERSON ................. CAREFULLY CARRY AND MOVE TO RELOCATION AREA
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
CAUTION It takes two people to move an unconscious body from a flight crew seat, in order
to prevent damage or interference to the cockpit controls.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
BOMB ON BOARD
Applicable to: ALL
WARNING Do not cut or disconnect any wires Do not attempt to gain entry to internal
components of a closed or sealed suspect device. Any attempt may result in an
explosion. Booby-trapped closed devices have been used on aircraft in the past.
WARNING Alternative Least Risk Bomb Locations LRBL must not be used without consulting
with an aviation explosives security specialist. Never take a suspect device to the
cockpit.
CAUTION (AR) The Least Risk Bomb Location LRBL for the A380 is located at the center of
the M5R cabin door.
For aircraft equipped with crew rest areas (Main Deck and Lower Deck).
PORTABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICES....................................................................... SWITCH OFF
The cabin crews must command passengers to switch off all portable electronic devices.
BOMB ........................................................................................... CHECK NO ANTI-LIFT DEVICE
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
To check for an anti-lift switch or lever, slide a string or stiff card (such as the emergency
information card) under the bomb, without disturbing the bomb.
If the string or card cannot be slipped under the bomb, it may indicate that an anti-lift switch or
lever is present and that the bomb cannot be moved.
If a card is used and can be slid under the bomb, leave it under the bomb and move together with
the bomb.
If it is not possible to move the bomb, then it should be covered with a single thin sheet of plastic
(e.g. trash bag), then with wetted materials, and other blast attenuation materials such as seat
cushions and soft baggage. Move personnel as far away from the bomb location as possible.
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT........................................................................REMOVE AND STOW
Emergency equipment (PBE, fire extinguisher, ...) located close to the LRBL must be removed
and stowed in alternate location.
GALLEY/IFE POWER ...............................................................................................................OFF
All galley and IFE equipment located close to the LRBL must be switched off.
● If the bomb can be moved
(AR) M5R CABIN DOOR ..............................................................................................DISARM
LEAST RISK BOMB LOCATION (LRBL)...................................................................PREPARE
Build up a platform of baggage out to the aisle, from the floor up to the mid - height of the door
at the LRBL. Wetted material for example, blankets or clothes, should make up the last 10
inches ( 25 cm) of this platform.
Place a single, thin sheet of plastic for example, a trash bag, on top of the wetted materials.
CAUTION Do not omit the plastic sheets, as the suspect device could get wet and possibly
short circuit electronic components causing inadvertent device activation.
WARNING Do not physically tie or otherwise attach the bomb location indicator line to the
bomb.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
BOMB...............................................................................................................MOVE TO LRBL
Move it in the position found to the prepared LRBL base with the card in place beneath it.
Stabilize it on top of the plastic sheet above the 10 inches (25 cm) of wetted materials and
center it against the inside surface of the door.
Position the bomb in the attitude found, as close to the center of the LRBL door.
WARNING If the bomb is located on the upper deck, DO NOT transport the bomb to the
main deck using the trolley lift.
CAUTION Ensure that when the suspect device, when placed in the stack against the
door, is above the slide pack but NOT against the door handle, and if possible,
avoid placement in the viewport..
CAUTION Do not omit the plastic sheets, as the suspect device could get wet and possibly
short circuit electronic components causing inadvertent device activation.
Saturate soft blast -attenuating materials for example, blankets or clothes, with water or any
other nonflammable liquid and carefully pack at least 10 inches (25 cm) of wetted material
around and on top of the bomb.
Arrange luggage and blast attenuating materials in a manner that prevents excessive weight
from being applied directly in the bomb, and fill the entire the entire remaining area above the
bomb with soft blast-attenuating materials, for example, seat cushions up to the cabin ceiling
and out to the aisle.
LRBL ........................................................................................................................... SECURE
Secure the LRBL stack in place using seat belts, headset cords, ties, or other appropriate
materials.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
LRBL Stack
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
REJECTED TAKEOFF
Applicable to: ALL
In the event of a rejected takeoff, the cabin crew should proceed as follows:
CABIN CREW...........................................................REMAIN SEATED WITH HARNESS SECURED
The cabin crew must remain seated in their crew seats, until the aircraft comes to a complete stop.
COCKPIT CREW INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................WAIT FOR AND FOLLOW
● If the cabin crew suspects or notices the development of an emergency situation (based
on passenger reactions, smoke, noises, odors, aircraft attitude,...)
CABIN CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................ASSESS
When the aircraft comes to a complete stop, and if necessary, the cabin crew can leave crew
seats to further assess any conditions and/or passenger reactions.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
After ditching, in the case that one of the main deck doors at M1, M2, M4, or M5 is inoperative, the
sliderafts can be carried to the opposite door and launched as a raft.
Release and reattachment instructions are visible when the decorative cover has been removed. The
quick release girt bars installed on main deck doors, M1, M2, M4, and M5 will facilitate the portability
features.
Note: The slideraft portability instructions are written on each slide pack. Follow the steps of the
procedure according to the slide location.
SLIDERAFT TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE DOORS M1 AND M2
1. Remove the decorative cover
2. Remove the hinge flap safety pin from the stowage pouch
3. Insert the hinge flap safety pin fully into the release mechanism
4. Disengage the upper packboard latch
5. Rotate the pack inboard and lift the pack free from the door
6. Disconnect the electrical connector
7. Disarm the door
8. Pull portability pins
9. Transport the slide to the opposite door position
Note: Once the slide pack is placed at the opposite door, proceed with the remainder of the
procedure.
10.Push the girt bar hooks down and remove the girt bar
11.Put the girt bar into the floor fittings
12.Pull the hinge flap safety pin out
13.Pull the hinge flap release cable
14.Lift the packboard from the slide
15.Verify the harness is inboard and clear of entanglements
16.Connect the harness to the portability connector
17.Turn the slide into the water
CAUTION Before deploying the transported main deck sliderafts, ensure that the upper deck
sliderafts are detached from the aircraft,
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
In case of an emergency, the single-blade lavatory door may be unlocked from the cabin.
LAVATORY SIGN COVER ............................................................................................................LIFT
The spring-loaded lavatory sign cover is located above the door's VACANT/OCCUPIED indicator
KNOB.................................................................................................................. SLIDE TO THE SIDE
Sliding the knob to the side will unlock the lavatory door, and the indicator will show: “VACANT”.
LAVATORY DOOR........................................................................................................... PULL OPEN
● If the lavatory door still does not open:
UPPER AND LOWER OUTSIDE LATCHES OF THE DOOR .......................................... UNLOCK
LAVATORY DOOR...................................................................................................... PULL OPEN
In case of an emergency, the bi-folding lavatory door may be unlocked from the cabin.
LAVATORY SIGN COVER ............................................................................................................LIFT
The spring-loaded lavatory sign cover is located above the door's VACANT/OCCUPIED indicator
KNOB.................................................................................................................. SLIDE TO THE SIDE
Sliding the knob to the side will unlock the lavatory door, and the indicator will show: “VACANT”.
LAVATORY DOOR.......................................................................................................... PUSH OPEN
● If the lavatory door still does not open:
Upper and lower latches of the lavatory door ................................................................... UNLOCK
LAVATORY DOOR...................................................................................................... PULL OPEN
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
A planned ground evacuation can be defined as an evacuation that enables the cabin crew to review
procedures, and to inform and prepare passengers for an emergency landing. The cabin crew provide
passengers with brace instructions, guidance on exit usage, and information on how and when exits
should be operated. Effective communication between the crewmembers and the passengers is
necessary for a timely, effective and orderly response.
EMERGENCY CHECKLIST
Emergency checklists are useful tools that enable cabin crew to prepare the cabin for a planned
emergency. They contain all the steps required to prepare the cabin for an emergency and list the
steps to be completed in order of priority.
Many Operators have developed checklists in the form of laminated cards that are distributed to each
cabin crew, or are stowed near the cabin crew stations and are readily accessible to the cabin crew.
Emergency checklists are designed to provide support to cabin crew in a planned emergency, and to
help them complete all the necessary steps without forgetting anything. Emergency checklists should
be short and consistent.
EMERGENCY CHECKLIST CONTENTS
THE BRACE POSITION
The brace position is essential when preparing passengers for an emergency landing. Reviewing
the brace position during the emergency passenger briefing will help to ensure that passengers are
in the correct brace position for landing.
The brace position has a dual function: First of all, it reduces body movement, as passengers must
lean or bend over their legs. Secondly, it protects passengers from hitting their head on a hard
surface.
This position must be adapted if the seat is:
- Facing a seat back or a bulkhead
- Forward facing or aft-facing with a safety belt and a shoulder harness (crewmember seats only).
It must also be adapted if passengers are obese, pregnant or traveling with infants.
Against a bulkhead
Pregnant lady
It must be emphasized to passengers that they should expect more than one impact.
Passengers must remain in the brace position until the aircraft comes until a complete stop.
Once the brace position has been explained, the next step is to inform the passengers when to
assume the brace position, for example:
“When you hear the cabin crew shouting “Brace , Brace”, this will be your signal to take the brace
position, you must remain in this position until the aircraft has come to a complete stop”.
EMERGENCY EXIT LOCATION
The cabin crew must indicate the location of all the emergency exits and the floor path lighting to
the passengers.
LOOSE ITEMS
All loose items must be secured as they may be projected into the cabin during landing causing
injury or impeding access to exits.
Items to be stowed and secured include:
- Carry-on baggage
- Handbags
- Laptops
- Briefcases.
All of these items must be placed in an overhead bin, closet or under a seat.
High-heeled shoes and sharp objects must also be removed, as they may cause damage to the
slide during an evacuation. In addition, these objects must not be stowed in seat pockets, since
they may injure passengers when they take the brace position.
Continued on the next page
Seat pockets should only be used to stow small objects, such as pens and eyeglasses. Cabin crew
should also remove items such as pens, badges and wing pins from their uniforms.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR A PLANNED GROUND EVACUATION
PLANNED GROUND EVACUATION BRIEFING
In any type of unusual, abnormal or emergency situation, crew communication and co-ordination
play a vital role. It is important that information is shared amongst the entire crew. Successful
evacuations are dependent on effective communication among the flight crew, the cabin crew and
the passengers.
It is important for Operators to establish procedures in order to ensure that adequate guidance is
provided to both flight crew and cabin crew on how to conduct abnormal and emergency briefings.
For example, if the flight crew need to inform the cabin crew of an emergency, there may be a
specific signal to alert the cabin, such as:
• A series of chimes
• A specific PA: i.e. “Purser to cockpit”.
These specific actions alert the other crewmembers that there is an emergency situation. When the
cabin crew hear the signal, this indicates that an emergency situation exists, and that they must
start to secure equipment. Cabin crew should be ready, at their stations, to be briefed by the Purser
via the interphone.
THE FLIGHT CREW TO PURSER BRIEFING
The flight crew should brief the Purser in a clear, precise and concise manner.
The briefing should provide the Purser with the following information:
- Nature of emergency (landing or ditching)
- Time available to prepare the cabin (the cabin and flight crew should synchronize watches to
assist with time management)
- What the brace signal will be
- Signal to remain seated (if no evacuation is required)
- Special instructions/other information
- Who will inform the passengers and when (flight crew or Purser).
THE PURSER TO CABIN CREW BRIEFING
The Purser must take note of the time in order to manage the time available for the emergency
briefing. A certain amount of time is allocated to each task on the checklist. The Purser will need to
closely monitor the time in order to accomplish as many tasks on the checklists, as time permits.
The extent of the cabin preparation will depend on the time available. The steps of the cabin
preparation should be completed in the order of their importance.
Continued on the next page
The Purser will relay the information provided by the flight crew to all of the cabin crew and
then instruct them to:
- Take their emergency checklists
- Take their emergency briefing position
- Be prepared for the emergency announcement and demonstration.
THE CABIN CREW TO PASSENGER BRIEFING
For psychological reasons, it is advised that the flight crew make the initial announcement.
However, due to the high workload in the cockpit during an emergency, the Purser may be required
to make the announcement.
The Purser must inform the passengers about:
- The nature of the emergency
- The need to prepare the cabin
- The need for passengers to follow the cabin crew instructions.
Before the emergency demonstration begins, the cabin crew must ensure that:
- The cabin dividers are open
- The lighting is on full bright
- The entertainment system is switched off
The cabin crew should be ready to demonstrate the emergency briefing in their assigned area.
In order to conduct an effective briefing, the cabin crew must not distract the passenger’s attention
from the briefing.
Some helpful tips include
- Remain in the assigned area
- Ensure all passengers can see the demonstration
- Do not talk during the announcement
- Coordinate the demonstration with the announcement.
When reading the announcement, the Purser should speak slowly and clearly, and remember to
pause at key points. This will enable cabin crewmembers to perform the demonstration, and verify
passenger compliance.
THE SIGNAL TO EVACUATE
The flight crew will initiate the evacuation by using the PA to make an appropriate announcement,
such as: “Evacuate, Evacuate”, and then pressing the EVAC COMMAND pushbutton.
Note: Preparing the cabin for an emergency does not always result in an evacuation. If the flight
crew decide that no evacuation is required, they may announce: “Passengers and crew
remain seated”.
Continued on the next page
Cabin crew must be assertive in order to ensure that passengers remain seated, and that
they follow all instructions.
THE CABIN EVACUATION PROCESS
The evacuation must begin immediately upon receiving the evacuation signal.
Positive, assertive action from the cabin crew will directly impact the rate and flow of passenger
movement to the exits and down the slides. The commands used by the cabin crew are an essential
part of the evacuation process.
Commands should be:
- Assertive
- Short
- Loud
- Clear
- Well-placed
- Positive.
The following are of some of the commands that are used during the evacuation of:
- ‘ Seatbelts off '
- ‘Leave everything’
- ‘Come this way’
- ‘Hurry, hurry’
- ‘Jump and slide’
- ‘Two by Ttwo’ (dual lane slide).
During the evacuation, the cabin crew must:
- Monitor the flow of the evacuation. Be aware of congestion in the cabin, and at the bottom of the
slide
- Be alert to situations developing during the evacuation, for example slide damage or a fire that
would make it impossible to use the exit
- Be prepared to re-direct passengers to other exits if necessary.
POST-EVACUATION
The majority of emergency evacuations happen at, or near, an airport. While the crewmembers are
evacuating the aircraft, the Airport Emergency Plan (AEP) is implemented. This plan consists of
deploying emergency services such as Airport Rescue Fire Fighting, ambulances and police to the
scene.
The crewmembers are responsible for the passengers until they are relieved by the rescue
services.
Continued on the next page
They must carry out the following actions to ensure passenger safety:
- Assist passengers away from the slides
- Direct the passengers away from fuel, fire and vehicles
- Assist in marshalling passengers to a safe area upwind, away from the aircraft
- Keep passengers together and complete a headcount
- Treat injured passengers, and give first aid, if necessary
- Enforce a NO SMOKING policy.
Crewmembers should also receive training and survival information according to regions,
such as:
- Desert areas
- Tropical areas
- Polar regions
- Mountainous areas.
FACTORS AFFECTING ADHERENCE TO THE OPERATIONAL STANDARDS
Analysis of in-service events reveals that the operational standards can be ineffective or
non-applicable due to the following reasons:
Incorrect application of the procedure:
• An inappropriate person is seated at an overwing exit.
Lack of training and familiarity with procedures:
• Cabin Crew lack sufficient assertiveness when ordering passengers to exit the aircraft
• Cabin crew do not use the manual inflation handle when the slide does not automatically inflate.
Lack of procedures:
• The Operator provides inadequate procedures and guidelines for planned emergencies
• The Operator does not give specific briefings to passengers seated at overwing exits.
Ineffective cabin crew communication with the passengers:
• Passengers do not adopt the brace position or the correct brace position when the cabin crew shout
the commands.
Ineffective cabin crew communication with the flight crew:
• The flight crew do not inform the Purser how much the time is available to prepare the cabin.
Therefore, the cabin crew are not aware of the time constraints and unable to prioritize the checklist
tasks
• The flight crew decide not to perform the evacuation. However, the cabin crew do not hear the order
to ‘remain seated’, and shout the evacuation commands
• The brace signal given by the flight crew, is too early, is not heard or comes too late. Therefore,
cabin crew and passengers are sitting upright upon impact.
Continued on the next page
PREVENTION STRATEGIES
It is impossible to prevent an unexpected event such as a ground evacuation. However, if an
evacuation is required, it is possible to take preventive steps that will help in achieving an efficient
evacuation:
• Effective communication and coordination between the flight and cabin crew is crucial when an
emergency event occurs
• Training should ensure that crewmembers are proficient in the use of emergency evacuation
procedures, commands and crowd control. Cabin crew should be trained on the location, function and
operation of each piece of emergency equipment onboard the aircraft
• Cabin crew should verify that the passengers seated at exit rows will be able to assist the cabin crew,
in the case of an emergency.
Individual briefings provided to passengers seated at exit rows have two benefits:
• Firstly, it provides passengers with the opportunity to ask the cabin crew questions
• Secondly, it enables the cabin crew to ensure that the passengers seated at the exit rows
understand the language in which the cabin crew will give their commands and are capable of
opening the exit in the case of an emergency
Attract passengers’ attention during the safety demonstration by making eye contact with as many
passengers as possible
Draw passengers’ attention to the safety card, and emphasize that a review of the safety card is
important, because it contains additional safety information.
INTRODUCTION
The primary responsibility of the cabin crew during an evacuation is to direct passengers to evacuate
the aircraft using all of the available exits. The aim of an evacuation is to ensure that passengers and
crewmembers leave the aircraft as rapidly and as safely as possible.
Many factors contribute to the successful evacuation of the aircraft:
• The procedural knowledge of the cabin crew: This includes training, experience and behavior
• The environment inside and outside the aircraft (e.g., the presence of smoke, fire, the cabin lighting
and outside conditions)
• The passengers’ behavior, age, level of fitness and motivation
• The aircraft configuration and the layout of the cabin.
During an emergency, it is essential for the cabin crew to be able to apply their knowledge of
procedures and rapidly adapt to the situation.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR AN UNPLANNED GROUND EVACUATION
THE SILENT REVIEW
The use of the Silent Review, Or the 30 s review , is excellent tool that the cabin crew can use to
prepare for the unexpected. The Silent Review helps the cabin crew focus their attention duties and
responsibilities and on safety.
The cabin crew should perform the Silent Review during the takeoff and landing phases of flight.
This review helps the cabin crew prepare themselves and enables them to react rapidly.
The Silent Review should contain all of the elements needed to review evacuation duties and
responsibilities. It may include, but is not limited to,
the following subjects:
BRACE COMMANDS
The brace command is the first and most important instruction that cabin crew must provide to
passengers in an unplanned emergency. The purpose of instructing passengers to take the brace
position is to reduce injuries during impact, in order to increase the chances of survival.
The brace position has two functions: Firstly, it reduces the extent of body movement, due to the
fact that passengers must lean or bend over their legs. Secondly, it protects passengers from hitting
their head on a hard surface.
When the cabin crew use the brace commands it is important that all of the passengers seated in
the cabin can hear and understand the commands. If the commands are not synchronized
(particularly on smaller aircraft, when the cabin crew are seated close together), the commands
may not be audible, and therefore may not be understood by the passengers. This can lead to
confusion among the passengers.
EXAMPLE Brace commands are: ‘Heads down’, ‘Stay down’, or ‘Heads down, feet back’.
EXAMPLE Possible commands are ‘Open seatbelts, leave everything’ , ‘Open seatbelts, no
baggage’
The cabin crew can also include this information in the passenger pre-flight safety briefing in order
to reinforce the message, i.e.: ‘If an emergency evacuation is necessary, leave all your
belongings behind’.
POST-EVACUATION RESPONSIBILITIES
When the cabin crew are outside the aircraft, they are responsible for the passengers until they are
relieved by the emergency services or by the authorities.
The cabin crew should perform the following actions to ensure passenger safety:
- Direct passengers upwind and away from the aircraft
- Assemble passengers and keep them together
- Direct passengers away from fuel, fire and vehicles
- Assist passengers and provide first aid, if necessary
- Enforce a NO SMOKING policy
- Make a passenger headcount, if possible.
PASSENGER SAFETY BRIEFINGS
Safety briefings should focus the passengers’ attention on safety, and make passengers aware that it
is in their interest to pay attention.
When introducing a safety briefing, the cabin crew can increase passenger awareness by using
phrases such as ‘For your safety’ or ‘As your safety is important to us’.
The cabin crew should emphasize the importance of:
• Listening to or watching the safety briefing
• Being aware of the location and use of safety equipment: i.e. safety cards, exits and seatbelts
When cabin crew are required to perform a safety demonstration, they must speak slowly and clearly
on the PA and pause at key points during the announcement to give the cabin crew sufficient time to
demonstrate.
The cabin crew should be animated and try to make eye contact with as many passengers as possible
in order to attract the passengers attention to the safety briefing. This also applies to the cabin crew
when they provide audiovisual safety presentations. When using an audiovisual presentation, the
cabin crew should take their positions in the cabin and point to the exits.
FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL STANDARDS
Analysis of in-service events reveal that operational standards may not be effective or applicable in the
following situations:
A procedure is not applied correctly:
- Cabin crew are not at their designated exit during takeoff and landing or leave the exit unattended
Cabin crew training is not sufficient:
- The cabin crew do not have the skills to efficiently evacuate an aircraft
- The cabin crew lack training in crew communication and coordination skills
Continued on the next page
INTRODUCTION
Turbulence is the leading cause of injury to passengers and cabin crew in non-fatal accidents.
Initiatives can be taken to reduce turbulence-related injuries, with little or no financial cost to the
operator.
The aim of this Operational Awareness is to:
Increase cabin crew awareness of the hazards of turbulence
Provide strategies to enable the cabin crew to effectively manage the cabin during turbulence
Help cabin crew to ensure safety in the cabin and reduce turbulence-related injuries.
BACKGROUND INFORMATION
Injuries to cabin crew during turbulence occur much more frequently than turbulence-related injuries to
passengers, because cabin crew are constantly working in the cabin.
IATA, Safety Trend Evaluation, Analysis and Data Exchange System (STEADES) performed a study of
turbulence-related injuries to cabin crew.
Analysis revealed that from January 1st 2004 to December 31st 2004 there were 232 reported cases of
turbulence-related injuries to cabin crew and that:
- 64 % of the injuries were due to cabin crew not being secured during turbulence
- 44 % of the injuries occurred in the galley
- 9 % of these incidents resulted in serious injury to cabin crew.
In the majority of these cases, cabin crew were lifted off the floor, or lost their balance, resulting in foot,
ankle and back/spinal injuries. Other cabin crew injuries were due to loose items in the cabin, such as
trolleys.
TURBULENCE DEFINITIONS
The levels of turbulence are defined and described as follows:
LIGHT TURBULENCE:
Light turbulence momentarily causes slight, erratic changes in the aircraft altitude or attitude:
• Passengers may feel a slight strain against seat belts
• Liquids are shaking but are not splashing out of cups
• Trolleys can be maneuvered with little difficulty.
MODERATE TURBULENCE:
Moderate turbulence, causes rapid bumps or jolts:
• Passengers feel definite strain against seat belts
Continued on the next page
POST TURBULENCE
Refer to 14-80 Post Turbulence Duties
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN A TURBULENCE ENCOUNTER
Analysis of in-service events has revealed that the operational standards are not always effective or
applied.
For example:
- The cabin crew do not follow the flight crew instructions to be seated during turbulence
- The cabin crew do not have sufficient training to understand the hazards associated with turbulence
- Communication between the flight crew and the cabin crew is not effective: The cabin crew and the
flight crew do not use the same terminology, resulting in information that is not accurate which may
lead to errors in communication
- Ineffective communication with passengers: The cabin crew do not stress to passengers the
importance of complying with the seat belt sign during turbulence.
TURBULENCE-RELATED INJURIES - PREVENTION STRATEGIES
Operators can apply the following prevention strategies in order to help reduce the risk of
turbulence-related injuries:
• Develop Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs), that include:
- Communication between the flight crew, the cabin crew and passengers
- Specific procedures for anticipated and sudden turbulence encounters
- The duties of the cabin crew before, during and after a turbulence encounter.
• Emphasize the importance of the flight crew and cabin crew preflight briefing, that should include
the following subjects:
- Anticipated areas of turbulence during the flight
- The importance of keeping the flight crew informed of the conditions in the cabin.
• Use standard terminology (Light, Moderate, Severe) when referring to the level of a turbulence
encounter to ensure that all cabin crew and flight crew understand the meaning and the required
actions
• Encourage the use of seat belts. During the after takeoff passenger announcement, the cabin crew
should advise passengers to use their seat belts during the flight, and request that passengers
keep their seat belts fastened at all times when seated.
• Provide effective training for cabin crew on how to increase their personal safety and passenger
safety during turbulence
• Increase cabin crew awareness regarding the use and location of handrails throughout the cabin, or
equipment that cabin crew could use to hold on to in the event of turbulence
• Train cabin crew to effectively use the PA system and other types of communication with
passengers during turbulence to ensure safety.
INTRODUCTION
Aircraft have cabin air systems that control pressurization, airflow, air filtration and temperature. The
purpose of these systems is to provide a safe and comfortable cabin environment and to protect all
cabin occupants from the physiological risks associated with depressurization at high altitudes.
In the case of a depressurization, there is a risk that not enough oxygen will be supplied to the body.
This condition, hypoxia (lack of oxygen), is the greatest threat to both crewmembers and passengers.
The objectives of this guidance are therefore to:
- Review the different types of depressurization
- Enhance cabin and flight crew awareness of the importance of rapidly taking appropriate action to
successfully manage depressurization.
TYPES OF DEPRESSURIZATION
The risk of a pressurized cabin is the potential for cabin depressurization. This can occur due to a
pressurization system malfunction or damage to the aircraft that results in a break in the aircraft
structure or the loss of a window. This causes cabin air to escape outside the aircraft.
The loss of pressurization can be slow - in case of a small air leak - while a Rapid or Explosive
depressurization occurs suddenly, usually within a few seconds.
The consequences of depressurization and its impact on cabin occupants depends on a number of
factors including:
• The size of the cabin:
• The damage to the aircraft structure: The larger the opening, the faster the depressurization time
• The pressure differential: The greater the pressure differential between the cabin pressure and
the external environmental pressure, the more forceful the depressurization.
When cabin pressure decreases, the cabin occupants are no longer protected from the dangers of high
altitudes and there is an increased risk of hypoxia, depressurization, illness and hypothermia. It is,
therefore, important that cabin crew recognize the different types of depressurization and react
effectively to overcome the difficulties associated with a loss in cabin pressure.
RAPID OR EXPLOSIVE DEPRESSURIZATION
Rapid/Explosive depressurization results in a sudden loss in cabin pressure and can be
recognized by the following signs:
- A loud bang, thump or clap that is the result of the sudden contact between the internal and
external masses of air
- Cloud of fog or misting in the cabin that is due to the drop in temperature and the change of
humidity
Continued on the next page
It is necessary to remember that each person may not react in the same way and that the
symptoms of hypoxia may manifest themselves differently in each individual.
- Emotional State
- Amount of activity.
The cabin crew must remember that in cases of continued physical activity, the time of useful
consciousness (Table 1) is significantly reduced.
The Time of Useful Consciousness
It is important to emphasize that this table is only a guideline, and provides average values that can
increase or decrease, depending on the skills needed to accomplish a task, on the individual’s
health, and on the amount of activity. For example, the time of useful consciousness for cabin crew
involved in moderate activity is significantly less compared to a passenger that is sitting quietly
The following are some other factors that can contribute to reducing the time of useful
consciousness:
- Fatigue: A person who is physically or mentally fatigued will have an increased risk of hypoxia
- Physical effort: During physical activity, there is an increased need for oxygen, an increased
risk of hypoxia and, as a result, a decrease in the amount of useful consciousness time
- Alcohol: Alcohol can significantly affect behavior and can increase the risk of hypoxia in
addition to aggravating some of the behavioral changes resulting from hypoxia.
CABIN DEPRESSURIZATION
IMMEDIATE ACTIONS
In the case of depressurization the immediate use of oxygen is critical.
Therefore, the first actions to be performed by the cabin crew are:
• Immediately don the nearest oxygen mask
• Sit down fasten seat belt, or grasp a fixed object
• If the Flight Crew did not communicate with the cabin crew , the cabin crew should as
soon as possible, by the most appropriate means, contact the flight crew and confirm
that the flight crew are wearing their oxygen masks
Refer to 14-60 Cabin Depressurization
If the cabin crew cannot sit down or grasp a fixed object, they should wedge themselves between
passengers and ask passengers for assistance. For example, in one cabin depressurization event,
a cabin crew was saved from ejection out of the aircraft because a passenger was holding on to the
cabin crew's ankle.
The priority of the cabin crew is to consider their personal safety.
POST DEPRESSURIZATION
When advised by the flight crew that a safe altitude has been reached, the cabin crew should transfer
to the portable oxygen cylinders and consider their post depressurization oxygen needs.
When deciding to remove their oxygen masks, cabin crew must use good judgment and be alert to any
signs of hypoxia.
After cabin Depressurization, the cabin crew should:
- Check on the flight crew, and be prepared to assist in the case of pilot incapacitation
- Check passengers for any injuries
- Check the cabin for any damage
- Provide first-aid and oxygen, as necessary
- Report the cabin status to the flight crew.
OXYGEN SYSTEMS
When the cabin altitude reaches 14 000 ft , the oxygen masks stored above the passenger seats, in
the lavatories, galleys, and crew stations will deploy automatically. The oxygen mask system can also
be deployed manually by the flight crew.
A minimum of two oxygen masks are stowed in each Passenger Service Unit (PSU). Each mask has a
lanyard attached to a pull pin. Pulling one mask will remove the pin and activate the flow of oxygen to
all the masks in the unit
The type of oxygen is available on the aircraft:
Continued on the next page
INTRODUCTION
It is important that cabin crew are aware of indications of smoke, respond to them appropriately and
report them to the flight crew. All crewmembers must take any report of smoke in the cabin seriously.
They must immediately identify the source of smoke and take the appropriate action in order to
significantly minimize the risk of fire onboard the aircraft.
It is wise to treat a smoke occurrence as potential fire, until it has been proven otherwise.
The cabin crews must remember that the development of an odor, or smoke, takes some time before it
can be detected.
However only communicate ‘Smoke’ if that is what has been seen – do not mention ‘Fire’ if no flames
are visible.
Additional information on how to deal with in-flight fire events is provided in :
- Refer to 14-100-50 Managing In-Flight Fires
- Refer to 14-20 Awareness to Smoke and Fires in Hidden Areas
BACKGROUND INFORMATION
Analysis of in-service events involving smoke in the cabin has shown:
• Cases where the cabin crew detected the source of smoke easily
• Cases where the cabin crew detected the source of smoke with difficulty.
In most cases, the cabin crew reported that the source of smoke was easily identified.
The following are the areas where the cabin crewmembers can easily detect the source of
smoke:
• Galley equipment (ovens, coffeemakers) represented the most common source of smoke
• Cabin equipment (i.e. a seat screen or seat control malfunction)
• Lavatories.
The following are the areas where the cabin crewmembers can easily detect the source of
smoke:
• Galley equipment (ovens, coffeemakers) represented the most common source of smoke
• Cabin equipment (i.e. a seat screen or seat control malfunction)
• Lavatories.
Smoke coming from the above areas may be attributed to:
• The Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
• Cabin recirculation fans
• Cargo compartments
• Crew Rest Compartments
Continued on the next page
• Electrical wiring
• Engine Air Bleed.(e.g Bird ingestion, ....)
Sometimes human error is a contributing factor to some smoke occurrences, such as:
• Putting a flammable item in an oven (e.g. plastic wrapping left on food during the cooking cycle, …)
• Leaving an empty coffeemaker on a hot plate
• Placing a flammable item close to a source of heat (e.g. plastic cups next to a hot oven)
• Forgetting to complete a pre-flight check of the ovens for cleanliness (i.e. papers or food grease left
in the oven)
• Smoking in the lavatories.
If it is not possible for the cabin crew to immediately detect the source of smoke, the following
consequences may occur:
• Fire
• Emergency evacuation
• Hospitalization of cabin crew and/or passengers due to smoke inhalation
• Flight delays, In-flight turn back, diversions.
Re-engaging a tripped circuit breaker may cause more electrical damage and increase the risk of
damage to other equipment.
The cabin crewmembers must never use circuit breakers as ON/OFF switches for
equipment.
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN THE DETECTION OF SMOKE
When smoke is detected in the cabin, the cabin crew must immediately try to identify the source.
Some areas are equipped with smoke detection devices which will alert both the flight crew and the
cabin crew when smoke is detected.
SMOKE DETECTORS
There is a smoke detector in all lavatories. If smoke enters into the measuring chamber of a smoke
detector, a visual and aural warning is transmitted to the cabin and cockpit.
VISUAL INDICATIONS IN THE CABIN
Visual indicators appear on the following systems in order to notify to the cabin crew that smoke is
detected:
- All Attendant Indication Panels (AIP)
- The applicable Area Call Panel (ACP)
- The associated lavatory wall light
- The Forward Attendant Panel (FAP).
- The Additional Attendant Panel (AAP)
AURAL INDICATIONS IN THE CABIN
The following aural indicators will simultaneously trigger, with the visual indicators:
- A repetitive chime from all the cabin loudspeakers
- A repetitive chime from all attendant station loudspeakers.
HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN THE DETECTION OF SMOKE (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS)
The cabin crew must also use their senses (Hearing, Touch, Smell, Vision) to detect smoke.
Sometimes, the cabin crew may not see any smoke, but may recognize such indications as:
- An abnormal noise in the cabin
- An abnormally warm surface
- An unusual odor.
When trying to find the source of smoke, the cabin crew should use the
Sense of Touch back of their hands to check the temperature and/or heat of the various
panels and/or doors.
The different panels (Attendant Indication Panels, Area Call Panel…)
Sense of Vision located throughout the cabin will help the cabin crew to detect the presence
of smoke in the aircraft.
Sense of Smell The following abnormal odors may indicate the presence of smoke
Descriptions of
odors Primary cause (Most Reported listed First )
Electrical Equipment/IFE
Acrid Chemical
Engine Oil Leak
Electrical Equipment
Burning Galley Equipment
Bird Ingestion
Contaminated Bleed Cuts
Chemical
APU Ingestion
Smoke hood
Chlorine
Blocked Door Area Drain
Electrical Electrical Equipment
Dirty Socks APU or Engine Oil Leaks
Foul Lavatories
Fuel APU FCU/Fuel Line
Oil Engine or APU oil Leak
Skydrol Engine Hydraulic
Wiring
Sulphur Avionics Filter Water Contamination
Light Bulb
INTRODUCTION
An in-flight fire is probably the most serious in-flight emergency and must be brought under control as
soon as possible. Considering the crucial role that time plays in this type of emergency, it is imperative
that no time is lost when attempting to extinguish the fire.
STATISTICAL DATA – BACKGROUND INFORMATION
A study conducted by the Transportation Safety Board of Canada revealed that the average elapsed
time between the discovery of an in-flight fire and the actual landing of the aircraft is 17 minutes.
Any fire, no matter how small, may rapidly become out of control, if not dealt with quickly.
The first priority will always be TO PUT IT OUT.
BASIC FIRE CHEMISTRY
To enable cabin crew to effectively fight an in-flight fire, it is important for cabin crew to have a basic
knowledge of fire chemistry. This will help cabin crew to understand the importance of selecting the
correct fire extinguisher in a given fire situation.
The key to fire prevention is keeping fuel and ignition sources separate.
Combustion consists of three elements: Oxygen, heat and Fuel
Together, these elements create a chemical chain reaction and result in a fire.
The goal of firefighting is to eliminate at least one element from the fire, in order to extinguish it.
FIRE CLASSIFICATION
Fires are classified into four types: those in solids, those in flammable liquids, those in electrical
equipment, and those in flammable metals. These are called, respectively, class A, B, C, and D
fires.
Refer to 14-20 Classes of Fire
Class A and C fires are the most commonly encountered fires onboard aircraft. It is important for the
cabin crew to select an appropriate fire extinguisher, according to the class of fire.
FIREFIGHTER EQUIPMENT
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Hand-held fire extinguishers discharge an extinguishing agent for 8 to 25 seconds, depending on
their type and capacity. Due to this short period, it is essential to select and use the appropriate fire
extinguisher immediately.
There are different types of fire extinguishers:
- Halon : is the generic name for the group of '' bromochlorodifluoromethane '' (BCF)
extinguishers that can be used for class A, B, and C fires
- Carbon dioxide (CO2) for class B and C fires
- Dry powder (DP) for class D fires
- Dry chemicals for class A, B, and C fires
- Water solution (H2O) for class A fires.
HOW TO USE A FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Note: This can also be easily remembered by using the word P A S S
- Pull the pin or turn the handle as appropriate. For some water extinguishers, the handle must be
turned in a clockwise direction, in order to pierce the carbon dioxide cartridge and to pressurize
the extinguisher
- Aim the fire extinguisher at the base of the fire. The best firefighting results are achieved by
attacking the base of the fire at the closest edge of the fire, and progressing toward the back. If
possible test the fire extinguisher before aiming it at the fire
- Squeeze the top handle or lever
- Sweep the fire extinguisher nozzle from side to side in a sweeping motion
Do not direct the initial extinguishing agent discharge at close range onto burning material. The high
speed of the stream of extinguishing agent may cause the extinguishing agent to splash and/or
scatter burning material. Stay at least five to eight feet away from the fire
Hand-held fire extinguishers should always be used in an upright position.
Note: There are only a limited number of fire extinguishers onboard the aircraft. Ensure
that an extinguisher has been fully discharged before using another.
PORTABLE BREATHING EQUIPMENT
Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE) is designed to protect the cabin crew from smoke, toxic
fumes and gases. The cabin crew can still communicate amongst themselves, and with the flight
crew via the interphone.
CRASH AXE
A crash axe can be used to lever panels, to enable cabin crew to insert the nozzle of the fire
extinguisher behind a panel. The crash axe may also be used for moving burning material for
example, burnt wiring. The crash axe has an insulated handle and is resistant to high voltages. Only
use the hook end of the crash axe and use small tapping motions to make a hole in an area that is
difficult to access. The hook end can then be used to make the hole bigger as required.
FIRE GLOVES
Fire gloves are fire retardant. These gloves give protection to hands and arms against heat.
USE OF NON STANDARD EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Cabin crew need to be resourceful when fighting an in-flight fire. Be prepared to improvise by using
other equipment such as pots of coffee/tea, to fight a visible fire for example, a waste bin fire.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR AN IN-FLIGHT FIRE
CREW COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION
In the event of an in-flight fire, communication between the cabin crew and flight crew is essential. If
a fire is discovered in the cabin, the cabin crew must inform the flight crew immediately.
The firefighting effort requires coordination between the cabin crew. The duties are divided into
three main roles, the Firefighter, the Communicator and the Assistant Firefighter. All other cabin
crew play a supporting role.
After any fire or smoke occurrence, one cabin crewmember should be responsible for monitoring
the affected area for the remainder of the flight, and for regularly reporting to the Purser. Then the
Purser will report to the flight crew.
Refer to 14-20 Definition and Description of Fire fighting Roles
AWARENESS TO SMOKE AND FIRE HIDDEN
Refer to 14-20 Awareness to Smoke and Fires in Hidden Areas
AREA SPECIFIC FIRES
Refer to 14-20 Area Specific Fires
Continued on the next page
OVEN FIRES
Refer to 14-20 Oven Smoke / Fire Procedure Oven fires are a common occurrence onboard the
aircraft. Many oven fires are preventable.
Some of the contributing factors to oven fires have been items left in the oven such as paper towels,
etc.
When an oven fire occurs, the oven door should be kept closed. It is hazardous to open an oven
door when a fire is present, because this will introduce oxygen and may cause a flash fire.
WASTE BIN FIRE
If there is a fire in the waste bin, the fire extinguisher operates automatically. When a predetermined
temperature has been reached, the fusible plug at the end of the discharge tube melts, and enables
the extinguishing agent to flow into the waste bin.
Cabin crew should ensure that a preflight check of the pressure gauge is conducted, to ensure that
the waste bin fire extinguisher is functional.
Regular checks of the lavatories should be conducted in-flight as part of the cabin crew duties.
LITHIUM BATTERY FIRE
Refer to 14-20 Guidelines for In-flight Smoke and Fire Management
OPERATIONAL AND HUMAN FACTORS INVOLVED IN IN-FLIGHT FIRES MANAGEMENT
HUMAN FACTORS (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS)
Cabin crew should always be alert to any sight, odor or sound that may indicate the
presence of fire, including:
- Fumes or unusual odors
- Electrical malfunctions, for example, tripped circuit breakers
- Noises, such as popping, snapping or crackling that may indicate electrical arcing
- Hot spots on sidewalls, floors, and panels.
Another possible of sign of a fire onboard may be passengers or cabin crewmembers
suddenly developing:
- Eye irritation
- Sore throats
- Headaches.
This may indicate that fumes are present, before smoke or fire is visible. The cabin crew must
immediately investigate any reports from passengers that may indicate fire, in order to locate and
extinguish the fire in its early stages.
INTRODUCTION
Planned ditching in commercial aviation is a rare occurrence. During a planned ditching, the cabin
crew may have prior notice, and therefore, sufficient time to prepare the cabin, or to advise passengers
to put on their life vests.
The flight and cabin crew coordination will have a high impact on the outcome of the evacuation in
case of a planned ditching.
On the other hand there is no or little time for the cabin crew to prepare the passengers when an
unplanned ditching occurs. In the event of an unplanned ditching the attitude of the flight and cabin
crewmembers and their immediate actions are key factors for the success of the evacuation and
survival of passengers.
STATISTICAL DATA – BACKGROUND INFORMATION
PLANNED DITCHING
A report of the CAAP said that the statistical chances of surviving a ditching were high as it was
estimated from UK and USA data that 88 % of controlled ditching result in few injuries to flight crew
or passengers.
UNPLANNED DITCHING
Many inadvertent landings on water (referred to as an Unplanned Ditching) have been documented.
During an unplanned ditching, there is no time for the cabin crew to advise the passengers to don
life vests or adopt the brace position.
An NTSB study of Air Carrier water contact accidents indicates that these accidents are usually
unplanned, with no time to prepare. Most accidents occur during the takeoff and landing phases of
flight, and usually within proximity of the airport. Many water contact accidents occur during the
hours of darkness.
There is usually a lot of damage to the aircraft. In some cases, the cabin has flooded quickly, and
the aircraft has sunk within minutes.
PLANNED DITCHING BRIEFING
THE FLIGHT CREW/CABIN CREW BRIEFING
The Flight crew will deliver the following information to the Purser:
• Nature of the emergency (ditching)
• Time available (check watch)
• Special instructions
• Brace signal.
Continued on the next page
In the event of a planned ditching the flight crew will not give the instruction to remain seated to the
Purser. As the aircraft may sink rapidly after impact everyone will have to evacuate immediately.
THE PURSER/CABIN CREW BRIEFING
The Purser will note the time in order to prepare the cabin according to the time available before the
aircraft ditching.
The Purser will transmit the information given by the flight crew and will instruct the
crewmember to:
• Take their position
• Be prepared for the emergency announcement and demonstration.
THE CABIN CREW/PASSENGER BRIEFING
The situation should be announced to passengers. The flight crew should make the announcement
but in case of workload in the cockpit it may be delegated to the Purser.
The Purser informs passengers about:
• The nature of the emergency
• The coming preparation of the cabin
• The attention and respect of passengers to cabin crewmembers instructions.
When the instructions and demonstrations are performed some conditions should be
respected:
• The cabin dividers should be open
• The cabin lighting should be turned to bright
• The entertainment system switched off.
The cabin crew should be ready to demonstrate the Emergency Briefing in their assigned area. The
crewmembers must have their own life vest before starting the briefing.
In order to deliver an effective briefing, the crewmembers should respect some conditions:
• Stay in the assigned area
• Ensure all passengers can see the demonstration
• Do not talk during the announcements
• Coordinate the demonstration with the announcement.
When reading the announcement, the Purser should speak slowly, distinctly and pause at key
points in order to give cabin crewmembers time to don their life vests, demonstrate, and check
passenger compliance.
• Carry on baggage
• Shoes without laces or heeled shoes
• Handbags
• Laptops
• Briefcases.
Able Bodied Passengers (ABP)
The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) defines able-bodied passengers as
“passengers selected by crewmembers to assist in managing emergency situations if
and as required”.
The selection of Able Bodied Passengers may be based on their ability to understand
instructions, their physical ability, and their ability to stay calm.
They can be chosen from people such as:
• Deadheading crewmembers
• Military personnel
• Police
• Fire personnel
• Medical personnel
• People who respond to instruction.
The ABP should be reseated at exits. The reseating action should not separate families, as the
ABP will be more concerned about their family than about the aircraft evacuation.
The crewmembers should select three ABPs for each exit and they should be briefed as
follows:
• To replace the cabin crewmember in case the crewmember becomes incapacitated
• How to assess conditions outside the aircraft, for example, identify exit usable/unusable
(determined by water level)
• How to open the exit
• How to protect oneself from going overboard, and to remain in the assist space
• To manually inflate the slide /slideraft
• Commands to be used during evacuation,
• How to board the slide/ slideraft and distribute passengers evenly
• How to disconnect the slide/slideraft
• How to cut the mooring line to release the slide/slideraft from the aircraft.
If additional rafts are carried on board, the ABPs should be briefed on how to:
• Take the raft to the exit
• Use the mooring line to attach the raft to a fixed part of the aircraft, for example, a passenger
seat
Continued on the next page
• Launch the slide/slideraft (the raft must be thrown outside the aircraft)
• Manually-inflate the slide/slideraft, in case it does not inflate.
• Board the slide/slideraft and distribute passengers evenly.
The role of the ABPs is also to help people that require assistance including:
Disabled, Elderly, Unaccompanied minors, People traveling alone with more than one child.
Securing the Cabin
When the passenger briefing has been completed, the final cabin secure is required, as
follows:
• Seat belts fastened
• Seat backs in the up-right position
• Tray tables closed and latched
• Armrests down
• Carry on baggage stowed and secure
• Overhead bins closed and latched
• Aisles clear of all obstructions
• Service items cleared
• Cabin dividers open.
The lavatories should be vacated and locked and the galley equipment should be
secured as follows:
• Close and lock all containers
• Ensure that carts are correctly stowed and secured
• Switch off all galley power and pull all galley circuit breakers.
When all the checklist items are complete, the Purser will notify the flight crew and ask for an
update of the situation, and the amount of time remaining.
The emergency lights should be switched on and the cabin lights switched off.
Cabin crewmembers should take their seats, adjust the harness, begin a silent review and be
prepared to brace when the command comes from the flight crew (approximately 1 minute
before ditching).
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR A PLANNED DITCHING
Refer to 14-40 Main Deck Planned Ditching
Refer to 14-40 Upper Deck Planned Ditching
POST DITCHING
During the survival and until rescued, passengers and crewmembers must keep their life vests on.
The crew will organize the survival in the raft as follows:
Continued on the next page
- Erect the canopy to prevent wind-chill hypothermia from affecting wet bodies and to assist
rescue services to locate the sliderafts
- Administer first aid to injured passengers
- Ensure that the weight is evenly distributed to avoid the raft from capsizing
- Keep the raft clean and dry to prevent illness and infection
- Use the survival kit equipment to indicate location
THE RESCUE
When an aircraft or a ship has been sighted, all the signaling equipment available should be used to
attract attention. Occupants must stop signaling as the craft approaches.
The crewmembers and passengers must follow the instructions of the rescue personnel, and
remain in the raft until instructed.
OPERATIONAL STANDARDS FOR AN UNPLANNED DITCHING
Refer to 14-40 Unplanned Ditching
In any unprepared emergency the reaction of the cabin crew will depend largely on their situational
awareness skill and their ability to identify an abnormal situation and react accordingly.
THE SILENT REVIEW
During Take-Off and landing phases near water or during a flight when life vest demonstration is
required, the use of the Silent Review will highlight the situational awareness of the cabin crew in
the case of an unexpected event.
They will review for example the following situations:
- The commands to be used
- The cabin environment
- How to initiate evacuation
- Operation of exits
- How to access outside conditions
- What equipment to take
- How to manage passengers in the water
- How to manage passengers in the raft.
THE IMPACT PHASE
The unplanned ditching is more likely to occur near airports built close to water than at sea or in
extended surfaces of water. So during the takeoff and landing phases the crewmembers will realize
rapidly if the situation is deteriorating and will shout the commands for the “Brace” position:
“Heads down”, “Hold your ankles”, “Stay down”.
This position will reduce the amount of injury to the passengers and give them a chance of being
able to evacuate the aircraft. The commands should be given until the aircraft has come to a
complete stop.
THE EVACUATION PHASE
The cabin crew will assess outside conditions:
- If the aircraft is floating or sinking
- If the water level is present at exits
There can be 2 different situations and the cabin crew will have to react accordingly:
The cabin crew will shout the commands for the life vests:
− “Life vests under your seats”
− “Tear open the pouch”
− “Place over your heads”
SITUATION I − “Fasten straps tight around waist”
− “Inflate when leaving the aircraft”
• They will direct passengers to the usable exits or redirect them if the exits
become unusable
• Passengers will board the slideraft.
The following actions will be taken if the aircraft is sinking rapidly:
• The crewmembers will direct passengers out the nearest opening, exit
• Instruct passengers to support themselves, by holding anything that will
SITUATION II
keep them afloat (seat cushions for example)
• Find as much flotation equipment (live vests) as time permits and
distribute it to passengers • Leave the aircraft.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
To access the trolley lift recovery refer to one of these Function Recovery Procedures:.
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - OPERATIVE Indicator Is OFF
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "OVERLOAD"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "STOP"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "FAULT"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "TRAILING" or "JAMMING"
- Refer to Trolley Lift Recovery - Display Shows "LOW TEMPERATURE" or
"OVERTEMPERATURE" or "VOLTAGE DROP"
To access the trolley lift error messages Refer to Trolley Lift Error Messages.
STOWAGE RECOVERY
Applicable to: ALL
To access the unlocking of the overhead stowages please Refer to 03-80-30-10 Unlocking an
Overhead Bin.
For unblocking the galley sink please Refer to 03-90-50-100 Galley Sink Unblocking.
To access the water faucet recovery please Refer to 03-100-50-10 Water Faucet Recovery or to stop
the water faucet pouring please Refer to 03-100-50-10 Water Faucet Pouring.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
To enter the lavatory failure indications on the FAP please Refer to 03-100-50-20 Deactivate a
Lavatory (Waste Tank full)
To access the IFE control center reset procedure please Refer to 08-20-80 How to Recover a Frozen
IFE Control Terminal.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
16-10 Boarding
Boarding .............................................................................................................................................. 1
16-40 Approach
Approach Announcement .................................................................................................................... 1
Light Dimming For Approach (If required)............................................................................................ 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
BOARDING
Applicable to: ALL
The boarding announcements can be made as appropriate (as one announcement or separately).
WELCOME ONBOARD AND CARRY-ON LUGGAGE
Good morning /afternoon /evening, (Pause)
Ladies and Gentlemen and welcome you onboard our Airbus A380 flight to...
In the interest of safety, please ensure that all your personal carry-on baggage is securely stored in
the overhead compartments or beneath the seat in front of you.
All aisles and exits must remain clear of any obstruction.
Should you need any assistance, please, do not hesitate to contact a cabin crewmember.
ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CELLULAR PHONES
Ladies and Gentlemen,
Cellular phones have to be switched off after the aircraft doors have been closed.
We would like to remind you that the use of any TVs, radios, or transmitting devices is not permitted
onboard at any time.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
FOR PASSENGERS
Ladies and Gentlemen, (Pause)
Please turn off all cellular phones at this time.
Cellular phones must not be turned on until the aircraft has arrived at its destination, and the aircraft
doors have been opened.
We would like to remind you that the use of TVs, radios, or any transmitting devices are not
permitted onboard at anytime.
FOR CABIN CREW
Cabin crew at doors, please. (Pause).
Arm slides for departure and crosscheck, please. (Pause).
Thank you.
SAFETY DEMONSTRATION
Applicable to: ALL
Please take the safety instructions card out of the seat pocket to enable you to follow the safety
procedures.
If you are seated at an exit row, you may be required to assist the cabin crew in an emergency.
If you are unable or do not want to assist the crew, please advise the cabin crew at the end of the
announcements.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Exits are located on both sides of the cabin, each exit is clearly marked with a EXIT sign.
The cabin crew will now point out the exits nearest your seats,
(The cabin crew should point out the nearest exits )
In some cases your nearest exits may be behind you,
(The cabin crew should point to exits at the rear of the cabin)
Please look around, and locate the exits nearest your seats.
Exit path lighting will guide you to the exits.
(The cabin crew should point out the location of the exit lighting)
If an evacuation is required, follow the instructions of the cabin crew.
Leave all you belongings behind and go to your nearest exit.
When you reach the ground, run away from the aircraft.
If needed, oxygen masks will drop in front of you from the overhead panel.
Place the mask over your nose and mouth, and adjust the mask over your face, if necessary, by
tightening the straps.
Even if the bag does not inflate, oxygen is flowing into the mask.
For safety reasons, please secure your own mask before helping others.
For all takeoff and landings during the hours of darkness, we will dim the cabin lights.
Should you wish to continue reading, please use the individual reading lights at your seat.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
TOP OF DESCENT
Applicable to: ALL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
APPROACH ANNOUNCEMENT
Applicable to: ALL
For all takeoff and landings during the hours of darkness, we will dim the cabin lights.
Should you wish to continue reading, please use the individual reading lights at your seat.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
ARRIVAL
Applicable to: ALL
FOR PASSENGERS
Ladies and Gentlemen, (Pause)
Please turn off all cellular phones at this time.
Cellular phones must not be turned on until the aircraft has arrived at its destination, and the aircraft
doors have been opened.
We would like to remind you that the use of TVs, radios, or any transmitting devices are not
permitted onboard at anytime.
FOR CABIN CREW
Cabin crew at doors, please. (Pause).
Cabin crew disarm slides for arrival and crosscheck, please. (Pause)
Thank you.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
AIRCRAFT DE-ICING
Applicable to: ALL
Before we leave the parking stand, the aircraft has to be de-iced. You will hear the noise of the fluid
flowing over the fuselage and may smell a chemical odor, which is normal.
AIRCRAFT DISINFECTION
Applicable to: ALL
To comply with the Government regulations of .... (Country), the cabin will be sprayed with insecticide.
The insecticide that will be using complies with international health standards and is not dangerous to
your health.
Please, remain seated during this process.
FUELING-REFUELING
Applicable to: ALL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
TURBULENCES
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL TURBULENCE
Ladies and Gentlemen, (Pause)
Due to some turbulence, the Captain has turned on the “fastened seat belt” sign. Please, return to
your seat and fastened your seat belt.
Please, remain seated in your seat with your seat belt securely fastened until the “fastened seat belt
“ sign has been turned off.
TURBULENCE MODERATE / SEVERE / INTERRUPTION TO SERVICE
This announcement may be from the Chief Purser, the Purser or the Captain, if the level of
turbulence is judged to be unsafe for the cabin crew to continue serving.
FOR CABIN CREW
Cabin crew, please, take your seats.
FOR PASSENGERS
Ladies and Gentlemen, (Pause)
We are experiencing turbulence.
Please, return to your seat and fasten your seat belt.
For safety reasons, the service will be suspended until the turbulence has stopped and it is safe
for cabin crew to move around the cabin. The service will resume a soon as possible.
Thank you for your cooperation and understanding.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
17-02 Cockpit
17-02-70 Flight Crew Rest Compartment
17-02-70-30 Description and Operation
Keypad Lock and Dead Bolt Override from the Cabin Side................................................................. 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
KEYPAD LOCK AND DEAD BOLT OVERRIDE FROM THE CABIN SIDE
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188
In case of a keypad lock failure or an emergency, the cabin crew can override the keypad lock and the
dead bolt from the cabin side.
To hide the override mechanism from the view of unauthorized persons, it is covered.
Keypad Lock Panel
override knob.
The tool can be e.g. a pen.
2. Use the tool to slide the keypad lock override knob to
the left side. Hold it in this position.
3. Turn the door unlock lever clockwise.
4. Open the entrance door by pulling the door unlock
lever.
KEYPAD LOCK AND DEAD BOLT OVERRIDE FROM THE CABIN SIDE
Applicable to: MSN 0011-0020, 0042, 0056-0077, 0106-0107, 0113-0119, 0132-0134, 0136-0138, 0141-0150, 0165, 0168-0174, 0186-0188,
0217-0224, 0232-0240, 0248-0249
In case of a keypad lock failure or an emergency, the cabin crew can override the keypad lock and the
dead bolt from the cabin side.
To hide the override mechanism from the view of unauthorized persons, it is covered.
Keypad Lock Panel
override knob.
The tool can be e.g. a pen.
2. Use the tool to slide the keypad lock override knob to
the right side. Hold it in this position.
3. Turn the door unlock lever counter-clockwise.
4. Open the entrance door by pulling at the door unlock
lever.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
18-10 Introduction
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 1
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Applicable to: ALL
DEFINITION
A Cabin Crew Bulletin (CCB) is issued to rapidly inform operators of any deviations from initial design
objectives that have a significant impact on cabin operations. A CCB provides the operators with
technical information and temporary operational procedures that address these deviations.
TYPES OF CCB
CCBs can either be red or white, depending on their level of priority.
Red CCBs : Are issued to indicate that non-compliance with the recommended
procedures may have a significant impact on the safe operation of the
cabin.
White CCBs : Are issued to indicate that non-compliance with the recommended
procedures may have a significant impact on the operation of the cabin.
Airbus strongly recommends that all Operators rapidly apply the CCB corrective actions as soon as
they become available, particularly for red CCBs.
The information in the CCB is recommended by Airbus, but may not be approved by Airworthiness
Authorities. If the procedures contained in the CCB differs from the procedures in the AFM, the
approved AFM remains the reference.
CCB CONTENT AND MANAGEMENT
A CCB:
- Is a part of the Cabin Crew Operating Manual (CCOM)
- Is temporary and usually focuses on one operational subject only
- Remains applicable until the appropriate corrective actions are completed
- Is filed in numerical order.
The content of each CCB includes:
- The reason for issue
- Technical explanations of the deviation from the initial design objectives
- The CCB operational procedure(s) to be applied
- The corrective actions that cancel the CCB, if available when the CCB is issued.
DISTRIBUTION H72
Airbus provides all affected operators with CCBs . It is operators responsibility to ensure the
distribution of the CCBs to all their applicable cabin crews..
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
APPROVAL REFERENCE
APPROVED BY: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
Approval date: 10-Sep-2007
Approval reference: none
Approved by: -Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
This CCB covers a significant operational issue. Non-compliance with this CCB may have a significant
impact on the operations of the cabin.
Therefore Operators must distribute this CCB, or the information contained in this CCB, to all cabin
crews without delay.
It is strongly recommended that all Operators accelerate the incorporation of all corrective Service
Bulletins as soon as they are available.
Reason for issue: This CCB is issued to provide A380 cabin crews with operational
recommendations applicable to the door arming procedure.
Applicable to: A380-800 aircraft
Cancelled by: This item should be corrected in the near future via an improved girt bar
for the slide (future MOD 69998).
Note: The interchangeability code, given in the Illustrated Part Catalog (IPC), indicates the conditions for interchangeability of
equipment. After installation of corrective modification(s)/SB(s), if an Operator reinstalls any equipment affected by this CCB,
it is the Operator's responsibility to ensure that the recommendations given in this CCB are applied again for the applicable
aircraft.
Cabin Crew Bulletins are issued by Airbus as the need arises to rapidly inform operators of any
deviations from initial design objectives that have a significant operational impact related to cabin.
They are distributed to all CCOM holders.
A380
CABIN CREW OPERATING MANUAL
Information in this bulletin is recommended by Airbus but may not be approved by Airworthiness
Authorities. If the procedures contained in this CCB differ from the procedures in the AFM, the AFM
remains the reference.
EXPLANATION
On main deck doors that have door-mounted slides, an amber SLIDE DISARMED indication may be
triggered on the FAP, even if the related door-arming lever is in the armed position. In this case, the
Chief Purser must call the cabin crew that is responsible for the affected door via the interphone, in
order to request that the cabin crew disarm, and then re-arm the door. It is possible to apply this
procedure on ground or during flight, when the SLIDE DISARMED comes on in amber.
PROCEDURE
CHIEF PURS
CABIN CREW AT AFFECTED DOOR, DISARMED AND RE-ARM DOOR .......................ORDER
The Chief Purser calls the cabin crew located at the affected door via the interphone.
CC responsible for the affected door
SLIDE ARMING LEVER PLASTIC COVER............................................................................. LIFT
SLIDE ARMING LEVER............................................................ MOVE TO DISARMED POSITION
SLIDE ARMING LEVER....................................................MOVE FIRMLY TO ARMED POSITION
SLIDE DISARMED AND RE-ARMED ............................................. REPORT TO CHIEF PURSER
CHIEF PURS
DOORS/SLIDES FAP PAGE .............................................................................................SELECT
AFFECTED DOOR CLOSED AND ARMED ....................................................................... CHECK
Note: It is recommended that the Chief Purser monitor the main deck door / slides FAP page
during the flight, and before landing.
APPROVAL REFERENCE
Approval date: 25-Jul-2007
Approval reference: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
Approved by: -Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
This CCB covers a significant operational issue. Non-compliance with this CCB may have a significant
impact on the operations of the cabin.
Therefore Operators must distribute this CCB, or the information contained in this CCB, to all cabin
crews without delay.
It is strongly recommended that all Operators accelerate the incorporation of all corrective Service
Bulletins as soon as they are available.
Reason for issue: This CCB is issued to provide UAE A380 cabin crews with the
operational limitations and, recommendations for the use of the BE
Aerospace steam ovens installed in the Upper Deck (UD) galleys.
Applicable to: UAE01 A380-800 aircrafts fitted with BE Aerospace steams ovens (P/N
4329002-00-6823) in the upper deck galleys.
Cancelled by: This item will be corrected by improved air ventilation in the oven
compartment and, by an improvement in the oven design.
Note: The interchangeability code, given in the Illustrated Part Catalog (IPC), indicates the conditions for interchangeability of
equipment. After installation of corrective modification(s)/SB(s), if an Operator reinstalls any equipment affected by this CCB,
it is the Operator's responsibility to ensure that the recommendations given in this CCB are applied again for the applicable
aircraft.
Cabin Crew Bulletins are issued by Airbus as the need arises to rapidly inform operators of any
deviations from initial design objectives that have a significant operational impact related to cabin.
They are distributed to all CCOM holders.
Information in this bulletin is recommended by Airbus but may not be approved by Airworthiness
Authorities. If the procedures contained in this CCB differ from the procedures in the AFM, the AFM
remains the reference.
EXPLANATION:
The steam ovens installed in the upper deck (UD) galleys have an operational limitation between two
cooking cycles.
An interval of a minimum time of 75 min(1 h15 min) is required between two cooking cycles,
irrespective of the duration or temperature of the selected cooking cycle.
● When a cooking cycle is completed:
- Select the FAN function on the Oven Control Module (OCM) menu
- Press the START/PAUSE pb-sw on the Oven Control Module (OCM)
This will launch a pre-defined 30 min FAN cycle
- Half open the oven door by attaching the mechanical arms to the hook
The door must remain in this position during the fan cycles
- Perform the fan cycle three (3) times
If needed, the third fan cycle can be stopped after 15 min by pressing the START/PAUSE pb-sw
When the third fan cycle is completed, a cooking cycle can be performed.
TROLLEY OPERATION IN UPPER DECK AFT GALLEY STAIRS AREA AND FORWARD OR AFT
STAIRS AREAS
APPROVAL REFERENCE
APPROVED BY:
Approval date: 29-Jul-2010
Approval reference: -
Approved by: -Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
This CCB covers a significant operational issue. Non-compliance with this CCB may have a significant
impact on the operations of the cabin.
Therefore Operators must distribute this CCB, or the information contained in this CCB, to all cabin
crews without delay.
It is strongly recommended that all Operators accelerate the incorporation of all corrective Service
Bulletins as soon as they are available.
Note: The interchangeability code, given in the Illustrated Part Catalog (IPC), indicates the conditions for interchangeability of
equipment. After installation of corrective modification(s)/SB(s), if an Operator reinstalls any equipment affected by this CCB,
it is the Operator's responsibility to ensure that the recommendations given in this CCB are applied again for the applicable
aircraft.
Cabin Crew Bulletins are issued by Airbus as the need arises to rapidly inform operators of any
deviations from initial design objectives that have a significant operational impact related to cabin.
They are distributed to all CCOM holders.
Information in this bulletin is recommended by Airbus but may not be approved by Airworthiness
Authorities. If the procedures contained in this CCB differ from the procedures in the AFM, the AFM
remains the reference.
EXPLANATION
Several cases occurred where, in flight, a trolley that was left unattended and unsecured rolled
towards and fell down the rear stairs.
PROCEDURE
The Cabin Crew must ensure that the trolley brake is engaged whenever the trolley is stopped
(refer to CCOM -chapter 03-90-30-20-Trolley Operation).
Additionally, in case the aircraft is fitted with a staircase strap system or rigid barrier, the Cabin
Crew must ensure that the concerned device is properly extended and secured by the foreseen
means before any trolley or trolley lift operation (refer to CCOM-chapter 03-60-40-How to install
the Staircase Barrier).
APPROVAL REFERENCE
APPROVED BY:
Approval date: 03-Jun-2013
Approval reference: Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
Approved by: Dominique Deschamps-Head of Flight Operations Support and Services
This CCB covers a significant operational issue. Non-compliance with this CCB may have a significant
impact on the operations of the cabin.
Therefore Operators must distribute this CCB, or the information contained in this CCB, to all cabin
crews without delay.
It is strongly recommended that all Operators accelerate the incorporation of all corrective Service
Bulletins as soon as they are available.
Note: The interchangeability code, given in the Illustrated Part Catalog (IPC), indicates the conditions for interchangeability of
equipment. After installation of corrective modification(s)/SB(s), if an Operator reinstalls any equipment affected by this CCB,
it is the Operator's responsibility to ensure that the recommendations given in this CCB are applied again for the applicable
aircraft.
Cabin Crew Bulletins are issued by Airbus as the need arises to rapidly inform operators of any
deviations from initial design objectives that have a significant operational impact related to cabin.
They are distributed to all CCOM holders.
Information in this bulletin is recommended by Airbus but may not be approved by Airworthiness
Authorities. If the procedures contained in this CCB differ from the procedures in the AFM, the AFM
remains the reference.
EXPLANATION
In some cases, the DOORS/SLIDES page of the FAP may not correctly reflect the most recent
status of the doors and slides.
Therefore, the FAP may erroneously display the door/slide indication symbols:
- Red (doors unlocked), even if the doors are correctly closed and locked.
- Amber (doors locked and slide disarmed), even if the doors are locked and the slides are
armed.
However, the ECAM indication is always correct.
PROCEDURE
● If the Chief Purser suspects a discrepancy between the real status of the DOORS and
SLIDES and the information on the FAP DOORS/SLIDES page, the chief purser must
inform the flight crew to ensure correct coordination of any required actions.
CHIEF PURSER .............................................................COORDINATE WITH FLIGHT CREW
Note: The flight crew can reset the CIDS to display the correct information on the FAP
DOORS/SLIDES page.